Ram Concept Manual Version 3

RAM Concept
Version 3.00
September 2007
RAM International
2744 Loker Avenue West
Carlsbad, CA 92010
Telephone: (760) 431-3610
Toll Free: (800) 726-7789
Fax: (760) 431-5214
DAA037480-1/0001
DISCLAIMER
The software and related documentation, including this documentation, are protected by both United States copyright law
and international treaty provisions. Any unauthorized copying or reproduction is strictly prohibited and subject to civil and
criminal penalties. Please refer to the License Agreement for authorization to make a backup copy of the software. You may
not sell this software or documentation or give copies of them away to anyone else.
Except as expressly warranted in the License Agreement, RAM International disclaims all warranties, expressed or implied,
including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, with respect to the
software, the accompanying written materials, and any accompanying hardware. All results should be verified to the user's
satisfaction. The contents of these written materials may include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors and may be
revised without prior notice.
Copyright attribution: © 2007, Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Trademark attribution: RAM Concept and RAM Structural System are either registered or unregistered trademarks or
service marks of Bentley Systems, Incorporated or one of its direct or indirect wholly-owned subsidiaries. Other brands and
product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
DAA037480-1/0001
RAM Concept
Table of Contents
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Comparing with “traditional” methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 RAM Concept options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.3 Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.4 Structural systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.5 Learning RAM Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.6 New features in Version 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.7 Technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2 Looking at the Workspace . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . .5

2.1 About the workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Creating and opening files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.3 Saving a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.4 About templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.5 Expanding tool buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.6 Rearranging toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.7 Using the right mouse button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.8 Undoing changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3 Understanding Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.1 Modeling with objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.2 Managing layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4 Using Plans and Perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

4.1 Using plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.2 Creating new plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.3 Viewing perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.4 Creating new perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.5 Controlling views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.6 Setting up the grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5 Drawing and Editing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

5.1 Precision drawing with snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.2 Drawing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.3 Entering coordinate points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.4 Using relative coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.5 Selecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.6 Deselecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.7 Cutting, copying, and pasting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
5.8 Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.9 Using the Utility tool to move and stretch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.10 Manipulating the model as a whole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.11 Editing object properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.12 Setting default properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.13 Adding reference lines, dimensions, and text notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6 Viewing Objects in Text Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

6.1 Customizing tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7 Choosing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
7.1 About units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
7.2 Selecting units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
7.3 Specifying report as zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
RAM Concept i
8 Choosing Sign Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
8.1 Selecting sign convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
8.2 About plot sign convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
9 Specifying Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

9.1 Viewing the available materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
9.2 Material properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
9.3 Adding and deleting materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
9.4 About post-tensioning systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
10 Specifying Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
10.1 About default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
10.2 Viewing the loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
10.3 Loading properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
10.4 About loading types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
10.5 Available loading types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
10.6 Changing Loading Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
10.7 Changing Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
10.8 Adding and deleting loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
10.9 About load pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
11 Specifying Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

11.1 About default load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
11.2 Viewing the load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
11.3 Rebuilding load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
11.4 Adding and deleting load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
11.5 Load combination properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
11.6 About group load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
11.7 About alternate envelope factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
11.8 Summary of load combination types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
12 Selecting Design Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

12.1 Using rule set designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
12.2 Rule set design properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
12.3 Types of active rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
12.4 Adding and deleting rule set designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
13 Using a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

13.1 Importing, verifying and viewing a drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
14 Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

14.1 What can be imported from the RAM Structural System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
14.2 Controlling which concrete members are imported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
14.3 About load importation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
14.4 Importing a database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
14.5 Reimporting a database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
14.6 Limitations, Defaults and Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
15 Data Transfer from STAAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

15.1 STAAD Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
15.2 RAM Concept Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
16 Defining the Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

16.1 Using the Mesh Input Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
16.2 About columns and walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
16.3 Column properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
16.4 Drawing columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
16.5 Wall properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
16.6 Drawing walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
16.7 About point and line supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ii RAM Concept
16.8 Point support properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
16.9 Drawing point supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
16.10 Line support properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
16.11 Drawing line supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
16.12 About springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
16.13 Point spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
16.14 Drawing point springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
16.15 Line spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
16.16 Drawing line springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
16.17 Area spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
16.18 Drawing area springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
16.19 About floor areas and members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
16.20 Slab area properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
16.21 Drawing slab areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
16.22 About beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
16.23 Beam properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
16.24 Drawing beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
16.25 Slab opening properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
16.26 Drawing slab openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
16.27 Checking the structure definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
17 Generating the Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

17.1 Generating the mesh automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
17.2 Selectively refining the mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
18 Manually Drawing the Finite Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

18.1 Using the Element layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
18.2 About column elements and wall elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
18.3 Column element properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
18.4 Drawing column elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
18.5 Wall element properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
18.6 Drawing wall elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
18.7 About point and line supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
18.8 Point support properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
18.9 Drawing point supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
18.10 Line support properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
18.11 Drawing line supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
18.12 About springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
18.13 Point spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
18.14 Drawing point springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
18.15 Line spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
18.16 Drawing line springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
18.17 Area spring properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
18.18 Drawing area springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
18.19 About floor areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
18.20 Slab element properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
18.21 Drawing the slab elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
18.22 A few final words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
19 Drawing Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
19.1 About self-weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
19.2 About superposition of loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
19.3 Point load properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
19.4 Drawing point loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
19.5 Line load properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
19.6 Drawing line loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
19.7 Area load properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
19.8 Drawing area loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
19.9 Copying loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
RAM Concept iii

20 Creating Pattern Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
20.1 Deciding how many load patterns to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
20.2 Drawing load patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
20.3 Load pattern filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
21 Defining Design Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

21.1 Definition of a design strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
21.2 Design strip terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
21.3 Understanding how a design strip works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
21.4 The design strip process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
21.5 Span segment properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
21.6 Creating span segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
21.7 Creating span segment strips (design strips) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
21.8 Defining span segment widths and strip widths manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
21.9 Cross Section Trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
21.10 Improving the mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
21.11 Additional design strip information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
21.12 Irregular column layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
21.13 Miscellaneous tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
21.14 A final word on design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
22 Defining Design Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

22.1 Using design sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
22.2 Design section properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
22.3 Drawing design sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
22.4 About ignore depths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
22.5 A final word on design sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
23 Defining Punching Shear Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

23.1 About punching shear checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
23.2 Punching shear check properties and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
23.3 Drawing punching shear checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
23.4 A final word on punching shear checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
24 Drawing Reinforcement Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

24.1 Reinforcement bar definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
24.2 Reinforcement properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
24.3 About drawing reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
24.4 Drawing concentrated reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
24.5 Drawing distributed reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
24.6 Concentrated and distributed reinforcement drawing examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
24.7 Other reinforcement plan tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
24.8 Layout and Detailing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
24.9 Reinforcement Text Formatting: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
24.10 About SSR callouts and SSR rails: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
25 Defining Tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

25.1 Using the latitude and longitude tendon layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
25.2 Tendon properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
25.3 About drawing tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
25.4 Drawing single tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
25.5 Drawing multiple tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
25.6 Editing tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
25.7 About jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
25.8 Jack properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
25.9 Drawing the jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
26 Using Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

26.1 About Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
26.2 Live Load Reduction Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
iv RAM Concept
26.3 Setting the Live Load Reduction Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
26.4 Live Loading Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
26.5 Live Load Reduction Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
26.6 Specifying Live Load Reduction Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
26.7 Implementation of Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
27 Calculating Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

27.1 Calculating the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
27.2 About analysis errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
27.3 Recalculating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
27.4 Reviewing the calc log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
27.5 Decreasing calculation time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
28 Viewing the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

28.1 Type of results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
28.2 Viewing frequently used results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
28.3 Viewing other results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
28.4 Section distribution plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
28.5 Miscellaneous results information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
29 Plotting Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

29.1 Setting the plotted results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
29.2 Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
29.3 Reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
29.4 Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
29.5 Section Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
29.6 Section Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
29.7 Punching Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
30 Using the Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

30.1 How the Auditor can assist the design process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
30.2 About the three design steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
30.3 About the information displayed by the Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
30.4 Using the Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
30.5 Using the Auditor for guidance on post-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
30.6 About the information displayed by the Punching Check Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
30.7 Using the Punching Check Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
31 Using the Estimate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

31.1 Viewing the estimate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
31.2 What the estimate calculates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
31.3 Editing the unit costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
31.4 About unit costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
32 Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
32.1 Basic printing instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
32.2 General printing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
32.3 Print setup options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
32.4 Determining the fit of plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
32.5 Printing the desired perspective viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
32.6 Previewing the print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
32.7 Printing optimizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
32.8 Changing the report contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
33 Exporting Plans and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

33.1 Exporting a plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
33.2 Exporting a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
34 Exporting a Database to the RAM Structural System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

34.1 About the export of reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
RAM Concept v
34.2 About the export of geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
35 Using Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

35.1 Starting Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
35.2 Specifying general parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
35.3 Entering span data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
35.4 Entering support data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
35.5 Adding drop caps and drop panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
35.6 Entering the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
35.7 Specifying the post-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
35.8 Specifying reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
35.9 Completing Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
35.10 Generating the mesh and calculating results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
35.11 Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
36 General Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

36.1 Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
36.2 Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
36.3 Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
36.4 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
37 Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

37.1 Capabilities and Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
37.2 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
37.3 Plans and perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
37.4 Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
37.5 Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
37.6 Sign Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
37.7 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
37.8 Tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
37.9 Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
37.10 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
37.11 Design Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
37.12 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
37.13 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
38 Errors and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

38.1 Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
38.2 Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
38.3 Tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
38.4 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
39 Simple RC Slab Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

39.1 Defining the structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
39.2 Drawing the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
39.3 Defining the design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
39.4 Drawing punching shear checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
39.5 Calculate and view the results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
39.6 Drawing reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
40 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

40.1 Import the CAD drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
40.2 Define the structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
40.3 Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
40.4 Define the post-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
40.5 Create the design strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
40.6 Regenerate the mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
vi RAM Concept
41 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: AS3600-2001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
41.3 Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
42 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: BS8110 / TR43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

42.3 Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
43 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: IS 456 : 2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

43.3 Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
44 Mat Foundation Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

44.3 Define the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
45 Strip Wizard Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

45.1 Start Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
45.2 Set the general parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
45.3 Enter the span data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
45.4 Create the supports below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
45.5 Add drop caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
45.6 Specify the loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
45.8 Specify the reinforcement parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
45.9 Complete the Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
45.10 Proceed with RAM Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
45.11 Comparison with PT Flat Plate Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
45.12 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
46 Analysis Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

46.1 Review of plate behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
46.2 Finite element analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
46.3 Orthotropic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
46.4 Deep beam considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
46.5 Wall behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
46.6 Post-tensioning loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
46.7 Self-equilibrium analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
46.8 Design strip and design section forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
46.9 Result categories in RAM Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
RAM Concept vii

47 Section Design Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
47.1 General Design Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
48 Live Load Reduction Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

48.1 Live Load Reduction for Loadings, Load Combinations and Rule Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
48.2 Tributary Area Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
48.3 Influence Area Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
48.4 ASCE-7 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
48.5 IBC 2003 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
48.6 UBC 1997 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
48.7 AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
48.8 BS 6399-1:1996 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
48.9 IS 875 (Part 2) - 1987 Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
48.10 Mat Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
48.11 Special Member Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
49 Reinforcement Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

49.1 Span detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
49.2 Development lengths / anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
49.3 How RAM Concept lays out program reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
49.4 How Concept details user and program reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
49.5 How Concept treats transverse reinforcement and individual transverse bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
49.6 Example 1: reinforcement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
50 ACI 318-99 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

50.1 ACI 318-99 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
50.2 ACI 318-99 default load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
50.3 ACI318-99 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
50.4 ACI 318-99 material behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
50.5 ACI 318-99 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
50.6 ACI 318-99 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
51 ACI 318-02 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

52 ACI 318-05 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

53 AS 3600-2001 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

53.1 AS 3600-2001 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
53.2 AS 3600-2001 default load combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
53.3 AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
53.4 AS 3600-2001 material behaviours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
53.5 AS 3600-2001 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
53.6 AS 3600-2001 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
54 BS 8110: 1997 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

54.1 BS 8110 / TR 43 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
54.2 BS 8110 / TR 43 Default Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
54.3 BS 8110 / BS 6399-1 live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
viii RAM Concept

54.4 BS 8110/TR43 material behaviours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
54.5 BS 8110 / TR 43 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
54.6 BS8110 / TR43 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
55 IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

55.1 IS 456 / IS 1343 default loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
55.2 IS 456 Default Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
55.3 IS 875 (Part 2) live load factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
55.4 IS 456 material behaviours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
55.5 IS 456 code rule selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
55.6 IS 456 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
55.7 IS 1343 code implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
56 Estimating deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

56.1 About RAM Concept’s deflection calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
56.2 About detailed deflection predictions using ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
56.3 Using RAM Concept to predict deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
56.4 Simplified deflection predictions using contour plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
56.5 Detailed deflection predictions using weighted ECR values for permanent live loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
56.6 Detailed deflection predictions using weighted ECR values for transient live loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
56.7 Detailed deflection predictions using strip based deflection plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
56.8 Using strip based deflection plots for slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
56.9 Summary of RAM Concept’s deflection capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
56.10 Effect of user-defined reinforcement on deflection calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
57 Punching Shear Design Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

57.1 Punching shear overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
57.2 How does RAM Concept handle punching shear? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
57.3 Using Concept's results to specify stud shear reinforcement (SSR) systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
57.4 Column connection type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
57.5 ACI 318 Punching Shear Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
57.6 AS 3600-2001 Punching Shear Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
57.7 EN 1992-2004 Punching Shear Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
57.8 Sign convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
57.9 Advice on the selection of punching check properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
57.10 Miscellaneous information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
57.11 Some final words of advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
R A M C once pt ix
x RAM Concept
Chapter 1
1 Introduction
RAM Concept is an analysis and design program that uses 1.2 RAM Concept options
the finite element method for elevated concrete floor
systems, or mat foundations. The floors or mats can be
post-tensioned concrete (PT), reinforced concrete (RC), or RAM Concept is available in several configurations.
hybrid (a mixture of PT and RC). Concept is extremely Start with either, or both, of the following reinforced
powerful and allows you to design an entire floor in one concrete modes:
model, or design individual strips or beams.
• RAM Concept for Mats (RC) Analysis and design of
In this context, the term “design” means that: reinforced concrete mat foundations (rafts) of any size and
• The user defines the following: structural geometry, shape.
loads, load combinations, and post-tensioning layout (if • RAM Concept for Elevated Slabs (RC) Analysis and
applicable). design of reinforced concrete floor systems of any size and
• Concept calculates (for any number of load combina- shape.
tions): the required amount of reinforcement for flexure Increase RAM Concept’s analysis and design capabilities
and one-way shear according to relevant code require- by adding the Post-tension option to either, or both, of the
ments; the stud shear reinforcement (SSR) for punching above:
shear, stresses for flexure, and deflections.
• RAM Concept PT option (post-tensioned option for
A model consists of anything from a single simply slabs or mats) Analysis and design of post-tensioned
supported beam or slab to an entire floor. All models are floors or mats in conjunction with reinforced concrete.
three-dimensional (even those developed with Strip
Wizard).
Concept does not generally use strip methods other than to

1.3 Strip Wizard
replicate the intent of concrete code rules, and with the
Strip Wizard interface.
Strip Wizard uses text input to generate a model. This
Note: The Equivalent Frame method is not used. allows the designer to perform quick preliminary design in
2-D, or final design of straightforward structures.
Strips generated by Strip Wizard are three-dimensional, but

1.1 Comparing with “traditional” methods boundary conditions are automatically introduced which
effectively model 2-D behavior. All models use the finite
element method.
Historically, the vast majority of concrete floors have been
analyzed by approximating a region of a slab as a frame (or You can use Strip Wizard to design a beam or one-way slab
design strip), and then analyzing the frame/strip using without many mouse clicks. It can provide an initial design
variations of conventional frame or moment distribution of tendons and profiles, negating the need for the designer
analysis techniques. There are two limitations to this to start with a guess.
approach. First, in irregular structures, the approximation
of the real structure into a frame model could be grossly
inaccurate and designing with the analysis results might not
even satisfy equilibrium requirements in the real structure. 1.4 Structural systems
The second limitation is that even in regular structures with
regular loadings, the frame analysis approximates the
slab/column interaction and provides no information You can use RAM Concept for models that contain any
regarding the distribution of forces across the design strip. combination of the following:
• one-way slab systems
RAM Concept enables you to design post-tensioned and
reinforced concrete slabs by using a finite element model • two-way slab systems
of the entire slab. Concept can predict the elastic behavior • beams
of a slab much more accurately than frame models. In
addition, the finite element method guarantees that the • girders
analysis satisfies all equilibrium requirements, regardless • “wide shallow” beams (that behave similarly to slabs)
of a structure’s irregularities.
• ribs (joists)
RAM Concept 1
Chapter 1
• waffles (two-way rib systems) • One of the following PT Tutorial Chapters: 40, 41, 42 or
• mats (rafts) 43.
• openings Note: Even if you do not have access to the PT version, it

is advisable to do one of these tutorials as a thicker RC slab.
There may be steps and changes in thickness and elevations
for all of these items. • For Mat (Raft Users): Chapter 44, “Mat Foundation
Tutorial”.
Concept is not effective, or you cannot use it directly, for
the following: The tutorials introduce you to the “philosophy” of the
program. They quickly give you experience in some basic
• deep beams using the strut and tie method modeling and many of the tools. The descriptions are not
• I-shaped sections exhaustive, and you should reference the actual tool
description in the appropriate chapter for further
• ramps information. This should prove useful for real projects.
• concrete sections with internal voids or cells
It is recommended that you redo the tutorials for Version 2.
In most cases, you could model ramps with a large number The completed tutorial files are available from the program
of steps. The authors do not recommend that you do this for directory, so you don’t have to start from scratch. For
evaluating post-tensioning behavior, as it is not particularly example, you could open the ACI 318-02 PT Tutorial,
relevant. delete the design strips, and then start with the design strips
input.
1.5.2 Critical Chapters

1.5 Learning RAM Concept We consider that you should at least read the following
chapters, together with the tips in this chapter before
starting your first design.
The RAM Concept design process could be considered to
comprise 5 stages: • Chapter 1, “Introduction”.
• Defining the concrete form (**) • Chapter 2, “Looking at the Workspace”.
• Drawing loads (*) • Chapter 3, “Understanding Layers”.
• Defining design strips (*****) • Chapter 4, “Using Plans and Perspectives”
• Defining tendons (if used) (***) • Chapter 5, “Drawing and Editing Objects”
• Interpreting results (****) Note: Chapter 5 describes snapping. Nearly all meshing
problems are due to the user’s failure to use snapping
The (**) rating is meant to indicate relative degree of
properly.
difficulty, or relative time you would expect to spend on the
stage. • Chapter 16, “Defining the Structure”
You should not use Concept for final design without a • Chapter 21, “Defining Design Strips”.
sufficient grounding in concrete design, or adequate • Chapter 36, “General Tips”
understanding of the program.
• Chapter 37, “Frequently Asked Questions”
The manual contains a large amount of information.Ideally, • Chapter 38, “Errors and Warnings”
you should read it all, but this may not be practical. We
recommend that you do the tutorials and read critical • Chapter 56, “Estimating deflections”.
chapters. Note: Not all deflection results consider creep and
cracking. It is very important that you understand which
ones do and which do not.
1.5.1 Tutorials
• The appropriate code chapter. See the section below:
We recommend that you start by doing the tutorials: “Know your building code”.
• Chapter 39, “Simple RC Slab Tutorial”.
2 RAM Concept
Chapter 1
1.5.3 Know your building code You can also modify the program-designed bar groups, and
re-analyze the structure considering your changes.
RAM Concept does not replace the code. It implements
some, but not all, of the code. Using the program does not The Reinforcement layer also facilitates creating a
absolve you of knowing your building code. production quality reinforcement drawing.
You should review the appropriate code chapter: See Chapter 24, “Drawing Reinforcement Bars” and
Chapter 49, “Reinforcement Notes” for detailed
• Chapter 52, “ACI 318-05 Design” information on the Reinforcement layer.
• Chapter 53, “AS 3600-2001 Design”
Span detailing
• Chapter 54, “BS 8110: 1997 Design”, or
• Chapter 55, “IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design” Many more code rules for detailing the reinforcement in
spans are implemented than in previous versions. User span
These chapters discuss the following code specific issues: detailing rules can also be created.
• default loadings Development (Anchorage) Length Calculations
• default load combinations
Concept now considers development (anchorage) lengths
• live load reduction for both the program-designed reinforcement and the user-
• assumptions on material behavior designed reinforcement.
• rule selection Group Load Combinations

• rule implementation
The new “group” load combination encapsulates a large
In particular, you should review what rules are used and number of individual load combinations, each with a
how the authors interpret and implement the rules. different lateral loading.
For example, for a model with 3 wind loadings (Wa, Wb

Rules not considered
and Wc), a group load combination of 1.2 D + 1.6 L + 1 W
Specifically, Concept does not consider the following: would be equivalent to the envelope of the following
• ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02, ACI 318-05: Rule 13.5.3 “regular” load combinations:
• AS3600-2001 Rules 9.1.2 (detailing bars for 25% of the 1.2 D + 1.6 L + 1 Wa
negative moment) and 9.1.3
1.2 D + 1.6 L + 1 Wb
• BS8110: 1997 Rule 3.7.3.1
1.2 D + 1.6 L + 1 Wc
The group load combinations are particularly useful when

1.6 New features in Version 3 there are a large number of lateral loadings.
Slab Plot Enveloping (Including Soil Bearing)

RAM Concept 3.0 has many new features. It also has some
features that work differently than in previous versions. Concept now envelopes all slab plotting quantities. This is
most useful with deflection plots and soil bearing plots. For
It is highly recommended that, before using Concept 3.0, example, in mat foundation (raft) models there is now a
you review the new features section below. Rule Set design that includes soil bearing plans that show
It is important that, before using Concept 3.0 with an old the maximum and minimum soil bearing pressures for all
(pre-version 3.0) file, you review the Upgrading Old Files of the service load combinations.
section.
ACI 318-05
Concept now includes this code.

1.6.1 About the new features
Wood Armer design
New Reinforcement Layer
Concept now (optionally) considers slab twisting moments
The Reinforcement layer allows you to supplement (or (Mxy) in design.
replace) program designed reinforcement by drawing
actual bar groups on plans using various tools.
RAM Concept 3
Chapter 1
Improved 3D Graphics questions that are not answered in this manual, please
contact us.
Concept’s perspectives now show more detail (including
reinforcement and SSR) and include new options, such as For customer support, please contact:
transparency.
Improved 2D Graphics Speed North, Central and South America

RAM International
Concept’s plans now display instantaneously when A Bentley Solutions Centre
zooming, panning or changing the text scale. 2744 Loker Avenue West
Carlsbad, CA 92008
Minor New Features USA
• Improved import of DWG files. Tel: 1-800-726-7789
Fax: 1-760-431-5214
• Perimeter line load tool
email: support@bentley.com
• Minor Ram Structural System integration improvements
• Improved calculation performance Europe
RAM International (Europe) Limited
• Color coding of failures A Bentley Solutions Centre
• Enhanced “Frequently Asked Questions” chapter 4 Woodside Place,
Glasgow, G3 7QF
UK
1.6.2 Upgrading Old Files Tel: +44 (0) 141 353 5168
Fax: +44 (0) 141 353 5112
Most of the improvements in Concept 3.0 are fully email: support@bentley.com
compatible with Concept 2.x files.
India
Recommendations for Old Files
Bentley Systems India Private Limited
We do not recommend that you upgrade old files that Third Floor, Tower A, DLF IT Park,
contain models that have been fully designed or are nearing No. 8, Major Arterial Road,
final design. Rajarhat, Kolkata - 700156
Tel: +91 33 4006 2021
We recommend that you upgrade files that contain partially Fax: +91 33 4006 2027
designed slabs. email: support@bentley.com
Australia, Asia, Middle East

Bentley Systems
1.7 Technical support Adelaide, Australia
Tel: +61 (8) 8362 9013
Fax: +61 (8) 8362 8519
Bentley Systems want you to get the maximum benefit
email: support@bentley.com
from your purchase of RAM Concept. If you have any
4 RAM Concept
Chapter 2
2 Looking at the Workspace
This chapter provides a basic orientation to the RAM To start a new file:
Concept interface. 1 Start RAM Concept and choose File > New.
2 Specify options in the New File dialog box and then click
OK.
2.1 About the workspace To start a new file from a template:
1 Start RAM Concept, and choose File > New.
When you create a new file, RAM Concept generates
2 Click Copy File in the New File dialog.
layers, plans and perspectives for you to begin design. As
you open windows in the workspace, RAM Concept 3 Select the file or template you want to copy.
activates the relevant toolbars.
Workspace with a plan open: 2.2.2 Opening an existing file

Use File > Open to open an existing RAM Concept file.
For quick access, Concept keeps track of the last ten files
you opened and lists them at the bottom of the File menu.
To open a file:
1 Choose File > Open.
2 Select the RAM Concept file you want to open.
Note: See “Upgrading Old Files” on page 4 for discussion

on using files from an earlier version.
2.3 Saving a file

Figure 2-1 A.Standard toolbar for general operations. B. Menu Bar con-
tains the set of menus for the program. Includes the File, Edit, Criteria,
Layers, Tools, Process, Report, View, Window, and Help menus. C. Action
Tools for manipulating the current view. D. Snap toolbar for setting coor-
Save your files often. When you save, you ensure that the
dinate snaps for the active plan. E. General Tools for editing the active file is stored on your computer even in the event of a power
plan window. F. Layer Specific Tools for editing the active plan window. failure or system crash.
G. Report Contents Window for viewing, opening, and reordering report
sections. H. The active window. I. Status Bar for program status informa-
tion. J. Command Prompt for displaying tool relative instructions and the To save and name a file for the first time:
current cursor location in plan coordinates. 1 Choose File > Save As (since the file has not yet been
saved, you could also choose File > Save).
2 Select the folder in which to save the file.
2.2 Creating and opening files 3 Type a name for your file and click Save. Concept adds
the filename extension .cpt if not provided.
When you start RAM Concept, you can create a new file or
To save any open file:
open an existing file. You can also create a new file based
on a template. 1 Choose File > Save (if you have not yet saved the file,
and the Save As dialog box appears, follow the previous
steps for saving for the first time).
2.2.1 Starting a new file
To save a file as a template:
When creating a new file, you make basic decisions about 1 Choose File > Save Template.
your model in the New File dialog, which appears when
2 Click Continue on the warning message box.
you choose File > New. You specify the type of slab, code
and units to use. You can copy an existing Concept file or 3 Type a name for the template and click Save. Concept
template by clicking Copy File on the New File dialog. adds the filename extension .cpttmp (if not provided) and
saves the file without the objects.
RAM Concept 5
Chapter 2
2.3.1 Saving a copy of a file with a new name 2.5 Expanding tool buttons
or location
Use the Save As command to create a copy of a file and Some tool button icons have a small triangle in the lower
change its name or location. The original file and the copy right corner ( ). This indicates that there are other similar
are completely separate and any work you do on one file tools available for this button. Press down on the left mouse
does not affect the other. button for one second over the tool button to reveal a pop-
up menu. Select a tool from the menu. The selected tool
becomes the new tool for that button.
2.3.2 Reverting to a backup copy
Expanding tool button with pop-up:
For version control, Concept creates a copy of your last
save every time you save your file to allow you to go back
to an older version if necessary. Concept creates the file
with the filename extension .cpt.bak1.
If you need to revert to an older version of a file, use the

backup copy created by Concept.
2.3.3 Restoring an auto-save file

As a safety net, Concept automatically saves a copy of your
working file in the same folder as the original and with the
filename extension .autosave. Concept updates the auto-
save file approximately every 2 minutes if you have made
changes to your original file. Once you save your file,
Concept deletes the auto-save file since your saved version
is up to date. We recommend that you save often to prevent
loss of work.
If a computer malfunction or loss of power occurs while

you are using Concept, when you restart Concept it detects
Figure 2-2 Pressing down on the left mouse button for one second over the
the last auto-save file and open it automatically. If you open Selection tool reveals a pop-up menu.
a second copy of Concept while one is running, the second
copy may detect the auto-save file of the first and open it.
In this case, just close the auto-save file and continue.
2.6 Rearranging toolbars
2.4 About templates You can move the toolbars in RAM Concept to suit your
particular work habits. To move a tool bar, click on the
handle of the toolbar and drag the toolbar to its new
A template file contains everything a normal file includes location. The toolbar handle is two lines on the right edge
(such as specification settings, plans, etc.) but has no of horizontal toolbars or at the top edge of vertical toolbars.
objects. You can create a template from any RAM Concept The toolbars snap to the edges of the application window or
file by choosing File > Save Template. Concept saves a can remain floating in the workspace.
copy of your file without any objects and with the .cpttmp
filename extension. For details on how to save a template,
see “To save a file as a template:” on page 5. Copy an
existing template file by choosing File > New and clicking 2.7 Using the right mouse button
Copy File to create a new file based on the template. For
more information on starting a new file from a template,
see “Starting a new file” on page 5. RAM Concept provides some of the commands available
from the menus or toolbars in a special context-sensitive
pop-up menu that appears when you click the right mouse
button. The contents of the menu vary depending on where
you click, what window is active, and whether there is a
current selection.
6 RAM Concept
Chapter 2
2.8 Undoing changes taken. To redo a command that has been undone, choose
Edit > Redo.
RAM Concept provides multiple levels of undo to correct Note: The Undo command cannot reverse the Generate
mistakes or reverse actions you have taken. Concept limits Mesh and Calc All commands. All changes you have made
the amount of memory used to record undo information. are committed once you perform one of these operations.
Concept is therefore able to undo more small operations
(deleting 10 objects) than large operations (deleting 1000
objects). Choose Edit > Undo to reverse the last action
RAM Concept 7
Chapter 2
8 RAM Concept
Chapter 3
3 Understanding Layers
In RAM Concept, objects (such as walls, columns, slab Drawing Import Layer
areas, springs, loads, tendons, design strips, etc.) make up
This layer contains all the imported CAD drawing
the structural model. Since there are so many objects
information. Concept automatically stores any imported
involved in modeling a structure, Concept uses layers to
drawings on this layer.
organize these objects.
A layer is a collection of related objects and each object in Mesh Input Layer
Concept resides on one and only one layer. You can handle This layer contains the objects that define the geometry of
all of the objects on a single layer as a group or the structure. Concept uses these objects to generate
individually. corresponding finite element objects on the Element Layer.
Layer-Specific Objects: Column, Wall, Slab Area, Slab
Opening, Beam, Point Support, Line Support, Point Spring,
Line Spring, Area Spring.
3.1 Modeling with objects
Element Layer
Since objects make up the structural model, they are more This layer contains the finite element objects. These objects
than a combination of points and lines. Each object is an can be generated by Concept based on the information on
individual entity with properties. Column object properties, the Mesh Input Layer, or can be created by hand.
for example, include concrete mix, height, width, depth,
and more. Layer-Specific Objects: Column Element, Wall Element,
Slab Element, Point Support, Line Support, Point Spring,
You draw some objects on plans, and RAM Concept Line Spring, Area Spring.
creates some objects automatically when you generate the
Loading Layers (Self-dead, Balance, Hyperstatic, Temporary
finite element mesh or run an analysis calculation. If you Construction (at Stressing), Other Dead, Live (Reducible), Live
have wall, column, and slab area objects on the Mesh Input (Unreducible), Live (Storage), Live (Roof) and User-defined)
layer, Concept creates corresponding wall element, column
element, and slab element objects on the Element layer These layers contain all the information that defines the
when you generate the finite element mesh. loads on the structure. In Concept, a loading is a set of
loads applied as a group, such as the live loads. The loading
If you want to create or edit objects on a layer, use the plans layers also contain the loading analysis results.
on that layer. When you draw columns on the Standard
Plan of the Mesh Input layer, you are creating objects on Concept provides the self-dead, balance, and hyperstatic
the Mesh Input layer. These objects belong to the layer and loading layers by default and you cannot delete them.
not the plan. They are editable by any plan on the Mesh
You can define an unlimited number of loadings and
Input layer, but not by plans on any other layer. Each object
Concept creates a corresponding layer for each.
is an individual entity so you can manipulate it both
separately and together with other objects on the same Layer-Specific Objects: Point Loads, Line Loads, Area
layer. Loads.
Note: You cannot edit the load objects on the Self-Dead
Loading Layer, Balance Loading Layer, and Hyperstatic
Loading Layer.
3.2 Managing layers
Pattern Layer
RAM Concept performs most of the layer management This layer contains the load patterns for the structure.
automatically. Almost all of the layers you need to design a
structure are already in place when you start a new file. Layer-Specific Objects: Load Patterns.
Concept adds appropriate layers when you create new
Design Strip Layer
Loadings, Load Combinations, and Rule Set Designs.
This layer contains the design strips, design sections and
Note: You can create and edit a separate group of Line punching checks for the structure.
Objects, Dimension Objects, and Text Note Objects on every
layer. Layer-Specific Objects: Span Segments, Span Boundaries,
Strip Boundaries, Design Sections, Punching Checks.
RAM Concept 9
Chapter 3
Tendon Layers (Latitude and Longitude) words, the dot means there exists at least one object that
belongs to that layer.This is different to any visible objects
These layers contain the layout of post-tensioning tendons
on one of the layers’ plans, which may or may not belong
and jacks for the structure. Although there are two tendon
to that layer.
layers, Latitude and Longitude, there is no requirement to
use both layers. You can draw tendons on the tendon layers Note: There may be a lag time (such as 10 seconds) for this
in whatever manner you wish. to happen after the first item on the layer is draw.
Layer-Specific Objects: Tendon, Jack. Note: This feature is added in response to the frustration
Load Combination Layers (All Dead, Dead and Balance, Initial
of having to search every layer in support files to see if they
Service, Service, Sustained Service, Factored, LT Uncracked contained any items.
Deflection and User-defined)
Note: Dots do not typically appear on Load Combination
These layers contain the load combination analysis results. layers as these layers have no items drawn on them. This
does NOT mean the load combo is not used in the design.
Note: The load combinations listed are for ACI318.
AS3600 and BS8110 use some different terminology.
Rule Set Design Layers (Code Minimum, User Minimum, Initial

Service, Service, Sustained Service, Strength, Ductility)
These layers contain the rule set design analysis and design
results.
Note: The rule set designs listed are for ACI318, AS3600
and BS8110 use some different terminology.
Design Status Layer
This layer contains the summary of all the design results.

The summary information is automatically created by
Concept when you Calc All. You cannot create, edit, or
delete the objects on this layer but you can view them.
3.2.1 Determining which plans contain

objects
Some layer icons next to a layer name in the contents
window have a dot on the top “sheet”. This indicates that Figure 3-1 Layer icons indicating that there are objects on the following
there is at least one object resident on that layer. In other layers: Mesh Input, Element, Other Dead Loading and Live (Unreducible)
Loading
10 RAM Concept
Chapter 4
4 Using Plans and Perspectives
Plan windows are used to create, view, and edit objects in appear larger than far objects of the same size. The Parallel
two dimensions while perspective windows provide a three
Projection ( ) and Perspective Projection ( ) toggles
dimensional view of those objects.
control which way the image is rendered. One, and only
one, of these toggles is always set.
4.1 Using plans

4.3.2 Selecting the modeling
A plan is a view of the geometric model and results. You The Wire Frame Modeling ( ) and Solid Modeling ( )
can view any object on any plan. You can only create and toggles control how the image is rendered. The wire frame
edit an object on a plan belonging to the object’s layer. For is made of only the edges of the visible objects whereas the
example, an other dead load can only be edited on a plan solid model shows the visible objects’ surfaces. The solid
belonging to the Other Dead Loading layer. model is more realistic, however the wire frame image is
often useful since it allows you to see through the model.
Objects are drawn and edited with tools located in Layer-
One, and only one, of these toggles is always set.
Specific toolbars, and the Tools menu. The available tools
are dependent on which plan is the active window in the
workspace. Once you draw an object on a plan, the object
4.3.3 Rotating the model
belongs to that plan’s layer.
Note: For information on drawing and editing objects, see Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool ( ) and the
the following chapter.
Rotate about z-axis tool ( ) to rotate the model about the
screen’s x-, y-, and z-axes.
To rotate the model:

4.2 Creating new plans
1 Select the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool ( ) or the
Rotate about z-axis tool ( ).
Create new plans when you need additional ones to those
2 Click once on the perspective window to begin and move
provided by default.
the cursor until you position the model as desired.
To create a new plan: 3 Click on the perspective again to set the view.
1 Choose Layers > New Plan.
2 Enter a name for the plan. (Concept automatically
prepends the layer name and appends the word “Plan”). 4.4 Creating new perspectives
3 Select the layer on which you want the plan and click OK.
Create new perspectives when you need additional ones to

those provided by default.
4.3 Viewing perspectives
To create a new perspective:
1 Choose Layers > New Perspective.
Perspectives provide a three dimensional view of the
2 Enter a name for the perspective. (RAM Concept
model. You can view the model from any angle by rotating
the perspective about the x-, y-, and z-axes. The model can automatically prepends the layer name and appends the
be viewed in parallel projection or perspective projection word “Perspective”).
and can be modeled as a solid or wire structure. 3 Select the layer on which you want the plan and click OK.
4.3.1 Setting the projection

4.5 Controlling views
You can render the model in either parallel or perspective
projection. In parallel projection, lines that are parallel in
the original model are also drawn parallel in the three You can manipulate the plan and perspective windows to
dimensional image. In perspective projection, near objects show the desired view or information. Zooming and
RAM Concept 11
Chapter 4
panning allow you to change what portion of the model you 4.5.3 Regenerating
are viewing. RAM Concept usually regenerates the view
automatically. It is sometimes necessary, however, to use Regenerating the view is necessary when anything occurs
that invalidates the current view. When you generate the
the Redraw command ( ) to update the image on the mesh, analyze the model or change the settings, the open
screen. windows may need updating. In most cases, RAM Concept
automatically regenerates for you. If you find that the view
Plans and perspectives represent unique views of the
model. You control which object types are visible and their is not up to date, click Redraw ( ) to regenerate the view
colors, font, and line type for each plan and perspective. in the active window.
4.5.1 Zooming to magnify or diminish 4.5.4 Setting the visible objects

Use zooming to magnify or diminish the plan or Use the Visible Objects dialog box to set which objects
perspective view. If you have a mouse with a wheel button, types are visible on a plan or perspective. Plans and
roll the wheel to zoom in and out at the cursor location. perspectives can show objects from any layer, but you can
only edit objects on a plan from the object’s layer.
Zoom In ( ) and Zoom Rectangle ( ) magnify the
view. Zoom Out ( ) diminishes the view. You can set the
view to encompass the entire model by using Zoom Extent
( ). To get back the previous zoom ratio use Zoom
Previous ( ).
To magnify or diminish the view with the mouse wheel button:

1 Place the cursor on a location over the active plan or
perspective window. This is the zoom center point.
2 Roll the mouse wheel button away from you to zoom in,
and toward you to zoom out.
To magnify a specific area in the view:

1 Select the Zoom Rectangle tool ( ).
Figure 4-1 Visible Objects dialog box (Mesh Input tab)
2 Fence the area you want to magnify.
To show or hide objects on a plan or perspective:
4.5.2 Panning to reposition 1 Make the plan or perspective the active window.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ).
Panning allows you to reposition the view in the plan or
perspective window. If you have a mouse with a wheel 3 Click on the tab for the object’s layer.
button, press down on the wheel over the view and pan. The plan or perspective’s layer is the one initially selected.
You can use the Pan tool ( ) to move the view as well. In 4 Check boxes to show objects and uncheck to hide
addition, plans have scroll bars along the bottom and right objects, then click OK.
side of the window that you can use to reposition the view.
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
To reposition the view with the mouse wheel button: includes the Visible Objects command.
1 Press down on the mouse wheel button over the active
plan or perspective window.
4.5.5 Changing colors, font, and line type
2 Pan the view into position and release the wheel button.
Each plan and perspective has an associated appearance
To reposition the view with a tool: scheme that dictates the colors, font, and line type used for
1 Select the Pan tool ( ). the objects shown. When a plan or perspective is the active
2 Click once on the plan to begin panning, click again when window, you can select and modify its appearance scheme
the view is in the desired position. using the Appearance dialog. If you change the settings of
an appearance scheme, it affects all the plans and
perspectives that use that scheme. You can create as many
12 RAM Concept
Chapter 4
appearance schemes as you need to customize the look of You can select the color of every drawn object type for
your plans and perspectives. When you create a new plan each appearance scheme. You can also set the background,
or perspective, the window initially uses the default grid and highlight colors. If an object type has no color
scheme.
selected ( ), RAM Concept uses the color setting for the
object’s layer. For example, you can set the Tendon object
color to no selection, and then set the Latitude Tendon layer
to red and Longitude Tendon layer color to blue. RAM
Concept uses the foreground color in the case that you have
selected neither the object type color nor the layer default
color.
To change the colors in an appearance scheme:

1 Choose View > Appearance ( ).
2 Select the appearance scheme (if a plan or perspective is
the active window, the selection is already the scheme set
for that window).
3 Select the item from the drop-down list (if changing
plotting colors skip this step).
4 Click on the color selection box for the item and choose
Figure 4-2 Appearance dialog
a color.
To set the appearance scheme for a plan or perspective: Lines of drawn objects can be set to solid, dashed, or
1 Make the plan or perspective the active window. dotted. Reference lines have Line Type and Line Width
properties that are independent of the appearance scheme
setting.
3 Select the scheme from the list of schemes on the left side
of the Appearance dialog and click OK.
4.5.6 Changing font size
includes the Appearance command. You can change the font size in two ways. In the
appearance schemes, you can select the font size for all text
To create a new appearance scheme: other then text notes. With the font buttons, you can
1 Choose View > Appearance ( ). temporarily change the font size.
2 Click New below the list of schemes in the Appearance
To temporarily change the font size:
dialog.
1 Click Enlarge Fonts ( ) or Shrink Fonts ( ).
3 Type a name for the new scheme and select the base
scheme. The settings from the base scheme initialize the Note: The temporary font size change only affects the
new scheme. active window and RAM Concept discards the change when
the window is closed.
To delete an appearance scheme:
2 Select the scheme you want to delete from the list of 4.5.7 Changing font scale
schemes in the Appearance dialog. You can select the font scale so that the font size either
3 Click Delete below the list of schemes to delete the changes or stays unchanged as you zoom in and out on a
highlighted scheme. plan.
To set a new default scheme: To set the font scale:

1 Choose View > Appearance ( ). 1 Choose View > Appearance ( ).
2 Select the scheme you want to make the new default 2 Select the appearance scheme (if a plan or perspective is
scheme from the list of schemes in the Appearance dialog. the active window, the selection is already the scheme set
3 Click Set As Default below the list of schemes to make for that window).
the highlighted scheme the new default scheme. RAM
Concept uses this scheme to initialize newly created plans
and perspectives.
RAM Concept 13
Chapter 4
3 Enter the font scale and click OK. To make the grid visible for a plan:
1 Make the plan the active window.
Note: A font scale of zero causes the font to stay a constant
size regardless of the plan scale. A non-zero value scales the 2 Choose View > Grid.
font to be the same relative size as you zoom in and out. 3 Check Show Grid and click OK.
Note: If you want the grid to be visible on all plans then

check Set for all Plans.
4.6 Setting up the grid
includes the Grid.
A grid can be set up to help you draw objects accurately by
providing snap points at a designated spacing. The Plan To change the grid settings for a plan:
Grid Setup dialog allows you to make the grid visible and 1 Make the plan the active window.
to change the spacing, origin, and rotation angle of the grid.
2 Choose View > Grid.
You can change the grid setting for the active plan window
or all plan windows at once. 3 Enter values in the Plan Grid Setup dialog box and click
OK.
Note: If you want the grid settings to apply to all plan

windows then check Set for all Plans.
Figure 4-3 Plan grid dialog box
14 RAM Concept
Chapter 5
5 Drawing and Editing Objects
Drawing objects is the cornerstone of using RAM Concept. In general, the snap extension setting causes the other snap
There are many tools available to make this as calculations to behave as if the line segments displayed
straightforward as possible. extended to be infinitely long lines. The specific changes to
the other snap settings are:
To create or edit objects on a layer, use the plans on that
layer. You draw and edit objects on plans using the tools • Intersection: intersections between infinite lines
from the Layer-Specific toolbar. (defined by visible line segments) are snappable points.
• Point: no effect.
• End Point: no effect.
5.1 Precision drawing with snaps • Mid Point: no effect.
• Nearest: nearby infinite lines (defined by visible line
RAM Concept provides drawing tools and settings to help segments) are snappable.
you work precisely. Snap tools allow you to snap the cursor
• Orthogonal: no effect.
to precise points on objects or locations on the screen.
• Perpendicular: perpendicular point on infinite lines
Using snaps is a quick way to specify an exact location on (defined by visible line segments) are snappable.
an object without drawing construction lines or knowing
• Center: no effect.
the exact coordinate. Whenever you move your cursor over
an object, RAM Concept identifies snap points based on • Grid: no effect.
what snaps are active. To turn on a snap, click on its button.
Click on the button again to turn off the snap.
Snap to Intersection ( ) snaps to the intersection of 5.2 Drawing objects

any two lines including polygon vertices.
To draw objects on a plan, first select a drawing tool by
Snap to Point ( ) snaps to any defined point such as clicking on it or choosing it from the Tools menu. The
the center of a column, end point of a line, or vertex of a selected tool will be the active drawing tool for the plan
polygon. until you select a new tool. Follow the command prompts
for points to enter (see Figure 2-1 on page 5). For example,
Snap to End Point ( ) snaps to the end points of lines with a Mesh Input layer plan open, and the Column tool
(including vertices of polygons). selected, the command prompt will read “Enter column
center point:”.
Snap to Mid Point ( ) snaps to the mid points of lines. If you are drawing with a tool and wish to cancel what you
have drawn, click the right mouse button, or press the Esc
Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) snaps to the point key.
on a drawn object nearest to the cursor.
If you need to reposition or magnify the view while you are
Snap Orthogonal ( ) snaps orthogonally in the drawing and do not want to cancel the work you are doing,
direction of the grid’s local x- or y-axis. This need not be use the mouse wheel button to pan or zoom. See
parallel with the global x- and y-axes. “Controlling views” on page 12 for more information on
how to use the mouse wheel button.
Snap to Perpendicular ( ) snaps perpendicularly
from the last click to a line.
5.3 Entering coordinate points
Snap to Center ( ) snaps the center of polygons and
columns.
Each point on a plan is a location represented by
Snap to Grid ( ) snaps to the grid. coordinates. Many tools require you to locate one or more
points on a plan. With a tool selected, you can enter points
by clicking at a location on the plan, entering the
Snap Extension ( ) does not create a snapping mode coordinates in the command line, entering the relative
by itself, but it affects the behavior of some of the other coordinates in the command line, or by using snaps.
snap settings.
RAM Concept 15
Chapter 5
To enter coordinates: 5.6 Deselecting objects

1 With the appropriate tool selected, type the x- and y-
coordinates separated by a comma (e.g. 10, 5).
You can deselect objects from the current selection by
holding the Shift key while you select objects to remove
from the selection.
5.4 Using relative coordinates To deselect an object or group of objects from a selection:
1 Choose the Selection tool ( ) or the Utility tool ( ).
Relative coordinates locate a point on a plan by referencing
2 Hold down the Shift key as you fence the objects in the
it to the last point entered. They can be very useful for
selection you want to deselect. This deselects the selected
moving and copying objects a set distance.
objects within and crossing the rectangular area, and selects
To enter relative coordinates:
any objects in the rectangular area not previously selected.
1 With the appropriate tool selected, type the letter “r” To deselect only a single object from a selection:
followed by the x- and y-coordinates separated by a comma
1 Choose the Selection tool ( ) or the Utility tool ( ).
(e.g. r10, 5).
2 Hold down the Shift key as you double click on the object
in the selection you wish to deselect. When you are
deselecting, RAM Concept interprets a very small rectangle
5.5 Selecting objects as a double click.
Before you can edit objects on a plan, you must select

them. Use the Selection tool ( ) or the Utility tool ( ) 5.7 Cutting, copying, and pasting objects
to select objects on a plan. You select visible objects by
fencing the area in which they are located. For example, if To cut or copy objects, first select the objects then choose
you have a slab opening (on the Mesh Input layer) in the the appropriate command from the Edit menu. RAM
middle of a slab, fencing the opening selects both the Concept places objects that you cut or copy on the
opening and the slab area because the rectangle crosses the Windows clipboard. The coordinate locations of objects
slab area and surrounds the opening. If you want to select pasted from the clipboard are the same as the coordinate
just the opening, double click on it. You can select any location from where you copied or cut them. RAM Concept
single object by double clicking on it. To add objects to the makes the pasted objects the current selection, so you can
current selection, hold the Shift key down as you select. reposition them after you paste.
To select an object or group of objects: To cut objects:
1 Choose the Selection tool ( ) or the Utility tool ( ). 1 Select the object or group of objects you want to cut.
2 Click at opposite corners of a rectangle. This selects 2 Choose Edit > Cut (or right-click and choose Cut from
objects within and crossing the rectangular selection area. the popup menu that appears).
(Hold down the Shift key on the first click to add objects to
the current selection.) To copy objects:
1 Select the object or group of objects you want to copy.
To select only a single object:
1 Choose the Selection tool ( ) or the Utility tool ( ). 2 Choose Edit > Copy (or right-click and choose Copy
from the popup menu that appears).
2 Double click on the object you wish to select (Hold down
the Shift key as you click to add the object to the current To paste objects from the clipboard:
selection). When you are selecting, RAM Concept inter-
1 Choose Edit > Paste (or right-click and choose Paste from
prets a very small rectangle as a double click.
the popup menu that appears).
You can also copy and move, rotate, stretch or mirror an

object in one step by pressing the Shift key while you use
the Move tool ( ), Stretch tool ( ), Rotate tool ( )
or Mirror tool ( ). See “Moving, rotating, stretching, and
mirroring objects” on page 17 for more information.
16 RAM Concept
Chapter 5
5.8 Moving, rotating, stretching, and 5.9 Using the Utility tool to move and
mirroring objects stretch
An object or group of objects must be selected before using

The Utility tool ( ) is a multi-purpose tool used for
the Move tool ( ), Stretch tool ( ), Rotate tool ( ) selecting, moving, and stretching objects. See “Selecting
objects” on page 16 for information on how to select
or Mirror tool ( ) (See “Selecting objects”). If you hold
objects with the Utility tool. Once you have selected an
down the Shift key on the first click of a move, rotate, or
object or group of objects, you can move or stretch a grip
mirror, the operation will be performed on a copy of the
point by snapping to it on the selection.
selection rather then the selection itself.
To move an object by one of its grips:
To move a selection:
1 Choose the Utility tool ( ).
1 Select the object or group of objects to move.
2 Select an object or group of objects.
2 Choose the Move tool ( ).
3 Snap to a grip point and position the cursor in the top half
3 Enter the point from which to move (hold down the Shift
of the snap area until you see the move cross cursor ( )
key as you click to move a copy of the selection).
then click. (Hold down the Shift key as you click to move a
4 Click on the point to where you want the object, or group copy of the selection.)
of objects, to move.
4 Click on the point to where you want the object, or group
To stretch the selection:
of objects, to move.
1 Select the object or group of objects to stretch. To stretch an object by one of its grips:
2 Choose the Stretch tool ( ). 1 Choose the Utility tool ( ).
3 Snap to the point you want to stretch on the selection 2 Select an object or group of objects.
(limited to highlighted control points).
3 Snap to a grip point and position the cursor in the bottom
4 Click on the point to where you want the object, or group half of the snap area until you see the stretch cursor ( )
of objects, to stretch. then click.
4 Click on the point to where you want the object, or group
To rotate a selection:
of objects, to stretch.
1 Select the object or group of objects to rotate.
2 Choose the Rotate tool ( ).
3 Enter the rotation center point (hold down the Shift key
as you click to rotate a copy of the selection). 5.10 Manipulating the model as a whole
4 Enter the rotation start angle or a point to create a line to
rotate. The Move Model tool ( ), Mirror Model tool ( ), and
5 Click on the new end point of the rotation line or enter an
Rotate Model tool ( ) work just like the Move tool
end angle.
( ), Mirror tool ( ), and Rotate tool ( ) except they
To mirror the selection: affect the whole model (all layers). You can also scale the
1 Select the object or group of objects to mirror.
entire model with the Scale Model tool ( ).
2 Choose the Mirror tool ( ).
To move the entire model:
3 Enter the two points that create the line across which you
would like to mirror the selected object(s). (Hold down the 1 Choose the Move Model tool ( ).
Shift key as you click to mirror a copy of the selection.) 2 Enter the start point.
3 Enter the move point.
To rotate the entire model:

1 Choose the Rotate Model tool ( ).
2 Enter the rotation center point (hold down the Shift key
as you click to rotate a copy of the model).
RAM Concept 17
Chapter 5
3 Enter the rotation start angle or a point to create a line to To set the default properties for an object drawing tool:
rotate. 1 Double click on the drawing tool or with the tool
4 Click on the new end point of the rotation line or enter an selected, choose Tools > Current Tool Properties.
end angle. 2 Specify default property values in the Properties dialog
and click OK.
To mirror the entire model:
1 Choose the Mirror Model tool ( ). When you now use the tool, it will draw objects with the
specified default properties.
2 Enter the two points that create the line across which you
would like to mirror the model (hold down the Shift key as Note: Changing the default properties of an object
you click to mirror a copy of the model). drawing tool does not change the properties of such objects
already drawn.
To scale the entire model:
1 Choose the Scale Model tool ( ).
2 Enter a scale center point.
5.13 Adding reference lines, dimensions,
3 In the Scale Model dialog box, enter the relative scale and text notes
factors and click OK.
The Line tool ( ), Dimension tool ( ), and Text tool

5.11 Editing object properties ( ) are all used to add information to plans. These
objects are not part of the structural model and RAM
Concept does not consider them when generating the mesh
The properties of an object define its individual or calculating results. As for all objects, the lines,
characteristics. For example, the properties of a Line object dimensions and text objects belong to the layer on which
include the Line Type and Line Width. Some objects’ they are drawn.
properties can be edited together as a group. Specifically,
you can always modify objects of the same type together, To draw a line:
and you can often modify objects of different types but
1 Choose the Line tool ( ).
with similar properties together. For example, you can edit
the Concrete Mix and Height properties of Column and 2 Click at the line start point (or enter the coordinates in the
Wall objects together. command line).
3 Click at the line end point (or enter the coordinates in the
To change the properties of an object or group of objects: command line).
1 Select the object or group of objects.
To draw a dimension line:
2 Choose Edit > Selection Properties, or right-click and
choose Selection Properties. 1 Choose the Dimension tool ( ).
3 Specify the property values in the Properties dialog and 2 Click at the start point.
click OK. 3 Click at the end point.
4 Click at the offset point where the dimension line will be
located.
5.12 Setting default properties To draw text:
1 Choose the Text tool ( ).
It is useful to set the default properties of object drawing
2 Click at a point (or enter the coordinates in the command
tools so that when you use the tool the drawn object has the
line).
desired properties. This is valuable when many objects will
have the same properties. 3 Right click and choose Selection Properties.
4 Enter the text and its properties.
18 RAM Concept
Chapter 6
6 Viewing Objects in Text Tables
A text table shows all the objects of a particular type on a 6.1.1 Choosing which rows and columns to
specific layer. Tables provide a customizable textual view show
of each objects’ properties. You can access text tables from
the Tables folder of any layer. Customize the table columns and rows by clicking on the
Customize button above the table. In the Customize dialog
To open a text table: box, you can select which rows and columns are visible in
1 Go to the Tables folder of the object type’s layer. the table. Check the columns you want to see and uncheck
the columns you want hidden.
2 Open the appropriate text table from the folder.
To make a table column visible or hidden:
For example, the text table for Walls Below on the Mesh
Input layer can be opened by choosing Layers > Mesh 1 Click on the Customize button above the table.
Input > Tables > Walls Below. 2 In the Customize dialog box, to make a column visible,
check the checkbox. To hide the column, uncheck the
checkbox.
3 Click OK.
6.1.2 Sizing table columns

You can resize columns by changing the width of the
column header.
To resize the width of the column:

1 Place your cursor on the line between two columns on the
table header and press down on the left mouse button.
2 Drag the table header to its new width and release the left
Figure 6-1 Mesh Input: Walls Below Table
mouse button.
The table will print as seen on screen so the column widths

you set will appear the same way on paper.
6.1 Customizing tables
6.1.3 Sorting table rows
You can choose which columns and rows are visible in the
table, and the column widths. You can also sort the rows To sort the table rows according to the values in a column,
based on a particular column’s values in ascending or click on the column header once for ascending order. Click
descending order. on the column header again to sort in the descending order.
RAM Concept 19
Chapter 6
20 RAM Concept
Chapter 7
7 Choosing Units
RAM Concept allows you to work with three unit systems: 2 Do one of the following:
US, SI and MKS. • Select each unit by accessing the appropriate drop
Some designers refer to the US units system as “US down box.
customary units”, and others call it “Imperial”. SI and • Select a unit system by clicking on US, SI, or
MKS are metric unit systems, with MKS using mass rather MKS at the top of the window.
than weight.
Note: There is often a long list of choices for the units.
It is up to you which system you use but local practice Scroll down the drop down menu to view the options.
should dictate your choice.
The choice of actual units is more subjective. For example,

after choosing the US system, one designer might use the
default area load units of pounds per square feet, and
another might change the selection to kips per square feet.
7.1 About units
Internally, RAM Concept performs all calculations with the

SI unit system. It converts all property values into an
equivalent SI unit prior to calculation. Once complete, it
converts the values back into the selected units for
reporting.
It is possible to mix unit systems (e.g. pounds and meters)

but this is not advisable.
7.2 Selecting units
A new file has default units that you can change at any
time.
Figure 7-1 Units Window

7.2.1 Selecting the default units
The default units depend on how you created the file. When
you use a template or an existing file, the default units are
those of the source. 7.3 Specifying report as zero
When you create a file using the New command, you only
have a choice of default units for ACI 318 (US or SI). For RAM Concept allows you to filter out trivial results with
all other codes, the default units are SI. the Report as Zero option. For example, column reactions
have components for Fr, Fs, Fz, Mr and Ms. Some of these
values, such as Fr and Fs, may be very small and hence not
7.2.2 Changing the units important. Filtering small values from plan plots can make
the results easier to read.
You can change either the unit system or individual units.
Note: Using this feature could result in human error, as
To change the units: you might later assume zeroed values are exactly equal to
zero.
1 Choose Criteria > Units.
You specify Report as Zero in the Units window.
RAM Concept 21
Chapter 7
To specify Report as Zero: 2 Enter one or more Report as Zero values.

1 Choose Criteria > Units.
Note: You can also turn off plotted values such as Fr and
Fs with the plot menu. See “Setting the plotted results” on
page 137.
22 RAM Concept
Chapter 8
8 Choosing Sign Convention
RAM Concept allows you to choose the sign convention Fy In the positive y-direction (see coordinate axes).
for loads, analysis and reactions.
Fz In the negative z-direction (see coordinate axes).
RAM Concept uses the Cartesian coordinate system with
the following sign convention for axes: Mx (moment about the X-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
My (moment about the Y-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
Mz (moment about the Z-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
You cannot change the sign of the coordinates’ axes. Positive analysis
Sign convention dictates how you input parameters and

how RAM Concept displays results. For example, the sign
convention of an applied load dictates whether the input
value is positive or negative.
Note that changing a sign setting does not change the real
value of any previously specified data. For example if a Figure 8-2 Top row, left to right: Vertical Element Shear, Element Bending,
+10 kips downward load was specified when RAM Element Axial, Vertical Deflection. Bottom row, left to right: Horizontal
Concept had a downward-positive load sign convention Shear, Twist, Lateral Deflection, Angular Deflection.
and then the load sign convention was changed to upward-
positive, the load value would now be reported as -10 kip, Vertical element shear Positive z-shear on the positive
but the load would still be a 10 kip downward load. x- and y-faces.
Similarly, a change in sign convention does not affect the
true value of results. Element bending Tension bottom face.
When you add loads after a change in sign convention, you Element axial Tension.
must observe the new sign convention. Vertical deflection In negative z-direction (down).
Horizontal shear Positive y-shear on Positive x-face

(equivalent to Positive x-shear on Positive y-face).
8.1 Selecting sign convention
Twist Positive x-axis moment on positive x-face
(equivalent to negative y-axis moment on positive y-face).
A new file has a default sign convention that you can
change at any time. Lateral deflection Positive in x- and y-axes directions.
Angular deflection Per right-hand-rule about x- and y-

axes.
8.1.1 Default sign convention
Positive reactions
The default sign convention depends on how you created
the file. If you use a template or an existing file then the
default sign convention is that of the source.
When you create a file (not from a template), the sign

Figure 8-3 Left to right: Fx, Fy, Fz, Coordinate Axis, Mx, My, Mz.
convention is as follows:
Positive loads Fx In the positive x-direction (see coordinate axes).
Fy In the positive y-direction (see coordinate axes).
Fz In the positive z-direction (see coordinate axes).

Figure 8-1 Left to right: Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My.
Mx (moment about the x-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
Fx In the positive x-direction (see coordinate axes). My (moment about the y-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
RAM Concept 23
Chapter 8
Mz (moment about the z-axis) Per right-hand-rule. 8.2 About plot sign convention
Note: The only difference in defaults between Positive
Loads and Positive Reactions is Fz. This is because point With the exception of vertical deflection, line plots show
loads are usually down if positive, and vertical reactions are positive results plotted above the axis line. This ensures
usually up if positive. that plots do not appear upside down. For axis lines that are
parallel to the y-axis (and hence have no “above the axis
line” direction), line plots show positive results to the left
8.1.2 Changing the sign convention of the axis line.
You can change the sign convention for any loads or Note: Line plots show positive vertical deflection below
results, but only one at a time. the axis line.
To change the sign convention: Perspectives are plotted with positive results in the global
z-direction (what is considered positive is dependent upon
1 Choose Criteria > Signs.
the sign convention of the Value Plotted). For example, a
2 Change each positive sign by clicking the appropriate perspective of deflection shows positive deflection up.
graphic. The direction changes.
You cannot change the sign of the coordinates’ axes.
Figure 8-4 Signs Window
24 RAM Concept
Chapter 9
9 Specifying Material Properties
RAM Concept uses materials as part of the input and the 9.2 Material properties
results. You specify concrete mixes and post-tensioning
systems as part of the input and Concept reports
reinforcement bar requirements as part of the results. The following is a list of Material properties:
You can use the materials provided or create your own. For
example, you might want to redesign the floor with the 9.2.1 Concrete Mix
actual tested strength of the concrete poured on site. In this
case, you would create a new concrete mix defined with Mix Name The label used to identify a concrete mix. The
that strength. mix name is not necessarily the concrete strength. Each
column, wall, slab and beam has a concrete mix property.
You can delete any of the materials that you find are
unnecessary. Density The concrete mass density (used to calculate self-
weight and sometimes the modulus of elasticity).
f’ci The characteristic cylinder strength of the concrete mix

at the time of applying prestress (also known as initial
9.1 Viewing the available materials
strength).
The Materials window shows the names and properties of f’c The characteristic cylinder strength of the concrete mix.
concrete mixes, PT systems and reinforcing bars.
Note: f’ci and f’c are used for all codes except BS8110.
To view the materials: fcui The characteristic cube strength of the concrete mix at
1 Choose Criteria > Materials. the time of applying prestress (also known as initial
strength).
fcu The characteristic cube strength of the concrete mix.
Note: fcui and fcu are only used for BS8110.

Poisson’s Ratio The negative of the ratio of lateral
strains to axial strains for an axially loaded material. This is
usually 0.2 for concrete.
Ec Calc The method used to calculate Young’s Modulus

(for both initial characteristic strength and characteristic
strength). This can be according to one of the code rules
listed or a specified value.
User Eci The user defined Young’s Modulus used for

initial cross section analysis.
User Ec The user defined Young’s Modulus used for

global analysis, service cross section analysis and strength
design.
9.2.2 PT Systems
System Name The label used to identify a PT system. It
usually describes the system, such as strand size and
bonding.
Type Whether the system has unbonded or bonded strand.

Figure 9-1 The Materials window.
Aps The cross sectional area of one strand. Since strand is
usually comprised of seven wires then the area is more
complicated than Πd2/4.
RAM Concept 25
Chapter 9
Eps The Young’s Modulus of the strand at zero strain. Fy The yield stress of the SSR reinforcement.
fse The assumed effective stress in the strand after all Stud Spacing Rounding Increment Specifies an
losses. Using jacks overrides this assumption. See “About increment to which all stud designs are rounded down. For
jacks” on page 121 for further information. example, specifying a larger number forces a larger number
of designs to have the same spacing, creating the potential
fpy The yield stress of the strand. for “grouping” of designs at different columns.
fpu The ultimate stress of the strand. Min Studs Per Rail Specifies the minimum number of
studs that Concept designs on any rail. This can be useful in
Duct Width The width or diameter of bonded tendon duct. a number of situations. For example, if one face of a
column has a small overhang for which the designer does
Max Strands Per Duct The maximum number of strands
not want SSR reinforcement, this minimum stud number
in a bonded tendon (use 1 for unbonded tendons).
can be increased to prevent the design of rails on that face.
Minimum Radius The minimum vertical radius that
allows satisfactory placement of tendons in the field. You
should consult with a local PT supplier. A value of zero
disables radius checking for this PT system. 9.3 Adding and deleting materials
Jacking Stress / Anchor Friction / Wobble Friction
You can add materials to define properties of concrete
/ Angular Friction / Seating Distance / Long-Term
mixes, PT systems and reinforcing bars. You can delete
Losses
materials as long as at least one material of each type
Friction loss calculations use these properties. They have remains.
no effect unless tendon jacks are used. See “Jack
properties” on page 121 of Chapter 25, “Defining Tendons” To add materials:
for further information. 1 Choose Criteria > Materials.
2 Click Add Concrete Mix, or Add PT System, or Add
Reinforcing Bar, or Add SSR System.
9.2.3 Reinforcing Bars
3 In the dialog box that appears, enter a name for the new
Bar Name The label used to identify a reinforcing bar. It material and click OK.
usually refers to the bar’s diameter.
A new row appears at the bottom of the appropriate table.
As Cross sectional area of the bar.
4 Enter the property value for each cell in the new row.
Es The Young’s Modulus of the bar.
To delete materials:
Fy The yield stress of the bar. 1 Choose Criteria > Materials.
2 Click Delete Concrete Mix, Delete PT System, or Delete
Reinforcing Bar, or Delete SSR System.
9.2.4 SSR Systems
A dialog box appears with a list of the available materials.
SSR System Name The label used to identify a SSR
(stud shear reinforcement) system. It usually describes the 3 Choose the material to delete and click OK.
system, such as stud size.
Stud Area Cross sectional area of the stud stem that is

used in strength calculations 9.4 About post-tensioning systems
Head Area The area of the stud head, generally about 10
times the stem area. Concept uses this to calculate the head There are two types of systems considered in RAM
diameter for clear spacing calculations. Concept.
Min Head Spacing The minimum clear spacing between • Unbonded systems: greased strand encased in plastic
stud heads along the length of a rail. The design will not sheathing.
succeed if this value is too large. • Bonded systems: bare strand within grouted ducts.
Specified Stud Spacing The desired stud spacing for
the SSR design. If set to “none”, Concept automatically
designs the stud spacing.
26 RAM Concept
Chapter 9
Strands are typically comprised of seven wires spirally For further discussion on post-tensioning systems, see
wound. There are two dominant strand sizes used in Chapter 25, “Defining Tendons”.
building construction:
• 0.5 inch diameter (12.7 mm)
• 0.6 inch diameter (15.2 mm)
RAM Concept 27
Chapter 9
28 RAM Concept
Chapter 10
10 Specifying Loadings
A loading is a set of point, line and area loads applied as a Live (Storage) Loading
group.
Live (Roof) Loading
You define loading properties in the loadings window. You
draw the actual loads on the loading plans. Different sets of live loads. See “About loading types” on
page 30 for further description.
Loadings can be added (e.g. seismic, snow, soil and wind).
Service Wind North Loading The set of wind loads in
Loadings can be deleted (other than those of a special type, the north-south direction (for mat defaults only).
as described in “About loading types” below).
Service Wind East Loading The set of wind loads in
RAM Concept can perform pattern (or skip) loading and the east-west direction (for mat defaults only).
you define the factors that control this process in the
loading window. Ultimate Seismic North Loading The set of seismic
loads in the north-south direction (for mat defaults only).
Ultimate Seismic East Loading The set of seismic

loads in the east-west direction (for mat defaults only).
10.1 About default loadings
RAM Concept provides default loadings for self-weight,

post-tensioning and gravity loads. For mat files, Concept 10.2 Viewing the loadings
provides additional default loadings for wind and seismic.
Self-Dead Loading This is the self-weight of the The Loading window lists the different loadings and their
concrete. All other dead loading is superimposed. type and pattern factors.
Balance Loading Post-tensioning tendons and anchors To view the Loadings:

apply internal loads to the concrete structure. We call this 1 Choose Criteria > Loadings.
set of loads the Balance Loading because you normally
2 If there are many loadings, scroll down to view them all.
design the post-tensioning to balance or offset the other
loadings applied to the slab.
Hyperstatic Loading The hyperstatic loading is a

theoretical loading that considers the restraining effect of
the supports on the structure as it tries to deform due to the
application of post-tensioning. Many people use the term
“secondary” in place of “hyperstatic”. The loading is not
necessarily secondary in nature. Concept calculates the
effects of the hyperstatic loading for all objects (elements,
springs, supports, design sections, design strip segments
and punching checks) as described in “Post-tensioning
loadings” on page 312.
Figure 10-1 Loadings Window
Temporary Construction (At Stressing) Loading
This set of superimposed loads applies before stressing of
post-tensioning tendons. This loading is rarely used, and
you need not consider it for RC structures. 10.3 Loading properties
Other Dead Loading This set of superimposed dead
loads applies to PT structures after stressing of post- Loadings have the following properties:
tensioning tendons. It is simply the superimposed dead
Loading Name The label used to identify the loading.
loads for RC structures.
Loading Type See “About loading types” on page 30 for
Live (Reducible) Loading
more information.
Live (Unreducible) Loading
Analysis The type of analysis, which can be Normal,
Hyperstatic or Lateral SE.
RAM Concept 29
Chapter 10
A Hyperstatic analysis is used for only the Hyperstatic Live (Reducible) Loadings of this type contain typical
Loading described in “About default loadings” on page 29. floor live loads that are reducible. See Chapter 48, “Live
Load Reduction Notes” for detailed information regarding
For information on Lateral SE, see “Self-equilibrium how each live load reduction code handles loadings of this
analysis” on page 313 of Chapter 46, “Analysis Notes”. type.
On-Pattern Factor The factor that applies to loads that Live (Unreducible) Loadings of this type contain typical
are located within the loading pattern when performing floor live loads that are not reducible (typically assembly
pattern-loading calculations. See “About load pattern” on loadings - see “About snow, parking and assembly loads”
page 32 for more information. on page 31).
Off-Pattern Factor The factor that applies to loads that Live (Storage) Loadings of this type contain typical floor
are not located within the loading pattern when performing live loads that are reducible using special storage loading
pattern-loading calculations. reduction rules. For live load reduction to most codes, it is
Note: Concept ignores the pattern factors if both factors appropriate to use this loading type for parking loads (see
are the same value. Setting both factors to 2.0 is identical to “About snow, parking and assembly loads” on page 31).
setting both factors to 1.0 Live (Roof) Loadings of this type contain typical roof live
loads - except snow - that are reducible. RAM Concept
never reduces these loads (the RAM Structural System may
reduce these loads).
10.4 About loading types
Other Loadings of this type contain loads of an
unspecified nature. RAM Concept never considers these
Every loading in RAM Concept has a loading type.
loadings except in manually created or edited load
Concept uses loading type to generate the appropriate load
combinations (or load combinations created in previous
combinations from the defined set of loadings, and to apply
files). All loading from FLOOR versions 2.3 and before, and
appropriate live load reductions.
RAM Concept versions 1.3 and before (except self-dead,
See “Rebuilding load combinations” on page 35 for balance and hyperstatic) are given this type; it is often
information on how Concept generates load combinations. useful to change the loading types of these loadings from
earlier program versions.
Service Wind Loadings of these types contain wind loads

at service force levels. Service Wind Loading N is assumed
10.5 Available loading types
to correspond to Ultimate Wind Loading N (if it exists).
The available loading types are: Ultimate Wind Loadings of these types contain wind
loads at ultimate force levels. Ultimate Wind Loading N is
Self-Weight The structure’s concrete self-weight loads assumed to correspond to Service Wind Loading N (if it
are always generated with this loading type. There is exists).
always one and only one loading of this type.
Service Seismic Loadings of these types contain seismic
Balance As described in “About default loadings” on loads at service force levels. Service Seismic Loading N is
page 29. There is always one and only one loading of this assumed to correspond to Ultimate Seismic Loading N (if it
type. exists).
Hyperstatic As described in “About default loadings” on Ultimate Seismic Loadings of these types contain
page 29. There is always one and only one loading of this seismic loads at ultimate force levels. Ultimate Seismic
type. Loading N is assumed to correspond to Service Seismic
Loading N (if it exists).
Stressing Dead Loadings of this type contain
superimposed loads applied before stressing of post- Most of these loading types are also available in a
tensioning tendons. “transfer” variation. See “About Transfer Loading Types”
on page 31 for more information.
This loading type is rarely used and is generally not
considered for other loading conditions. You need not Note: All loading types except self-weight, balance and
consider it for RC structures. hyperstatic may be used for more than one loading.
Dead Loadings of this type contain permanent dead loads

other than those from the self-weight type.
30 RAM Concept
Chapter 10
10.5.1 About snow, parking and assembly 10.6 Changing Loading Types
loads
Snow, parking and assembly loadings deserve special The type of any loading (except Self-Dead, Balance and
consideration Hyperstatic) may be changed in the Loadings window.
Snow loads Snow loads should generally be drawn on a To change a loading type:
Live (Unreducible) Loading layer. 1 Choose Criteria > Loadings.
Parking and assembly loads It is recommended that, 2 Click the loading type of the loading name.
in order to get the appropriate factors, you draw parking
garage loads on a Live (Storage) layer and assembly loads A drop down menu appears.
on a Live (Unreducible) layer. 3 Select the new loading type.
Refer to the live load reduction section listed below for
detailed information regarding how a specific code handles
loadings of this type:
10.7 Changing Analysis
• “ACI318-99 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors” on
page 355
The analysis of any loading (except Self-Dead, Balance
• “ACI318-02 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors” on and Hyperstatic) may be changed in the Loadings window.
page 371
To change an analysis:
• “AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors” on
page 409 1 Choose Criteria > Loadings.
• “BS 8110 / BS 6399-1 live load factors” on page 424 2 Click the analysis of the loading name.
A drop down menu appears.

10.5.2 About Transfer Loading Types 3 Select the new analysis.
Almost all of the loading types previously discussed are

available with a “transfer” variation. The transfer variations
represent loads transferred from the structure above onto 10.8 Adding and deleting loadings
the level under consideration (via columns or walls). A few
loading types are not available with a transfer variation, or
have a somewhat different meaning with a transfer At times, you may wish to add loadings such as seismic or
variation. These are: snow. Conversely, you may choose to delete loadings such
as Temporary Construction (At Stressing) Loading.
Self-Weight There is no transfer variation of this loading
type. To add a loading:
1 Choose Criteria > Loadings.
Balance The transfer variation of this loading type is for
loads generated by the tendons in the structure above the 2 Click Add Loading.
level under consideration. Unlike the non-transfer balance 3 Enter a name for the new Loading in the Add Loading
type: multiple loadings of this type may exist; the loadings dialog box and click OK.
do not contain loads generated from the tendons; and the
loadings of this type are user-editable. Loadings of this The new loading appears in a row at the bottom of the
type are considered in the calculation of hyperstatic effects. table.
Hyperstatic There is no transfer variation of this loading 4 Enter the Loading Type and Analysis for the new loading.
type. 5 Enter the On-Pattern Factor and Off-Pattern Factor for
the new loading.
Stressing Dead There is no transfer variation of this
loading type. To delete a loading:
1 Choose Criteria > Loadings.
2 Click Delete Loading.
A dialog box appears with a list of the current loadings.

3 Choose the loading to delete and click OK.
RAM Concept 31
Chapter 10
10.9 About load pattern
In structural engineering, pattern loading refers to a load

arrangement that ignores or reduces loads on selected
spans for the purpose of maximizing moments, shears or
reactions. In 2D analysis, it is not difficult to create an
algorithm that determines the important patterns, but this is
extremely difficult for a 3D program, especially for
irregular column layouts and panels. To handle pattern
loading, RAM Concept uses the concept of load patterns.
Note: Some refer to pattern loading as skip loading.

Figure 10-3 Load Pattern for maximum negative moment (about Y-Y) at
first interior column.
10.9.1 How load patterns work
A load pattern creates a (invisible) pattern loading that For the figures above, if the live load is 100 psf, the on-
contains only filtered loads for each standard loading. The pattern factor is 0.8 and the off-pattern factor is 0.1 then
On-Pattern and Off-Pattern factors control the filtering. two pattern loadings are created with a load of 80 psf on the
hatched areas and a load of 10 psf on the remainder of the
The inclusion and exclusion of loads within the pattern area
slab.
defines the pattern loading. Concept multiplies loads inside
the pattern area by the on-pattern factor and multiplies Concept uses the load patterns for a loading - along with
loads outside the pattern area by the off-pattern factor. The the full loading - to determine the design force envelopes
actual pattern area is dependent upon the finite element for design strip segments, design sections and punching
mesh. See Chapter 20, “Creating Pattern Loading”, for checks.
further explanation.
On-Pattern areas (shaded) for 6-panel slab: 10.9.2 When to use load pattern
Whether you use pattern loading is a matter of which code
you are using and your engineering judgment. Some codes
allow you to ignore pattern loading for certain types of
structures and magnitudes of live loading. Common sense
should lead you to logical load patterns that produce very
close to the maximum moments, shears and reactions.
In most circumstances, you only pattern the live loading.

There could be circumstances where you pattern other
loadings.
For patterned loads, the on-pattern factor often has a value

Figure 10-2 Load Pattern for maximum positive moment (about Y-Y) in of 0.75 and the off-pattern factor often has a value of zero.
end span
For non-patterned loads, both factors should be 1.0. In
special circumstances, the on-pattern factor can exceed a
value of 1.0.
When in doubt, all on-pattern and off-pattern factors should

be 1.0. This results in no pattern loading.
See Chapter 20, “Creating Pattern Loading”, for further

discussion.
10.9.3 How load pattern can approximate

moving loads
You can approximate moving loads by using load patterns.
32 RAM Concept
Chapter 10
To approximate moving loads: 4 Draw the load once in each pattern.

1 Specify an on-pattern factor of 10 and an off-pattern
factor of zero.
Note: Concept still analyses a load combination with all
the loads present that is included in the envelope. This is the
2 Specify load factors (in the load combinations window) reason for scaling the on-pattern, off-pattern and load
for the “moving” loading of one-tenth their actual values. factors - it diminishes the effect of the “all the loads” load
3 Define the movement using the load patterns. combination.
RAM Concept 33
Chapter 10
34 RAM Concept
Chapter 11
11 Specifying Load Combinations
A load combination is a factored linear combination of

loadings. Strictly speaking, we should call it “loading
combination”, but we have adopted the commonly used
terminology.
11.1 About default load combinations
Codes generally specify which loadings you need to

consider in the design of a structure and how you should
combine these loadings.
RAM Concept’s default load combinations depend on how

you created the file. When you use a template or an existing
file then the default load combinations are those of the
source.
When you create a file using the New command the default
load combinations depend on the code selected. These load
combinations are usually appropriate for the selected code,
but there may be times when you need to modify the load
factors and add loadings.
The default load combinations for each code are described Figure 11-1 Load Combination Window
in detail in the relevant chapter:
• Chapter 50, “ACI 318-99 Design”
• Chapter 51, “ACI 318-02 Design” 11.3 Rebuilding load combinations
• Chapter 52, “ACI 318-05 Design”
At times, you may wish to rebuild an existing load
• Chapter 53, “AS 3600-2001 Design”
combination that includes a new or revised loading. For
• Chapter 54, “BS 8110: 1997 Design” example, if a loading’s type changes, it affects the load
• Chapter 55, “IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design”. factors and live load reduction process. You can account for
these changes by using the rebuild command.
RAM Concept will not automatically update load factors

when a loading's loading type changes. RAM Concept only
11.2 Viewing the load combinations sets the load factors when rebuilding load combinations.
To rebuild load combinations:

The Load Combinations window lists the different load
combinations and their design criteria and load factors. 1 Choose Criteria > Rebuild Load Combos
To view the Load Combinations: Another dialog box appears that requires you to specify if
the load combinations are for an elevated slab or mat
1 Choose Criteria > Load Combinations.
foundation.
2 If there are many load combinations, scroll down to view
2 Select elevated slab or mat foundation
them all.
3 Select Rebuild
RAM Concept 35
Chapter 11
11.4 Adding and deleting load Analysis Type The choices are:
combinations • Linear: this is the standard type.
• Zero-Tension: these load combinations do NOT have
At times, you may wish to add load combinations such as alternate load factors and never consider pattern loading.
seismic plus dead or snow plus dead. Conversely, you
might choose to delete load combinations such as Active Rule Sets These control which rule sets are used
Temporary Construction (At Stressing) LC. for design calculations. Up to four active rule sets can be
associated with each load combination. See Chapter 12,
To add a load combination: “Selecting Design Rules” for further explanation.
1 Choose Criteria > Load Combinations. Load Factor The factor applied to a particular loading in
2 Click Add Load Combination. the load combination.
3 In the dialog box that appears, enter a name for the new Alternate Envelope Factor You should only use these
load combination and click OK. if you fully understand the principle involved. Do not set
these factors to zero without understanding their use. If you
Another dialog box appears that requires you to specify the
are unsure then set them to equal the corresponding load
plans that you want RAM Concept to create (Slab Stress,
factors. See “About alternate envelope factors” on page 37.
Slab Deflection and Slab Force). These plans appear in the
new load combination’s folder.
4 Choose the plans that you want created and click OK.
The new load combination appears at the bottom of the

window. 11.6 About group load combinations
5 Select the active rule sets.
6 Enter the load factors and the alternative load factors for A group load combination has load factors for every non-
each loading in the load combination. lateral loading and for one single lateral loading type.
Effectively, a group load combination's results are the

To delete a loading:
envelope of all the results from N invisible single load
1 Choose Criteria > Load Combinations. combinations, where N is the number of loadings for the
2 Click Delete Load Combination. given lateral loading type.
A dialog box appears with a list of the current load A linear group load combination has a standard and
combinations. alternate load factor for every non-lateral loading, and a
standard and alternate load factor for the selected lateral
3 Choose the load combination to delete and click OK.
loading type. It never has zero tension iterations.
A zero-tension group load combination has a single load

factor for every non-lateral loading, and a single load factor
11.5 Load combination properties for the selected lateral loading type. It has zero-tension
iterations as necessary for invisible (internal) component
load combo, and will be the envelope of all of the
Load Combination Name The label used to identify the
component load combos combined. It never considers
load combination.
pattern loading.
Combo Type The choices are:
Figure 11-2 is intended to explain the ramifications of load
• Single: this is the standard type. combination type selection.
• Lateral Group: this is used for a floor that is part of the
lateral force resisting system [especially mat foundations
(rafts)].
Note: The primary purpose of Load Combination types is

to reduce the number of lateral load combinations. A
secondary purpose is to provide easy enveloping for results
such as soil bearing pressure.
36 RAM Concept
Chapter 11
combination, RAM Concept provides a much simpler

solution - Alternate Envelope Factors (AEF).
Load Combination TYPE Point Load
Area Load
Single Lateral Group

Figure 11-3 This beam supports dead loads (not shown) and live loads
(shown). The live loading reduces the positive span moment. By using an
AEF less than the corresponding load factor, you create a load combina-
tion with a reduced live loading. Note that the AEF affects the entire live
loading, not just the live load on the cantilever.
- All loadings are listed Conceptually, Concept considers alternate envelope factors
- Each loading has load factors by analyzing the load combination 2L times (where L is the
- Linear Load Combinations have number of loadings) - once for every permutation of load
factors and alternate envelope factors for all of the
an Alternate Envelope Factor
loadings. Concept then envelopes the design strip forces,
- Zero-Tension Load Combinations design section forces and punching shear reactions for all
do NOT have Alternate Envelope of the load combination analyses. Concept uses these force
Factors envelopes later for design purposes. You can also plot the
force envelopes or view them in tables.
Concept fully considers any pattern loading effects while

- All non-lateral loadings are listed considering the load factors.
- One, and only one, key loading type
can be used (per load combination). Note that the general analysis forces that are not used as
design forces by Concept - such as standard slab bending
- All N loadings within the Key Loading
moments and deflections - are only stored for the load
Type are used to generate N load combination considering the standard load factors.
combinations.
As stated above, you should only use alternate envelope
Figure 11-2 Ramifications of Load Combination Type factors if you fully understand the principle involved. Do
not set them to zero without understanding their use. If you
Refer to “Summary of load combination types” on page 38 are unsure then set them to equal the corresponding load
for more information. factors.
11.7.1 Example of Alternate Load Factors

11.7 About alternate envelope factors Figure 11-4 shows the suggested way to use the factors for
a strength design of the ACI318-05 Factored LC.
There can be situations where the application of a loading
has an unconservative effect on the results.
For example
• a retaining wall loading that applies compression to a
floor.
• a cantilever live loading that reduces the internal span
moment.
In such circumstances, it is desirable to analyze

the structure both with and without the full loading. While
Figure 11-4 Factored LC load factors and alternate envelope factors.
you could do this by creating an additional load
RAM Concept 37
Chapter 11
11.8 Summary of load combination types Example 11-1 ACI 318-05 Elevated floor file with lateral
loadings added
The effects of using different load combination types and To simplify the example, four loadings have been deleted
analysis types are summarized in Table 11-1. from the standard file.
Linear Zero-tension
Single • Standard and • Standard load factor

Alternate load factors for every loading
for every loading • Zero-tension itera-
• No zero-tension tions as necessary
iterations
• Ignores pattern
• Considers pattern loading Figure 11-5 Loading table for ACI 318-05 Elevated Floor - three wind
loading loadings have been added (and one stressing dead and three live loadings
have been deleted)
Group • Standard and • Standard load factor
Alternate load factors for every non-lateral After adding and deleting some loadings, the load
for every non-lateral loading combinations have been rebuilt. See “Rebuilding load
loading • Standard load factor combinations” on page 35.
• Standard and for the selected lateral
The Rebuild operation adds the load combination
Alternate load factors loading type
“Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W”, as shown
for the selected lateral
• Zero-tension itera- in Figure 11-6.
loading type tions as necessary
• No zero-tension • Ignores pattern
iterations loading
• Considers pattern
• No results for point
loading
springs, line springs,
• No results for point point supports, line
springs, line springs, supports, walls.
point supports, line • No “Standard”
supports, walls. results for any
• No “Standard” quantity
results for any • See Figure 11-2 for
Figure 11-6 Rebuilt load combination: Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+
quantity 0.5Lr + 1.6W
more information.
• See Figure 11-2 for
Concept now expands this load combination and calculates
more information.
the following load combinations:
Table 11-1 Load Combination Summary 1 1.2 Self-dead + 1.0 Hyperstatic + 1.2 Other dead + 0.5 Live
(reducible) + 1.6 East Wind
2 1.2 Self-dead + 1.0 Hyperstatic + 1.2 Other dead + 0.5 Live
(reducible) - 1.6 East Wind
(reducible) + 1.6 North Wind
(reducible) - 1.6 North Wind
(reducible) + 1.6 Trade Wind
(reducible) - 1.6 Trade Wind
38 RAM Concept
Chapter 12
12 Selecting Design Rules
You design concrete floors manually by calculating the 6 A design summary envelopes the reinforcement require-
resultants (moments, shears and axial forces) of a load ments and section status for all rule set design section
combination and applying the appropriate code rules and envelopes.
formula. You select code rules based upon the type of
member (reinforced slab, post-tensioned beam, etc.) and Example:
the type of load combinations. For example, codes intend
The following example describes how RAM Concept
some load combinations are for strength design and others
selects the ACI 318-02 design rules for a post-tensioned
for serviceability design.
beam with live and wind loadings.
RAM Concept uses a similar method. It sorts code rules
into sets of rules and applies them to the resultant
envelopes of load combinations. Thus, a rule set design is
one or more code rules applied to the resultant envelope of
one or more load combinations.
For example, the set of code formula for bending and shear
strength is the strength rule set. Concept applies this rule
set to the envelope of all “factored” (or ultimate) load
combinations. The strength rule set does not apply to
service load combinations.
You design most floors or members for more than one rule
set. For example, a post-tensioned floor is usually checked
for initial service stresses, service stresses and strength, all
with different load combinations.
12.1 Using rule set designs
RAM Concept uses the concept of a design strip to link

finite element analysis with concrete code rules (see
Chapter 21, “Defining Design Strips”). Each design strip’s
Figure 12-1 Example of load combinations and rule sets
properties include design system (beam / one-way slab /
two-way slab) and the “considered as post-tensioned”
option. Design strips contain design cross sections. RAM Concept’s process is as follows:
You assign each load combination active rule set designs in • The two load combinations generate envelopes for
the load combinations window. resultants.
• The five active rule set designs (service design, code
How RAM Concept utilizes rule set designs: minimum design, user minimum design, strength design
1 Load combinations generate envelopes for resultants and ductility design) each create envelopes from the load
(moments, shears, axial forces and torsions). combinations.
2 All load combination envelopes with the same rule set • Each rule set design envelope creates a rule set design
design are in turn enveloped. This is a rule set design section envelope.
envelope.
• The design strip properties of “Structural system: beam”
3 For each rule set design envelope, design strips generate and “consider as post-tensioned” determines the following
rule set design force envelopes. rules from ACI 318-02 are applicable:
4 Each design strip determines which code rules are appro- • Strength Design: rules 18.7.2 (flexural strength)
priate for each rule set design. Design strip properties and 11.4 and 11.5 (shear strength) are used with the
impact which particular rules are used. beam clauses.
5 Design and checking rules are applied to the rule set • Minimum Design: rule 18.9.2.
design section envelopes.
• Service Design: rules 18.3.3 and 18.4.2 (b).
RAM Concept 39
Chapter 12
• These rules are applied to the rule set design section Ductility Design
envelopes.
Rules intended to produce ductile behavior.
• The reinforcement requirements and section status for
all rule set design section envelopes are in turn enveloped Soil Bearing
for a design summary.
This is used in mat foundation (raft) files to facilitate the
enveloping of soil bearing pressure. It does not use any
active rules.
12.2 Rule set design properties
The following is a list of rule set design properties: 12.4 Adding and deleting rule set designs
Name This relates to the rule set design. It most cases it is
the same as the active rules, but there can be exceptions Adding a duplicate rule set design allows you to separate
(see adding rule set designs - below). the results for different load combinations with the same
active rules. For example, if a strength design is required
Active Rules This describes the set of rules applied by for three different load combinations (1. Dead and Live; 2.
this rule set. Dead, Reduced Live and Snow; 3. Seismic) then you could
keep the results separate by creating two new rule set
designs with names such as “Snow” and “Seismic” which
both use the code strength rules. This way you can view the
12.3 Types of active rules strength reinforcement requirements separately.
You can delete non-applicable rule set designs to simplify

The available ACI 318-02 active rules are: the file. For example, in ACI 318-02, initial service design,
and sustained service design are not required for floors
Code Minimum Design
without post-tensioning. Another example is DL + 0.25LL
Rules for minimum reinforcement (shrinkage, detailing, Design is not required if the UBC is not used.
etc.) based upon geometry rather than stress or moment
level. Does not include shear reinforcement. To add a rule set design:
1 Choose Criteria > Design Rules.
User Minimum Design
2 Click Add Rule Set Design.
Reinforcement based on user defined reinforcement ratio. 3 Type a name for the new Rule Set Design in the Add Rule
See the design strip property description on page 84 of Set Design dialog box and click OK.
Section 21.5.
A dialog box appears that requires you to specify the plans
Initial Service Design that you want created (Top and Bottom Reinforcement,
Shear Reinforcement and Punching).
Checks of PT floor stresses just after application of
prestress (when dead load is minimal). 4 Choose the plans that you want created and click OK.
Service Design The new rule set design appears at the bottom of the
window.
Checks of PT floor stresses due to service loads.
5 Select the active rules.
Rules for reinforcement bar based upon bar stress levels.
To delete a rule set:
Sustained Service Design 1 Choose Criteria > Design Rules.
Checks of PT floor compression stresses due to sustained 2 Click Delete Rule Set Design.
loads.
A dialog box appears with a list of the current rule set
Strength Design designs.
3 Choose the rule set design to delete and click OK.
Rules to ensure section has sufficient strength in bending
and shear for factored (or ultimate) moments, and
minimum shear reinforcement.
40 RAM Concept
Chapter 13
13 Using a CAD Drawing
You can define the model’s geometry quickly if there is a 3 Select the appropriate units and click OK.
CAD file (with .dwg or .dxf filename extension) available
to use as a background. You trace the CAD drawing with Note: It is possible to import a CAD drawing with one set
object tools to facilitate the finite element mesh generation. of units into a model with another set of units.
You can also use the CAD drawing to locate other objects
such as loads. Snap tools make tracing the imported CAD
drawing easier. 13.1.2 Checking the imported information
Note: RAM Concept itself does not recognize the meaning When you import the drawing file, it will be visible on the
of actual drawing lines. Standard Plan of the Drawing Import Layer. You should
verify that the plan scale is correct.
It is not necessary, however, to use a CAD file. If the floor
is straightforward, or there is no drawing available, you To check that the imported drawing is at the correct scale:
should skip this chapter. For strip-like models that do not 1 Choose Layers > Drawing Import > Standard Plan.
warrant the use of a CAD file, it may be better to use Strip
2 Click Zoom Extent ( ) to ensure that you are viewing
Wizard.
the entire CAD plan.
3 Select the Dimension tool ( ) and draw a dimension
line between two snapable points that are a known distance
13.1 Importing, verifying and viewing a apart. The distance between the two points will appear as a
drawing dimension.
If this dimension is not as expected then the imported file

To use a background drawing you import the drawing and may be in the wrong scale. Consider importing the drawing
then verify that it is at the correct scale. with different units to fix this problem.
13.1.1 Importing a CAD file 13.1.3 Making the drawing visible on other
plans
You can import a drawing at any time. An imported
drawing overwrites any previously imported drawing. You can make the imported drawing visible on any plan
RAM Concept can work with either a .dwg or a .dxf file. It through the Visible Objects dialog box. Usually you want
is typically best to use a .dwg file. to make it visible on the Mesh Input Standard Plan (for
defining the floor geometry), and perhaps on some loading
To import a CAD file: plans (for locations of line and point loads). You may
1 Choose File > Import Drawing. choose to turn off some CAD layers if they clutter the
drawing. If you happened to bring in an architectural
2 Select the CAD drawing file you want to import.
drawing, it is probably a good idea to turn off the furniture.
The File Units dialog box will appear with a list of units. See “Controlling views” on page 12 for more information
The units relate to the CAD file, not the Concept file. on making objects visible or hidden.
RAM Concept 41
Chapter 13
42 RAM Concept
Chapter 14
14 Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System
Note: In many places in this chapter the RAM Structural

System is referred to as “RSS”. Import Type
Story
RAM Concept can import concrete structure information Elevated Mat Foundation
and loads from the RAM Structural System (Version 9.01
or higher) into a RAM Concept file. 1st A C
RAM Concept can also export support member forces back 2nd B D
to RSS.
Table 14-1 Relationship between the selected story, the import slab type,
and the slab area imported.
14.1 What can be imported from the RAM

Structural System 14.2.1 Definition of the “import perimeter”
The selected slab areas define the import perimeter. Only
RAM Concept allows the selective import of concrete RAM Structural System support members within the
members (slabs, beams, openings, columns and walls), import perimeter will be imported. For example, in Figure
applied loads and member loads from one story of a RAM
14-1, if the 1st story elevated slab is imported with the
Structural System database. Member loads can be from
“columns above” setting, the two furthermost right
gravity and / or lateral analyses.
columns between the 1st story and 2nd story will not be
imported as they are not within the slab perimeter of the 1st
story elevated slab.
14.2 Controlling which concrete members
The following structural members can be imported:
are imported
1 Slabs
A story defined in the RAM Structural System can have All slabs of the selected slab type.
two types of floors: elevated or mat foundation. The floor 2 Beams
type designation determines which concrete members in
the story are imported. All concrete beams from the selected story.
Figure 14-1 and Table 14-1 show the relationship between 3 Openings and Penetrations
the selected story, the import slab type and the slab area
All openings and penetrations within the import perimeter.
imported. Note that mats are below the designated story.
For example, the 2nd story mat is the mat that supports the 4 Columns
second story elevated floor.
Any column (below and / or above) whose center point lies
inside the import perimeter.
5 Walls
Any wall (below and / or above) whose center line is

contained by or crosses any part of the import perimeter.
6 Grids
All orthogonal and radial grids.
Note: All structural members are imported into RAM

Concept’s Mesh Import layer. Grids are imported into the
Drawing Import layer.
Figure 14-1 The slab areas shown above (A,B,C,D) will be imported based
upon the selections shown below.
RAM Concept 43
Chapter 14
14.3 About load importation Table 14-3 shows how RSS load cases are mapped to
Concept loading layers.
RAM Concept imports applied loads and analyzed member

RSS Load Case RAM Concept Loading Layer
forces from the selected member group.
Dead Dead Load
Certain components of member loads are ignored when
importing. The components that are ignored depend on the Live Ignored (imported as 3 individual live
slab type, whether the member is supported, and whether loadings)
the member forces are from gravity and lateral loads.
Live Reducible Live Reducible
The following table summarizes the force components that Live Unreducible Live Unreducible
are imported onto a mat foundation and an elevated slab.
Live Storage Live Storage
Forces Imported
Live Roof Live Load Roof
Slab Type Loading Member Member Construction Dead Construction Dead Load
Type Supported Unsupported
Construction Live Ignored
Mat Transfer not applicable Fz, Mx, My
Gravity Mass Dead Ignored
Mat Transfer not applicable Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, Table 14-3 Mapping of RSS load cases
Lateral My
Elevated Transfer none Fz 2 Transfer gravity loads

Gravity
Concept imports transferred gravity loads from RSS
Elevated Transfer Fz, Mx, My Fz, Mx, My members above the import slabs. The loads include
Lateral member self-weight with the transferred gravity loads. The
loads are imported as point loads into separate Concept
Table 14-2 Relationship between the slab type, member loading type, loading layers.
member support, and imported force components for a slab.
A new Concept transfer gravity loading layer is created for
each RSS Load Case, as in Table 14-3, but with the string
For the purposes of Table 14-2, Concept considers any “(transfer)” appended to the name. For example, transfer
column, brace or wall to be supported if it rests upon a loads from the RSS Dead load case are imported into the
column or wall. Concept “Dead Load (transfer)” loading layer. The
Wall forces are resolved into a point load at each end of the Concept “(transfer)” loading layers are not created if the
wall. Walls above a slab may have different “supported” Transfer Gravity Loads are not imported.
designations at each end (as one end may rest on a column 3 Lateral Member Loads
or wall and the other may rest on a beam); in that case the
import of each end force considers its end support Lateral member forces (such as wind and seismic) from
condition separately. members above and below the imported slab are imported
as point loads. The member loads are imported into a new
The following loads can be imported: loading layer for each analyzed load case in RSS. Concept
1 Direct gravity loads creates the name for the new loading layer from the user's
label and the RSS load type.
Point, line and area gravity loads applied directly to the
imported slabs. For example, the name could be
“mySeismic(EQ_UBC97_X_+E_F)”.
Note: Mat foundation loads imported from the RAM Struc-

tural System will always be reduced during the import. For
this reason you should always choose the live load reduction
code of “None” in these files.
44 RAM Concept
Chapter 14
14.4 Importing a database
You can import from the RAM Structural System at any

time. An import overwrites some or all previously imported
data, and may overwrite information you have directly
input to RAM Concept. Refer to “Reimporting a database”
for more information.
Note: Concept may not be able to import data correctly if

the RSS file does not pass the “Data Check” operation in
the RAM Modeler module. It is strongly recommended that
your RSS file have no errors before attempting to import it
into Concept.
To import from the RAM Structural System:

1 Choose File > Import RAM Structural System.
If there is no open RAM Concept file the “Open RAM

Structural System Database” dialog box will appear.
Browse and select a RSS database (.rss) file and click OK.
When a valid RSS database file is selected, the RAM

Structural System dialog box in Figure 14-2 appears.
The RSS filename selected appears after “File:” at the top

of the window.
You may click on the “Browse” button at the top of the

window to select a different file with the file browser.
Note: If you select a file with a version prior to 9.0, an

error will be displayed and you will be returned to the file
browser. Clicking the Cancel button cancels the import
operation. Figure 14-2 RSS import dialog box
Note: If you are running RSS version 9, select RSS

database files with the .ram extension. The dialog box makes “Columns Below Slab”, “Walls
Below Slab”, “Beams” and “Openings and Penetrations”
2 Select the story and slab type. unavailable for a Mat Foundation.
3 Select the structural members from the check boxes 4 Select the loadings from the check boxes under
under “Structure”. “Loading”.
The dialog box makes “Direct Gravity Loads” unavailable

for a Mat Foundation.
5 Click OK to import the file, or Cancel to cancel the
import operation.
After an RSS file is imported, a RAM Import Status dialog

box, similar to that shown in Figure 14-3, appears with a
summary and any warnings.
RAM Concept 45
Chapter 14
the loadings that Concept offers to remove. If you want to

export the reactions from these pre-existing loads to RSS,
you need to copy the loads from the original loadings to the
corresponding RSS loadings that are being imported (after
which you should manually delete the non-RSS loadings).
Note: If you have used the Export Geometry to RAM Struc-

tural System feature (section 34.2) prior to importing, then
you always see this warning. The recommended workflow is
to either draw the loads in RSS or draw the loads in Concept
after importing from RSS; with either of these workflows,
you can safely allow the loadings proposed for removal to
be deleted.
Figure 14-3 Example of an import summary with warnings
The RSS geometry definitions and loads are now imported

into RAM Concept.
You can now generate the finite element mesh. See Chapter
17, “Generating the Mesh”.
Figure 14-4 Choices for dealing with new loadings
Note: If you are reimporting there could be additional
dialog boxes that appear with more warnings.
RAM Concept will also prompt you to determine if you
Note: Importing lateral analysis loads from RSS models require rebuilding of the load combinations and design
that contain a large number of lateral load cases will cause rules, as shown in Figure 14-5.
Concept to create a large number of load combinations
You have three choices:
which will result in sluggish performance.
• Rebuild: load combinations and design rules in the RAM
Concept file are rebuilt
• Don’t Rebuild: the new load cases are added to the RAM
14.5 Reimporting a database
Concept file, but not included in the load combinations.
• Cancel: RAM Concept returns you to the file browser.
If the information in the RAM Structural System database
changes, the RAM Concept model will not be
automatically updated. You can, however, reimport the
changed information.
Changes to structural members and loads made in RAM

Concept can be lost when importing an RSS file, so care
should be taken to avoid losing information.
14.5.1 Resolving loading conflicts

If the Concept file has existing loadings that do not match Figure 14-5 Choices for dealing with new loadings
the RSS loadings to be imported, a dialog box like that in
Figure 14-4 asks if you want to keep or delete the existing Note: When reimporting a particular member type, e.g.
loadings. beams, all entities of that category are removed from the
If you have already specified (drawn) loads in the loadings RAM Concept file before importing. For example, if beams
that Concept has proposed to delete, then you should keep are imported, all beams in the RAM Concept file are
46 RAM Concept
Chapter 14
removed first. Any beams you have added manually in RAM A RSS Import Status dialog box will appear with a
Concept will be lost. If beams are not selected for import, summary and any warnings.
then beams in the RAM Concept file will not be affected
5 Click OK.
when the file is reimported.
Note: If any loading categories are selected, then ALL

loads in reimported loading layers are removed. Any loads
you have added manually on a loading layer being 14.6 Limitations, Defaults and
reimported will be lost.You have the option whether to Assumptions
regenerate load combinations or not.
RAM Concept always asks you to confirm a reimport

operation, because it may lead to loss of information. It 14.6.1 Limitations
warns you if the data to be reimported would be • Not all information stored in a RAM Structural System
significantly different from the previously imported data, database can be transferred into RAM Concept.
or if significant information will be lost. For example,
RAM Concept warns you when reimporting a mat • RAM Concept models RAM Structural System data
foundation after previously importing an elevated slab, or using either the ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02, or BS 8110:
vice versa. 1997 building code. A RAM Structural System database
that uses either BS 6399 or Eurocode will be imported
To reimport from the RAM Structural System: using the BS 8110: 1997 building code; otherwise the
appropriate ACI code is used.
1 Choose File > Import RSS.
• RAM Concept does not model beam fixity.
A file dialog box will open with the name of the last RSS
file you imported into this RAM Concept file. • RAM Concept models a column end as fixed if the RAM
Structural System column is fixed along either its major or
2 Select the RSS file and click OK. minor axis.
The file can be a different RSS file which may have a • RAM Concept only models walls of constant height.
significant (and possibly negative) effect on the RAM RAM Concept will create a wall with the average height
Concept model. of the RAM Structural System wall.
The RAM Structural System Import dialog box will appear • The lateral loads applied to the structure in RAM Frame
with a list of options. The default options will be the story Analysis are not imported.
and slab type from the last import. • Concept ignores holes in walls modeled in RSS version
10.
3 Select the story, slab type, structure and loading and click
OK.
A New Loadings confirmation box may appear that 14.6.2 Defaults

describes loadings in the RSS file that are not in the current
RAM Concept file. Click Replace, Add or Cancel. RAM Concept uses the following defaults for properties
that are not defined in the RAM Structural System.
A confirmation box appears that warns about differences
from previously imported data. Beams
• Surface elevation is 0.0.
Columns
• Compressible is true.
• Roller is false, except above mat foundations.
• Columns above mat foundations are pinned at the top
regardless of the setting in the RAM database.
Walls
Figure 14-6 Examples of warnings for an import operation with different
levels and structure type • Neither the top nor the bottom is fixed.
• Modeled as a Shear Wall.
4 Click Replace or Cancel. • Modeled as compressible.
RAM Concept 47
Chapter 14
• The RAM Structural System “cracked section factor” is

ignored.
14.6.3 Assumptions RSS Load Sub-Type RAM Concept RAM Concept

Case Type Loading Loading
• All loads are applied to the surface of the slab. Force Level
• Wall member forces are applied as two point loads at the (Limit State)
endpoints of the wall that are statically equivalent to the Wind User defined Wind Service *
wall forces and moments. story forces
Wind all others Wind Service
Refer to Table 14-4 and Table 14-5 for mapping of RAM
load cases and types to RAM Concept’s loadings and force Seismic User defined Seismic Ultimate *
levels. story forces
Seismic UBC 94 Seismic Service
Seismic all others Seismic Ultimate
RSS Load Type RAM Concept RAM Concept Dynamic Eigen solu- Ignored
Loading Loading Force tion
Level (Limit State)
Dynamic all others Seismic Ultimate *
Wind Wind Service *
User defined Seismic Ultimate *
Seismic Seismic Ultimate * story forces
Other Seismic Ultimate * Center of Ignored
Virtual Ignored rigidity
Virtual Work Ignored
Table 14-4 RAM Modeler Force Level Assumptions
Table 14-5 RAM Frame Load Cases
Note: * denotes assumed
Note: * denotes assumed
48 RAM Concept
Chapter 15
15 Data Transfer from STAAD
STAAD starting Concept, the dialog box shown in Figure

The STAAD analysis and design program can transfer 15-1 opens.
structure geometry and loading information to RAM
Concept.
15.1 STAAD Interface
In STAAD, you can select slabs elements, wall elements,

column elements and beams for export into RAM Concept.
You can also select STAAD load cases for export and
associate them with Concept loading types.
The STAAD interface allows you to either run Concept

immediately with the exported data or to save the data to a
GCFF file for later import into Concept.
If the STAAD file changes (perhaps loads or column sizes

change), you can update the Concept file by re-exporting
the STAAD information.
Please see the STAAD manuals for more information on

the STAAD interface.
15.2 RAM Concept Interface

Figure 15-1 File options dialog box
15.2.1 Data Transfer Paths

The options at the top of the dialog window are the same as
RAM Concept can import STAAD information in four for creating any new Concept file and are not discussed
ways: further here.
7 Concept is started by STAAD to create a new file. The checkboxes at the bottom of the window allow you to
8 Concept is started by STAAD to update a previously created
import one or more of the following classes of information:
slabs (including beams), walls, columns and loads.
file.
9 The Concept File menu item New From STAAD GCFF file is
chosen to create a new file. 15.2.3 Update file options in RAM Concept
10The Concept File menu item Update from STAAD GCFF file When updating a Concept file with new STAAD
is chosen to update an already opened Concept file. information - either via the Update From STAAD GCFF
file menu item or by STAAD starting Concept, the dialog
box shown in Figure 15-2 opens.
15.2.2 New file options in RAM Concept
When creating a new file from STAAD information - either
via the New from STAAD GCFF file menu item or by
RAM Concept 49
Chapter 15
behave slightly differently due to the operation being an

“update”. For example if “Columns” is selected, all
existing columns will be removed and new columns
defined by the STAAD information. If “Columns” is not
selected, no changes will be made to the columns in the
Concept file.
Figure 15-2 Update file options dialog box
The options in the window are the same as those discussed

in “New file options in RAM Concept” on page 49, but
50 RAM Concept
Chapter 16
16 Defining the Structure
The easiest and recommended way to define the concrete 16.3.1 General column properties
structure is to use RAM Concept’s automatic meshing
facility (otherwise known as the “Mesher”). This approach
requires that you define supports, slabs (of varying
thickness), beams and openings with objects that Mesher
uses to generate the finite element model. You do this on
the Mesh Input Layer’s Standard Plan.
16.1 Using the Mesh Input Layer
There is no set order in which you must define objects.

Some people choose to draw supports first, whereas others
draw the slab outline first. You can edit whatever drawn
objects later.
If you have imported a CAD drawing, make it visible on

the Mesh Input Plan before drawing the structure.
16.2 About columns and walls
RAM Concept allows for single story models whereby you

Figure 16-1 Column properties: general
define columns and walls below and above the slab.
Supports above the slab do not provide vertical support,
only horizontal support and bending resistance. Concrete Mix Type of concrete used (defined in
Materials Specification).
Height Vertical distance from centroid of slab element to

far end of column.
16.3 Column properties
Support Set Defines the column as below or above the
floor.
RAM Concept column properties are separated into two
categories: general and live load reduction. Width Measured along the column’s r-axis. Set to zero for
round columns.
Depth / Diameter Measured along the column’s s-axis.
Angle Plan angle measured counterclockwise from the

global x-axis. It determines the column’s r-axis (and is
usually zero).
Bending Stiffness Factor Used to modify the bending

stiffness without changing the dimensions or height. For
example, you may expect an edge column to crack and
rotate more than an internal column and so you might
consider setting this value to 0.5. You could use the BSF to
increase a column’s stiffness, but this is an unlikely
scenario.
Roller at Far End Results in zero horizontal shear in

column.
RAM Concept 51
Chapter 16
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection (about x- and fixity settings are somewhat different, and there is no
y-axes) between column and slab; otherwise pinned. Bending Stiffness Factor.
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection (about x- and y- The following is a list of RAM Concept wall properties:
axes) at far end; otherwise pinned.
Concrete Mix Type of concrete used (defined in
Compressible Allows for column to elongate in the z- Materials Specification).
direction according to Hooke’s law; otherwise
incompressible. Compressible columns usually produce Height Vertical distance from centroid of slab element to
results that are more accurate. far end of wall.
Support Set Defines the wall as below or above the floor.

16.3.2 Live load reduction column properties Thickness
See “Specifying Live Load Reduction Parameters” on Shear wall “Locks” the wall to the slab horizontally and
page 124. thus restrains it; otherwise, the slab can “slide” over the
wall.
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection between wall

16.4 Drawing columns and slab about the wall’s r-axis; otherwise pinned.
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection about the wall’s

Each column is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two r-axis at far end; otherwise pinned.
columns cannot have the same coordinates unless one is
Compressible Allows for the wall to elongate in the z-
above and one is below.
Note: Ensure you are working on the Mesh Input layer, not incompressible. Compressible walls usually produce
the Element layer. results that are more accurate.
Note: See “Setting default properties” on page 18 for

relevant information.
16.6 Drawing walls
To draw a column:
1 Choose the Column tool ( ).
The wall tool is very similar to the column tool except that
2 Click at the column center. it uses a line rather than a point. A wall can pass through a
column, or intersect another wall.
To copy columns from below to above:
1 Select the columns and choose Edit > Copy. Note: Ensure you are working on the Mesh Input layer, not
the Element layer.
2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new column objects
in the same location as the original column objects. The Note: The Wall tool ( ), Right Wall tool ( ) & Left Wall
pasted columns are the active selection. tool ( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific
3 Change the Support Set property from “below” to toolbar. See “Expanding tool buttons” on page 6.
“above” in the Column Properties dialog box.
To draw a wall:
Note: If you do not change the Support Set designation 1 Choose the Wall tool ( ).
then there are duplicated columns that do not allow the
2 Click at the wall end center points.
model to run properly. If you have copied a large number, it
is tedious to delete the second column at each location (one To copy walls from below to above:
by one).
1 Select the walls and choose Edit > Copy.
2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new wall objects in
the same location as the original wall objects. The pasted
16.5 Wall properties walls are the active selection.
3 Change the Support Set property from “below” to
Wall properties are similar to column properties though “above” in the Wall Properties dialog box.
instead of width, depth and angle there is thickness. The
52 RAM Concept
Chapter 16
16.7 About point and line supports Rotation about s-axis fixed Prevents rotation about the
local s-axis.
The result of defining a point support is a single support at

a finite element node. The result of defining a line support
is one or more line supports that are each located at a finite 16.9 Drawing point supports
element edges. RAM Concept uses the thickness of the
lowest numbered element in determining the support
elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate point Each point support is located with an x- and y-coordinate.
supports or line supports at slab steps. Two point supports cannot have the same coordinates.
All supports that have a horizontal rigidity should be Note: The Point Support tool ( ) and Line Support tool
placed at the mid-depth of the slab or they may cause an ( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific toolbar.
unintended arch action in addition to their horizontal See “Expanding tool buttons” on page 6.
rigidity (mid-depth placement is done by setting the
“Elevation above slab soffit” to be one-half of the slab To draw a point support:
depth). 1 Choose the Point Support tool ( ).
Normally there is no need to use horizontal fixities in point 2 Click at the point support location.
and line supports, as RAM Concept automatically
stabilizes the structure in the x- and y-directions (you can
turn this automatic stabilization off in the Calc Options
dialog box). One situation where you might use a 16.10 Line support properties
horizontal support is a structure braced against sidesway
but modeled without bracing members (perhaps something The following is a list of RAM Concept line support
other than a concrete wall provides the bracing). properties:
Be very careful about specifying anything but “Fixed in z- Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between
direction” for point supports and “Translation in z-direction the line support and the soffit.
fixed” for line supports. For point supports, fixing the point
support in the r- or s-direction could result in arch / Translation along support fixed (OFF for line of
membrane action. For line supports, fixing the slab symmetry) Prevents the slab from moving along the
translation along or across the support could result in arch / support axis.
membrane action.
Translation across support fixed (ON for line of
symmetry) Prevents the slab from moving across the
support axis.
16.8 Point support properties Translation in z-direction fixed (OFF for line of
symmetry) Prevents the slab from deflecting up or down
The following is a list of RAM Concept point support at the support axis.
properties: Rotation about support axis fixed (ON for line of
Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between symmetry) Prevents rotation of the slab about the
the point support and the soffit. support’s longitudinal axis.
Angle (r=x, s=y@0) Allows you to set the local axes. Rotation about perp.-to-support fixed (OFF for
line of sym) Prevents rotation of the slab about the
Fixed in r-direction Prevents movement along the local support’s transverse axis.
r-axis.
Fixed in s-direction Prevents movement along the local

s-axis. 16.11 Drawing line supports
Fixed in z-direction Prevents movement along the
global z-axis. You can use line supports as an axis of symmetry. This is
very useful if a floor is symmetrical and you wish to model
Rotation about r-axis fixed Prevents rotation about the
local r-axis.
RAM Concept 53
Chapter 16
only half of it. Be aware that line supports could prevent R-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the
post-tensioning forces being applied to the floor. local r-axis.
Note: The Point Support tool ( ) and Line Support tool S-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the
( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific toolbar. local s-axis.
See “Expanding tool buttons” on page 6.
Z-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the
To drawing a line support: global z-axis.
1 Choose the Line Support tool ( ). R-Axis Moment Constant Angular spring constant
2 Click at the support end points. about the local r-axis.
S-Axis Moment Constant Angular spring constant

about the local s-axis.
16.12 About springs
The result of defining a point spring is a single spring at a 16.14 Drawing point springs
finite element node. The result of defining a line spring is
one or more line springs that are each located at a finite
Each point spring is located with an x- and y-coordinate.
element edge. RAM Concept uses the thickness of the
Two point springs cannot have the same coordinates.
lowest numbered element in determining the spring
elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate Note: The Point Spring tool ( ), Line Spring tool ( ),
springs at slab steps. Tri-Area Spring tool ( ), and Quad-Area Spring tool
( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific toolbar.
All springs that have a horizontal stiffness should be placed
at the mid-depth of the slab or they may cause an
unintended arch action in addition to their horizontal To draw a point spring:
stiffness (mid-depth placement is done by setting the
“Elevation above slab soffit” to be one-half of the slab 1 Choose the Point Spring tool ( ).
depth). For slabs with varying centroid elevations, it can be 2 Click at the spring location.
difficult to avoid adding a rotational restraint to the slab
when using lateral springs and supports.
Normally there is no need to use horizontal springs, as 16.15 Line spring properties
Concept automatically stabilizes the structure in the x- and
y-directions (you can turn this automatic stabilization off in
the Calc Options dialog box). One situation where you The following is a list of RAM Concept line spring
might use a horizontal spring is a structure braced against properties:
sidesway but modeled without bracing members (perhaps
Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between
soil friction provides the bracing).
the line spring and the soffit.
Be very careful about specifying anything but a z-force
Spring Angle (R=X, S=Y@0) Orientation of the local
constant. R- and s-force constants could result in
axes. The plan shows spring orientation.
membrane action.
R-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the
local r-axis at each end.
16.13 Point spring properties S-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the
local s-axis at each end.
The following is a list of RAM Concept point spring Z-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the
properties: global z-axis at each end.
Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between R-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the
the point spring and the soffit. local r-axis at each end.
Spring Angle (r=x, s=y@0) Orientation of the local

54 RAM Concept
Chapter 16
S-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the S-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the
local s-axis at each end. local s-axis.
Note: If the force constant (or moment constant) is uniform Note: If the force constant (or moment constant) is uniform
you need to enter only one value. Otherwise you need to you need to enter only one value.
enter two values separated by a comma (ends 1 and 2). This
allows linear variation of the force constant (or moment Note: The force constant (or moment constant) can
constant). linearly vary in any direction.
Note: If the force constant (or moment constant) varies you

need to enter three values, separated by commas (corners 1,
2 and 3). This allows linear variation of the force constant
16.16 Drawing line springs (or moment constant) in two directions. See Figure 16-2.
Note: If you use the Quad-Area Spring tool to specify a

The line spring tool is very similar to the point spring tool
varying force constant (or moment constant), Concept
except that it uses a line rather than a point.
calculates the unique value of the fourth corner (three
Note: The Point Spring tool ( ), Line Spring tool ( ), points define a plane).
Tri-Area Spring tool ( ), and Quad-Area Spring tool
To draw a line spring:

1 Choose the Line Spring tool ( ).
2 Click at the line spring end points.
16.17 Area spring properties
The following is a list of RAM Concept area spring

properties:
Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between

the area spring and the soffit.
Figure 16-2 Area spring properties varying from 100 to 200 to 300 units
Spring Angle (R=X, S=Y@0) Orientation of the local at the first three corners. For quad areas, Concept calculates the fourth
corner value.
R-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the

r-axis.
16.18 Drawing area springs
S-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the
s-axis.
You use the Quad-Area Spring tool ( ) to locate the
Z-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the
spring area corners.
global z-axis.
R-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the

Note: The Point Spring tool ( ), Line Spring tool ( ),
and Quad-Area Spring tool ( ) share the same button on
local r-axis.
the Layer Specific toolbar. See “Expanding tool buttons” on
page 6.
To draw an area spring:

1 Choose the Area Spring tool ( ).
2 Click at the vertices of the area spring (or enter the
coordinates in the command line).
RAM Concept 55
Chapter 16
3 Close the polygon by typing “c” in the command line or

clicking at the first vertex.
Note: An Area Spring object can be larger than the

structure it supports.
16.19 About floor areas and members
Objects representing slabs, beams and openings define

floor areas and members. Often these objects overlap.
16.19.1 The priority method

At any floor location, only one thickness (depth) is used,
Figure 16-4 The Element Slab Summary Plan after mesh generation from
and the object with the highest priority defines that Figure 16-3.
thickness.
The thicknesses of overlapping objects do not add to define

the thickness. 16.20 Slab area properties
For example, you would expect the overall thickness of a
drop panel located at a column to take priority over the slab Slab area properties fall into two categories: general and
thickness. By assigning a Priority to each object, the behavior.
automatic mesh generator understands how to generate the
finite elements. The following is an explanation of RAM Concept slab area
properties:
The lowest Priority is 1. This is so that you can keep adding
beams, thickenings and slab areas with higher priorities.
There is no limit to the highest priority (other than your
computer and text overflow).
Note: Overlapping objects for slabs, beams and openings

must have different priorities. Priority numbers need not be
sequential.
Note: Supports do not have priorities.
Figure 16-5 Slab area properties - general

Thickness You define slab thickenings, such as drop caps

Figure 16-3 Slab, beam and opening objects defined in the Mesh Input and drop panels, by specifying an increased thickness.
Standard Plan
Surface Elevation It is customary to set the typical
elevation as 0. Setting the elevation to a very large value
56 RAM Concept
Chapter 16
(such as 100 feet or 30 m) may result in round off errors in • No-torsion 2-way slab The slab behaves like a two-
the analysis. You create surface and soffit steps by using way slab, except that it has only minimal torsional
different surface elevations for different areas. stiffness (Mrs).
Priority Generally, the typical slab thickness has a Priority • Custom All of the stiffnesses (relative to the isotropic
of 1. slab stiffness) can be specified by the user. These values
are called KMr, KMs, KMrs, KFr, KFs and KVrs. In
general, we do not recommend using this option.
Refer to “Orthotropic behavior” on page 306 for further

information on the use of Behavior properties.
16.21 Drawing slab areas
Use the Slab Area tool ( ) to define the slab area by

clicking on each consecutive point (vertex). To close the
polygon, click on the first polygon point or type “c” and
press Return.
To draw a slab area:

1 Choose the Slab Area tool ( ).
2 Click at each slab area vertex consecutively.
Figure 16-6 Slab area properties - behavior

3 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or
type “c” and press Return).
R-Axis defines an orientation for the slab. If the slab is a Note: You can approximate curves by a series of straight
two way slab with identical properties in all directions edges.
(“isotropic”), then the R-Axis is irrelevant, because there is
no inherent orientation of the slab. However, if the slab is
not isotropic, then this axis (defined as the counter-
clockwise angle from 3 o'clock) defines the r-axis which is 16.22 About beams
used along with the other slab area properties to define the
behavior of the slab. The s-axis is always 90 degrees
counter-clockwise from the r-axis. In RAM Concept, you model beams as thickened slabs
with the beam tool. You can assign properties that
Behavior This defines the slab area’s behavior type. It has differentiate beam behavior from slab behavior.
four possible designations:
• Two-way slab The slab is isotropic and behaves in the
same manner in all directions.
16.23 Beam properties
• One-way slab The slab has normal bending stiffness
along the r-axis and about the s-axis (Ms). The slab has
Beam properties fall into two categories: general and
only minimal bending stiffness in the perpendicular
behavior.
direction (Mr). The slab also has reduced torsional
stiffness (Mrs). The in-plane stiffnesses are not affected by
this setting.
RAM Concept 57
Chapter 16
The following is an explanation of RAM Concept beam The beam behavior properties are very similar to the slab
properties: area properties. The beam R-Axis is automatically set to
the beam longitudinal axis.
Behavior This defines the beam’s behavior type. It has

four possible values:
• Standard The beam is isotropic and behaves in the
same manner in all directions.
• No-torsion The beam behaves like a two-way slab,
except that it has only minimal torsional stiffness (Mrs).
• Custom All of the stiffnesses (relative to the isotropic
slab stiffness) can be specified by the user. These values
are called KMr, KMs, KMrs, KFr, KFs and KVrs. In
general, we do not recommend using this option.
16.24 Drawing beams
Figure 16-7 Beam properties - general

You draw a beam by clicking the start and end points of its
Concrete Mix Type of concrete used (defined in centerline using the Beam tool ( ). Each beam has six
Materials Specification). control points. The four additional points are automatically
located so that the beam-ends are perpendicular to the
Thickness is the same as beam depth. sides. You can stretch the corner grip points to define
mitered corners.
elevation as 0. Setting the elevation to a very large value To draw a beam:
(such as 100 feet or 30 m) may result in round off errors in
1 Choose the Beam tool ( ).
the analysis. You create surface and soffit steps by using
different surface elevations for different areas. 2 Click at the each end of the beam centerline.
Width The beam width automatically appears to scale. To define mitered corners on a beam:
Priority Generally, beams have higher priorities than 1 Select the beam and choose the Stretch tool ( ).
slabs. 2 Snap to the beam corner grips and stretch them into
position.
16.25 Slab opening properties
There is only one slab opening property:
Priority Generally, openings have the highest priorities in

the floor.
16.26 Drawing slab openings
The Slab Opening tool ( ) defines an opening in the

slab.
Figure 16-8 Beam properties - behavior
To draw a slab opening:
1 Choose the Slab Opening tool ( ).
58 RAM Concept
Chapter 16
2 Click at each slab-opening vertex consecutively. 16.27 Checking the structure definition
3 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or
type “c” and press Return). After you have fully defined the structure’s geometry, you
Note: You approximate curves with a series of straight should check for obvious errors. RAM Concept flags
edges. illegal modeling when generating the mesh. A list of
possible errors appears in Chapter 17, “Generating the
Mesh”.
Once you have drawn all the support and floor objects on
the Mesh Input Plan, you must generate the actual finite
element mesh. The structure does not exist until you
generate the mesh.
RAM Concept 59
Chapter 16
60 RAM Concept
Chapter 17
17 Generating the Mesh
There are two ways to generate the finite element mesh in The dialog box shown in Figure 17-1 will appear.
RAM Concept:
• Using the automatic meshing facility that uses the mesh
input objects described in Chapter 16, “Defining the
Structure”.
• Using the manual meshing tools.
The first method is certainly easier and faster. It is the

recommended method for nearly all models.
The second method allows more control over mesh

intensity. The mesh size can be more widely varied in
different areas of the floor, but editing is more difficult.
Instructions for the second (manual) method are in Chapter Figure 17-1 Generate mesh dialog box
18, “Manually Drawing the Finite Elements”.
2 Specify the Element Size in the Generate Mesh dialog
box.
3 Click Generate.
17.1 Generating the mesh automatically
The time taken to generate the mesh depends upon the size
of the floor and the specified mesh element size. For most
Finite elements do not exist (and hence there is no
models, the mesh generates in less than 15 seconds.
structure) until the mesh has been generated. You need to
have defined the mesh input objects (using the procedure Note: Every time you generate a mesh, RAM Concept
described in the preceding chapter) before generating the deletes any existing mesh and generates a new one.
mesh.
It is preferable to generate the mesh as soon as possible,

17.1.2 Limitations of the automatic meshing
although it is possible to draw additional objects on other
layers (such as loads) before generation. The main automatic meshing limitation is that the
minimum element size is 50 mm (0.164 feet). Concept can
usually overcome this limitation by adjusting the mesh
17.1.1 Deciding what mesh element size to input objects to generate a mesh. Concept moves mesh
use input line objects (for example, walls, line supports) to
accommodate point objects (for example, columns, point
When generating the mesh you need to decide what
supports).
element size to use. The maximum is 32.8 feet (10 meters).
Concept automatically adjusts the mesh input objects if:
To speed the analysis, it is useful to choose a coarse mesh
for preliminary design and a fine mesh for final design. • Two control points are closer than the minimum element
size.
A coarse mesh might have an element size of span length /
6. A fine mesh might have an element size of span length / • A control point is closer to a line than the minimum
12. If in doubt, you should investigate the effects of element size.
different mesh element sizes. Note: Concept generates warnings during the meshing if it
was necessary to make adjustments. You can stop the
To generate the mesh automatically:
meshing and make corrections. If you continue, you should
1 Click Generate Mesh ( ). check the mesh to see if the adjustments are satisfactory.
Note: Concept generates a warning if two slab areas (or

beams or openings) with the same priority overlap. You can
stop the meshing and make corrections. If you continue you
RAM Concept 61
Chapter 17
should check the mesh to see if the adjustments are satis-

factory as the choice of which slab area (or beam) governs
the elements is effectively random.
Note: Concept moves two columns to the same point that

you draw closer than the minimum element size.
A mesh generates but the model does not run properly if:
• A column or point support is outside of the slab areas.
• A wall or line support is partially outside the slab areas.
• An area spring is completely outside the slab areas.
• Two columns or walls of the same support set are dupli-
cated (intersecting walls are allowed).
Figure 17-2 Mesh before Design Strips
To avoid mesh warnings:
Do any one of the following:

1 Adjust objects on the Mesh Input plan so that the
minimum element size dimension (or more) separates them.
2 Edit priorities so that slab areas, beams and openings
with the same priorities do not overlap.
17.1.3 Viewing the finite element mesh

You can view the finite element mesh on any plan, but the
Standard Plan of the Element layer is the preferred plan to
use.
To view the finite element mesh:

Figure 17-3 Mesh after drawing Design Strips and Regenerating.
1 Open Layers > Element > Standard Plan.
The mesh generated at this stage appears to be somewhat

random. This is normal and in fact, for sensible mesh sizes
it produces highly satisfactory design results. At times, 17.2 Selectively refining the mesh
however, such a mesh (adversely) affects the contour plots.
Although there is no setting that makes the mesh finer in
some areas than others, you can employ a trick to achieve
17.1.4 Improving the mesh this.
You can significantly improve the mesh once design strips
are drawn. The following diagrams show the differences.
17.2.1 Using point and line supports to refine
the mesh
You can draw “dummy” point or line supports to ensure
that the mesh is finer in particular areas. You must ensure
that all fixity boxes are unchecked, as shown in Figure 17-4
and Figure 17-5.
A refined mesh example is shown in Figure 17-6.
62 RAM Concept
Chapter 17
Figure 17-4 Point support dialog box with all fixity boxes unchecked.
Figure 17-5 Line support dialog box with all fixity boxes unchecked
Figure 17-6 Two slabs, identical in every way except for the implementa-
tion of line supports to refine the mesh.
RAM Concept 63
Chapter 17
64 RAM Concept
Chapter 18
18 Manually Drawing the Finite Elements
Note: In most cases, you do not need to draw the finite Concrete Mix Type of concrete used (defined in
element mesh manually. If you have used the automatic Materials Specification).
method, there is no need to read this chapter
There are two ways to generate the finite element mesh in far end of column.
RAM Concept:
Support Set Defines the column as below or above the
• Using the automatic meshing facility, described in floor.
Chapter 17, “Generating the Mesh”, that uses the mesh
input objects, described in Chapter 16, “Defining the Width Measured along the column’s r-axis. Set to zero for
Structure”. round columns.
• Using the manual meshing tools described in this Depth / Diameter Measured along the column’s s-axis.
chapter.
Angle Plan angle measured counterclockwise from the
The first method is certainly easier and faster. It is the global x-axis. It determines the column’s r-axis (and is
recommended method for nearly all models. usually zero).
The second method allows more control over mesh Bending Stiffness Factor Used to modify the bending
intensity: the mesh size can be more widely varied in stiffness without changing the dimensions or height. For
different areas of the floor. The method is, however, more example, you may expect an edge column to crack and
prone to user error and editing is more difficult. rotate more than an internal column and so you might
consider setting this value to 0.5. You could use the BSF to
Do not use the manual method to supplement a mesh made increase a column’s stiffness, but this is an unlikely
with the automatic meshing facility. This is because manual scenario.
elements would be lost if you used the mesh generation
facility. For example, if you added a column element above Roller at Far End Results in zero horizontal shear in
in the element layer it would be lost when you regenerated. column.
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection (about x- and

y-axes) between column and slab; otherwise pinned.
18.1 Using the Element layer Fixed Far Provides a moment connection (about x- and y-
axes) at far end; otherwise pinned.
There is no set order in which you must define objects.
Compressible Allows for column to elongate in the z-
Most people choose to draw supports first.
If you have imported a CAD drawing, make it visible on incompressible. Compressible columns usually produce
the Element Standard Plan before drawing the structure. results that are more accurate.
18.2 About column elements and wall 18.4 Drawing column elements
elements
Each column is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two
RAM Concept allows for single story models whereby you columns cannot have the same coordinates unless one is
define columns and walls below and above the slab. above and one is below.
Supports above the slab do not provide vertical support,
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw
only horizontal support and bending resistance.
column elements at slab element nodes.
To draw a column element:
18.3 Column element properties 1 Choose the Column Element tool ( ).

2 Click at the column center.
The following is a list of RAM Concept column element To copy columns from below to above:
properties:
1 Select the column elements and choose Edit > Copy.
RAM Concept 65
Chapter 18
2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new column A wall element can pass through a column element, or
elements in the same location as the original column intersect another wall element.
elements. The pasted column elements are the active
selection. Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw
wall elements along the edge of the slab elements. The ends
3 Change the Support Set property from “below” to of the wall elements must be at slab element nodes. Wall
“above” in the Column Element Properties dialog box. elements cannot traverse a slab finite element.
Note: If you do not change the Support Set designation
To draw wall elements on slab elements:
then there are duplicated column elements that do not allow
the model to run properly. If you have copied a large 1 Choose the Wall Element tool ( ).
number, it is tedious to delete the second column element at 2 Click at the wall end center points.
each location (one by one).
To draw wall elements where there are no slab elements:
1 Choose the Wall Element tool ( ).
18.5 Wall element properties 2 Click at the wall end center points.
3 Specify the number of elements in the Wall Element Tool
dialog box and click OK.
Wall element properties are similar to column element
properties though instead of width, depth and angle there is To copy walls from below to above:
thickness. The fixity settings are somewhat different, and
there is no Bending Stiffness Factor. 1 Select the wall elements and choose Edit > Copy.
2 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new wall elements
The following is a list of RAM Concept wall element in the same location as the original wall element objects.
properties: The pasted wall elements are the active selection.
Concrete Mix Type of concrete used (defined in 3 Change the Support Set property from “below” to
Materials Specification). “above” in the Wall Element Properties dialog box.

far end of wall element.
Support Set Defines the wall element as below or above 18.7 About point and line supports
the floor.
The result of defining a point support is a single support at
Thickness
a finite element node. The result of defining a line support
Shear wall “Locks” the wall element to the slab is one or more line supports that are each located at a finite
horizontally and thus restrains it; otherwise, the slab can element edge. RAM Concept uses the thickness of the
“slide” over the wall. lowest numbered element in determining the support
elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate point
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection between the supports or line supports at slab steps.
wall element and the slab about the wall element’s r-axis;
otherwise pinned All supports that have a horizontal rigidity should be
placed at the mid-depth of the slab or they may cause an
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection about the wall unintended arch action in addition to their horizontal
element’s r-axis at far end; otherwise pinned. rigidity (mid-depth placement is done by setting the
“Elevation above slab soffit” to be one-half of the slab
Compressible Allows for wall element to elongate in the
depth).
z-direction according to Hooke’s law; otherwise
incompressible. Compressible walls usually produce Normally there is no need to use horizontal fixities in point
results that are more accurate. and line supports, as RAM Concept automatically
stabilizes the structure in the x- and y-directions (you can
turn this automatic stabilization off in the Calc Options
dialog box). One situation where you might use a
18.6 Drawing wall elements horizontal support is a structure braced against sidesway
but modeled without bracing members (perhaps something
The wall element tool is very similar to the column tool other than a concrete wall provides the bracing).
except that it uses a line rather than a point. Be very careful about specifying anything but “Fixed in z-
direction” for point supports and “Translation in z-direction
66 RAM Concept
Chapter 18
fixed” for line supports. For point supports, fixing the point To drawing a line support on slab elements:
support in the r- or s-direction could result in arch / 1 Choose the Line Support tool ( ).
membrane action. For line supports, fixing the slab
2 Click at the support end points.
translation along or across the support could result in arch /
membrane action.
18.12 About springs

18.8 Point support properties
The result of defining a point spring is a single spring at a
finite element node. The result of defining a line spring is
See “Point support properties” on page 53 for more
one or more line springs that are each located at a finite
information on point support properties.
element edge. RAM Concept uses the thickness of the
lowest numbered element in determining the spring
elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate
springs at slab steps.
18.9 Drawing point supports
All springs that have a horizontal stiffness should be placed
You draw point supports by clicking at their location with at the mid-depth of the slab or they may cause an
unintended arch action in addition to their horizontal
the Point Support tool ( ). stiffness (mid-depth placement is done by setting the
“Elevation above slab soffit” to be one-half of the slab
Note: The Point Support tool ( ) and Line Support tool
depth). For slabs with varying centroid elevations, it can be
difficult to avoid adding a rotational restraint to the slab
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw when using lateral springs and supports.
point supports at slab element nodes.
Normally there is no need to use horizontal springs, as
To draw a point support:
RAM Concept automatically stabilizes the structure in the
x- and y-directions (you can turn this automatic
1 Choose the Point Support tool ( ). stabilization off in the Calc Options dialog box). One
2 Click at the point support location. situation where you might use a horizontal spring is a
structure braced against sidesway but modeled without
bracing members (perhaps soil friction provides the
bracing).
18.10 Line support properties
Be very careful about specifying anything but a z-force
constant. R- and s-force constants could result in
See “Line support properties” on page 53 for more membrane action.
information on line support properties.
18.13 Point spring properties

18.11 Drawing line supports
See “Point spring properties” on page 54 for more
You can use line supports as an axis of symmetry. This is information on point spring properties.
very useful if a floor is symmetrical and you wish to model
only half of it. Be aware that line supports could prevent
post-tensioning forces being applied to the floor.
Note: The Point Support tool ( ) and Line Support tool


line supports along the edge of the slab elements. The ends
of the line supports must be at slab element nodes. Line
supports cannot traverse a slab finite element.
RAM Concept 67
Chapter 18
18.14 Drawing point springs 18.18 Drawing area springs
Each point spring is located with an x- and y-coordinate.

You use the Tri-Area Spring tool ( ) or the Quad-Area
Two point springs cannot have the same coordinates.
Spring tool ( ) and locate the spring area corners.
Note: The Point Spring tool ( ), Line Spring tool ( ),
Tri-Area Spring tool ( ), and Quad-Area Spring tool Note: The Point Spring tool ( ), Line Spring tool ( ),
( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific toolbar. Tri-Area Spring tool ( ), and Quad-Area Spring tool
point springs at slab element nodes. To draw a Tri-Area Spring:
To draw a point spring:

1 Choose the Tri-Area Spring tool ( ).
1 Choose the Point Spring tool ( ). 2 Click at the three corner point locations of the area
spring.
2 Click at the spring location.
To draw a Quad-Area Spring:
1 Choose the Quad-Area Spring tool ( ).
18.15 Line spring properties 2 Click at the four corner point locations of the area spring.
Note: An Area Spring object can be larger than the

See “Line spring properties” on page 54 for more structure it supports.
information on line spring properties.
18.19 About floor areas

18.16 Drawing line springs
You define floor slabs and beams manually with the slab
The line spring tool is very similar to the point spring tool meshing tools. Drawing elements manually requires more
except that it uses a line rather than a point. thought on the drawing process. Poor decisions could
require a significant amount of editing and duplication of
Note: The Point Spring tool ( ), Line Spring tool ( ), work.
Tri-Area Spring tool ( ), and Quad-Area Spring tool
( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific toolbar. Drawing elements manually also requires careful
application of the tools to ensure that the side of each
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw element is the same length as the adjacent element. In other
line springs along the edge of the slab elements. The ends of words, each element node must be at the corner of any
the line springs must be at slab element nodes. Line springs element that touches it. Elements cannot overlap.
cannot traverse a slab finite element.
You model beam elements as thickened slab elements with
To draw a line spring: the same slab element tools. You model openings as empty
1 Choose the Line Spring tool ( ). spaces in the mesh.
2 Click at the line spring end points.
18.20 Slab element properties

18.17 Area spring properties
Slab area properties fall into two categories: general and
behavior.
See “Area spring properties” on page 55 for more
information on area spring properties. The following is an explanation of RAM Concept slab area
properties:

Thickness You define slab thickenings, such as drop caps

and drop panels, by specifying an increased thickness.
68 RAM Concept
Chapter 18

operation using the Rect Slab Mesh Elements tool ( ) or
elevation as 0. Setting the elevation to a very large value
(such as 100 feet or 30 m) may result in round off errors in the Poly Slab Mesh Elements tool ( ). This would often
the analysis. You create surface and soffit steps by using mean drawing slab panels (with columns in the corners) in
different surface elevations for different areas. one operation.
Note: The Rect Slab Mesh Elements tool ( ) and Poly

Slab Mesh Elements tool ( ) share the same button on the
Element layer toolbar.
Note: You can approximate curves by a series of straight

edges.
To draw a rectangular slab mesh area:

1 Choose the Rect Slab Mesh Elements ( ) tool.
2 Click at two opposite corners of the rectangle.
3 Specify the element size in the Rect Mesh Tool dialog
box and click OK.
To draw a polygon slab mesh area:

1 Choose the Poly Slab Mesh Elements ( ) tool.
2 Click at each slab panel vertex consecutively.
Figure 18-1 Slab element properties - behavior 3 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or
R-Axis defines an orientation for the slab. If the slab is a 4 Specify the element size in the Poly Mesh Tool dialog
two way slab with identical properties in all directions box and click OK.
(“isotropic”), then the R-Axis is irrelevant, because there is
no inherent orientation of the slab. However, if the slab is To draw a single mesh element:
not isotropic, then this axis (defined as the counter- 1 Choose one of the single element tools ( ).
clockwise angle from 3 o'clock) defines the r-axis which is 2 Click at each of the three (or four) slab panel vertices
used along with the other slab area properties to define the consecutively.
behavior of the slab. The s-axis is always 90 degrees
counter-clockwise from the r-axis. 3 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or
KMr, KMs, KMrs, KFr, KFs, KVrs Relative stiffnesses
(compared to isotropic slab stiffness).
Refer to “Orthotropic behavior” on page 306 for further 18.22 A few final words
information on the use of Behavior properties.
Do not click Generate Mesh ( ) after drawing the mesh

elements manually. It deletes all the elements that you have
18.21 Drawing the slab elements drawn.
You can draw slab elements one or more at a time. Usually

you would attempt to draw as many as practical in one
RAM Concept 69
Chapter 18
70 RAM Concept
Chapter 19
19 Drawing Loads
RAM Concept allows you to draw point, line and area 19.3 Point load properties
loads and moments on any loading plan. These loads can be
in the directions of the global x-, y- and z-axes and the
moments can be about the global x- and y-axes. The following is a list of RAM Concept point load
properties:
Each load belongs to a loading layer, such as Live Loading.
You define each loading in the loadings window, and draw Elevation above slab surface Vertical distance
the loads on plans. between the point load and the slab surface.
There is no limitation to the number of loads defined. Fx Point force in the direction of global x-axis (horizontal
force).
Loads are independent of the finite element mesh and have
no effect on the automatic mesh generation. This is Fy Point force in the direction of global y-axis (horizontal
satisfactory for most loads. For very heavy point or line force).
loads (such as on a mat or transfer slab), however, the loads Fz Point force in the direction of global z-axis (vertical
should correlate with the finite element mesh nodes. You force).
can do this by drawing pinned columns and walls above the
floor, and drawing the loads at these locations with the help Mx Point moment about the global x-axis.
of snaps. Alternatively, you can refine the mesh locally
with the use of “dummy” slab objects. Refer to “Selectively My Point moment about the global y-axis.
refining the mesh” on page 62 for further information. Note: Although point loads need not be located at a finite
Horizontal loads may cause applied moments depending element node, you should consider locating very large loads
upon the elevation above the slab surface of the loads. If a at nodes. Point loads must be located on finite elements;
load is located at a slab surface step, RAM Concept uses Concept issues a warning if you violate this rule.
the thickness of the lowest numbered slab element in Note: Sign convention is defined in Criteria > Signs. See
determining the load elevation. For this reason, it is not Chapter 8, “Choosing Sign Convention”.
advisable to locate point or line loads at steps.
Note: Horizontal forces (Fx, Fy) cause applied moments
Importing a CAD drawing may assist you in drawing loads. unless the Elevation above slab surface is set to apply the
load at the slab centroid.
19.1 About self-weight

19.4 Drawing point loads
RAM Concept automatically calculates the floor’s self-
weight for the Self-Dead Loading. Each point load is located with an x- and y-coordinate.
To draw a point load:

1 Choose the Point Load tool ( ).
19.2 About superposition of loads
2 Click at the load location (or enter the coordinates in the
command line).
Point loads cannot be at the same location on the same
loading layer.
Line loads can intersect or overlap, but cannot have the

exact same length and location on the same loading layer. 19.5 Line load properties
Area Loads can overlap, but cannot have the exact same
The following is a list of RAM Concept line load
shape and location on the same loading layer.
properties:
Overlapping loads are additive.
Elevation above slab surface Vertical distance
between the line load and the slab surface.
Fx Line force in the direction of global x-axis (horizontal

force).
RAM Concept 71
Chapter 19
Fy Line force in the direction of global y-axis at each end 19.6 Drawing line loads
(horizontal force).
Fz Line force in the direction of global z-axis at each end There are two line load tools.
(vertical force).
Mx Line moment about the global x-axis at each end. 19.6.1 Standard line load
My Line moment about the global y-axis at each end. The line load tool is very similar to the point load tool
except that it uses two points rather than one point.
Note: If the line force (or moment) is uniform you need to To draw a line load:
enter only one value. Otherwise you need to enter two 1 Choose the Line Load tool ( ).
values separated by a comma (ends 1 and 2). This allows
2 Click at the load end points (or enter the coordinates in
linear variation of the line force (or moment). See Figure
the command line).
19-1.
Note: Although line loads need not be located at a finite

element node, you should consider locating very large loads 19.6.2 Perimeter line load
at element edges. Line loads must be completely located on
The perimeter line load tool facilitates the drawing of
finite elements; Concept issues a warning if you violate this
multiple line load objects around the perimeter, with or
rule.
without an offset.
Note: Sign convention is defined in Criteria > Signs.
To draw a perimeter line load:
Note: Horizontal forces (Fx, Fy) cause applied moments 1 Choose the Perimeter Line Load tool ( ).
unless the Elevation above slab surface is set to apply the
load at the slab centroid. 2 Click anywhere on the slab.
3 In the dialog box that appears, enter the Inset Distance,
and click Apply.
19.7 Area load properties
The following is a list of RAM Concept area load

properties:
Elevation above slab surface Vertical distance

between the area load and the slab surface.
Fx Area force in the direction of global x-axis (horizontal

force).
Fy Area force in the direction of global y-axis (horizontal

force).
Fz Area force in the direction of global z-axis (vertical

Figure 19-1 Line load properties varying from 10 to 20 units. force).
Mx Area moment about the global x-axis.
72 RAM Concept
Chapter 19
My Area moment about the global y-axis. 19.8 Drawing area loads
Note: If the area force (or moment) is uniform you need to
enter only one value per axis.
You use the Area Load tool ( ) to locate the area load
Note: The area force (or moment) can linearly vary in any vertices.
direction. The area force variation could be for snowdrift,
While it is neater to draw area loads that match the floor, it
or sloping soil.
is satisfactory to make the load oversize. RAM Concept
Note: If the area force (or moment) varies you need to ignores any part of an area load that is not on a floor
enter three values, separated by commas (vertices 1, 2 and element. Exaggerating the size too much affects the
3). This allows linear variation of the line force (or moment) automatic printing and zooming bounds.
in two directions. See Figure 19-2.
To draw an area load:
Note: If you use more than three vertices, Concept calcu- 1 Choose the Area Load tool ( ).
lates the unique value at all vertices (three points define a
plane). 2 Click at the vertices of the area load (or enter the coordi-
nates in the command line).
Note: Area loads must be at least partially located on finite 3 Close the polygon by typing “c” in the command line or
elements; Concept issues a warning if you violate this rule. clicking at the first vertex.
Concept ignores any part of an area load not on a finite
element.
Note: Sign convention is defined in Criteria > Signs.

19.9 Copying loads
Note: Horizontal forces (Fx, Fy) cause applied moments
unless the Elevation above slab surface is set to apply the
You can copy loads from one Loading plan to another. This
load at the slab centroid.
is convenient since in practice most loads have values for
more than one loading.
To copy a load from one loading to another:

1 Select the load and choose Edit > Copy.
2 Open the loading plan to which you wish to paste.
3 Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new load in the same
plan location as the original load. The pasted load is the
active selection.
4 Edit the properties of the new load.
Note: You can copy, paste and edit multiple loads simulta-
neously.
Figure 19-2 Area load properties varying from 10 to 20 to 30 units at the

first three vertices. Concept calculates the values at all other vertices.
RAM Concept 73
Chapter 19
74 RAM Concept
Chapter 20
20 Creating Pattern Loading
RAM Concept generates pattern loadings based upon the To Draw Load Patterns:
load patterns that you draw. “About load pattern” on 1 Choose Layers > Pattern.
page 32 explains the principle of load pattern.
2 Open one of the load pattern plans (from Load Pattern 1
through Load Pattern 10).
3 Double click the Pattern Load tool ( ).
20.1 Deciding how many load patterns to 4 Specify which pattern number you wish to use (the
use number should correspond to the load pattern plan’s
number).
Mathematically, there could a large number of floor pattern Draw the on-pattern areas with a polygon.
loadings, which would all have different results. For
practical reasons, the maximum number of load patterns is 5 Click at each slab area vertex consecutively.
ten. This allows you to draw five load patterns in each 6 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or
direction. type “c” and press Return).
Typical pattern loading configurations are: 7 Repeat for all patterns.
Note: Regardless of which load pattern plan you are using,

the pattern number will be the last one specified. You will
need to change this for each different pattern plan.
20.3 Load pattern filtering
Internally, RAM Concept resolves a pattern loading by

determining which slab and beam finite elements are
partially or wholly within the related load pattern. The
loads on these elements (the element loads) are multiplied
by the on-pattern factor. For elements totally outside the
pattern, the element loads are multiplied by the off-pattern
factor.
Thus, RAM Concept’s calculation pattern areas

Figure 20-1 Beam Pattern Loadings. Note that these will not necessarily
produce the maximum negative moments, but they will produce moments
approximate the pattern areas that you draw. You should
that are very close to the maximum and represent a practical solution in consider this when drawing load patterns and choosing
most situations. mesh size as it will affect the actual pattern loadings
generated.
20.2 Drawing load patterns 20.3.1 Effect of mesh on load pattern

The finite element mesh regularity and intensity has an
You draw load patterns as part of the pattern loading
effect on the load pattern process. The following example
process.
best explains the process.
RAM Concept 75
Chapter 20
Load pattern for four-panel slab Actual pattern areas for an irregular fine mesh
Figure 20-2 To generate the maximum My at midspan you would use this Figure 20-4 With the finer mesh, the point load will not be included and
load pattern. there will be less additional area load in the pattern loading.
Actual pattern areas for an irregular coarse mesh Actual pattern areas for a regular coarse mesh
Figure 20-3 The point load and some additional area load will be included Figure 20-5 This mesh generates a pattern loading with an area that
in the pattern loading. closely resembles the load pattern.
76 RAM Concept
Chapter 20
Drawing design strips significantly improves the mesh. See

Chapter 17, “Generating the Mesh” for more information
on improving the mesh.
Note: The mesh becomes more regular if you generate or

regenerate after design strips are drawn.
RAM Concept 77
Chapter 20
78 RAM Concept
Chapter 21
21 Defining Design Strips
Note: Design strips are perhaps the most important tool in three Span Segment Strips (left, center and right). These are
RAM Concept. It is highly recommended that the designer known as design strips.
takes the time to fully understand what a design strip does,
and how to use them. If you use design strips improperly See Figure 21-1 for further explanation.
then the results will be meaningless.
Finite element analysis often produces high peak moments

and stress concentrations which are inappropriate for
calculation of reinforcement and evaluating performance.
Code rules are generally intended for strip methods that

assume an averaging (or “smearing”) of moment and shear
across a designated width, such as a column strip. RAM
Concept uses design strips and design sections to link finite
element analysis with concrete code rules and concrete
design.
21.1 Definition of a design strip
A design strip is an object that:

• contains a series of cross sections at specific locations
• is usually the length of a span, or part of a span, but can
in fact have any length within the structure
• integrates resultants (moments, shears, axial forces,
torsions) for all load combinations along each cross
section (and, hence, across the design strip’s width)
• applies appropriate code rules to the resultants
A design strip is the same as a span segment strip.
21.2 Design strip terminology
It is important to understand the different objects used to

define design strips.
Figure 21-1 Design strips for a two-way flat plate.
Span segment A line segment-line entity that is intended
to indicate a portion of a structural span or a whole
structural span. The “at support” properties of the Span
Segment indicate where the span starts and stops. 21.3 Understanding how a design strip
works
Span One or more connected Span Segments that together
make up a single structural span. Nearly all spans require
only one Span Segment. RAM Concept generates design strips from span segments.
Frame One or more Spans that are connected together to A design strip is normally the length of a span with a
form a continuous line of spans. logical width.
Span Segment Strip A set of cross sections associated Concept subdivides each individual design strip segment
with a Span Segment. The Span Segment can have up to according to the following parameters:
• minimum number of divisions
RAM Concept 79
Chapter 21
• maximum division spacing

• support width
• changes in concrete section along the span
Concept locates a design strip cross section at the start of

each division, plus one at the end. The length of each cross
section equals the width of the design strip at that location.
See Figure 21-2.
Note: You can specify the minimum number of divisions as

zero, such that, with a large maximum spacing, the number
of cross sections is zero. This could be useful to help
generate span segment widths.
Concept modifies the geometrical properties of each design

strip cross section according to the cross section trimming
and inter cross section slope limit settings.
Concept integrates the resultants for each load combination

along the length of each design strip cross section (and
hence across the width of the design strip). See Figure 21-
3.
Concept uses some properties of each span segment to

determine applicable code rules (beam or slab, post-
tensioned or reinforced) for the corresponding design strip. Figure 21-2 Column strip and two middle strips belonging to one span
with cross sections visible.
Concept applies the code rules to the envelope of the load
combination integrals within a rule set. Other span segment
properties (reinforcement bar sizes, cover) facilitate the
actual code rule calculations. See “Span segment
properties” on page 82 for more information.
Concept separates design strips into two sets: latitude and

longitude. The two sets are for convenience and recognize
that concrete floors should be designed in two directions.
Note: As with all plans, you can rename the Latitude

Design Strip Plan and Longitude Design Strip Plan by
choosing Layer > Rename.
Figure 21-3 Moment about the y-axis (My) plotted across one cross sec-
tion of three design strips.
21.4 The design strip process
This is best explained by Figure 21-4.
80 RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Step 1 - Create the Span Segments
Specify the default span segment properties
EITHER AND / OR
Generate Span Segments Draw Span Segments

(and supplement and adjust if necessary) (manually)
Step 2 - Create Span Segment Strips

You create Span Segment Strips from Span Segments with the Generate Strips
command. You cannot draw or directly edit Span Segment Strips.
Step 3A - Examine Span Segment Strips

Check the Lock Generated Strips box of any
Span Segment that has satisfactory strips.
Step 3B - Edit Span Segment Properties

Use the strip generation tab of the Span Segment
properties dialog to modify the Span Segment Strips.
Step 3C - Edit Span Segments manually

Use the Span Boundary, Strip Boundary, and Orient Span
Cross Section tools to control the strip generation.
Step 3D - Set cross section trimming

This enables you to modify the concrete section
used for shear and flexure calculations.
Continue
Figure 21-4 Flow diagram of the design strip process
RAM Concept 81
Chapter 21
21.5 Span segment properties This is a very important setting related to the effect of axial
force resultants (not necessarily axial loads) in a cross
section. If you select this option, Concept includes the
Span segment properties serve different purposes. RAM interaction of the axial force with the bending in the cross
Concept uses properties to determine the following: section strain calculations, similar to typical column design
• design method (e.g. inclusion of axial force) using strain compatibility. We generally recommend the
consideration of axial forces in strength design. For
• design strip width and cross section geometry
sections with net axial compression this will tend to reduce
• appropriate code design rules (e.g. beam or slab) the reinforcement demand while for sections with net axial
tension it will typically increase the reinforcement demand.
• reinforcement
• live load reduction Consider as Post-Tensioned Enables Concept to
decide which code rules are used.
The following is an explanation of Concept span segment
properties: This determines if the design strip segment is checked for
initial service design code rules (for the Initial Service LC)
and whether RC or PT code rules are used (some codes do
not make this distinction).
Note: If consider as post-tensioned is not used then

Concept ignores tendons in strength calculations.
Don’t reduce integrated M and V due to sign

change The intent of this option is to allow for safe,
conservative designs where cross sections include regions
of moment (or shear) with opposite signs that cause the
moment (or shear) recorded for the cross section to be less
than that for a shorter sub- cross section.
When this option is selected, the design forces are always

more conservative than when the option is not selected.
This option should not be used without due consideration.
See “Using the “Don't Reduce Integrated M and V due to

Sign Change” option” on page 317 for explanation.
Figure 21-5 Span segment properties - General
Span Set Determines the set the span segment belongs to:
latitude or longitude.
Environment The environment setting affects which

service rules Concept selects in some codes.
Refer to the appropriate code discussion chapter for more

information:
• Section 51.5.4 on page 374 and Section 51.6.10 on
page 380 for relevance to ACI318-02.
• Section 53.6.15 on page 419 for relevance to AS3600.
• Section 54.5.4 on page 429 for relevance to BS8110.
• Section 55.5.4 on page 452 for relevance to IS 456.
Note: This setting has a significant effect on reinforcement

quantities.
Consider Axial Force in Strength Design Uses the Figure 21-6 Span segment properties - Strip Generation
net section axial force in bending design.
82 RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Span Width Calc This determines how Concept • the Strip Boundaries (in the same
calculates the span width. latitude/longitude set as the Span Segment)
The choices are: Skew Angle The angle between the design strip cross
section and a line perpendicular to the span segment. The
• Automatic: this applies (sometimes fallible) logic to
typical value is zero.
calculate the span width as the closest of:
• the Span Boundaries (in the same Min Number of Divisions Determines how many design
latitude/longitude set as the Span Segment) cross sections per span.
• the slab edges For N divisions there are N+1 design cross sections. It is
generally advisable to make N an even number. The upside
• half-way to the nearby spans or walls
of more divisions is greater design accuracy; RAM
• Manual: this overrides the automatic calculation and Concept’s ability to find critical design locations and length
determines span widths by the closest Span Boundary of reinforcement is a function of the number of divisions.
items (in the same latitude/longitude set as the Span The downside of more divisions is that calculating takes
Segment). See “Drawing span segments manually” on longer; for large models, you might consider using a small
page 86 for further information. number of divisions (say, 4) and then increasing the
number for final design (but you should consider the effect
Note: When the Manual setting is used in a strip segment, of the next property).
all of the span boundaries for that strip segment must be
defined. A strip segment generates a span width of zero There is no reason for all design strips to have the same
when some of its length does not have any span boundaries number of divisions. Should you be designing a transfer
defined. beam within a flat plate it would probably make sense to
have more divisions for the beam design strip.
Column Strip Width Calc This determines how the
column strip width is determined. The term “column strip Max Division Spacing Overrides the Min Number of
width” is used for more than flat slabs with column and Divisions with an upper bound on division spacing.
middle strips. The choices are:
Detect Supports and Edges Automatically (resets
• Full Width: this is typical for PT slabs designed to supports and widths below) This detects:
ACI318 and TR43. The column strip width is the same as
the span width. • the presence of supports at ends of span segments and
overrides “Consider End as Support” and “Support
• Code Slab: this is typical for two-way RC slabs, and Width”.
two-way PT slabs designed to AS3600. The column strip
width is the narrower of: • where the span spine is near the slab edge and “pulls
back” the closest cross section by “x”, where x is the bar
• the span width end cover plus 1 inch / 25 mm.
• the Strip Boundaries (in the same
• This is done by setting the support width to x.
latitude/longitude set as the Span Segment)
• If the spine end near the slab edge has detected a
• a fraction of the distance to the adjacent spans or support, then the slab edge detection is NOT
supports (for all current codes this fraction is 0.25) performed (and the regular support width calcs are
• a fraction of the span length on each side of the used).
span line (for all current codes this fraction is 0.25)
Consider End 1 as Support These checkboxes allow
• Code T-beam: the column strip width is the narrower of: Concept to determine your interpretation of “spans” in the
• the span width structure. This determination of spans affects how Concept
applies code rules that are span-related, including
• the Strip Boundaries (in the same determining support regions, span regions and areas used in
latitude/longitude set as the Span Segment) live load reduction.
• the web width plus 8 times the flange thickness on
either side (ACI codes only) Support Width at End 1 The dimension of the support
parallel to the design strip. The support width determines
• 25% of the span length (ACI codes only) where the first and last design strip cross sections are
• the web with plus 0.07 times the span length on located. Their locations are at half the support width
either side (AS 3600 and BS 8110 only) (measured in the direction of the span) from the ends of the
design strip. This is to facilitate reduction of moments to
• Manual: the column strip width is the narrower of:
face of supports (it is thus important to start and end design
• the span width
RAM Concept 83
Chapter 21
strips at the center of supports). It is conservative to enter CS Legs in Shear Reinforcement Determines the area
the support width as zero. of vertical shear reinforcement by multiplying the number
of legs by the Shear Bar area.
CS Torsion Design The method used for torsion design.
See “Torsion Considerations” on page 330 of Chapter 47,

“Section Design Notes” for further explanation.
CS Design System The design system (beam / one-way

slab / two-way slab) for the design strip.
Minimum reinforcement and other rules are dependent

upon what type of system is in use in the span. For
example, the minimum requirements for beam stirrups are
different to those for a one-way slab.
CS Span Detailer The detailing system used. See “Span

detailing” on page 341 of Chapter 49, “Reinforcement
Notes”.
The choices are:

• None
• Code
Figure 21-7 Span segment properties - Column Strip • User-defined
CS Min. Reinforcement Location Determines the face

Cross Section Trimming Reduces design strip cross
for minimum reinforcement.
sections based on geometry. See “About cross section
trimming” on page 91 for more information. The choices are:
Inter Cross Section Slope Limit Reduces design strip Elevated Slab: Some minimum tensile reinforcement code
cross sections based on slope limits. See “Inter Cross rules do not consider flexural stress conditions; they
Section Slope Limit Trimming” on page 93 for more determine minimum reinforcement based solely on
information. geometry and the “expected” tensile face. For example,
ACI 318-99 Rule 18.9.3.3 stipulates that the minimum
CS Top Bar The label used to identify the top face
reinforcement at a column in an elevated slab should be in
reinforcing bar used for flexural design.
the top face. This setting ensures RAM Concept uses that
CS Bottom Bar The label used to identify the bottom face.
face reinforcing bar used for flexural design.
Mat Foundation: Similar to above, you would expect the
CS Shear Bar The label used to identify the reinforcing minimum reinforcement at a column in a mat to be in the
bar used for one-way shear design. bottom face.
The label is not necessarily the bar size. Reinforcement bar Tension Face: This setting details the minimum
labels (and their properties) are specified in the Criteria > reinforcement on the tensile face, or the face with the least
Materials. It is possible for different design strips to have amount of compression.
different bars.
Top: This setting details the minimum reinforcement on the
After completing the calculation process, RAM Concept top face, regardless of the concrete stresses.
reports design strip reinforcement requirements based upon
Bottom: This setting details the minimum reinforcement on
the bars specified in the design strip properties. You can
the bottom face, regardless of the concrete stresses.
view the required reinforcement area in plots and tables.
None: No minimum reinforcement is detailed.
CS Top Cover Clear cover to the top longitudinal bars.
CS Min. Top Reinforcement Ratio The user defined
CS Bottom Cover Clear cover to the bottom longitudinal
reinforcement ratio for the top face. Concept multiplies the
bars.
trimmed cross sectional area by this ratio.
84 RAM Concept
Chapter 21
CS Min. Bottom Reinforcement Ratio The user Max live Load Reduction See Chapter 48, “Live Load
defined reinforcement ratio for the bottom face. Reduction Notes” for information on Concept’s
implementation of live load reduction.
User specified LLR parameters See Chapter 48, “Live

Load Reduction Notes” for information on Concept’s
implementation of live load reduction.
21.6 Creating span segments
You can create span segments in two ways: automatic and

manual. For most models you use the automatic feature to
generate span segments once in each orthogonal direction,
and then make manual adjustments.
21.6.1 Generating span segments

automatically
Unless you have a truly one-way concrete floor, it would be
usual to first generate one set of span segments (and hence
Figure 21-8 Span segment properties - Middle Strip
design strips) on the Latitude Design Spans Plan, and then
an orthogonal set on the Longitude Design Spans Plan.
Note: Middle strips have one additional property to To generate latitude span segments:
column strips. The rest of the properties are the same, but
1 Click the Generate Spans tool ( ), or choose Process >
can have different values to those of the column strips.
Generate Spans.
Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties Sets the
The Generate Spans dialog box appears.
middle strip properties to those of the column strip.
2 Set Spans to Generate to latitude.

3 Select other options and click OK.
Figure 21-9 Span segment properties - Live Load Reduction
The span segments appear (with nominated orientation) on
the Latitude Design Spans Plan.
You should repeat this process for the longitude direction.
RAM Concept 85
Chapter 21
21.6.2 Drawing span segments manually To generate some span segment strips
1 Select one or more span segments
You sometimes need to manually draw or adjust span
segments for floors that are not rectilinear or have 2 Choose the Generate Selected Strips tool ( ).
complications.
Concept recalculates the span segment strips for the
selected span segments.
To draw a single span segment:
1 Choose the Span Segment tool ( ).
2 Click at the span segment start point.
3 Click at the span segment end point.
21.8 Defining span segment widths and
strip widths manually
The two clicks define the span segment spine.
To draw multiple span segments: Concept often generates span segment widths and strips
that require modification. This tendency becomes apparent
1 Choose the Span Segment Polyline tool ( ). once you have tried the span segment generation a few
2 Click at the first span segment start point. times. You should always examine the strip widths to
3 Click at the first span segment end point. determine that they are to your satisfaction.
4 Click at the second span segment end point.
5 Continue to click segment end points until all related 21.8.1 Defining span segment boundaries
segments are drawn. manually
6 Right click and select enter to close the operation.
You can manually define the span segment width when the
Note: Start and end points are normally supports. There automatic span width calculation has not provided a
are, however, exceptions, such as a design strip used for a satisfactory result.
pour strip to discriminate between PT and RC areas, or
used for a span with user-defined reinforcement in discrete To set the span segment width:
locations. 1 Choose the Span Boundary Polyline tool.
2 Click at the span boundary start point.
3 Click at the next span boundary point.
21.7 Creating span segment strips 4 Continue to click span boundary points until all are
(design strips) defined.
5 Right click and select enter to close the operation.
You generate span segment strips from span segments. This Note: Boundaries with a span set of latitude (longitude)
can be done for all strips (on both latitude and longitude only affect latitude (longitude) span segment strips.
plans) or just selected strips.
Example 21-1
To generate span segment strips
1 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ), or choose Process > Figures 21-10 through 21-12 show the use of span
Generate Strips. boundaries to control the span segment width.
Note: The Generate Strips command does not generate Figure 21-13 shows an alternative.
strips for any span segment with the Lock Generated Strips
checked. This is useful when you are satisfied with some, but
not all, of the design strips.
Note: Each span segment can generate up to 3 strips: a

center (“column”) strip, a left (“middle”) strip and a right
(“middle”) strip. Together, these three strips form the entire
span strip.
86 RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Figure 21-11 Strips generated from the span segments in Figure 21-10.
One span has some illogical design strips because the calculated span
Figure 21-10 Slab with span segments. width is excessive.
Figure 21-12 Regenerated design strips after modification of span width

with span boundaries (shown inside ellipses).
RAM Concept 87
Chapter 21
division of the panels over the region of the common

support should be taken as that calculated for the panel
giving the wider column strip.”
The column strips in the following example are modified

with logic derived from this clause.
Example 21-2
Figures 21-14 through 21-16 show the use of strip
boundaries to control the column strip width
Figure 21-13 The same span segment strips with the cross sections orient-
ed to ninety degrees. This did not require manual span boundaries.
Figure 21-14 Slab with span segments.

21.8.2 Defining strip boundaries manually
You can manually define the “column” strip boundaries
when the Column Strip Width Calc has not provided a
satisfactory result.
To set the strip boundary:

1 Choose the Strip Boundary Polyline tool( ).
2 Click at the strip boundary start point.
3 Click at the next strip boundary point.
4 Continue to click strip boundary points until all are
defined.
Unequal spans are a source of varying column strip widths.

You can choose to accept the column strip widths that
Concept calculates, or make some modifications.
BS8110 Clause 3.7.2.9 states the following:
“Columns strips between unlike panels: Where there is a

support common to two panels of such dimensions that the
strips in one panel do not match those in the other, the
88 RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Figure 21-16 Strip boundaries have made transitioning column strip

widths
Note: The short span segments in Figure 21-16 have

Column Strip Width Calc set to Manual
One span (with gray shading) has illogical span width and column strip
Example 21-3 width.
Figures 21-17 through 21-20 show the use of strip

boundaries to control the column strip width.
Figure 21-19 Span boundaries have made a logical span width, but the
column strip width is still a problem.
Figure 21-17 Slab with span segments
RAM Concept 89
Chapter 21
Figure 21-20 Strip boundaries have made a logical column strip width.
Example 21-4
Short spans and cantilevers present problems for the design Figure 21-22 Strips generated from the span segments in Figure 21-21.
because Concept will generate narrow column strips.
Codes recommend that columns strips are no more than

half the span in width. Concept makes the (commonly
used) assumption that the equivalent length of a cantilever
is 2L. The cantilever column strip width is thus L. This can
be quite narrow for short cantilevers.
Figure 21-23 Strip boundaries have made a logical column strip width.
Figure 21-21 Slab with span segments
90 RAM Concept
Chapter 21
21.9 Cross Section Trimming considers this core to be the same as a single core with the
same (total) width.
RAM Concept automatically trims cross sections in span Note: The shear core is modified for post-tensioning ducts
segment strips according to the trimming settings in the as described in “Concrete “Core” Determination” on
associated span segments. page 330.
21.9.1 About cross section trimming

True cross section shapes in a slab can be quite irregular
due to slab steps and other forming or architectural
considerations. While it is generally advised to model the
geometry of the concrete as per the form in the constructed
building, it is not advised to always use the true geometry
in design. It is often better to modify cross sections
considering both their own shape and that of the nearby
concrete.
Concept offers two types of cross section trimming: Single

Cross Section Trimming and Inter Cross Section Slope
Limits.
Single Cross Section Trimming considers one cross-section

at a time and modifies the cross-section based on the user-
specified trimming type.
Inter Cross Section Slope Limits trims the top and/or

bottom of cross-sections based on the adjacent cross-
sections, their elevations, and the distance between the
cross-sections.
Inter Cross Section Slope Limit trimming always occurs

after Single Cross Section Trimming. Figure 21-24 Shear core (shaded) for various cross sections
Some odd shaped cross-sections do not have a shear core.

21.9.2 About shear core In such cases, Concept cannot calculate some capacity
It is important to understand “shear core” before using values (such as shear capacity). See the example in Figure
cross section trimming. 21-25.
Concept defines the shear core as the parts of the trimmed

cross section that include any vertical slices that extend
from the top of the cross section to the bottom of the cross
section, as shown in Figure 21-24.
Concept bases one-way shear calculations on the entire

shear force and shear core. For example, in a T-beam the narrow shear core zero shear core:
shear calculations are based on the cross-sectional area of no vertical slice extends
the stem and the flange immediately above the stem. from top to bottom
Figure 21-25 One cross section with a narrow shear core and one with
Cross-sections can have multiple separate cores. For zero shear core.
example, in a double-T-beam, the core is the two stems and
the flange areas above the two stems. Concept typically
21.9.3 Shear core in slabs
It is common for Concept to report unexpected shear
reinforcement in slabs with section changes when the
trimming is not set appropriately.
RAM Concept 91
Chapter 21
It is quite possible for a slab cross section with a small multiple separated rectangles with the same top and bottom
shear core to show large amounts of shear reinforcement or elevations. See the example in Figures 21-28 and 21-29.
even design failure, even when the shear force is small. See
Section 21.9.5 for trimming settings for rectification.
Figure 21-28 Untrimmed slab showing cross-section (left) and shear core
(right).
Figure 21-26 Slab depression showing shear core (right). Such narrow
shear core “slivers” often result in shear reinforcement and design failure.
21.9.4 Viewing a perspective of design strip

cross sections Figure 21-29 “Max rectangle” trimming showing revised cross-section.
The shear core is now the same as the cross section.
Viewing a perspective of the design strip cross sections is a
useful way of checking the validity of the design strip cross
Beam Rectangle Vertical slices of the cross section are
section trimming settings.
removed until the remaining portion is the maximum
height rectangle possible. This rectangle can be multiple
To view the latitude design strip cross section perspective:
separated rectangles with the same top and bottom
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Cross Sections elevations.
Perspective
T or L The top and bottom of the cross section is trimmed,
and other pieces may be removed to produce a cross
section with a uniform top elevation, and only two bottom
elevations (flange bottom and web bottom). The Tees and
Els formed can be joined (such as double-tees) or
separated. Rectangles are considered the same as flangeless
Tees. See the example in Figures 21-30 and 21-31.
Figure 21-27 Design strip cross section perspective. Parts of the cross sec- Figure 21-30 Untrimmed beam showing cross-section (left) and shear
tion not in the shear core are a different color. core (right).
21.9.5 Single Cross Section Trimming

Concept offers six different types of single cross section
trimming:
Max Rectangle The top and bottom of the cross section is

trimmed, and other pieces may be removed to produce a
cross section with a uniform top and bottom elevation, and
a maximum area. The “rectangle” formed may actually be Figure 21-31 “T or L” trimming showing revised section (left) and shear
core (right).
Inverted T or L Same as T or L, but with the flange on the

bottom.
Max Shear Core The top and/or bottom of the cross

section is trimmed to produce a cross section with the
maximum shear core area. See the example in Figures 21-
32 and 21-33.
92 RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Slope Limit trimming effectively trims the top and bottom

elevations of adjacent cross section to limit the slopes
between them.
This is done because compression and tension forces

cannot “flow” at sharp angles from one cross-section to the
next.
Figure 21-32 Untrimmed beam showing cross- section (left) and shear Figures 21-34 through 21-37 show two examples with the
core (right). Inter Cross Section Slope Limit set to 0.25.
t1 A t2
A span direction
Figure 21-33 “Max Shear Core” trimming showing revised section (left)
and shear core (right).
Figure 21-34 Elevation of thickened slab. It would be unrealistic to use a
design depth of t2 at cross-section A-A.
None - No (single) cross section trimming is performed.
21.9.6 Selecting cross section trimming

1 4
You must determine which cross section trimming is most
appropriate, but the following is provided for guidance:
Figure 21-35 Elevation of effective design slab thickness using a slope
limit of 0.25.
Typical slabs with drop caps (but not drop panels):
The best trimming is usually Max Rectangle. A slope limit of 0.0 will not allow any change between
adjacent cross sections’ top elevations and bottom
Slabs with drop panels (but not drop caps): elevations. This effectively trims all the cross sections in a
The best trimming is usually T or L. span segment strip to have the same top and bottom
elevation.
Slabs with drop panels and drop caps:
In general, we do not recommend using a slope limit over
The best trimming is usually T or L, but this assumes that 0.25.
the drop cap cross-sectional area is smaller than the drop
panel cross sectional area.
Down-turned beams:
The best trimming is usually T or L. span direction

Up-turned beams:
Figure 21-36 Elevation of stepped slab. It would be unrealistic to use the
The best trimming is usually Inverted T or L. full depth for all cross-section design.
After a Calc-All, you can view the actual cross-section

perspectives. See “Viewing a perspective of design strip
cross sections” on page 92.
21.9.7 Inter Cross Section Slope Limit

Trimming Figure 21-37 Elevation of effective design slab thickness using a slope
limit of 0.25.
Once cross sections have been individually trimmed, they
are trimmed relative to each other. This Inter Cross Section
RAM Concept 93
Chapter 21
21.10 Improving the mesh 21.12 Irregular column layouts
The presence of design strips can significantly improve the Laying out design strips for irregular column layouts
regularity of the finite element mesh. We recommend that requires consideration of a number of issues.
once you have completed the design strips, you regenerate
the mesh. See Chapter 17, “Generating the Mesh” for more These include:
information. 1 Skew angles: whether latitude and longitude design strips
should be strictly orthogonal.
2 If tendons components from two directions are affecting
the design strip.
21.11 Additional design strip information
The following sections discuss these issues.
RAM Concept automates a large percentage of the design
strip process. It is relatively straightforward to rationalize
the layout of design strips when the support arrangement is 21.12.1 Design Strip Skew Angles
rectilinear. It is intuitive that there would be a limit on the skew angle
The more complicated the geometry the more you have to of design strips. One reference guideline is the Eurocode
think about the design strip layout and make manual (EC2: 4.3.1.1 P(8)): “For slabs, deviations between the
changes. direction of the principal stress and the main reinforcement
of less than 15 degrees may be ignored”.
If there is a lot of repetitive geometry in a floor then it
should not be necessary to use design strips everywhere. This suggests that flat slabs / flat plates should be designed
You should only use as many as required to adequately for two directions that are between 75 and 105 degrees
design the floor. For example, if a floor has many beams of apart, which means the skew angle should not exceed
the same loading, tributary area, span and size then there is fifteen degrees.
no need to use design strips for each similar beam. This is The span segment property Skew Angle enables you to
just as you would not perform hand calculations for each of manipulate span segments such that design strip cross
twenty identical beams. Not withstanding, although slabs sections are normalized in each direction. This is shown in
or beams may appear identical, continuity effects and other figures 21-38 through 21-41.
considerations may have a significant influence and the
results could be different.
It is better to define design strips properly in some critical

areas than to cover the floor with unsuitable strips.
When in doubt, draw a design strip, but keep in mind that

the number of design strips affects the calculation time.
Some engineering judgement is always a good thing.
Keep in mind that any area without strips will not have the
finite elements improved when you regenerate the mesh.
In general, design strips for one span set (latitude or

longitude) should not overlap.
For beam and slab systems, you might consider placing

design strips parallel and in between the beams. This is
because the beam strips only collect the moments and
Figure 21-38 Span segment 2-2 has an angle of 15 degrees. The skew an-
shears over the width of the strip. If the beams are not gle is zero so the cross sections (shown in Figure ) are perpendicular to the
significantly stiffer than the slab, there may be design span segment.
reinforcement required for the slab.
The following sections discuss some situations with

irregular geometry.
Note: See “Miscellaneous tips” on page 99 for some more

tips and hints.
94 RAM Concept
Chapter 21
21.12.2 Effect of tendon components on

design strip cross sections
In many instances the “latitude” and “longitude” tendons
may be detailed and constructed in a non-orthogonal
manner. This is often ignored in hand or strip calculations
but it is a real issue that can affect design criteria such as
service, strength and ductility.
RAM Concept considers the force components of all

tendons that cross a design strip cross section (or a design
section). The following figures show an example.
Figure 21-39 Design strip cross-section
Figure 21-42 A skewed design strip with three design cross sections. The
Figure 21-40 Span segment 2-2 has an angle of 15 degrees. The skew an- latitude tendons are not orthogonal to the longitude tendons.
gle is minus fifteen degrees so the cross sections (shown in Figure 21-41)
are parallel to those of adjacent spans
Figure 21-43 Perspective shows the central cross section is perpendicular

to the latitude tendons which are at the low point. Due to the layout the strip
collects a component of the longitude tendon which is at its high point. This
configuration may cause design issues.
Figure 21-41 Revised design strip cross sections.
RAM Concept 95
Chapter 21
21.12.3 Examples of irregular grids

The following examples show design strip layouts for non-
rectilinear grids.
Example 21-5 Column and middle strips

Figures 21-44 through 21-46 show the process of
generating column and middle strips for an irregular grid.
Figure 21-46 shows design strips, a number of which are

not satisfactory. In particular, the 3-2 span segment strips
do not adequately consider the slab near the “irregular”
columns.
Figures 21-47 through 21-50 show a better solution

enabled with manual modifications.
Figure 21-46 Design strips generated by Concept. Span 3-2 has unsatis-
factory design strips.
Figure 21-44 Irregular column layout
Figure 21-47 Span 2-1, 3-2 and 4-1 deleted
Figure 21-45 Spans generated by Concept.
Figure 21-48 Manually drawn spans (2-1, 3-1, 4-1 and 5-1) after renum-
bering
96 RAM Concept
Chapter 21
Example 21-6 Full panel design strips for an irregular grid

(ACI318 and TR43 post-tension design)
Figure 21-49 Regenerated design strips based on revised spans.
Figure 21-51 Irregular column layout
Figure 21-50 Regenerated design strips after using the “Orient Span
Cross Section” tool.
Figure 21-52 Spans generated by Concept.
Figure 21-53 Design strips generated by Concept. Span 3-2 has unsatis-
factory design strips.
RAM Concept 97
Chapter 21
Figure 21-54 Span 2-1, 3-2 and 4-1 deleted Figure 21-57 Regenerated design strips after using the “Orient Span
Cross Section” tool.
21.12.4 Drawing design strips near walls

There are some considerations for drawing design strips
near walls.
Omission of design strips parallel to walls
Since a wall is a continuous support, there is usually no

need to design a floor over, and parallel to, a wall for
strength.
You may, however, be interested in the minimum

reinforcement requirements and so a design strip could be
warranted.
Strips over or under walls will occasionally have unrealistic

Figure 21-55 Manually drawn spans (2-1, 3-1, 4-1 and 5-1) after renum-
stress peaks as the forces and moments are continually
bering transferred back and forth between the wall elements and
the slab elements. For this reason, some designers
eliminate span segments over and under walls.
Figure 21-58 Column and middle strips with strip omitted over wall.
21.12.5 Changing from PT to RC design

It is quite common for a floor to have a mixture of PT and
Figure 21-56 Regenerated design strips based on revised spans. RC areas. For example, a pour strip (an area with no post-
tensioning that joins two post-tensioned slabs).
98 RAM Concept
Chapter 21
For most codes, PT design rules are different from those for 21.13 Miscellaneous tips
RC. As such, you should use multiple design strip
segments in one span.
Middle strip support widths
Figure 21-59 shows two examples of a slab with tendons
Middle strip support widths are the same as those of the
stopping either side of a pour strip (in gray).
associated column strip. Should you require to use middle
On the left, span segment 2-1 has been generated and strips with a different support width (say, zero), you need to
extends from support to support. This means that the entire manually draw span segments for the column and middle
segment is designed according to the “Consider as Post- strips and use the span boundary tool.
Tensioned” option. If the option is checked, then the pour
strip design is wrong. Span segments that have no width
On the right, span segments 1-1, 1-2(2) and 1-1 (3) have A span segment has zero width if the Span Width Calc is
been drawn manually. The “Consider End x as Support” set to “manual” and some of its length does not have any
options have been unchecked, and support widths set to span boundaries defined.
zero, where end “x” is at the pour strip.
Design strips (span segment strips) with no cross sections
The “Consider as Post-Tensioned” option is checked for 1-
You can specify a design strips’ minimum number of
1 and 1-1(3), but not 1-1(2). The pour strip is thus designed
divisions as zero. Combined with a large maximum
as reinforced, not post-tensioned, concrete. Concept
spacing, the number of cross sections could then be zero.
designs the PT span segments for service stress rules and
checks initial stresses, but not the RC areas. This could be useful in affecting other span segments’ strip
generation, without slowing down the calculations. (The
overall number of cross sections has a significant effect on
calculation time).
For an example of this application, see steps 13 to 15 on

page 291 of Chapter 44, “Mat Foundation Tutorial”.
21.14 A final word on design strips
Figure 21-59 Multiple span segments used to model an RC pour strip.

Design strips are extremely powerful tools, but that is all
they are: tools. It is important that you understand the
Note: You could define the pour strip to have orthotropic calculations that these tools perform, so you can determine
behavior such that it is very flexible in the Y direction. This the appropriateness of the calculation for the situation
is done in the Mesh Input Layer. See “Slab area properties” under consideration, and so you can set the tools’
on page 56 of Chapter 16, “Defining the Structure”. parameters correctly.
RAM Concept 99
Chapter 21
100 RAM Concept

Chapter 22
22 Defining Design Sections
A design section is the equivalent of one design strip cross Bottom Ignore Depth The bottom concrete ignored in
section. You draw design sections manually to supplement flexural and one-way shear design. See “About ignore
design strips. depths” on page 102 for more information on this
important issue.
22.1 Using design sections
There are situations where you may choose to use design

sections rather than design strips. This would include:
• In some areas, you may only require design information
at one cross section rather than for an entire span.
• A design strip may not provide sufficient design infor-
mation.
• A design strip may be inappropriate. For example, a slab
step may not be orthogonal to the span (and design strip)
and you want the reinforcement bars designed perpen- Figure 22-2 Design section properties - Design Parameters
dicular to the step. In this case, you might draw a design
section parallel to the step.
Span Length Used to calculate the following:
• You find it is too difficult to define a design strip for an
• Minimum reinforcement rules for some codes.
area with very complicated structural geometry.
• The upper bound on fps for unbonded tendons based
upon the selected code’s criteria (these criteria often
include a span length parameter).
22.2 Design section properties
Tributary Length This creates a zone over which the
reinforcement required by the design section must be
Design sections have similar properties to design strips. provided (development lengths, if required, are in addition
See “Span segment properties” on page 82 for definitions to this zone).
and explanations.
The zone length on the right side of the design section is
The following properties are unique to design sections: the smaller of these two values:
• TributaryLength/2.0
• (SpanRatio - 0.0) * SpanLength
The zone length on the left side of the design section is the
smaller of these two values:
• TributaryLength/2.0
• (1.0 - SpanRatio) * SpanLength
The intent of the span-ratio-based limit is to restrain the

reinforcement zone to within the span, even if the design
section is at the beginning or end of a span.
Note: The Visible Objects dialog can be used to show the

reinforced zone to be outlined and hatched. The region
Figure 22-1 Design section properties - General displayed also considers all the span ratio implications. The
hatched region does not display before a calc-all.
Top Ignore Depth The top concrete ignored in flexural Span Ratio Determines the location of the design section
and one-way shear design. See “About ignore depths” on relative to supports and midspan. If the ratio is less than
page 102 for more information on this important issue. 0.25 then RAM Concept applies any code rules specific to
supports.
RAM Concept 101

Chapter 22
22.3 Drawing design sections Example 1
A two-way slab thickening that the building code deems

When using design sections it is advisable to draw one set does not comply as a drop panel. That is, a drop cap. You
on the Latitude Design Spans Plan, and the other on the should ignore the incremental thickness of the drop cap
Longitude Design Spans Plan. below the slab. RAM Concept then only uses the drop cap
for punching checks.
Design sections are located by a line that has a start point
and an end point.
To draw a design section:

1 Choose the Design Section tool ( ).
2 Click at the design section start point.
3 Click at the design section end point.
Note: You can use relative coordinates to define exact

lengths. Alternatively, you can draw User Lines to provide
snap points to define exact lengths. Figure 22-3 Two-way slab with drop cap that should be ignored for flex-
ure.
22.4 About ignore depths

Example 2
Design sections use the full concrete section available A beam or slab that supports an upstand that is not an
unless overridden by “Top Ignore Depth” or “Bottom effective part of the concrete section. You should enter an
Ignore Depth”. appropriate “Top Ignore Depth” value.
In many instances, it is inappropriate to use the full
concrete cross-section properties of a design section for
flexural and one-way shear design since some concrete is
not effective.
Note: Design section “ignore depth” settings are the

equivalent of design strip “cross section trimming” settings.
See “Cross Section Trimming” on page 91 of Chapter 21,
“Defining Design Strips” for more information.
22.4.1 When to use ignore depths

It is sometimes obvious when to use ignore depth. Often, Figure 22-4 Beam with upstand to be ignored.
however, engineering judgement is required to determine
the use of ignore depth. Example 3
You should decide if the concrete is effective based on code A beam or slab that deepens abruptly and the full depth of
rules and a practical assessment of the situation. There are the concrete cannot be mobilized for flexure. You should
too many permutations of concrete form to lay down rules, enter an appropriate “Bottom Ignore Depth” value.
and, as such, the following is for discussion purposes only.
Figure 22-5 shows bending moments in a slab
perpendicular to a beam. For such an arrangement you need
22.4.2 Examples of concrete form that should to decide if the slab should be designed for the bending
use ignore depth moment at the face of the beam, or within the beam.
The following are examples of when design sections

should ignore part of the concrete cross-section:
102 RAM Concept

Chapter 22
Figure 22-7 Slab supported by a deep beam that is not fully effective for
slab bending. Ignore depth should be used for the design sections to utilize
a shallower section.
22.4.3 Effect of ignore depth on

reinforcement location
RAM Concept locates reinforcement based upon the covers
and ignore depth settings. You should consider this to
ensure that reinforcement bars are designed at the
appropriate depth.
Figure 22-5 Slab bending moments
If the slab is to be designed for the bending moment at the

face of beam, then it is a matter of locating a design section
within the slab depth.
If the slab is to be designed for the bending moment within

the beam then you should consider the actual depth that can
be mobilized for bending.
Figure 22-8 Using ignore depth to locate reinforcement bars at the correct
elevation.
Figure 22-6 Slab supported by a beam that is effective for slab bending.
22.5 A final word on design sections
Design sections are powerful tools, but that is all they are:
tools. It is important that you understand the calculations
that these tools perform, so you can determine the
appropriateness of the calculation for the situation under
consideration, and so you can set the tools’ parameters
correctly.
RAM Concept 103

Chapter 22
104 RAM Concept

Chapter 23
23 Defining Punching Shear Checks
Punching shear is often a critical consideration when Angle This is the angle of the first ray measured counter-
designing slabs, In particular, post-tensioned slabs are clockwise from the global x-axis.
usually thinner than their reinforced counterparts and hence
punching considerations are even more important. Number of Desired Sections per Zone A zone can be
envisioned as a region outside a column, drop cap, beam,
etc. A column connection in a simple plate will have only
one zone. A column connection with a drop cap will have
23.1 About punching shear checks multiple zones. This property enables Concept to determine
how many sections you want to generate in each of these
“zones”.
RAM Concept can calculate punching failure planes and
the punching shear stresses due to column reactions (Fz, This property can be used to eliminate unwanted sections,
Mx, My). but caution should be used when reducing the desired
number of sections. The sections generated are based upon
RAM Concept is not infallible in its determination of the minimum critical section cross-sectional area, and they
potentially critical sections. For unusual geometries, RAM are not actually analyzed until after they are generated. By
Concept may not check the appropriate section and / or setting this value to 1 you would be likely to get only the
may check inappropriate sections that give higher than most critical section in each zone but this is not guaranteed.
appropriate stress ratios. You should review RAM
Concept’s selections of potentially critical sections and use Edge Treatment This determines how RAM Concept
engineering judgment to decide if RAM Concept’s treats edges and openings.
selections and the application of the ACI 318 model are
An edge treatment of Sector Voids is always conservative.
appropriate.
For columns near a slab edge, however, the Sector Voids
setting stops the critical section before it reaches the slab
edge (at a ray from the column center to the slab edge that
has a length equal to the search radius).
23.2 Punching shear check properties
and options An edge treatment of Failure Planes probably produces
better results for critical sections at edge and corner
locations. This setting, however, requires you to review the
The following explains the general and code specific
results more carefully to ensure that Concept has checked
Punching Shear Check properties and options.
all the appropriate sections.
An edge treatment of Ignore Edges is generally

23.2.1 General unconservative. You may want to try this setting to see if
Concept finds a critical section that it missed with the other
Maximum Search Radius The radius that defines the
settings.
area RAM Concept searches for potential failure locations.
The analysis is conservative when you set a very large Connection Type This determines which column
radius, but this has two detrimental effects: Concept will classification Concept uses for calculating allowable
need to review a larger area of slab and hence take longer stresses.
to check that punching location. More importantly,
Concept will consider slab openings that are far from the A Corner type uses corner column rules (post-tensioning is
column in determining the potentially critical section that ignored).
may result in a smaller critical section than is appropriate.
An Edge type uses edge column rules (post-tensioning is
Cover to CGS The distance that will be subtracted from ignored).
the slab depth in each region to determine the “effective
An Interior type uses interior column rules (Concept
depth” for critical section calculations.
considers the section as post-tensioned if the P/A exceeds
For columns under, this is usually the distance from the top 125 psi).
of the slab to the bottom of the top bar. Concept subtracts
An Auto type determines if the column is corner, edge or
this distance from the slab thickness to determine the “d”
interior type based upon the total void angle around it. If
distance.
the void angle is less than 90 degrees then the column is an
If the depth in any region is smaller than the specified interior type. If the void angle is between 90 and 180
Cover to CGS, the region is treated as a hole.
RAM Concept 105

Chapter 23
degrees then the column is an edge type. If the void angle is 23.2.4 BS 8110 specific options
180 degrees or more then the column is a corner type.
Reinforcement Ratio For specification of “ ρ 1 ” for
See “Column connection type” on page 486 of Chapter 57,
equation 6.47. You should calculate the input value using
“Punching Shear Design Notes” for more information.
the equation in clause 6.4.4 of the EN 1992-1-1:2004 code.
SSR System The stud shear reinforcement system used,
Beta Factor This represents a ratio of the maximum stress
if required, for design. These systems can be edited on the
on a critical section (including shear and moment transfer)
Materials page.
over the maximum stress due to shear only. This option
Align with Rectangular Columns Aligns the punch allows the user to select “Auto Calc”, 1.15 (interior), 1.4
check angle with the rectangular column angle during a (edge), 1.5 (corner), or input any positive value for Beta
“calc all”. directly.
Design SSR if Necessary Generates an SSR design (if The factors for each column condition are taken from
possible) where the unreinforced strength is insufficient. clause 6.4.3 (6) of the EN 1992-1-1:2004 Code and are
meant to be used only when lateral stability does not
Align SSR w/ Punch Check Axis Aligns the SSR with depend upon frame action and where adjacent spans do not
the punch check axis. For example, it is intended to be used differ in length by more than 25%.
when the slab edge is not parallel to the column faces and it
would be preferable to have the rails align with the slab “Auto Calc” uses the model and calculation methods
geometry instead of the column face. described in Chapter 57, “Punching Shear Design Notes”.
Note: This last option is not available for AS3600 as the

SSR are always aligned with the punching check axis.
23.3 Drawing punching shear checks
23.2.2 ACI 318 specific options
You can draw punching shear checks for all columns
Use ACI 421.1R-99 Increased Max Vn Suggestion simultaneously.
Allows the use of a higher maximum ΦV n for SSR design.
To draw punching shear checks:
Use ACI-421.1R-99 Increased Vc Suggestion 1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Punching Checks Plan.
Allows the use of a higher vc value for use in strength 2 Select the Punching Shear Check tool ( ).
computations for SSR design. 3 Fence the columns.
Use ACI-421.1R-99 Increased Max Stud Spacing A circle of the prescribed radius appears at each column
Suggestion Allows higher maximum stud spacings, within the fence.
depending upon the stress levels in the critical sections.
Note: Although ACI 421.1R-99 is an ACI publication, it is

not officially recognized by the ACI 318 standard. As such,
it should only be utilized under the discretion and judgment
23.4 A final word on punching shear
of an Engineer with a full understanding of the provision checks
and its recommendations.
Punching shear checks are extremely powerful tools, but
that is all they are: tools. It is important that you understand
23.2.3 AS3600 specific options the calculations that these tools perform, so you can
Closed Ties In R/S-Axis Torsion Strip Use these determine the appropriateness of the calculation for the
options if you are providing minimum closed ties in the situation under consideration, and so you can set the tools’
torsion strips in accordance with AS3600. Concept does parameters correctly.
not actually design this reinforcement, but uses the
appropriate code provisions in calculating the punching
capacity. You should ensure that this reinforcement is
provided if using these options.
106 RAM Concept

Chapter 24
24 Drawing Reinforcement Bars
Note: Drawing your own reinforcement bars is not • Transverse Individual Bars - single transverse bars
necessary but an advanced feature you may wish to utilize (strirrups/links/ligatures) that are generated from Trans-
once you are experienced with the program. verse Reinforcement
The Reinforcement layer allows you to: • Stud Shear Reinforcement (SSR) Callouts - a fixed
number of SSR rails with a fixed number of studs.
• supplement the Program reinforcement by drawing
actual (User) bars on plans using various tools • SSR Rails - individual rails that are generated from SSR
Callouts.
• change some Program bars to User reinforcement
You can directly create (by drawing) Concentrated
The Reinforcement layer facilitates a production quality Reinforcement and Distributed Reinforcement. You cannot
reinforcement layout. directly create any of the other types of reinforcement.
24.1 Reinforcement bar definitions 24.2 Reinforcement properties
24.1.1 About User and Program

Reinforcement
There are two types of reinforcement bar: Program and
User. All reinforcement is tagged (identified) as one type or
the other.
When performing design calculations, Concept generates

Program reinforcement required in addition to any existing
User reinforcement. In subsequent calculations, Concept
removes all of the Program reinforcement before starting
the calculations.
You can change Program Concentrated Reinforcement to

User Concentrated Reinforcement merely by changing its
tag (in the object properties window). You might do this to
modify Concept's design. When performing subsequent
calculations, Concept only designs reinforcement needed in Figure 24-1 Concentrated rebar properties - General
addition to the reinforcement tagged as User.
You could also change “User” reinforcement to “Program”

reinforcement, but this has no value since Concept removes
all existing program reinforcement when it generates new
“Program” reinforcement.
24.1.2 Reinforcement object types

There are seven object types in the Reinforcement layer:
• Concentrated Reinforcement - a fixed number of bars
over a parallelogram area
• Distributed Reinforcement - a bar spacing applied over
a polygon area.
• Individual Bars - single bars that are generated from
Concentrated and Distributed Reinforcement. Figure 24-2 Distributed rebar properties - General
• Transverse Reinforcement - a fixed number of trans-

verse bars at a fixed spacing.
RAM Concept 107

Chapter 24
Span Set Determines the set the reinforcement belongs to: Skew Reinforcement Extent tool” on page 112 for more
latitude or longitude. information).
Elevation Reference The choices are: Quantity Type The choices are:
• Absolute: the elevation relative to the zero datum. This • Quantity: number of bars
is not recommended other than for very complicated • Spacing: bar spacing
geometry.
• Above Soffit: The elevation is measured from the soffit Number of bars Only editable if Quantity Type is set to
elevation to the center of the bar. Quantity
• Above Surface: The elevation is measured from the Spacing Only editable if Quantity Type is set to Spacing.
surface elevation to the center of the bar. The value is
Orientation The plan angle of the reinforcement
almost always negative
(distributed reinforcement only - see “The Orient
• Top Cover: The elevation is measured from the surface Reinforcement tool” on page 112 for more information).
elevation to the top of the bar. The value is always
positive. Zone Width The width of the concentrated reinforcement
zone.
• Bottom Cover: The elevation is measured from the soffit
elevation to the underside of the bar. The value is always Designed By The choices are:
positive.
• User: Bars drawn by the user
Elevation The distance used with the elevation reference. • Program: Bars calculated and drawn by Concept.
Ending at End 1 The choices are: Note: See “Concentrated and distributed reinforcement
• Straight: callouts” on page 114 for discussion on the second (Presen-
tation) tab.
• 90 Hook:
• 180 Hook:
• Anchored:
24.3 About drawing reinforcement
Ending at End 2 Similar to End 1
Slab Face This is used for (1) graphic display purposes You can draw reinforcement in a number of ways:
(2) design rules. • A group of one or more concentrated reinforcement bars
The choices are: using one of the three Concentrated Reinforcement tools.
• A group of distributed reinforcement bars using one of
• Per Elev. Reference - the default and typical setting
the three Distributed Reinforcement tools
• Top
• Bottom
24.3.1 Expected workflows
• Both
It is expected that you will typically convert the “Program”
• Auto
reinforcement to “User” reinforcement and modify it. One
Note: Special Caution - Reinforcement set to “Auto” face common exception to this might be that you may want to
will not appear on either the “top” or the “bottom” specify a bottom mat of reinforcement. There is no
reinforcement plans. If you use “Auto” face reinforcement, difficulty if you convert some reinforcement and directly
change the default plan settings (or add some plans) to be draw other reinforcement.
certain that all of the reinforcement used is visible on the
plans in your report.
Bar Type The label used to identify the reinforcing bar. 24.4 Drawing concentrated reinforcement
The label is not necessarily the bar size. Reinforcement bar
labels (and their properties) are specified in the Criteria >
Materials. Concentrated reinforcement consists of one or more bars
located within a parallelogram.
Bar Extent Skew The orientation of the bar’s extent line
in degrees (concentrated reinforcement only - see “The
108 RAM Concept

Chapter 24
The parallelogram is initially a rectangle with a default 24.5 Drawing distributed reinforcement
width, but you can use the stretch tool to edit the width and
the skew tool to change the shape.
Distributed reinforcement consists of a group of bars
located within a polygon.
24.4.1 Drawing concentrated reinforcement
You can draw concentrated rebar by specifying the end 24.5.1 Drawing distributed reinforcement
points or specifying the midpoint and one endpoint.
You draw distributed reinforcement within a polygon. This
To draw concentrated reinforcement #1: is done by defining the polygon with mouse clicks or using
the slab perimeter.
1 Select the Concentrated Reinforcement tool ( ).
2 Click at one endpoint. To draw distributed reinforcement #1:
3 Click at the other endpoint. 1 Choose the Distributed Reinf. tool ( ).
Note: See Example 24-1 “Drawing concentrated bottom 2 Click at each polygon vertex consecutively.
bars” on page 110 for more information. 3 Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or
To draw concentrated reinforcement #2:
Note: This creates two objects: a polygon and a
1 Select the Concentrated Reinforcement tool ( ).
reinforcement object that belongs to either the latitude
2 Click at the midpoint. reinforcement layer or longitude reinforcement layer.
3 Click at one endpoint.
Note: Once the file is run you can view the individual bars
Note: See Example 24-2 “Drawing concentrated bottom through the Visible Objects dialog box.
bars by defining the midpoint” on page 110 for more infor-
Note: See Example 24-4 “Drawing distributed bottom
mation.
bars over part of the floor” on page 111 for more infor-
mation.
24.4.2 Drawing concentrated reinforcement To draw distributed reinforcement #2:
in two directions
1 Choose the Distributed Reinf. in Perimeter tool ( ).
You can draw concentrated rebar in two directions by 2 Click somewhere on the slab.
specifying the midpoint and one endpoint.
3 Click at another point to define the orientation of the
To draw concentrated reinforcement in two directions: reinforcement.
1 Select the Concentrated Reinforcement Cross tool Note: This creates two objects: a polygon matching the
slab outline and a reinforcement object that belongs to
( ). either the latitude reinforcement layer or longitude
reinforcement layer.
2 Click at the midpoint.
3 Click at one endpoint. Note: Once the file is run you can view the individual bars.
Note: This creates two reinforcement objects: one that Note: See Example 24-5 “Drawing distributed bottom
belongs to the latitude reinforcement layer and one that bars over the entire floor” on page 111 for more infor-
belongs to the longitude reinforcement layer. mation.
Note: See Example 24-3 “Drawing concentrated bottom To draw distributed reinforcement #3:
bars in two directions” on page 110 for more information. 1 Choose the Distributed Reinf. Cross in Perimeter tool
( ).
2 Click somewhere on the slab.
3 Click at another point to define the orientation of the
reinforcement.
RAM Concept 109

Chapter 24
A polygon appears that is the shape of the slab. Once the Example 24-2 Drawing concentrated bottom bars by defin-
file is run you can view the individual bars. ing the midpoint
Note: This creates three objects: a polygon matching the

slab outline, a reinforcement object that belongs to the
latitude reinforcement layer and a reinforcement object that
belongs to the longitude reinforcement layer.
Note: See Example 24-6 “Drawing a bottom mat over the

entire floor” on page 112 for more information.
24.6 Concentrated and distributed

reinforcement drawing examples
Example 24-1 Drawing concentrated bottom bars
Figure 24-4 Concentrated bars drawn by clicking at points A and B with

the second Concentrated Reinforcement tool.
Example 24-3 Drawing concentrated bottom bars in two

directions
Figure 24-3 Concentrated bars drawn by clicking at points A and B with

the first Concentrated Reinforcement tool.
Figure 24-5 Concentrated bars in two directions drawn by clicking at

points A and B with the Concentrated Reinforcement Cross tool.
110 RAM Concept

Chapter 24
Example 24-4 Drawing distributed bottom bars over part Example 24-5 Drawing distributed bottom bars over the
of the floor entire floor
Figure 24-6 Distributed bar polygon drawn over part of the slab by click- Figure 24-8 Distributed bars polygon drawn over the slab by clicking at
ing at 5 vertices with the Distributed Reinforcement tool. Hatching is points A and B with the Distributed Reinforcement in Perimeter tool.
turned ON. Hatching is turned ON.
Figure 24-7 Individual distributed bars shown via Visible Objects dialog
box. Hatching is turned OFF. Figure 24-9 Individual distributed bars shown via Visible Objects dialog
box. Hatching is turned OFF.
RAM Concept 111

Chapter 24
Example 24-6 Drawing a bottom mat over the entire floor 24.7.1 The Orient Reinforcement tool
This tool allows you to draw a line segment that represents
the desired orientation of selected reinforcement objects’
individual bars.
After you draw this line, Concept rotates any selected

concentrated reinforcement objects, and orients any
distributed reinforcement parallel to the drawn line. The
selected reinforcement creates individual bars of the same
orientation after calculation.
To change the reinforcement orientation:

1 Select the reinforcement object.
2 Choose the Orient Reinforcement tool ( ).
3 Click anywhere on the plan.
4 Click at a location on the plan to create a line parallel to
the desired direction of the reinforcement.
Figure 24-10 Distributed bottom mat polygon drawn over the slab by
clicking at points A and B with the Distributed Reinforcement Cross in Pe- Note: Use snap orthogonal or snap to perpendicular to
rimeter tool. Hatching is turned ON. help with orientation where appropriate
Note: Selecting both reinforcement objects created with

the Concentrated Rebar Cross tool or the Distributed Rebar
Cross in Perimeter tool orientates both reinforcement
objects.
Note: See Example 24-7 “Orientating concentrated

reinforcement” on page 113 for more information.
24.7.2 The Skew Reinforcement Extent tool

This tool allows you to draw a line segment that represents
the desired orientation of selected Concentrated
Reinforcement objects' extent line. This tool allows you to
create parallelogram regions of Concentrated
Reinforcement. Distributed reinforcement cannot be
skewed.
To skew the reinforcement extent

1 Select the concentrated reinforcement object.
Figure 24-11 Individual distributed bars shown via Visible Objects dialog
box. Hatching is turned OFF. 2 Choose the Skew Reinforcement Extent tool ( ).
3 Click anywhere on the plan (but preferably near the
reinforcement object)
24.7 Other reinforcement plan tools 4 Click at a location on the plan to create a line parallel to
the desired extent line.
There are two special tools in the Reinforcement layer that Note: See Example 24-8 “Skewing concentrated
you can use to edit the plan properties of reinforcement. reinforcement” on page 113 for more information.
112 RAM Concept

Chapter 24
Example 24-7 Orientating concentrated reinforcement Example 24-8 Skewing concentrated reinforcement
Figure 24-12 Using the Orient Reinforcement tool to define the line A B
Figure 24-14 Using the Skew Reinforcement tool to define the line A B
parallel to the desired orientation
parallel to the desired skewed ends
Figure 24-13 The reoriented concentrated reinforcement Figure 24-15 The skewed concentrated reinforcement with the extent line
parallel to line AB.
RAM Concept 113

Chapter 24
Example 24-9 Stretching concentrated reinforcement modify so the reinforcement is described per your office
standards.
24.9.1 Concentrated and distributed

reinforcement callouts
Figure 24-16 Using the stretch tool at point A to widen the concentrated
reinforcement parallelogram
Figure 24-18 Concentrated rebar properties - Presentation
Figure 24-17 The stretched concentrated reinforcement
Figure 24-19 Distributed rebar properties - Presentation
24.8 Layout and Detailing Parameters The Concentrated and Distributed Reinforcement format
specifiers use the following key values:
There are five calculation option parameters that influence • $Q - Bar quantity
how Concept lays out and details reinforcement. Refer to
“Reinforcement layout and detailing parameters” on • $F - Bar face
page 127 of Chapter 27, “Calculating Results”. • $B - Bar name
• $L - Bar length
• $U - Bar length units
24.9 Reinforcement Text Formatting:
• $u - Bar spacing units
• $S - Bar spacing
Concentrated Reinforcement, Distributed Reinforcement
and SSR Callouts all have format specifiers that you can • \n - Start new line
114 RAM Concept

Chapter 24
24.9.2 Examples of reinforcement text 24.9.3 SSR Callout

formatting
The SSR Callout format specifiers use the following key
The following examples show generated text for different values:
codes.
• $R - Rail quantity
Example 24-10 ACI 318-05 • $S - Studs per rail
The Concentrated Reinforcement format specifier “$Q $B • $F - First stud spacing

x $L $U $F@$S $u” would generate text on the plan view • $T - Typical stud spacing
such as:
• $N - SSR system name
28 #5 x 15 feet T @ 12.1 inches • $U - Stud spacing units
For the same Concentrated Reinforcement, the format • $S - Stud spacing
specifier ($Q)$Bx$L$F” would generate the text: • \n - Start new line
(28)#5x15T The SSR Callout format specifier “($R)$S@$T First
Spacing = $F $U\n$N” would generate text on the plan
Example 24-11 AS 3600-2001 view such as:
The Concentrated Reinforcement format specifier $Q $B x
(12)8@3 First Spacing = 2.5 inches
$L $U $F@$S $u” would generate text on the plan view
such as: 3/8” SSR
28 N16 x 4.57 m T @ 307 mm For the same SSR Callout, the format specifier “$R rails
with $S studs” would generate the text:
For the same Concentrated Reinforcement, the format
specifier “($Q)$Bx$L$F” would generate the text: 12 rails with 8 studs
(28)N16x4.57T
Example 24-12 BS 8110 : 1997 and IS456-2000

24.10 About SSR callouts and SSR rails:
The Concentrated Reinforcement format specifier $Q $B x
$L $U $F@$S $u” would generate text on the plan view
Concept generates SSR Callouts and SSR Rails from the
such as:
results of its punching shear calculations. This generated
28 T16 x 4.57 m T @ 307 mm reinforcement is for display purposes only - it is not used in
calculations and cannot be changed to “user”
For the same Concentrated Reinforcement, the format reinforcement.
specifier “($Q)$Bx$L$F” would generate the text:
(28)T16x4.57T
RAM Concept 115

Chapter 24
116 RAM Concept

Chapter 25
25 Defining Tendons
Note: You should bypass this chapter if you are designing 25.2 Tendon properties
a structure with only bar reinforcement.
There is no unique quantity or layout of post-tensioning Before you begin drawing tendons, specify the default
that provides a satisfactory PT design. This is particularly properties for the tool(s) you will use. The default values
true with partial prestress design where the emphasis is on are set in the Default Properties dialog box. Double click
strength, deflection and crack control rather than
one of the tendon drawing tools (Half Span Tendon ( ),
hypothetical service stresses.
Full Span Tendon ( ), Half Span Tendon Panel ( ), or
Historically, many 2D programs have used allowable
service stresses to drive their algorithms for providing a PT Full Span Tendon Panel ( )) to edit its properties.
solution. This is fast losing favor; some codes have all but
abandoned using (hypothetical) service stresses as a design
Note: Setting the default properties for one tendon
drawing tool sets properties for all the tendon drawing
criterion, and other codes (such as ACI 318) are moving in
tools.
that direction. Some computer generated tendon layouts are
not practical for real design. The following is a list of RAM Concept tendon properties:
Whereas you expect a 2D program to help provide a PT System The label used to identify the PT system for
workable tendon design based upon spans, sections and each tendon. The label is not necessarily the size and type
loads, the possible randomness of supports makes this of strand. The Materials Specification defines the PT
extremely difficult in 3D. system properties. It is possible to mix systems in a single
tendon layer.
Thus, in RAM Concept, it is necessary for you to define the
tendons by drawing them in plan and specifying parameters Strands per Tendon Specifies the number of strands in
such as profile and number of strands. For guidance, you the selected tendon(s). It need not be an integer value.
should use one of the following for your first estimate:
In Concept and in post-tensioned construction a “strand” is
• your experience the unit of post-tensioning reinforcement, similar to a
• a preliminary run with Strip Wizard reinforcing bar being the unit of RC reinforcement. In
practice, the PT industry defines a tendon as a group of
• a logical guess based upon precompression (P/A)
strands that share a common anchorage. The “group” may
considerations
be just one strand, as is the case with most unbonded
• a random guess (correctly drawn design strips flag systems, or “monostrand”.
incorrect guesses, and you can use “The Auditor” for help
in iterating) While the total number of strands in Concept and the real
structure must match, the grouping of strands into tendons
need not be the same in Concept as in the real structure. It
is usually not necessary to model each real tendon as a
25.1 Using the latitude and longitude Concept tendon - fewer Concept tendons (with a larger
tendon layers number of strands per tendon) are often used. An exception
is for specific code rules that require a deduction in shear
area for duct size. In those situations you should specify the
RAM Concept has two layers for tendons called latitude correct duct size and number of strands per tendon.
and longitude.
For example, if you model six 4-strand ducts containing 2
By using Concept’s two tendon layers, you can separate strands each, as three 4-strand ducts containing 4 strands
tendons into two groups. Separating orthogonal tendons each, Concept considers the correct number of strands (12),
allows for easier editing and a clearer presentation. but only three of the six ducts.
You could also separate PT systems (say, bonded and Profile (Profile at end 1 and Profile at end 2) The
unbonded tendons) on the two layers. tendon profile is the vertical distance between the floor
soffit and the centroid of the tendon’s strands. Another
Note: Latitude and longitude are just names. You could name for profile is “cgs” (center of gravity of strand).
draw all tendons, which might be at various plan angles, on
one plan. Note: The cgs is not the same as mid-depth of a bonded
tendon’s duct.
RAM Concept 117

Chapter 25
The dimension from the floor soffit (at that exact plan • A number of tendons one segment at a time using the
location) to the cgs is the profile point dimension. Thus, if a Half Span Tendon Panel tool.
profile point is located over a slab thickening (drop cap, • A number of tendons one span at a time using the Full
beam etc.) then the thickening should be taken into Span Tendon Panel tool.
account. Concept does not use dimensions to the underside
of duct, or cover, to determine profiles. You use these tools in different situations. You might find
drawing one tendon and then copying it is quicker than
The path of a tendon along with the number of strands using the polyline and panel tools.
determines the forces the tendon exerts on the concrete.
Profile points (that are usually the tendon high and low
points) define this path. If necessary, you can introduce
intermediate profile points. 25.4 Drawing single tendons
Tendons are comprised of segments. For elevated floors,
each segment has a high point (end 1) and a low point (end The following instructions are relevant for elevated floors
2). For mats, the reverse is generally true. where the tendon has a high point at supports and a low
point near midspan. For mats, the reverse is generally true.
Most spans have a tendon with two segments. Cantilevers
and some spans have tendons with one segment
Selections should consider cover and load balancing. 25.4.1 Drawing a half-span tendon
Profiles typically vary according to span lengths.
You might use the half-span tendon tool for cantilevers and
Inflection Point Ratio Determines the distance, x, from short end spans. For such uses, the Profile at End 2 value
end 1 to the point where the tendon curvature changes sign. would commonly be half the slab thickness or the beam
The inflection point ratio is the ratio of x to the distance centroid dimension.
from end 1 to end 2. A value of 0.2 places the inflection
point 10% of the span distance from end 1 if end 2 is at To draw a half-span tendon:
midspan. This is a commonly used value. 1 Select the Half Span Tendon tool ( ).
Note: An inflection point ratio of zero results in a simple 2 Click at the tendon high point.
parabola. 3 Click at the tendon low point.
Harped Specifies the tendon segment as having a straight Note: The order of mouse clicks is very important when
profile (as opposed to a parabolic profile). drawing half-span tendons because the tool measures the
inflection point from the high point (end 1).
Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads
If two tendon segments in one span have different values

for end 1 then the Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance 25.4.2 Drawing a full-span tendon
loads option moves the low point in plan to equilibrate the
You typically use the full-span tendon tool for conventional
uplift during an analysis calculation.
spans.
Note: Do not select this option when the end 1and end 2
To draw a full-span tendon:
profiles are at the same elevation. A segment with such
profiles would have zero uplift and so the formulation does 1 Select the Full Span Tendon tool ( ).
not work. 2 Click at the two tendon high points. The low point (End
2) automatically locates at the midpoint of the tendon.
Note: The low point can be adjusted with the Stretch tool
25.3 About drawing tendons ( ) or the “Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance
loads” option in the Tendon Properties dialog box.
You can draw tendons in a number of ways:
• A single tendon one segment at a time using the Half 25.4.3 Drawing a multi-span tendon with the
Span Tendon tool (typically used for cantilevers). tendon polyline
• A single tendon one span at a time using the Full Span
Tendon tool. The Tendon Polyline tool ( ) allows you to draw a series
of full span tendons with fewer mouse clicks.
• A single tendon with numerous spans using the Tendon
Polyline tool.
118 RAM Concept

Chapter 25
To draw a tendon polyline:

1 Select the Tendon Polyline tool ( ).
2 Click a series of tendon high points. The low points (End
2) automatically locate at the midpoint of high points.
3 Right-click after clicking the last high point.
4 Click Enter
25.5 Drawing multiple tendons
You can draw a group of tendons in one operation with the

tendon panel tools. You designate the panel to lay out the
tendons, along with the desired tendon spacing, and RAM
Concept draws the tendons.
The drawing process requires you to draw the panel points

sequentially in a clockwise or counter-clockwise manner to
form a quadrilateral.
25.5.1 Tendon panel layout options

Layout The choices are Parallel and Splayed.
Figure 25-2 Tendons with splayed layout and spacing not to exceed five
feet.
Tendon Spacing The choices are Fixed, Equal and Auto

Connect.
“Fixed” draws tendons at exactly the specified spacing

distance apart. It is not available with splayed tendons.
“Equal (not to exceed maximum)” draws tendons an equal

distance apart that is at most the spacing value.
“Auto connect (based on last edge)” draws tendons

connected to the profile points on the last edge of the
tendon panel area.
Skip Start Tendon / Skip End Tendon Omits edge

tendons.
Figure 25-1 Tendons with parallel layout and spacing not to exceed five
feet.
RAM Concept 119

Chapter 25
2 Click at the tendon high and low points of the first tendon
in the tendon panel area.
3 Click at the tendon low and high points of the opposite
edge of the tendon panel area.
The Tendon Panel dialog box appears after the fourth click.
4 Select options (see discussion above).
To draw a Full-Span Tendon Panel:

1 Select the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ).
2 Click at the tendon high points of the first tendon in the
tendon panel area.
3 Click at the tendon high points of the opposite edge of the
tendon panel area (following a clockwise or counter-
clockwise direction).
The Tendon Panel dialog box appears after the fourth click.
4 Select options (see discussion above).
Note: A low point (End 2) automatically locates at the

midpoint of each tendon.
Figure 25-3 Tendons after Auto Connect.

25.6 Editing tendons
As with any object, you can edit tendons after they are
drawn.
25.6.1 Calc profile tool

You can adjust profiles manually or use the Calc Profile
tool ( ) for automatic adjustment.
Too much uplift in a tendon can cause deflection reversals

that may crack the slab. For this and other reasons, it is a
good idea to have the amount of uplift or load balance
somewhat consistent from span to span.
To edit a tendon based on uplift:

1 Select a tendon segment.
2 Click the Calc Profile tool ( ).The Calc Tendon
Profile dialog box appears and reports the current balance
load.
3 Input the desired balance load (values are typically
negative) in the Calc Tendon Profile dialog box and click
Calc.
The low point (end 2) adjusts to provide the desired uplift

Figure 25-4 Tendons after Auto Connect.
You can select two segments in the same span and Concept
To draw a Half-Span Tendon Panel: calculates the low point based on average uplift
1 Select the Half Span Tendon Panel tool ( ). It is generally not necessary to balance exactly the same
amount of load in each span. It is not advisable to have an
120 RAM Concept

Chapter 25
excessive number of different low points. Manually 25.7 About jacks

rounding the profile values can produce a more practical
design.
RAM Concept calculates the force losses in a tendon if you
If the desired balance load is too high then Concept could draw jacks at live (stressing) ends. If you draw a jack at
calculate a negative profile that causes an error when each end of a tendon then it is double end stressed. If only
calculating the results. one jack is drawn then the other end of the tendon is a dead
end. If you draw a single jack on a tendon layer then every
Note: Concept does not check cover violations tendon on that layer must have at least one jack attached.
Concept uses the relevant value of fse (specified in the

25.6.2 Change profiles tool Materials criteria page) as the effective stress for any
tendon without a jack.
When a plan viewing one of the tendon layers is active,
Concept adds a Change Profiles items to the Tools menu.
This menu item allows you to change all tendon profiles

with a given value to a new value. This can be very useful 25.8 Jack properties
in circumstances such as change slab or beam depths.
Set the default jack properties in the Default Jack
To change the profile of a number of tendons:
Properties dialog box by double clicking the Jack tool
1 Open a plan from the Latitude Tendon or Longitude
Tendon layer. ( ). You can choose to ignore the jack property values in
the Jack Properties dialog and instead use the PT System
2 Choose > Tools > Change Profiles. values.
The Change Tendon Profiles dialog box appears. The following is a list of jack properties:
3 Enter the profile value that you wish to change.
Jacking Stress The stress in the strand at the jack at
4 Enter the new profile value. jacking.
5 Uncheck either tendon layer that you do not want edited.
Anchor Friction Coefficient Loss of stress due to
6 Uncheck either end number that you do not want edited, friction in the anchorage. It is a fraction with no units. You
and click OK. would enter a 2% loss as 0.02. Most PT suppliers
recommend a value of zero for unbonded tendons. You
might consult with a local PT supplier regarding bonded
tendons.
Wobble Friction Coefficient Friction calculations use

this property (k) to estimate losses due to accidental
curvature (in the horizontal and vertical planes). It is the
product of the angle friction coefficient and the accidental
angular change per unit length.
Note: Some engineering communities (Australia in

particular) use a definition of wobble coefficient that is the
accidental angular change per unit length. These commu-
nities can calculate the wobble coefficient that Concept
uses, k, with the following relationship: k = AngularWob-
bleCoefficient * mu.
Angle Friction Coefficient Loss due to deliberate

curvature (in the horizontal and vertical planes). Most
designers know it as mu.
Figure 25-5 Change tendon profiles tool
Seating Distance The distance that the wedges recede
into the anchorage. This occurs when the field operator
releases the tension in the jack.
Long Term Losses The sum of losses such as creep and

shrinkage of concrete, and relaxation of strand. It also
RAM Concept 121

Chapter 25
includes the loss due to elastic shortening of the concrete To draw tendon jack(s):
even though it is a short-term loss. 1 Select the Jack tool ( ).
2 Click at opposite corners of a rectangle encompassing the
tendon live ends.
25.9 Drawing the jacks Note: You can delete a single jack by double clicking it. To
delete multiple jacks, consider making all objects except the
jacks invisible, then select and delete the jacks.
You draw jacks with the Jack tool ( ) by clicking a
rectangle around the stressed ends of the tendons.
122 RAM Concept

Chapter 26
26 Using Live Load Reduction
RAM Concept can automatically perform live load 2 Choose the live load reduction code, as shown in Figure
reduction calculations on columns, punching checks, 26-1.
design strip segments and design sections per the
requirements of the selected live load reduction code.
26.1 About Live Load Reduction
Most design codes allow the design of members supporting

large areas to ignore a fraction of the live load effects on
the member. This “live load reduction” is allowed because
the probability of all of a large supported area being
simultaneously fully loaded is small. While each code has
its own rules, the common approach is that the larger the
supported area, the larger the allowed reduction, up to a Figure 26-1 Calc Options Window
limit.
26.4 Live Loading Types

26.2 Live Load Reduction Options
RAM Concept allows four different live loading types.
RAM Concept currently allows six different live load These types are affected by live load reduction in different
reduction calculation options: ways, depending upon the design code. The types are:
ASCE 7-02 Reduction using ASCE 7-02, section 4.8. Live (Reducible) Loading Standard live load reduction
is performed
IBC 2003 Reduction using IBC 2003, section 1607.9.
Live (Unreducible) Loading No live load reduction is
UBC 1997 Reduction per UBC 1997, section 1607.5. performed
AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Reduction per AS/NZS 1170.1, Live (Storage) Loading Special “storage” live load
section 3.4.2. reduction is performed if allowed in the specified code.
BS 6399-1:1996 Reduction per BS 6399, sections 6.1 Live (Roof) Loading No live load reduction is
through 6.3. performed.
None No live load reduction is performed. These loading types are specified in the Loadings window.
See section 10.2 though section 10.6 of Chapter 10,
“Specifying Loadings” for more information.
26.3 Setting the Live Load Reduction Note: Live (Roof) Loading is reducible in the RAM Struc-
Code tural System, but not in RAM Concept.
You choose the live load reduction code in the Calc

Options.The default live load reduction code is “None”, 26.5 Live Load Reduction Parameters
causing no reductions to be used.
To set the live load reduction code: RAM Concept uses up to six parameters to determine the
allowed reduction factors:
1 Choose Criteria > Calc Options
Loading type - Only certain loading types may be
reduced (as is discussed above)
Member type - Most codes have special reduction rules

for certain member types (such as columns)
RAM Concept 123

Chapter 26
Maximum allowed reduction - The user may specify a • Click the Live Load Reduction tab
maximum reduction value for each member.
• Check the Use Specified LLR Parameters box
Number of levels supported - Most codes consider the • Set the values for LLR Levels, Trib Area, and
number of levels supported when calculating the allowed Influence Area.
reductions. If RAM Concept's automatic calculation of
5 Click OK.
areas is used, then the number of levels supported is
assumed to be one.
Tributary area - Most codes use the tributary area of the

member as the primary live load reduction parameter.
Influence area - RAM Concept has options for two codes

that use the influence area of the member as the primary
live load reduction parameter.
RAM Concept calculates the last three parametric values.

You can view the values on plan as described in “To view
the column element LLR results” and “To view the latitude
design strip LLR results” on page 131.
You can override the calculation by specifying the

parameters’ values. The next section describes how to edit
these values.
26.6 Specifying Live Load Reduction

Parameters
Figure 26-2 Live Load Reduction Properties
You can specify live load reduction values for columns,
punching checks, design strip segments and design
sections.
26.7 Implementation of Live Load
To specify overriding values for number of levels supported, Reduction
tributary area, and influence area:
1 Open the appropriate plan
See Chapter 48, “Live Load Reduction Notes” for
2 Select the object(s) information on RAM Concept’s implementation of live
3 Choose Edit > Selection properties load reduction.
4 In the Default Properties dialog box (see Figure 26-2):
124 RAM Concept

Chapter 27
27 Calculating Results
You generally calculate results many times during the The slider on the left side of the Calc dialog box determines
modeling and design process. You can calculate as soon as the level to which Concept performs the calculations. The
elements have been generated (e.g. self-weight deflection) options are:
or wait until modeling is close to finished.
Through analysis Calculations are performed up to and
It is conceivable that you would not calculate results until including the global slab analysis (slab moments
all tendons, loads and design strips are drawn. It makes deflections, etc.) and the strip and section forces.
sense, however, to “run” the file during modeling to check
for errors. That way you could avoid repeating the same Through design Concept performs the design of strips,
modeling error. sections and punching shear checks, in addition to all the
Through analysis calculations.
Through layout Concept performs the layout of program

reinforcement on the Reinforcement layer, in addition to all
27.1 Calculating the results the Through design calculations.
All Concept performs the detailing of program

You can calculate all or some of the results with or without
reinforcement into individual bars (viewable in
a review of the calculation options.
perspectives), in addition to all the Through layout
calculations.
27.1.1 Calculating all of the results The checkboxes on the right side of the Calc dialog
window provide options on how Concept performs the
To calculate results: calculations. The options are:
1 Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All.
Skip warnings Optional warnings do not stop the
Modeling errors are common and you may encounter error calculations, but are added as notes to the Calc Log. This
messages when calculating results. If the file runs setting is off by default.
successfully without errors, the Calc All icon becomes
grayed-out. If errors occur then the calculator does not Calculate only out-of-date items Existing calculation
become grayed-out. See “About analysis errors” on results are not replaced by new calculations unless Concept
page 127 for more information. detects that the existing calculations are out-of-date. This
setting is on by default.
Warnings invalidate calculations Previous

27.1.2 Partially calculating the results calculation warnings are considered to invalidate their
associated results, causing the re-calculation of the item
To partially calculate results:
that caused the warning. This setting is on by default.
1 Click Calc Partial ( ), or choose Process > Calc Partial.
The dialog box shown in Figure 27-1.

27.1.3 Calculation options
You can review and change the calculation options.
To access the Calc Options:

1 Choose Criteria > Calc Options.
The calc options dialog box opens.
Figure 27-1 Calc dialog box
RAM Concept 125

Chapter 27
Live load reduction The applicable loading code.
See Chapter 26, “Using Live Load Reduction”, for

information on the loading code.
27.1.6 Zero tension iteration options

If a mat is flexible or there are large overturning loads then
the springs may initially be resisting tension. You can
reduce this tension by iteration.
Zero tension iterations use an “accelerator” factor to make

convergence faster. An accelerator value of 1 results in no
acceleration, while a value that is too large may result in
wild oscillations instead of convergence. RAM Concept
calculates the accelerator value as follows:
accelerator = (Tj / Ti)power ≤ maxAccelerator

Figure 27-2 Calc options dialog box
where
The following describes the calculation options:
Tj = the tension force offset in iteration j (j = i+1)
Ti = the tension force offset in iteration i

27.1.4 General options
power = the user-controlled “Accelerator Power” (typically
Auto-stabilize structure in X- and Y-directions
1.0)
Auto-stabilization introduces a small horizontal brace for
structures that have no horizontal restraint. This is only maxAccelerator = the user-controlled maximum allowed
suitable for structures with no external horizontal loads. acceleration (typically 1.5)
Create viewable self-dead loading This setting Iterations to use The number of iterations used in
controls whether RAM Concept creates loads that are calculations. The higher the number of iterations, the closer
viewable in plans and perspectives for the self-dead the tension is to zero.
loading. This setting has no effect on the actual loading
calculations. You would normally leave this unchecked. Accelerator Power The power in the above formula;
typically this is 1.
Include supports above slab in self-dead loading
This includes the weight of supports (columns and walls) Max. Acceleration The maximum allowed acceleration.
as loads. You should consider that Concept bases punching
shear calculations at columns below on the total column
reaction that includes any loads applied directly above. 27.1.7 Effective curvature ratio options
Include tendon component in punch check RAM Concept calculates an effective curvature ratio
reaction This includes the vertical component of the (ECR) at every cross section:
tendon force within the punch zone (which often reduces
ECR = Ce / Cg
the punch check reaction). See “Contribution from the
Vertical Component of Prestress” on page 484 of Chapter Where
57, “Punching Shear Design Notes” for more information.
Ce = the effective cross section curvature
27.1.5 Code options Cg = the gross section curvature
Design The applicable design code. RAM Concept calculates Ce by the approximate formula:
You can switch design codes during the design process. Ce = (kc BSR Cg) + ((1 – BSR) Cccs)
Note that switching codes does not automatically change
the load factors. See “Rebuilding load combinations” on where
page 35 for information on changing code specific load
factors.
126 RAM Concept

Chapter 27
kc = the concrete design creep factor (often 3.35) = total not use this rounding length is where both ends of a
strain / elastic strain reinforcement callout are not straight (they are hooked or
anchored).
Note: ACI 209 reports the value of 3.35 as an average
creep value. RAM Concept files adopt this value as a Bar End Cover Concept uses this value when detailing
default. both user and program reinforcement. Bar ends - except for
bar ends with anchors - are always pulled back from slab
BSR = Branson’s Stress Ratio edges by this amount.
Cccs = the cross section curvature considering cracking,
creep and shrinkage.
See Chapter 47, “Section Design Notes” for further 27.2 About analysis errors
explanation.
Two types of errors can occur during calculation: fatal and
Creep factor kc as defined above.
non-fatal. RAM Concept generates an Analysis Error
Shrinkage strain The design shrinkage value used to message if an error occurs.
determine long-term curvature in cross sections. If a fatal error occurs, analysis cannot continue. You must
correct the problem, then recalculate. For example, if the
structure is unstable then Concept cannot triangularize the
27.1.8 Reinforcement layout and detailing stiffness matrix.
parameters
After non-fatal error occurs, you can choose whether to
There are five parameters that influence how Concept lays continue the analysis calculation or not. For example, if a
out and details reinforcement. point load is not located on the structure, you can do one of
Three of the parameters are layout “cost” values that affect the following:
Concept's priorities when laying out program • continue the analysis and ignore the point load
reinforcement. They have no effect on user reinforcement.
• fix the problem and continue calculation
The cost parameters are: • stop the analysis
Bar Length Cost When this value is increased Concept
gives a higher priority to minimizing the weight of the
reinforcement. This also causes Concept to create a larger
number of callouts.
27.3 Recalculating
Bar Group Length Cost When this value is increased

Some or all of the calculation analysis information
Concept gives a higher priority to minimizing the total
becomes out-dated when you edit the model. Click Calc All
length of all of the callouts summed together. This also
causes Concept to use more reinforcement than necessary ( ) to run a new analysis calculation. If the Calc All
in some areas.
option is grayed-out ( ), the analysis results are current.
Bar Callout Cost When this value is increased Concept
When you recalculate, the analysis starts from the point
gives a higher priority to minimizing the total number of
where the information is no longer valid. For example, if
callouts. This also causes Concept to use more
you were to add a load, it would not affect the stiffness
reinforcement than necessary in some areas, and may cause
matrix. The recalculation would start with the analysis of
Concept to provide reinforcement where none is required.
loads and then move on to design. If you were to edit the
Using the default values for these three cost parameters concrete elements however, the calculation would start
usually results in acceptable program reinforcement from the beginning.
layouts. However, you may want to try adjusting these
parameters if you want Concept to arrive at different
layouts.
27.4 Reviewing the calc log
The other two parameters are as follows:
Bar Rounding Length Concept lays out the program After RAM Concept calculates results, you can review the
reinforcement with lengths that are a multiple of this value. calc log to check for detected errors.
The only instance where the program reinforcement does
RAM Concept 127

Chapter 27
To open the Calc Log: enveloping are quite efficient and so do not slow down the
1 Choose Report > Calc Log. calculations very much. You could, however, speed up the
calculation time by eliminating load patterns and setting
alternate envelope factors to the same as load factors in the
Load Combinations window (Choose Criteria > Load
27.5 Decreasing calculation time Combo to open the Load Combinations window).
SSR Design
The time it takes RAM Concept to calculate results is
dependent upon a number of parameters. You have control Stud shear reinforcement design adds significantly to the
over some of these parameters. calculation time. You might consider delaying the drawing
of punching checks until most of the design is close to
Desired Element Size finish.
The time to analyze the stiffness matrix is a function of the Detailed Section Analysis
number of finite element nodes. You can speed up the
analysis time by using larger finite elements for A cracked section analysis takes significant time. If you are
preliminary work. This means specifying a large Desired not interested in these results or they are not appropriate
Element Size when generating the mesh. then you can turn the detailed section analysis off.
Design Strip “Min Number of Divisions” and “Max Division To turn off Detailed Section Analysis:
Spacing” 1 Choose Criteria > Design Rules.
The calculation time is a function of the number of span 2 Uncheck the Include detailed section analysis boxes.
segment strip cross sections and design sections on the
slab. Each span segment strip with “n” internal divisions
produces at least “n+1” design cross sections; more if the
maximum spacing governs. You can speed up the analysis
time by using a small number of divisions and large
maximum spacing for preliminary design.
Enveloping
Load patterns and alternate envelope factors produce

additional calculations. The Concept algorithms for
128 RAM Concept

Chapter 28
28 Viewing the Results
RAM Concept produces a large volume of results from the these plans by editing the visible objects and plots. Keep in
model analysis. mind that this may void or make irrelevant some of the
instructions below.
If you take the time to understand how Concept calculates
results (and their accessibility), Concept can be a much
more powerful tool in your workplace. 28.2.1 Viewing reinforcement results
RAM Concept stores the envelope of all required
reinforcement for all rule set designs in the Design Status
28.1 Type of results folder. There are a number of plans available to show
different reinforcement. The names of reinforcement plans
in the default new file setup match the visible
You can view the results generated via text tables, plans,
reinforcement.
and perspectives on layers of the following types:
• Loading To view reinforcement
• Load Combination 1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Reinforcement Plan.
• Rule Set Design If this plan shows more information than you require,
• Design Status consider using an alternate plan such as the Longitude
Bottom Reinforcement Plan.
To locate a particular result, you need to know on which
layer it belongs. Only that layer contains the plans, To view longitudinal direction bottom reinforcement
perspectives and text tables that show those results. For 1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Longitude Bottom
example, you find the Live Loading: Deflection Plan on the Reinforcement Plan.
Live Loading layer, but the service deflection is in the
Service LC layer. To view a reinforcement plot
1 Choose a reinforcement plan.
2 Choose View > Plot ( ).
28.2 Viewing frequently used results The Plot dialog box appears with the Section Design
dialog.
In general, using plans is the most useful way to view 3 Check the Active box.
results. Most results of interest relate to the following:
4 Select a reinforcement radio button.
• reinforcement quantities
5 Enter the Min Frame # and Max Frame #, and click OK.
• status
• deflections
28.2.2 Viewing status
• support reactions
It is possible for a concrete member not to comply with
• precompression
code irrespective of the reinforcement provided. For
• load balance example, there is a limit on how much shear a member can
• bending moment contours resist. RAM Concept reports a violation when the shear
exceeds the limit.
• section stresses (for some codes)
Status refers to code violations. When a design strip
• punching shear
complies with all code rules in a rule set design then its
• bearing pressures status is “OK”. If there are violations then the status is
“Failed” or “Exceeded” (depending on the rule) and RAM
This section explains how to find such results. Concept identifies the code rule.
Note: When you create a new file without using a template, Concept stores the envelope of status for all rule set designs
the file has RAM Concept’s default new file setup. The in the design summary layer folder.
default new file setup provides preconfigured plans to show
some of the results in an organized way. You can change
RAM Concept 129

Chapter 28
To view the status To view the strip-based long term deflection for AS3600
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Status Plan. 1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Max Service Design
> L.T. Deflection Plan.
Note: There is no consideration of deflection limits in the
status report.
28.2.4 Viewing support reactions
28.2.3 Viewing deflections Support reaction plans are available by default for most
loadings and some load combinations.
You may be interested in a number of different deflection
plans. Usually these are for vertical deflection but RAM Filtering can make trivial reactions invisible.
Concept does calculate lateral deflections and hence these
are viewable. To view self-weight reactions:
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Self-Dead Loading >
All deflection intensity and contour plots use uncracked
Reactions Plan.
section (Igross) results and do not consider cracking (unless
the load factors have been increased for this purpose). To view live load reactions:
Note: Intensity and contour plots are accessed via the plot 1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live Loading > Reactions
“Slab” tab. Plan.
Deflection results that do consider cracking are available To view dead load reactions:
via plots that use the Section Analysis tab and L.T. 1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > All Dead LC >
Deflection plot. Reactions Plan.
Such a plot is shown by default in new files in either Rule
To view factored load reactions:
Set Designs > Service Design > L.T. Deflection Plan or
Rule Set Designs > Max Service Design > L.T. Deflection 1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC >
Plan (depending on the code). Reactions Plan.
Note: You could change these plans with the plot setting
such that the plot is no longer consistent with the plan name. 28.2.5 Viewing post-tensioning
As such, changing the plot is discouraged. precompression (P/A)
See Chapter 56, “Estimating deflections” for more Precompression plans can be useful for viewing the level of
information. tendon prestress and the effect of restraining supports. The
Note: “Slab” (identified by the plot tab) deflection plots default plans are for the x and y directions.
are available for loadings and load combinations. “Section
To view the precompression in the x-direction
Analysis” (identified by the plot tab) deflection plots are
available for rule sets. 1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Balance Loading > Fx
Precompression Plan.
To view live loading deflection
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live Loading > Deflection
Plan.
28.2.6 Viewing balanced load percentages
You can view the percentage of load that is balanced by the
To view dead loading deflection
post-tensioning within design strips.
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > All Dead LC >
Deflection Plan. To view the balanced load percentages on the latitude design
strips plan
To view service deflection 1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Strips
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Service LC > Plan
Deflection Plan. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ).
To view the strip-based long term deflection for ACI318 or 3 Check the Balanced Load Percentages box, and click
BS8110 OK.
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Note: See “Calculating the balanced load percentages”
L.T. Deflection Plan. on page 315 for more information.
130 RAM Concept

Chapter 28
28.2.7 Viewing bending moment contours To view the punching shear status
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Punching Shear Status
Bending moment contour plans can be useful for Plan.
understanding the flexural behavior of complicated floors.
The Bending Moment Distribution tool ( ) increases the
Note: “USR” is unreinforced stress ratio
usefulness of the plan. Note: “RSR” is reinforced stress ratio
To view the factored moments about the x-axis Note: “CTSR” is closed ties stress ratio. This is only
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC > available for AS3600. See “The AS 3600 Punching Shear
Mx Plan. Model” on page 491 of Chapter 57, “Punching Shear
Design Notes”.
To view the punching shear SSR

28.2.8 Viewing section stresses
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan.
Some codes have concrete stress limits for post-tensioned
floors. You may want to know these stresses for the Initial
Service Design and Service Design. Usually you want to 28.2.10 Viewing live load reduction results
view stresses based upon the design strips rather than
contours, as the design process rarely uses peak stresses You can view live load reduction results for each
derived from contours. “member” (columns, punching checks, design strip
segments and design sections) and some loadings.
To view the strip-based initial top stresses
To view the column element LLR results
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Initial Service
Design > Top Stress Plan. 1 Choose Layers > Element > Slab Summary Plan.
To view the strip-based initial bottom stresses
3 Check the LLR Parameters box, and click OK.
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Initial Service
Design > Bottom Stress Plan. To view the latitude design strip LLR results
To view the strip-based service top stresses 1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Latitude Design Strip
Plan.
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design >
Top Stress Plan. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ).
3 Check the LLR Parameters box, and click OK.
To view the strip-based service bottom stresses
Bottom Stress Plan. 28.2.11 Viewing soil bearing pressures
Note: If too much information is visible then edit the plot. Files created with “Mat foundation” checked in the New
You could make the capacities invisible, or limit the range File dialog box have bearing pressure plans provided.
of strip numbers
To view live loading soil bearing pressure
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live Loading > Soil
28.2.9 Viewing punching shear results Bearing Pressure Plan.
RAM Concept checks punching (or two-way) shear for the To view service soil bearing pressure
appropriate code. It calculates the stresses at each vertex of
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Service LC >
a potential failure plane and compares the calculated
Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
stresses to allowable values.
Note: You can add soil bearing pressure plans to files. See
“Creating new result plans” on page 132.
RAM Concept 131

Chapter 28
28.3 Viewing other results 28.3.3 Creating new result plans

You can create new plans for results that are not available
There are times when the result you seek is not visible on in the plans in the default new file setup. See “Creating new
the default plans. The following describes how to show plans” on page 11 and “Creating new perspectives” on
such results. page 11 for more information on how to create new plans
and perspectives.
28.3.1 Changing which result objects are The following example demonstrates creating a Service LC
visible reactions plan:
• Choose Layers > New Plan.
In the default new file setup, specific objects are visible by
default. You can modify the visible objects to show less or • Enter a name such as “Reactions”.
more results. • RAM Concept automatically appends the word “plan”
to the name and prepends the layer name.
To change the visible objects:
• Select the Service LC layer, and click OK.
2 Choose options in the Visible Objects dialog box and • The Visible Objects dialog box appears.
click OK • Click OK.
Note: See “Controlling views” on page 12 for more infor- • Choose View > Plot ( ).
mation. • The Plot dialog box appears.
• Select the Reaction tab.
28.3.2 Changing which results plot • Check Active.
The plot settings control which results plot on a plan or a • Select Standard.
perspective. The default file setup has specific plot settings • Check the supports (under Value) for which you want to
for particular plans or perspectives. You may decide to view reactions.
change the settings to suit your requirements, or to make
the plan easier to read.
To change a plot setting: 28.4 Section distribution plots

The Plot dialog box appears. RAM Concept’s section distribution plots allow you to see
the variation of analysis values across any line drawn on
2 Make changes and click OK.
the structure. These distribution plots can be very helpful in
Note: The way plans and perspectives are named is often understanding the behavior of the structure (especially for
a reflection of the plot settings used. If you change the plot moments and deflections), but they are not intended to be
settings, you might make the names inaccurate. used for quantitative design purposes.
Note: You must first open the plan or perspective before

you can use the plot command. 28.4.1 Distribution plot values
The following example demonstrates plotting the bending Distribution plots are created using the Bending Moment
moment envelope on the Strength Design: Reinforcement
Plan: Distribution tool ( ), Vertical Shear Distribution tool
• Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Strength Design > ( ), Axial Force Distribution tool ( ) and Selected
Reinforcement Plan. Plot Distribution tool ( ). These plots display
• Choose View > Plot ( ). predictions of values along the lines drawn across the slab.
RAM Concept bases these predictions on the calculated
• On the Strip tab, check “Active”. results of the individual elements.
• Select “Bending”
RAM Concept’s calculation method guarantees that the
• Check “Maximum Moment”, and “Minimum Moment”. results for design strip segments and design sections are in
• Click OK. equilibrium with the nodal loads. The results for plots
across elements are not necessarily exact, however, and can
132 RAM Concept

Chapter 28
be much less accurate for coarse meshes or elements with

high aspect ratios. Even though RAM Concept’s
calculation method guarantees stored elastic energy of the
stresses in each element is equal to the energy of the loads
applied to the element, for some oddly shaped elements
(such as pointy triangles), the energy formulation can result
in local fictitious stress spikes. Note that this limitation
does not affect design strip segments or design sections and
does not affect RAM Concept’s reinforcement calculations.
28.4.2 Moment distribution plots

You can create moment distribution plots using the
Bending Moment Distribution tool ( ). The plot
displayed along the drawn line shows the distribution of
bending moment about the axis of the line. The values in
the main 2D plot (if any) controlled by the Plot ( )
dialog box have no effect on the moment distribution plot.
The integrated moment value shown below the moment
distribution plot is the sum of the area of the plot, but does
not include the bending moment that is due to axial forces
and variations in the centroid elevation of the slab (such as
the bending moment caused by axial forces in the web and
flanges of a T-beam). You should use design strips and
design sections to determine design quantities as they
capture both components of the bending moment.
Figure 28-1 on page 133 shows a moment distribution plot

for My moments drawn on a contour plot for Mx moments. Figure 28-1 Moment distribution plot showing My moments on an Mx con-
The distribution plot shows My moments because the line tour plot.
drawn on the plan is parallel to the y-axis. The distribution
plot has an integrated value of –657 kip-ft and a peak value
of –73.9 kips (or –-73.9 kip-ft/foot). The contour plot 28.4.3 Shear distribution plots
values have no effect on the distribution plot values. If you You can create shear distribution plots using the Vertical
used the Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ) instead of the Shear Distribution tool ( ). The plot displayed along the
Bending Moment Distribution tool ( ), the contour plot drawn line shows the distribution of vertical shear force
and the distribution plot would display the same values. across the line. The values in the main 2D plot (if any)
controlled by the Plot ( ) dialog box have no effect on
the shear distribution plot. The integrated shear value
shown below the shear distribution plot is the sum of the
area of the plot. Design strips and design sections provide a
more accurate calculation of this integrated value.
28.4.4 Axial force distribution plots

You can create axial force distribution plots using the Axial
Force Distribution tool ( ). The plot displayed along the
drawn line shows the distribution of axial (horizontal) force
across the line. The values in the main 2D plot (if any)
controlled by the Plot ( ) dialog box have no effect on
the axial force distribution plot. The integrated axial force
value shown below the axial force distribution plot is the
sum of the area of the plot. Design strips and design
RAM Concept 133

Chapter 28
sections provide a more accurate calculation of this distribution plots are very helpful in understanding the
integrated value. behavior of the structure, but you should not use them for
quantitative design purposes. You should always use design
strips and design sections to determine design quantities
28.4.5 Selected distribution plots
You can create selected distribution plots using the
Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ). The plot displayed 28.5 Miscellaneous results information
along the drawn line shows the distribution of the values
shown in the main 2D plot (controlled in the Plot ( ) The following sections are for clarification of some results.
dialog box). The integrated value shown below the
distribution plot is the sum of the area of the plot. This
integrated value may or may not be useful depending upon 28.5.1 Top and bottom longitudinal
the plotted quantity (for example, the integration of a top- reinforcement
stress plot is a force/length value, which is largely useless).
RAM Concept shows longitudinal reinforcement on plan
You need to take special care when using the Selected Plot with the following parameters:
Distribution tool ( ) with the “max” and “min” axis • number of bars
contour plots (such as a Service LC Max Bottom Stress • bar type (as defined as a design strip property)
Plan). The “max” and “min” stress plots show the
maximum or minimum principal value at every point in the • length of the bars
slab. At each point along a selected plot distribution of the • bar spacing
principal values, the principal axes may be different. The
integrated value for the distribution plot has mathematical Figure 28-2 and Figure 28-3 show top reinforcement at a
meaning, but does not have any structural meaning. column. There are two callouts because the design strips
terminate at the column. The required reinforcement is
If you want to see the distribution of stresses (or moments, different on each side, as often happens. You need to
rationalize this information and detail the bars in a logical
etc.) about a particular axis, you can use the Plot ( )
manner. The left hand reinforcement is nine #5 bars, each
dialog box to set the contour plot axis (using the Value
6.5 ft. long [nine 16 mm bars, each 1.8 m long].
Plotted Axis) to be the axis of the results you want to view.
The Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ) then shows the
values for that axis.
28.4.6 Effects of averaging

Distribution plots display the calculated results of the Figure 28-2 Design Status: Latitude Top Reinforcement Plan (US units)
individual elements. At the shared edge of two elements,
RAM Concept uses simple averaging. This produces
reasonable results in most cases, but can cause distortions
of the integrated result when RAM Concept averages a
small element’s result with a large element’s result. The
selected distribution plots are additionally affected by the
plan averaging that occurs in the 2D plot controlled by the
Plot ( ) dialog box. Figure 28-3 Design Status: Latitude Top Reinforcement Plan (metric)
This distortion caused by averaging is another reason why

you should always use design strips and design sections to Figure 28-4 and Figure 28-5 show bottom reinforcement.
determine design quantities. The reinforcement is thirteen #4 bars, each 9.5 ft. long
[fifteen 12 mm bars, each 2.9 m long].
28.4.7 Summary
Section distribution plots allow you to see the variation of
analysis values across any line draw on the structure. These Figure 28-4 Design Status: Bottom Reinforcement Plan (US units)
134 RAM Concept

Chapter 28
• number of spaces in the zone

• number of legs per shear reinforcement set
• spacing of the sets
Figure 28-5 Design Status: Bottom Reinforcement Plan (metric)
• length of the zone
Figure 28-7 shows shear reinforcement.

28.5.2 Reinforcement bar lengths
For US units and bar size, the zone is 2.78 ft. long and has
Concept calculates the reinforcement bar lengths by 4 spaces with two #4 legs @ 8.34” centers.
determining termination points. The termination points are
located at design strip segment cross sections where the For metric units and bar size, the zone is 0.772 m long and
bars are no longer required for any rule set design. has 4 spaces with two 12 mm legs @ 193” centers.
The bar lengths shown on plan do not include development For both unit systems, there are five shear reinforcement
or embedment lengths. sets (spaces + 1).
28.5.3 Orientation of reinforcement

Concept draws and plots reinforcement along an axis
determined by the first and last cross section of the design
strip.
Top bars appear “over” the axis and parallel to it. Bottom
bars appear “under” this axis and parallel to it.
Reinforcement plots are perpendicular to the axis.
Figure 28-6 shows the axis, line A-B, for a middle strip.
Point A is at the midpoint of the first middle strip cross
section, and point B is the midpoint of the last middle strip
cross section.
Design and capacity calculations always assume that the

reinforcement (other than tendons) is perpendicular to the Figure 28-7 Design Status: Shear Reinforcement Plan (US and metric
cross sections. If the reinforcement is placed away from the units).
perpendicular orientation (such as that shown in Figure 28-
6), the reinforcement quantity may need to be increased.
28.5.5 Punching Shear Results
Punching shear design notes appear in Chapter 57,
“Punching Shear Design Notes”.
Non-Standard Sections: ACI 318
Some times the punching shear status is “Non-Standard

Section”. This is a warning, not an error. “Non-Standard
Section” means that at least one of the critical sections that
RAM Concept is investigating for that column does not
perfectly fit one of the three ACI cases: interior, edge and
corner.
When you get a “Non-Standard Section”, you need to

inspect the critical sections that Concept has defined, and
Figure 28-6 Reinforcement drawing and plotting relative to local axis use your engineering judgment to determine if you feel
they fit the ACI punching model (you should always
visually inspect the critical sections, even if Concept does
28.5.4 Shear reinforcement not flag them as non-standard). Concept still calculates a
stress ratio for non-standard sections.
Concept shows shear reinforcement zones on plan with the
following parameters:
RAM Concept 135

Chapter 28
Non-Standard Sections: AS3600, BS8110 and IS 456 3 Corner Rectangular:
Some times the punching shear status is “Non-Standard • must be uniform thickness
Section”. This is a warning, not an error. “Non-Standard • must have 2 sides
Section” means that at least one of the critical sections that
RAM Concept is investigating for that column does not • sides must be perpendicular
perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and • can only have two discontinuous ends (assumed at slab
corner. edge)
When you get a “Non-Standard Section”, you need to 4 Interior Round (circular shape idealized into straight line
inspect the critical sections that Concept has defined, and segments):
use your engineering judgment to determine if you feel • must be uniform thickness
they fit the code punching model (you should always
visually inspect the critical sections, even if Concept does • section centroid must coincide with column centroid
not flag them as non-standard). Concept still calculates a • all segment ends must be on same radius from the center
stress ratio for non-standard sections. of the column
If a punching section can be classified by any of the • must be continuous (no gaps)
“standard” rules, it is considered to be a “standard” section. 5 Corner or Edge Round (circular shape idealized into
The rules for “standard” sections are: straight line segments):
1 Interior Rectangular: • must be uniform thickness
• must be uniform thickness • column must be round
• must have 4 sides • can only have two discontinuous ends (assumed at slab
• section centroid must coincide with column centroid edge)
• opposite sides must be parallel and have same length • can only have two segment end points that are a different
radius from the center of the column than all other
• adjacent sides must be perpendicular segment end points (assumed at slab edge)
• must be continuous (no gaps) • discontinuous segment end points must be the “off
2 Edge Rectangular: radius” points (at slab edge)
• must be uniform thickness Note: The rules are applied to EC2 sections before the
• must have 3 sides corners are filleted.
• opposite sides must be parallel and have same length

• adjacent sides must be perpendicular
• can only have two discontinuous ends (assumed at slab
edge)
136 RAM Concept

Chapter 29
29 Plotting Results
The plot settings control which results plot on a plan or a Slab plots are available for loading, load combination and
perspective. The default file setup has specific plot settings rule set layers.
for particular plans and perspectives. You can customize
these settings or create new plans and perspectives that
show your desired plots.
Plot settings are controlled via the Plot dialog which is

accessed through the Plot command ( ).
29.1 Setting the plotted results
You may decide to change the settings to suit your

requirements.
To change a plot setting:

1 Open the plan or perspective you want to change. Figure 29-1 The plot dialog with slab result plotting active.
The Plot dialog box appears. 29.2.1 About slab plotting contexts
3 Select a tab and check Active to make that plot active. There are three possible contexts: “Standard”, “Max” and
4 Make changes and click OK. “Min”. The Max and Min context are used to envelope the
maximum and minimum values for each point in the slab.
Note: The name of a plan or perspective is often indicative
of its plot settings. If you change the plot settings, you may While the meaning of the Standard, Max and Min contexts
want to rename the plan or perspective. is somewhat self-evident, Table 29-1 lists how Concept
calculates these values considering load patterns and
standard and alternate load factors.
29.2 Slab
29.2.2 Max and Min context slab plot
Checking the Active box in the Slab tab allows you to
limitations
display and control various slab analysis plot quantities Concept stores only a limited number of slab analysis
such as moment, shear, axial, torsion, deflections, and area values. For example, standard, maximum and minimum
spring reactions. For plotting axial stresses or in-plane Mx, My and Mxy values are stored, while moment values
shear stresses, select the depth at which to plot the value. about other axes (not x- or y- axis) are calculated via
Other plot values are not dependent upon depth. Mohr’s Circle calculations. Similarly, standard, maximum
and minimum Px, Py, Vxy, Mx, My and Mxy values are
We recommend curve smoothing for contour plots. Without
used to calculate stress values at the top, center and bottom
curve smoothing, contours will be plotted element by
of the slab.
element, which can make it difficult to observe the results
of a larger region (also, for some plotted quantities, nothing Because minimum and maximum values are not stored for
will be shown unless curve smoothing is on). RAM these derived values, the calculation of the minimum and
Concept allows you to define a resolution for the selected maximum values is approximate.
plot value. Finer plot resolutions require longer screen
regeneration times. Example: if one loading pattern gives an x-deflection of 10
and a y-deflection of 0, while another pattern gives a x-
For contour plots, you can control the frequency of the deflection of 0 and a y-deflection of 10, the Max context
contour lines by unchecking “Use default magnitudes” and deflection will be reported as 14.4, even though the true
entering the desired contour value. For color contour plots, maximum deflections never exceeded 10.
you can set the upper and lower limits of the contour values
by entering the minimum and maximum values.
RAM Concept 137

Chapter 29
The following slab maximum and minimum context plot

values should always be considered approximate:
• Values for any axis that is not the x- or y- axis.
• Stress values for any depth that is not mid-depth.
• Lateral deflection values for any depth that is not mid-
depth.
• Lateral deflection values where the center of the slab is
not at elevation zero.
Layer Type Standard Max Min

Loading Values with full applied Maximum values that occur consid- Minimum values that occur consid-
loads (no pattern loading) ering each pattern loading (complete ering each pattern loading (complete
with pattern factors) and the full with pattern factors) and the full
loading. loading.
Single Linear combination of Values that occur when combining Values that occur when combining
Loading Standard values all loadings, taking the maximum all loadings, taking the minimum
Load Combination using the Standard load value of the following four values value of the following four values
factors for each loading: for each loading:
• Standard Load Factor * Max • Standard Load Factor * Max
• Alt Load Factor * Max • Alt Load Factor * Max
• Standard Load Factor * Min • Standard Load Factor * Min
• Alt Load Factor * Min • Alt Load Factor * Min
Lateral Group (not available) Values that occur when combining Values that occur when combining
all gravity loadings, taking the all gravity loadings, taking the
Load Combination maximum value of the following minimum value of the following
four values for each loading: four values for each loading:
• Std Load Factor * Max • Std Load Factor * Max
• Alt Load Factor * Max • Alt Load Factor * Max
• Std Load Factor * Min • Std Load Factor * Min
• Alt Load Factor * Min • Alt Load Factor * Min
Plus the maximum single value of Plus the minimum single value of all
all of the lateral loadings' (of the of the lateral loadings' (of the correct
correct type) values: type) values:
• Std Lateral Load Factor * Max • Std Lateral Load Factor * Max
• Alt Lateral Load Factor * Max • Alt Lateral Load Factor * Max
• Std Lateral Load Factor * Min • Std Lateral Load Factor * Min
• Alt Lateral Load Factor * Min • Alt Lateral Load Factor * Min
Rule Set (not available) Maximum of all of the related load Minimum of all of the related load
combination values combination values
Table 29-1 Calculation of Standard, Max and Min values
138 RAM Concept

Chapter 29
29.3 Reaction
Checking the Active box in the Reaction tab allows you to

display and control analysis reaction quantities. Selecting
the Standard context button displays reactions
corresponding to the standard results (more information
about standard and enveloping results is available in
Chapter 46, “Analysis Notes”). For the standard results,
you can display any number of reactions for column
above/below, wall above/below, point spring/support, line
spring/support, and the standard reactions used for the
punching checks. If a column above and below occur at the
same location in plan, and both Column Above and
Column Below boxes are checked, the sum of the reactions
is shown at that location. The same holds true for walls
above and below.
Figure 29-3 Plot dialog reaction tab
The other buttons in the Context group are for the
enveloped results. Concept displays reactions for columns
(above/below) and punching checks for the envelope result
of the selected context. Wall reactions will be enveloped
and available for plotting in future versions.
The “standard” reaction context values are only available

for loading and load combination layers, while the six
enveloped contexts are available for loading, load
combination and rule set design layers.
Figure 29-4 Plot dialog reaction tab
29.4 Strip
Checking the Active box in the Strip tab allows you to

display analysis results for the design strips. Each plot
Figure 29-2 Plot dialog reaction tab value represents the variation of the selected value at each
design strip segment cross section (along the axis of each
strip selected). Plots related to the maximum and minimum
moments and shears can be displayed, enabling the
envelope for a particular plot value to be displayed.
The Torsion value is the torsion about the centroid of the

design strip segment, in equilibrium with the element nodal
forces.
The Twist value is the component of the torsion due to the

slab twisting moment (Mxy for design strips parallel to the
x- or y- axes) calculated from the element stress predictions
(and is not necessarily in equilibrium with the element
RAM Concept 139

Chapter 29
nodal forces). The Twist value is not recommended for use Section analysis plots are only available for rule set design
in torsion design. layers.
Absolute Twist is the sum of the absolute value of the twist

along the cross section. This value differs from the “Twist”
value in that it is always positive, and that in its calculation,
twist values of different signs do not cancel out.
The Absolute Twist value is not used in design unless

Wood-Armer torsion design is selected.
Note: The accuracy of the Twist and Absolute Twist values

are determined from element stress predictions and are
dependent upon the quality and the refinement of the mesh.
Unlike the Torsion value, there is no guarantee that these
values will be in equilibrium with the applied nodal loads.
Definitions of other values can be found in Chapter 46,

“Analysis Notes”.
The “standard” strip context values are only available for Figure 29-6 Plot dialog section analysis tab.
loading and load combination layers, while the four
enveloped contexts are available for loading, load
combination and rule set design layers.
29.6 Section Design
Checking the Active box in the Section Design tab allows

you to plot top, bottom and shear reinforcement quantities
corresponding to Concept’s final design or a design for a
particular rule set.
The “Top Developed” and “Bottom Developed” values

represent the amount of fully developed top and bottom
reinforcement that is required at each location.
Section design plots are only available for rule set designs
and the design summary layers.
Figure 29-5 Plot dialog strip tab.
29.5 Section Analysis
Checking the Active box in the Section Analysis tab allows

you to display analysis and design results for the design
strips including moments, shears, stresses, crack width, and
effective curvature ratio. The plotted analysis results are for
the envelope results. They can be plotted against the design
capacity resulting from RAM Concept’s final design. Note
that some quantities may not have capacity values defined. Figure 29-7 Plot dialog section design tab
29.6.1 About section design “context” plots

The Section Design plot group box, “Context” allows for
three possible contexts:
140 RAM Concept

Chapter 29
• With Span Detailing In a skyline plot, each calculated value is valid for a portion
of the span (as shown by a horizontal line) instead of the
• Without Span Detailing, and
values being interpolated between cross sections. While
• User Provided Reinf. this is primarily just a graphical difference, the actual
detailing of the reinforcement into bar callouts is
Span detailing is explained in Section 49.1 on page 341 of
performed using the skyline plot values.
Chapter 49, “Reinforcement Notes”.
For rule set designs, the effects of the Span Detailing
The effects of the Span Detailing Contexts on plots are
Context (other than the skyline plotting) are as shown in
explained in Table 29-2 and Table 29-3.
Table 29-2 below.
For the Design Status layer, the context of “With Span
For the Design Status layer, the effects of the Span
Detailing” includes the effects of the assumed
Detailing Context (other than the skyline plotting) are as
reinforcement development calculations in the plots of
shown in Table 29-3 below.
developed reinforcement.
29.6.2 About skyline plots

When you select the “With Span Detailing” or “User
Provided Reinf” contexts, Concept plots the reinforcement
with a “skyline” plot.
Value Without span detailing With span detailing User provided reinforcement
Top As calculated per section Values calculated per section are Vector component of area of user
lengthened according to the span individual bars intersected by the
Bottom detailer rules (see Section 49.1 “Span cross sections
detailing” of Chapter 49, “Reinforce-
Top and Bottom
ment Notes”).
Top Dev As calculated per section As calculated per section Vector component of developed area
of user individual bars intersected by
Bottom Dev
the cross sections
Shear As calculated per section As calculated per section (none)
Shear Density
Shear Spacing
Table 29-2 Effects of span detailing context on rule set plots
RAM Concept 141

Chapter 29
Value Without span detailing With span detailing User provided reinforcement
Top As calculated per section Values calculated per section are Vector component of area of user
lengthened according to the span individual bars intersected by the
Bottom detailer rules (see Section 49.1 “Span cross sections
detailing” of Chapter 49, “Reinforce-
Top and Bottom
ment Notes”).
Top Dev As calculated per section Plotted values are the maximum of Vector component of developed area
the reinforcement calculated per sec- of user individual bars intersected by
Bottom Dev
tion and the amount of developed the cross sections
reinforcement calculated from the
span-detailed amounts of non-devel-
oped reinforcement (see Section 49.1
“Span detailing” of Chapter 49,
“Reinforcement Notes”).
These values are used in the final

capacity check calculations.
Shear As calculated per section As calculated per section (none)
Shear Density
Shear Spacing
Table 29-3 Effects of Span Detailing Context on Design Status Plots
29.7 Punching Analysis
Checking the Active box in the Punching Analysis tab

allows you to display information about the punching
analysis including stresses for each critical section for any
of the enveloped force sets. The values displayed are for
the selected critical section(s) with the selected force set,
and are not necessarily the worst case for the column. The Figure 29-8 Plot dialog punching analysis tab
most critical punching case can always be displayed by
selecting the Max Stress Ratio button and checking Section
1. 29.7.1 Punching Shear Results
Punching analysis plots are only available for rule set Punching shear design notes appear in Chapter 57,
design and the design summary layers. “Punching Shear Design Notes”.
There is discussion of “Non-Standard Section” in

“Punching Shear Results” on page 135.
142 RAM Concept

Chapter 30
30 Using the Auditor
• Pass 1
There will be times when a design result calculated by
• Pass 2
RAM Concept may be confusing or unexpected. This could
be due to incorrect input, an unusual set of resultants (for • Final check
example: a negative moment at mid-span), or a code rule
interpretation. The Auditor assists in displaying design
information for you to review.
30.3 About the information displayed by
the Auditor
30.1 How the Auditor can assist the
The information displayed by the Auditor is for a single
design process
cross section of one span segment strip, or a design section.
The Auditor is a tool that displays input data, parameters, The Auditor displays the following:
resultants and code specific results for design strip cross 1 Design strip and cross-section number, or design section
sections, design sections and punching checks, in text number
format.
2 Concrete components for a cross section
The Auditor displays information that could be useful for: • number of concrete blocks
1 Checking input data such as reinforcement bar cover. • top and bottom elevation of each block
2 Checking calculated data such as the elevation of the • depth and width of each block
center of a reinforcement bar.
• initial and final strengths (cylinder and cube)
3 Reviewing the rule set designs (service, strength etc.)
• initial and final Ec (modulus of elasticity) values
4 Checking the envelope of resultants (moment, shear
force, axial force etc.). • density
5 Revising the number of strands in a tendon to satisfy code • inclusion or exclusion of block from shear core
stress limits.
See “Concrete “Core” Determination” on page 330 for
discussion of shear core.
3 Reinforcement properties for each bar type
30.2 About the three design steps • elevation
• yield stress
RAM Concept performs its design in 3 steps:
• Ec (modulus of elasticity) value
Step 1: Each Rule set performs its “Pass 1” selection of
• bar area
reinforcement. For most rule sets this is the entire design.
• bar diameter
Step 1b: The selected reinforcement of all the rule sets is
4 Tendon properties for each tendon type
summarized.
• elevation of cgs (center of gravity of strand) above
Step 2: Each Rule set performs its “Pass 2” selection of datum
reinforcement needed in addition to that summarized in
step 1b. For most rule sets nothing happens in this step, but • ultimate strength (stress)
for some rule sets –such as shear design and ductility • yield stress
design the summarized step 1 reinforcement needs to be
• effective stress
known before the design can be performed.
• Ec (modulus of elasticity) value
Step 2b: The selected reinforcement of all the rule sets is
summarized. • area of strand
• bonding
Step 3: Each Rule set performs a final check (no
reinforcement is added in this step) and final analysis. • R-component [the component of the tendon parallel to
the design strip cross section (perpendicular to the design
The Auditor reports the three steps as the following: strip spine)]
RAM Concept 143

Chapter 30
• S-component [the component of the tendon perpen- • force

dicular to the design strip cross-section (parallel to the • force elevation
design strip spine)]
• Untensioned reinforcement forces for each bar
• Z-component [the vertical component of the tendon
across the cross-section (only used for hyperstatic calcula- • elevation
tions)] • strain
• length • stress
• initial concrete strain • bar area
• duct width • force
• number of strands per duct • Post-tensioning forces for each tendon
• cross sectional area per strand • elevation
• number of ducts • cross-section strain
• component cross-section strain (considers tendon
angle)
5 Base design envelopes (for each Rule Set Design):
• Tendon Force (effective force in cross section
The envelopes for maxima and minima of moment and plane)
shear force are displayed. These are modified, as
appropriate, for torsion and axial force design. The
envelopes list the following resultants:
• Vr (horizontal shear) 30.4 Using the Auditor
• Ps (axial tension)
The Auditor can be used for specific rule set designs, or for
• Vz (vertical shear)
the design summary.
• Mr (bending)
Note: A rule set audit has significantly less data than a
• Ts (torsion) design summary audit. As such, a rule set audit may be more
• Mz (diaphragm bending) useful.
6 Reinforcement (for each Rule Set Design): To use the Auditor for a rule set design:
Depending upon the rule set, RAM Concept adds 1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Selected Design >
reinforcement to the cross section. Selected Plan
• As Top 2 Select the Auditor tool ( ).
• As Bot. 3 Click on the plan at the design strip cross-section, or

design section, you wish to audit.
• As Shear Density
The Auditor window opens.
• As Shear Spacing
4 Scroll to find the information you require.
• As Shear (density multiplied by spacing)
Brackets appear after each result showing which code rule Note: You may find it convenient to make the design cross
governed. sections visible for the purpose of selecting the correct one.
7 Cross Section Forces (Analysis) Note: The Auditor selects either (i) the nearest cross-
section (of a visible span segment strip) to the point you
Depending upon the rule set, the Auditor displays cross click, or (ii) nothing, if there is no cross section within 3 feet
section forces and other information. [1m] of the point you click. The cross-sections themselves
do not need to be visible.
• Cross Section Strains
• curvature Note: The Auditor will not work if a Calc All has not been
performed.
• top, centroid and bottom strains
• Concrete Forces for each block Note: The Auditor’s results may not be current if the
analysis is not current. (If the Calc All option is grayed-out
• top and bottom stress ( ), the analysis results are current).
144 RAM Concept

Chapter 30
To use the Auditor for the design summary: 30.6 About the information displayed by
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Selected Plan. the Punching Check Auditor
2 Follow instructions for “rule set design” above.
The information displayed by the Punching Check Auditor
is for a punching check at a single column.
30.5 Using the Auditor for guidance on The Auditor displays the following:
post-tensioning 1 Punching check number
2 Location (coordinates)
Certain codes limit the service stresses and designers are
3 Geometry
required to comply with the limits. The Auditor displays
advice on how much additional post-tensioning strand is • axis angle
required in a design strip to satisfy certain code clauses. • radius
This information is accessible from many plans, but the 4 Cover to CGS
instructions below are for using the Service Rule Set 5 Concrete Strength
Design.
6 Precompression
To use the Auditor for guidance on post-tensioning: 7 Resultant envelopes
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > 8 Critical section perimeter properties
Status Plan
• number of critical sections
2 Select the Auditor tool ( ).
• perimeter length
3 Click on the plan at the design strip cross-section which
has failed a stress criterion and for which you require • perimeter depth
guidance. • torsion strip properties (for AS3600)
The Auditor window opens. 9 Unreinforced stress ratio
4 Scroll to the text bordered by two lines of asterisks (top 10 Stud shear reinforcement rail properties (if required for
and bottom) near the bottom of the audit. design).
11 Summary
If the maximum tensile stress is within code then no
information will be displayed. If the calculated concrete
tensile stresses exceed the allowable limit then the Auditor
suggests the percentage increase in strand required to 30.7 Using the Punching Check Auditor
satisfy the stress limit.
The Auditor can be used for the strength rule set design, or
for the design summary.
To use the Punching Check Auditor for the strength rule set
design:
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Strength Design >
Figure 30-1 Auditor text indicating percentage increase required to com- Selected Plan
ply with code. 2 Select the Punching Check Auditor tool ( ).
3 Click on the plan at the punching check location you wish
Note: The precompression and balance effects of a tendon to audit.
are not necessarily limited to the area (and design strip)
where the tendon is located. Due to the diversion of The Auditor window opens.
prestress (bleed of P/A) beyond the design strip the
4 Scroll to find the information you require.
suggested percentage increase may not be exact.
Note: If there are tendons intersecting the cross-section at Note: The Auditor will not work if a Calc All has not been
an angle other than ninety degrees then the suggested performed.
percentage increase may be inaccurate. Note: The Auditor’s results may not be current if the
analysis is not current. (If the Calc All option is grayed-out
( ), the analysis results are current).
RAM Concept 145

Chapter 30
To use the Auditor for the design summary: Follow instructions for the “strength rule set design” above.
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Selected Plan.
146 RAM Concept

Chapter 31
31 Using the Estimate
When preparing a design, it can be useful to know the Mild Steel Reinforcing
amount and cost of the materials used in the model. The
The weight of reinforcement based upon design strip
estimate window serves this purpose.
calculations. This does not include laps, bends, or other
The estimate is particularly useful for comparing bars such as “detailing”, tendon support or miscellaneous.
preliminary schemes. You can also use it to compare The calculation is only “as good” as the design strips
changes made to a design. drawn. As such, consider the quantities judiciously.
RAM Concept automatically calculates material quantities.

Specified unit costs allow supply and installation costs to
be calculated 31.3 Editing the unit costs
You can only edit unit costs. The estimate separates unit
31.1 Viewing the estimate costs into materials and installation (labor).
To edit the unit costs:

The Estimate window lists the different material quantities 1 Choose Report > Estimate.
and their unit costs for supply and installation (labor).
2 Enter the costs for each material.
To view the Estimate:
Note: The costs update when you press Enter or Tab.
1 Choose Report > Estimate.
31.4 About unit costs

31.2 What the estimate calculates
Unit costs can vary for many reasons, including the
The material quantities calculated are: following:
Concrete • Region (labor availability and skill).

• Size of the floor and the project.
The volume of the concrete floor excluding supports.
• Formwork system (usually flat slabs are more
Formwork economical to form than beams).
The area of horizontal soffit formwork. • Post-tensioning costs are not the same for different
systems. Unbonded systems are often less expensive in
Post-Tensioning some countries, but this may not be true if large bonded
tendons are used in beams.
The weight of strand based upon tendon plan length. This
does not include stressing tails or allowance for drape. • Large diameter reinforcing bar is generally less
expensive than small diameter bar for materials and labor.
RAM Concept 147

Chapter 31
148 RAM Concept

Chapter 32
32 Printing
RAM Concept provides a range of printing customization 32.2.2 Page range

options to help you create professional printouts and
reports. You control the information included on a page and In the Page Range section of the Print dialog box, select
in a report. Every window in RAM Concept can be printed which pages to print:
individually or as part of a report. This chapter describes • Use the All option to print all the pages in the report, or
the printing features you can use to achieve the result you all the pages that are required to print the active window.
want and offers techniques for printing efficiently.
• Specify the range of pages you want to print. Type a
Note: See “Determining the fit of plans” on page 150 for hyphen between two numbers to print the pages in that
more information on setting the print scale of plan windows. range (inclusive). You must type the numbers separated by
hyphens in ascending order (4-7, not 7-4).
32.1 Basic printing instructions 32.2.3 Number of copies

In the Print dialog box, the Number of copies option
You can selectively print windows, or the entire report. indicates the number of printed copies of the print job you
want. Enter a value from 1 to 9999.
To print a window:
1 Make the window you want to print the active window.
2 Choose Report > Print Window.
32.3 Print setup options
3 Select the printing options you want. See “General
printing options” on page 149 for more information.
In the Page Setup dialog box, you can set the printer, page
4 Click Print.
size and source, default orientation, and margin size for
To print the report:
your printed pages. These settings are stored on your
system and are used as the default settings every time you
1 Choose Report > Print Report print.
2 Select the printing options you want. See “General
printing options” below for more information. To change the print setup options:
3 Click Print. 1 Choose Report > Print Setup.

2 Select the print setup options you want.
Note: To make sure you get the desired printing results,
preview the print job before you print. See “Previewing the 3 Click OK.
print job” on page 150 for more information.
32.3.1 Printer selection

Click on Printer to select a printer from the Printer section
32.2 General printing options
of the Page Setup dialog. RAM Concept can print on any
printer with the appropriate printer drivers installed.
The Print settings tell RAM Concept what printer to use,
which pages to print, and how many copies you need.
Update these settings every time you print a window or 32.3.2 Paper size and source
report.
Select the paper size and paper source the printer uses from
the Paper section of the Page Setup dialog box. The printer
32.2.1 Printer selection selection dictates the options for the size and source.
Specify the printer you want RAM Concept to print on in

the Select Printer section of the Print dialog. With the latest 32.3.3 Default orientation
compatible drivers installed, RAM Concept can print on
any Windows printer or plotter connected directly to your In the Orientation section of the Page Setup dialog, select
computer or connected via a network. Consult your printer the default page orientation:
documentation for information on setting up your printer • Use Portrait for a vertical page orientation.
and selecting the appropriate printer driver.
RAM Concept 149

Chapter 32
• Specify Landscape for a horizontal page orientation. preview carefully after setting the print viewpoint to verify
that the scale and orientation of the model fit on the page as
Page orientation is also customizable for each individual intended.
printed window in the Report Contents window. See
“Printing optimizations” on page 151 for more
Use the Set Print Viewpoint tool ( ) to save the print
information.
viewpoint to what is visible on screen. This viewpoint does
not change unless you reset it. You can manipulate the
model on screen without affecting the saved print
32.3.4 Margin size
viewpoint. To display the saved print viewpoint, use the
Set the page margins in the Margins section of the Page Show Print Viewpoint tool ( ).
Setup dialog. If the left, right, top, or bottom margin sizes
you select overlap, or they are off the paper, an alert To set the print viewpoint:
message appears.
1 Adjust the on screen viewpoint by:
• Setting the relative scales of the coordinate axes
using the Scale tool ( ).
32.4 Determining the fit of plans
• Rotating the model with the Rotate about x- and
Plans print according to their Print Area and Print Scale y-axes tool ( ) and the Rotate about z-axis tool
settings. Everything within the printing area boundary ( ).
prints using as many pages as necessary to print at the
desired scale. • Zooming to show the desired portion of the
model.
To specify the print scale:
• Setting the projection to Parallel Projection ( )
1 Select the Print Scale tool ( ).
2 Enter the scale in the Print Scale dialog and click OK. or Perspective Projection ( ) and the modeling to
Note: Typically, you want to check “Set for all plans” in Solid Modeling ( ) or Wire Modeling ( ).
the Print Scale dialog if you are printing a report. 2 Click Set Print Viewpoint ( ).
To specify the printed area on the plan: To show the set print viewpoint on screen:
1 Select the Print Area tool ( ). 1 Click Show Print Viewpoint ( ).
2 Click at two opposite corners to identify the rectangular
boundary.
To specify the printed area with coordinates: 32.6 Previewing the print job
1 Choose View > Print Area or double click on the Print
Area tool ( ). Preview the print job before you send it to the printer to
2 Uncheck the option to “Automatically calculate printing ensure the images and text fit as desired on the chosen
area” and enter the left, right, top, and bottom coordinates in paper with the specified margin, and orientation settings.
the Printing Area Setup dialog. Check “Set for all plans” if See “Print setup options” on page 149 for more information
you want this printing area to be used by all plans. on how to change the page setup.
3 Click OK. To preview the active window print job:
1 Choose Report > Window Preview.
2 Examine the preview as described in the following
32.5 Printing the desired perspective sections and click Close.
viewpoint
To preview the report print job:
1 Choose Report > Report Preview.
The saved print viewpoint determines how a perspective
window prints. Sometimes a viewpoint that looks good on 2 Examine the preview as described in the following
screen may not appear as desired in print due to the sections and click Close.
dimensions of the page. Remember to examine the print
150 RAM Concept

Chapter 32
32.6.1 Zooming To set the orientation of a particular window or item:

1 Make sure the Orientation column is visible in the Report
Scale the print preview by setting the zoom percentage in Contents window. You may need to widen the window or
the print preview window. You can choose a zoom factor of scroll horizontally.
500%, 200%, 150%, 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, 10%, Fit
Page or Fit Width, or you can type a numeric percentage of 2 Click on the Orientation column value for the item to
your choice (between 5% and 500%). toggle between Default, Portrait and Landscape. A value of
Default in the Orientation column sets the orientation to the
default orientation set in the Page Setup dialog box.
32.6.2 Viewing multiple pages at once
You can view the print preview one, two, or four pages at a 32.7.2 Customizing the printed appearance
time. Use One Page ( ) to view one page of the print job of plans and perspectives
at a time. Click Multi Page ( ) and select 2-up to view In the same way that you change the colors, font, and line
two pages at a time or 4-up to view four pages at once. type of plan and perspective windows on the screen, you
can customize their appearance in print.
Use the Print tab for schemes in the Appearance dialog to

32.6.3 Paging through the print job
set the appearance settings for a plan or perspective you
The print preview automatically opens to the first page in wish to print. See “Changing colors, font, and line type” on
page 13 for more information about appearance schemes
the print job. Use Next ( ) to page forward through the and changing appearance settings.
print job and Previous ( ) to page back. If you want the printed plan or perspective to have the same
appearance settings as what you see in the respective
window, click Set Same As Screen on the Print tab. In most
cases, you want:
32.7 Printing optimizations
• background color in printing to be white (no printed
background)
To achieve the best possible results when printing, you may
need to customize the page orientation and appearance • print font size to be smaller then the screen font
settings for the individual report items (or windows). • print line scale to be larger then on screen
To change the printed appearance of a plan or perspective:

32.7.1 Customizing page orientation 1 Make the Plan or Perspective the active window.
You can print each window or report item in RAM Concept 2 Choose View > Appearance.
in Portrait or Landscape orientation. The default page 3 Specify options on the Print tab of the Appearance
orientation is set in the Page Setup dialog box. See “Print Settings dialog box and click OK.
setup options” on page 149 for more information on setting
the default orientation. You may want some items in a
report or a specific window to print in a different
orientation than the rest. Use the Orientation column of the 32.8 Changing the report contents
Report Contents window to specify the orientation of an
item. Choose Default to use the Page Setup settings, or
Portrait or Landscape to override the Page Setup The contents of the report are customizable to suit your
orientation. specific needs. You have control over what plans,
perspectives and text items are included in a report and
their order and orientation. You change the report contents
through the Report Contents window.
RAM Concept 151

Chapter 32
2 Click on the Include column value for the item you wish
to include or exclude to toggle between Yes and No. A value
of Yes in the Include column includes the item in the report
printout while a value of No excludes the item.
Note: If you want to include an item in the report, make

sure every item in the hierarchy above it is also included.
The following is an example list of windows you might

include in a report for an elevated PT slab using the ACI
318 design approach:
• Report Cover
• Units
• Signs
• Materials
• Loadings
• Load Combinations
• Design Rules
• Estimate
• Element: Standard Plan
Figure 32-1 In the Report Contents Window, you can change the order of
report items, set whether an item is included in the report, and change the
• Element: Slab Summary Plan
printed orientation or an item. • Element: Structure Summary Perspective
• Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan
32.8.1 Including items in the report • Longitude Tendon: Standard Plan
Any window can be included as an item in the report. • Temporary Construction (at Stressing) Loading: All
Modify the selection of plans, perspectives and tables to be Loads Plan (if used)
included in the report via the Report Contents window.
• Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan
Toggle the Include column value to specify whether an
item is included in the report or not. • Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan
For something to print in the report, it requires that its • Live (Unreducible) Loading: All Loads Plan
Include value is “Yes” and every item above it in the report • [other live loadings (Storage, Roof) if used]
hierarchy is also “Yes”. For example, if you want the
• Service LC: Deflection Plan
Standard Plan on the Latitude Tendon Layer to be included
in the report, the plan itself should have an Include value of • Factored LC: Mx Plan
“Yes”, the Latitude Tendon layer should be “Yes” and the • Factored LC: My Plan
Layers folder should be “Yes”. Likewise, with an Include
value of “No” for the Criteria folder, RAM Concept does • Factored LC: Reactions Plan
not include anything in that folder in the report. • LT Uncracked Deflection LC: Deflection Plan
This functionality is especially useful if you want to omit • Service (/ Max Service) Design Rule Set: L.T.
everything on a particular layer from the report. You can do Deflection Plan
so with one click, rather then changing the Include value of • Design Status: Status Plan
every plan, perspective, and text table on that layer to
“No”. • Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan
• SSR Plan
To include or exclude a report item:
• Design Status: Latitude Top Reinforcement Plan
1 Make sure the Include column is visible in the Report
Contents window. You may need to widen the window or • Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan
scroll horizontally. • Design Status: Latitude Shear Reinforcement Plan
• Design Status: Longitude Top Reinforcement Plan
152 RAM Concept

Chapter 32
• Design Status: Longitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan new location inside the Criteria folder but you cannot move
it into the Layers folder.
• Design Status: Longitude Shear Reinforcement Plan
To change the location of a report item:
32.8.2 Reordering report items 1 In the Report Contents Window, press down on the left
mouse button over the report item you want to move.
The order of report items in the Report Contents window is
2 Drag the report item to its new location and release the
the order they print in the report. You can reorder items that
left mouse button. (RAM Concept does not allow you to
are within the same folder or layer by dragging them to a
move a report item outside of it’s folder or layer)
new position. You cannot move items outside their folder
or layer. For example, you can move the Units item to a
RAM Concept 153

Chapter 32
154 RAM Concept

Chapter 33
33 Exporting Plans and Tables
You can export any plan or text table in RAM Concept. To choose a text size:
Concept supports export of plans as .dwg or .dxf files in 1 Choose View > Appearance.
AutoCAD R12 through AutoCAD 2000 format. Tables
2 In the Font section of the Appearance dialog box, click
export as text files, which you can open with most
AaBbZz to select a font.
spreadsheet software.
The point size of text is 72 times the actual size. Thus, 9
points is one-eighth of an inch.
33.1 Exporting a plan 3 In the Select Font dialog box, choose the font size and
click OK.
4 Set the font scale to zero and click OK.
RAM Concept exports a plan with whatever information is
visible at the time. You need to open a plan and make it the Note: Do not use Enlarge Fonts ( ) or Shrink Fonts
active window before exporting. You make a plan the ( ) to change the text size before exporting.
active window by clicking on it.
To export the active plan:

1 Choose File > Export Drawing. 33.2 Exporting a table
The Export Drawing dialog box appears.
Text tables export to tab-delimited text files that you can
2 Choose a name and type for the AutoCAD file and click open with most spreadsheet software.
Save.
To export a text table:
The File Units dialog box appears.
1 Open the text table you wish to export.
3 Select the units for the AutoCAD file and click OK.
2 Click Export (at the top of the window).
3 Enter a name for the text file and click Save.
33.1.1 Selecting the text size
The exported text size depends on the visible text size on
the screen. You can change the text size to suit the export.
RAM Concept 155

Chapter 33
156 RAM Concept

Chapter 34
34 Exporting a Database to the RAM Structural System
34.1.1 Special handling of the Self-Dead

Note: In many places in this chapter the RAM Structural Loading and the Balance Loading during
System is referred to as “RSS”. export
RAM Concept has functions that can export reactions and
Concept adds the “Self-Dead Loading” reactions to the
geometry to the RAM Structural System.
“Dead Load” reactions during export. This ensures that the
RAM Concrete Analysis of the structure considers the self-
weight of the slab.
34.1 About the export of reactions Note: The RAM Structural System provides the option to
have beam and slab self-weights calculated automatically,
or input manually as part of the dead load case. Conversely,
RAM Concept has a function that exports wall and column
RAM Concept always automatically includes beam and slab
reactions to the RAM Structural System.This export
self-weights in its analysis. We recommend that, when using
capability allows RSS to use Concept's accurate load
RSS in combination with Concept, you have RSS automati-
distribution to calculate wall, column and foundation
gravity forces. The export capability also allows RSS to cally calculate the beam and slab self-weight loads. That
consider the effects of floor tendons on columns and walls will eliminate any confusion regarding whether self-weight
for post-tensioned structures. loads are included in the analysis or need to be manually
specified as part of the dead load case, even when some
This export capability only applies to elevated slab models levels are designed with RSS and some levels are designed
created in RAM Concept by importing from the RAM with Concept.
Structural System.
RAM Concept does not currently export “Transfer” loading
Note: The RAM Structural System requires RAM Concrete reactions to RSS. When analyzing a building with a
to consider the exported Concept reactions. transfer slab, RSS uses its own internal distribution of the
transfer forces in the slab rather than forces from Concept's
The RAM Concept force export function transfers column floor analysis. Concept’s exported “Direct” loading
and wall reactions to the RAM Structural System database. reactions will be used by RSS, if you so direct. See “Using
RAM Concept reactions in RAM Concrete” on page 158
The export only sets the wall and column reactions for the
for further information.
end of the columns and/or walls that are touching the
elevated slab. Exporting of reactions does not affect the RAM Concept exports the balance loading reactions to a
support axial force of walls and columns above the slab. “hyperstatic” load case that is only visible in RAM
The structure above the column or wall determines the Concrete. Generally, balance forces and hyperstatic forces
axial force. are not the same, but for a support that contains no tendons,
however, the balance forces are equal to the hyperstatic
RAM Concept only exports reactions from gravity loadings
forces.
imported from RSS back to RSS. For example, if you add
“Swimming Pool Loading” to a Concept file, the export Note: See “Post-tensioning loadings” on page 312 for a
function will not transfer reactions from that loading to discussion of balance and hyperstatic loadings.
RSS.
Note: RAM Concept does not export Construction Dead

Loading reactions, as they would have no further use in
34.1.2 The export of reactions process
RSS. You can export reactions to RSS at any time after you
perform a “Calc All” operation and you save the file.
Note: RAM Concept never exports lateral loadings
(imported from RSS or otherwise) to RSS.
To export to the RAM Structural System
Note: “Loadings” in RAM Concept are analogous to Choose File > Export Reactions to RAM Structural
“load cases” in RSS. System.
A dialog box, as shown in Figure 34-1, opens with a list of

RSS story names to which you can export reactions.
Concept labels one story name as “Source Story”. This is
the RSS story previously imported to create this Concept
file. Concept lists other stories in the RSS file with the
RAM Concept 157

Chapter 34
same floor type, and labels them “Identical Story” or 34.1.5 Checks performed after choosing
“Compatible Story”. A story is compatible with, but not export stories
identical to, the source story if it has a different story
height, member sizes, or (for the top story of the type) any RAM Concept checks each story you choose to export
columns above it have different orientations. against the RSS file in detail. If Concept detects any errors,
you may cancel the export operation or return to the story
Select any combination of stories, and click “OK”. RAM selection window to deselect the stories with errors. If
Concept displays a log detailing the results of the export Concept issues only warnings, you may continue with the
operation when the export is completed. export or return to the story selection window.
Concept generates warnings for any columns or walls

above the Concept slab that do not have matching columns
or walls above the export story selected. This typically only
happens at the highest story of the floor type, where it
transitions to a different floor type or the roof.
Concept also generates warnings if a selected story's height

is different from the source story height.
34.1.6 Using RAM Concept reactions in RAM

Concrete
Once you export the column and wall reactions to RSS,
they become available to RAM Concrete for analysis and
design purposes, but only if you inform RSS that you want
Figure 34-1 Export Reactions to RAM Structural System dialog box to use them.
To set RAM Concrete to use RAM Concept’s reactions

34.1.3 About export reactions access and 1 Start RAM Concrete
consistency checking
2 Choose Criteria > Column Forces
RAM Concept performs consistency checking before the
Select the button at the top to “Use RAM Concept Analysis
actual export operation to ensure that it can export
Forces at selected levels”. Select the levels by checking the
reactions correctly. Concept performs the checks before
box in the “Use” column.
and after choosing the export stories.
You can use this dialog to review the RSS levels that have
Concept forces and the Concept file name from which you
34.1.4 Checks performed before choosing exported the forces. The “Read” column displays the date
export stories you imported each level from RSS into Concept. The
“Saved” column displays the date you exported member
The first check performed is your access to the RSS file
reactions from Concept to that level. The “Source Story”
from which the RAM Concept floor was imported. The
column indicates the source story of the RSS file used to
export operation can proceed only if the RSS file exists, it
import data into the Concept file. If the “Source Story”,
is not currently open in RSS and you are able to access and
“Saved” and “Concept File” entries are empty, then you
modify it.
have not exported member forces to that level. If the
Concept also checks the RSS file for changes made to the “Read” entry is empty, then you have never imported that
source story since importation into the Concept file. If level to Concept.
someone has made a “major” change to the source story,
Note: RSS uses Concept wall reactions on all levels where
you must reimport from RSS and recalculate results before
Concept column reactions are used.
exporting. If someone has made a “minor” change to the
source story, Concept gives you the option of reimporting. Note: After exporting Concept reactions to RSS, you will
Major changes include adding or deleting columns or need to perform a RAM Concrete reanalysis of the structure
walls. Changing a column size is a minor change. before designing any members or importing any member
forces from RSS to Concept (such as for a mat foundation).
Concept cannot export the file if someone has added
columns or walls after importing from RSS, or if any
springs or rigid supports are present in the Concept model.
158 RAM Concept

Chapter 34
34.1.7 How the RAM Structural System - RAM Concept model design code is ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02 or
Concept link works BS8110, the design code of the RSS database is set
accordingly. Otherwise the database design code of the new
The key to the export of Concept's reactions to RSS are the RSS database will be the user's default design code.
imported walls and columns and the imported direct
gravity loadings. After a file is selected, the “Export Geometry to RAM
Structural System” dialog appears, as shown in Figure 34-
Walls and columns that you import from RSS have special 2.
RSS identifiers “tagged” to them. These identifiers allow
Concept to match its column and wall elements to the
corresponding members in RSS. Concept will even allow
you to move the walls and columns slightly (up to 50mm or
2").
Concept will not allow you to export if you add, delete, or

significantly move imported columns or walls (or do not
import walls and columns). Concept does this to ensure
transfer of the full equilibrium gravity load between
Concept and RSS.
Note: If you accidentally delete an imported support, or

the supports change in RSS, you can always reimport the
walls and columns.
RSS tracks a fixed set of gravity loadings through the

structures. These loadings are Dead Load, Live Load
Reducible, Live Load Unreducible, Live Load Storage and
Live Load Roof (when Concept and RAM Concrete are
used the Hyperstatic loading is tracked as well). To ensure
compatibility with RSS, Concept will not allow you to Figure 34-2 Export Geometry to RAM Structural System dialog box
delete these imported gravity loadings.
Concept does allow you to modify the imported RSS The dialog lists the floor types present in the RSS file.
gravity loading and to add more gravity loadings. Concept 3 Enter the new floor type name in the “New Floor Type
assumes that you are fully aware that it considers only the Name” text field.
loads that appear in the imported RSS loadings in the
reactions it exports back to RSS. A popup notifies you if the floor type name entered is
already defined.
The “Columns (below)” and “Walls (below)” check boxes

34.2 About the export of geometry select whether columns and/or walls are exported. Concept
exports only the columns and walls below the floor,
because it is those elements that are associated with a floor
Column and wall geometry can be exported to a new or type in RSS.
existing RAM Structural System database file. This
geometry can only be exported to a new RSS floor type. If you check “Start RSS after Export”, then RSS starts on
the file after the geometry is exported. This has no effect if
To export geometry to the RAM Structural System RSS is already running.
1 Choose File > Export Geometry to RAM Structural 4 Click “Create New Floor Type” to export the selected
System. members to the new floor type.
Note: The menu item is disabled if there is no model Note: Column and wall geometry can only be exported to
currently open. a new RSS floor type.
A file browser appears which allows the selection of an
RSS file.
34.2.1 About errors and ambiguities
2 Select a RSS file or enter a new filename.
Errors and ambiguities in a Concept model are normally
If a new RSS filename is entered, a new RSS database is detected and corrected when the model is meshed. Concept
created with the current Concept model’s units. If the allows models to be exported before they are meshed, so
RAM Concept 159

Chapter 34
some errors are detected and arbitrarily corrected when the were exported to RSS. If the overlapping columns or walls
geometry is exported. had different properties, the user may have to reassign the
desired values in RSS. The user can also mesh the model
If two or more walls overlap, completely or partially, only and resolve such errors within Concept before exporting.
one of the overlapping segments will be exported. If two or
more columns have the same location, only one column at Walls defined in RSS may not intersect other walls or span
that location will be exported. In either case, a pop-up columns or the ends of other walls. Each Concept wall is
dialog describes the columns and wall segments that were split into segments at each of these locations before being
not exported. exported. The splitting of walls is not reported, but the
effect will be seen as individual walls in RSS.
If any columns or wall segments are not exported, the user
should check the material properties of the elements that
160 RAM Concept

Chapter 35
35 Using Strip Wizard
Strip Wizard is a dialog that automates the initial steps in 3 Click Next to proceed or you can load Strip Wizard
the process of creating a model in RAM Concept. When Settings (see “Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings” on
modeling a straightforward slab or beam, you can page 165 for more information).
efficiently use Strip Wizard to enter the structural data
without having to draw in a plan window. With the wizard,
you can enter the spans, tributaries, loads and post-
tensioning in the same way you would with a conventional 35.2 Specifying general parameters
two-dimensional program. Since entering the structural
data in Strip Wizard is so quick and easy, it is particularly
Specify the structure type, spans and concrete mixes on the
useful for preliminary design of slabs, beams, and joists.
General Parameters page of the Wizard.
Strip Wizard uses the structural information you provide to
build a model in a new Concept file. You can then modify Structure Type
the file by drawing openings, surface steps, point loads, and Decide what type of structure you want Strip Wizard to
such using plan windows. Strip Wizard is deliberately create and whether to use post-tensioning. The floor can be
simple, so use it to create the basic structure, and then set up as post-tensioned or reinforced and can be one of the
modify the structure in plans if necessary. following systems:
The authors intend that Strip Wizard be largely for • Two-way slab
assessment of two-dimensional behavior. The (automatic)
• One-way slab
design results are only for one direction (the x-axis). Since
Concept is a three-dimensional program, line supports are • Beam
automatically included along the edges of the model that
• Joist
allow deflection but no rotation. This closely simulates
two-dimensional behavior. Spans
Enter the number of spans for the strip (not including

cantilevers). Decide if you are using start or end
35.1 Starting Strip Wizard cantilevers. Check “Asymmetric” to allow the model to
have different tributaries on either side of the columns.
When you start Strip Wizard, it prompts you to create a Concrete Mixes
new RAM Concept file. This file is where the wizard
generates your model once you enter all the structural data. Choose a concrete mix for the slabs and beams and one for
Strip Wizard uses all the generic settings defined in the new the supports.
file (such as units, materials, loadings, etc). If you want
Strip Wizard to use your custom settings, create the new Note: The concrete mixes available are the mixes in the
file from a template. For example, if you want certain new file created when you started Strip Wizard. If you want
concrete mixes to be available when specifying general to use specific mixes, use a template when creating the new
design parameters, you should create the new file from a file.
Concept template with these concrete mixes.
After you have chosen options in the New File dialog, the
Strip Wizard dialog appears. At this point, you can load 35.3 Entering span data
previously saved Strip Wizard settings if you want (see
“Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings” on page 165
The table you see on the Span Data page depends on the
for more information). To start defining your strip, proceed
information you entered on the General Parameters page.
to the next page in the wizard by clicking Next.
The cantilevers and spans appear as rows in the table. The
table columns depend on whether you are modeling a one-
To start Strip Wizard:
way or two-way system, beam system, or joist system.
1 Choose File > Strip Wizard.
For this table and subsequent pages, the top data row’s
2 Specify options in the New File dialog box and then click
name is “Typical”. Data entered here automatically copies
OK. The Strip Wizard dialog appears.
to the rows below. You can overwrite the copied data.
RAM Concept 161

Chapter 35
35.3.1 One-way and two-way systems 35.3.3 Joist systems

Span length, slab thickness and tributary width define these Span length, web properties (depth, width, spacing and
systems. They can vary span by span. number), slab thickness and tributary width define these
systems. They can vary span by span. This system does not
Length allow asymmetry.
The span length from center to center of supports. Length
Thickness The span length from center to center of supports.

The slab structural depth. W Depth
Start Width The joist web structural depth (including the flange depth).
The slab width at the beginning (or left hand end) of the W Width
span. For asymmetric strips, L Start Width is the left start
width, and R Start Width is the right start width. The joist web width.
End Width F Depth
The slab width at the end of the span. For asymmetric The flange (slab) depth (thickness).
strips, L End Width is the left end width, and R End Width
is the right end width. Pan Start Offset
The distance from the beginning (or left hand end) of the
span to the pan (or void former).
35.3.2 Beam systems
Span length, beam depth, beam width, slab thickness and Pan End Offset
tributary width define these systems. They can vary span The distance from the end of the pan (or void former) to the
by span. end of the span.
Length
Additional Web Properties
The span length from center to center of supports. The following properties determine the tributary width for
the whole model. The width cannot vary span by span.
W Depth
The beam web structural depth (including the flange Spacing

depth). The center-to-center spacing of the webs.
W Width
Number
The beam web width. The total number of webs.
F Depth
The flange (slab) depth (thickness).

35.4 Entering support data
Start Trib Width
The tributary (and hence slab) width at the beginning (or The Support Data page is for entering supports above and
left hand end) of the span. For asymmetric strips, L Trib below. You must specify supports below but they are
Start Width is the left tributary start width, and R Trib Start optional above.
Width is the right tributary start width.
End Trib Width 35.4.1 Support (above and below) properties

The tributary (and hence slab) width at the end of the span. Depth, width, height, bottom fixity and top fixity define the
For asymmetric strips, L Trib End Width is the left supports. They can vary span by span.
tributary end width, and R End Width is the right tributary
end width. Strip Wizard interprets a support with a width four or more
times the depth as a wall. Otherwise, it is a column.
162 RAM Concept

Chapter 35
Depth 35.6 Entering the loads

The support dimension parallel to the span.
The Loads page is for entering area and line loads in the z-
Width direction for two standard loadings.
The support dimension perpendicular to the span (enter
zero for round columns).
35.6.1 Load properties
Height
Area and line loads can be input for two different loadings
The support’s height from its base to mid-depth of the floor. on each span.
Bottom Fixity Dead Area Load
The moment connection at the base of the support. The area load over the entire span.
Top Fixity Dead Line Load
The moment connection between the support and the floor. The line load from the first support center to the second
support center for each span.
Live Area Load

35.5 Adding drop caps and drop panels The live load over the entire span.
The Drop Caps and Drop Panels page is for entering drop Live Line Load
caps and drop panels for two-way slabs. The page is not The live load from the first support center to the second
available for one-way slabs, beams or joists. support center for each span.
Strip Wizard uses drop caps for punching shear only; it
Loadings to use
ignores them for flexural design. Some codes provide
guidance on what dimensions are required to consider a The Dead and Live are just names. You can specify the
thickening as a drop panel. Strip Wizard does not check loads as belonging to any of the Standard loadings in the
such rules. RAM Concept file.
“Dead”
35.5.1 Drop cap and drop panel properties
This can be any one of the standard loadings in the RAM
Thickness, width, before length and after length define the Concept file.
drops. They can vary span by span.
“Live”
It is possible to have drop caps and drop panels at the same
support. The drop cap should be the thicker of the two. This can be any one of the standard loadings in the RAM
Concept file (except for that used for “Dead”).
Thickness
The total thickness (structural depth) of the drop. This is

not the incremental increase in thickness. 35.7 Specifying the post-tensioning
Width
The Post-Tensioning page is only available if you checked
The drop dimension perpendicular to the span. “Post-Tensioned” in the Structure Type section of the
General Parameters page.
Before Length
Most of the data entered on this page relates to minimum
The dimension parallel to the span from the beginning of
precompression, load balancing and tendon cover. Strip
the drop to the support center.
Wizard uses this data in conjunction with data for spans,
After Length
depths and loads to generate a single profiled tendon.
The dimension parallel to the span from the support center

to the end of the drop.
RAM Concept 163

Chapter 35
35.7.1 General PT information 35.8 Specifying reinforcement

You specify the type of tendon and information that helps
to determine the number of strands. The Reinforcement page is for specifying reinforcement
bars and general covers.
PT System
Specifies the size and type of strands for the tendon (as 35.8.1 Reinforcing bar
defined in the Materials Specification of the RAM Concept
file). You specify the bars from those available in the RAM
Concept file.
Stressing
Top
Specifies the stressing (jack) locations. Concept calculates
tendon friction and other losses if jacks are located at one Name of reinforcement bar used in the top face for flexural
or both ends. design.
Min P/A Bottom
The minimum average precompression required for the Name of reinforcement bar used in the bottom face for
concrete. Following the code minimum does not usually flexural design.
result in the most economical design.
Shear
35.7.2 Balance load Name of reinforcement bar used for one-way shear design.
Balance load refers to the amount of uplift provided by the

tendons. The industry has traditionally expressed this as a 35.8.2 Reinforcement clear cover
percentage of gravity loads.
The covers are for bars and tendons. Rounding of tendon
Min Balance Load Percentage: profiles could override the tendon covers.
The percentage of the specified load balanced by tendons. Top
Balance Load Considers: Clear cover to the top longitudinal bars and tendons.
Specifies the loadings that the balance loading is based Bottom

upon. The choices are self-weight of concrete, self-weight
plus “dead”, or total load. Clear cover to the bottom longitudinal bars and tendons.
35.7.3 Profiling 35.8.3 Punching shear checks

You decide if Concept performs punching shear
These selections vary the tendon profile shape.
calculations.
Straight Profile Distance at Supports
Perform punching shear checks
The length of tendon that is horizontal at a support. The
Checking this box instructs Concept to draw punching
dimension is the total flat distance, not the distance each
shear checks at each column.
side of the support.
Cover to CGS
Round Profiles to Nearest
The distance from the top of the slab to the centroid of the
The profile distance increment. This allows rounding of
top reinforcement. Usually this is the distance from the top
tendon high and low points to convenient values. If this
of the slab to the bottom of the top bar. Concept subtracts
value is too large it may cause cover violations.
this distance from the slab thickness to determine the “d”
distance.
164 RAM Concept

Chapter 35
35.9 Completing Strip Wizard See Chapter 17, “Generating the Mesh” and Chapter 27,
“Calculating Results” for further information.
The Completing Strip Wizard page is the final page in the

wizard dialog. At this point, you can choose to save the
information you have just entered so that you may load it 35.11 Loading and saving Strip Wizard
into the wizard later. See “Loading and saving Strip Wizard
settings
settings” on page 165 for more information.
When you click Finish on the Completing Strip Wizard The data you entered into the Strip Wizard can be saved as
page, Strip Wizard draws your model in the RAM Concept a Strip Wizard Settings file (with a filename extension of
file based on the data you have provided. The leftmost .cptstrip) and reloaded into the wizard later. The Strip
support of your model is located at the origin (0,0). Wizard Settings file contains only the information you
Open plans on the Mesh Input, Latitude Tendon, and entered into the wizard pages. Save your Strip Wizard
Design Strip layers to view your model. You cannot view Settings before you click Finish on the final page of the
the finite element mesh, however, until you generate the dialog.
mesh. Loading Strip Wizard Settings just sets the values in the
Strip Wizard dialog to the values stored in the Settings file.
To complete the wizard:
After you load your Strip Wizard Settings, you then page
1 Click Finish on the Completing Strip Wizard page. through the dialog as usual by clicking Next. You can
change the data in the wizard to create a different strip.
This does not affect the Settings file you loaded. You must
save a new Strip Wizard Settings file if you want your
35.10 Generating the mesh and changes to be stored for later use.
calculating results
To load strip wizard settings:
After completing Strip Wizard, you are ready to generate 1 Click Load on the Welcome to Strip Wizard page.
the mesh and run an analysis calculation on your model. 2 Select the Strip Wizard Settings file (with a filename
extension of .cptstrip) and click Open.
To get the best finite element mesh you need to regenerate
twice: once before, and once after, calculating.This is To save strip wizard settings:
because calculating generates the design strips, which in
1 Click Save on the Completing the Strip Wizard page
turn can be used to improve the mesh the second time you
(before you click Finish).
generate.
2 Enter the name of your Strip Wizard Settings file and
click Save.
RAM Concept 165

Chapter 35
166 RAM Concept

Chapter 36
36 General Tips
This chapter provides advice on learning RAM Concept 36.2 Walls

and tips that are not explained elsewhere.
Note: It is strongly suggested that you refer to “Learning

RAM Concept” on page 2 of Chapter 1, “Introduction” 36.2.1 Drawing connecting walls
before reading this chapter.
It is recommended that intersecting walls are drawn such
that one wall terminates at the centerline of the other, as
shown in 36-2.
36.1 Beams
You should be careful when modeling beams. If you use

standard finite elements then the beam’s torsional stiffness
could be overestimated, which could erroneously reduce
the deflection in the adjacent slabs.
In Concept, there is no difference between standard slab

and beam elements, and standard elements have a torsional
stiffness that is proportional to their depth cubed.
Figure 36-2 Connecting walls
The actual torsional stiffness of a beam is proportional to
the cube of the lesser value of depth and width. Standard
elements thus overestimate the torsional stiffness of beams 36.2.2 Walls above
that are deeper than they are wide. Walls above behave similarly to beams: they stiffen the
For this reason, you should consider using the “No-torsion” floor. This is especially relevant in transfer floors. The
behavior for beams, especially deep edge beams. See floor moments DO NOT include the bending moments in
“Beam properties” on page 57 for more information. the actual walls.
We recommend that if you are in doubt as to the effect of

walls above, do not model them.
Figure 36-1 No-torsion beam setting
Figure 36-3 Comparison of two floors identical in all respects except that
one has a wall above (Two images with slab shown, two with no slab
shown).
RAM Concept 167

Chapter 36
36.3 Restraint
Columns and walls restrain the floor against (post-

tensioning induced) axial deformations unless you model
columns with rollers and walls as “slip” walls (shear wall
property unchecked).
It is unlikely that columns above restrain the floor so a

roller above will generally be appropriate
Restraint generally reduces the precompression and hence

increases the service reinforcement. It usually increases
Figure 36-4 Effect of wall modeled above: no wall (left) vs. wall above strength reinforcement too.
(right) - plot of slab moment about x-axis.
36.2.3 The difference between walls above

and upstand beams of similar proportions 36.4 Miscellaneous
Concept treats walls above the slab similarly to beams. There are many tools and capabilities described in the
Using “wall-beams” instead of just thickened slab elements preceding chapters that are useful but often overlooked.
has both advantages and disadvantages; overall it is not
recommended to model walls above the slab as beams.
Slab elements have two major advantages over wall 36.4.1 Templates
elements (“wall-beams”): We have created a template (for the purpose of starting a
Concept design strip cross sections automatically integrate file) that may or may not suit your needs. You can create
the forces across slab elements. Wall-beam elements are your own template with additional plans, materials and
ignored in these integrations. Also, Concept provides you settings that you can use when you start a new file. See
many controls over how slab element results can be “About templates” on page 6.
displayed; wall-beam elements (like wall elements) can
only plot their reactions to the slab.
36.4.2 Adding plans
However, as discussed in “Beams” on page 167, Concept’s
standard slab elements have a torsional stiffness that is You can add plans. See“Creating new plans” on page 11
proportional to their depth cubed. This can cause a large and “Creating new result plans” on page 132.
over-estimation of the torsional stiffness for a very thick
slab element if it is adjacent to relatively thin elements.
“Wall-beam” elements do not have this problem. 36.4.3 Copying and moving objects
As such, walls above that are modeled as upstand beams Many users do not appreciate that selected objects can be
should use the “No-torsion” beam setting discussed in copied and moved through a combination of holding down
“Beams” on page 167. the shift key and using the move command (or similar). See
“Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring objects” on
When modeling wall-beams, Concept interprets some of page 17.
the wall element parameters differently. If the wall-beam is
not rotationally fixed to the slab then the wall-beam will You should also familiarize yourself with using the relative
have zero torsional stiffness. If the wall-beam is not a shear coordinates command. See “Using relative coordinates” on
wall then it will have zero axial stiffness. The vertically page 16.
compressible and rotationally fixed at far end parameters
To copy and move an object using relative coordinates
are ignored.
1 With the Selection tool ( ), select the object.
Wall-beam elements have one advantage over slab
2 Choose the Move tool ( ).
elements. Slab elements of drastically differing thicknesses
in the same structure can cause the automatic plotting 3 Hold down the Shift key and click anywhere on the
controls to show (correctly) huge force variations in and workspace.
adjacent to thick slab elements and almost no variation 4 Type the letter “r” followed by the x- and y-coordinates
within the thin slab element areas. This does not generally separated by a comma (e.g. r10, 5), and press Return.
happen if walls above are modeled as wall-beams.
168 RAM Concept

Chapter 36
This moves a copy of the selection x units to the right and y based) moments (actual and demand), crack widths and
units upward. reinforcement, to name just a few.
Some clients prefer to plot the reinforcement on new plans

36.4.4 Expanding tool buttons rather than use the template plans that show bar call-outs.
You can expand many tools to reveal additional

capabilities. See “Expanding tool buttons” on page 6. 36.4.9 Reducing the information shown on
plans
36.4.5 The Utility tool You can remove trivial results such as small reactions in
two different ways. See “Specifying report as zero” on
The Utility tool can save you a lot of time when you need page 21, and “Reaction” on page 139 and Figure on
to move and stretch many objects or control points. See page 139.
“Using the Utility tool to move and stretch” on page 17.
36.4.10 Load balancing

36.4.6 Left Wall and Right Wall tools
You can view the percentage of load that is balanced by the
The Left Wall and Right Wall tools can be very useful. See post-tensioning within design strips. See “Viewing
“Drawing walls” on page 52. balanced load percentages” on page 130.
36.4.7 Changing multiple tendon profile 36.4.11 The Auditor

points
This can be invaluable in unlocking the “black-box” of
You can seek and change profile points that have the same calculations. See Chapter 30, “Using the Auditor”.
value in one operation. See “Change profiles tool” on
page 121. Note: Many users complain that there is too much infor-
mation revealed by the auditor. You can reduce the infor-
mation by auditing a rule set rather than the design
36.4.8 Plotting Results summary.
Many users are unaware of the power of the plot

capabilities. You can plot many results including (strip
RAM Concept 169

Chapter 36
170 RAM Concept

Chapter 37
37 Frequently Asked Questions
This chapter addresses many of the questions that we are Is Concept capable of running a single design strip for quick
frequently asked. preliminary runs without modeling the whole building?
It should be read in conjunction with: Yes. See Chapter 35, “Using Strip Wizard” and Chapter 45,
“Strip Wizard Tutorial”.
• “Learning RAM Concept”: Section 1.5 of Chapter 1
Can I model a pour strip?
• Chapter 36, “General Tips”, and
• Chapter 38, “Errors and Warnings” Yes, although there are limitations.
1 Use the orthotropic properties for the pour strip area such
that the axial stiffness perpendicular to the strip is signifi-
cantly reduced. See the discussion below Figure 16-6 on
37.1 Capabilities and Modeling page 57
2 Terminate tendons either side of the pour strip.
What can Concept design?
Note: Modeling a pour strip in this manner does not
Elevated (suspended) concrete floors and mat foundations consider the temporary situation before the strip is poured
(rafts). They can be reinforced concrete, post-tensioned back. This could affect deflections and resultants.
concrete or hybrid. See “Structural systems” on page 1 for
more information. How can I model curved edges or walls?
Is there a limit on the size of structure modeled? Use a series of straight lines. The approximation should
have negligible effect.
The only limit is the performance of the computer
hardware. The analysis run time is approximately Can Concept be used to design retaining walls by drawing the
proportional to the square of the number of nodes in the wall as a slab?
model, so large structures may take a significant amount of
time to analyze. Design time is approximately proportional While Concept is not optimized for this use, it can perform
to the number of span segment strip cross sections. See most of the analysis and design tasks if you are very
“Decreasing calculation time” on page 128 for more careful.
information. Care must be used as Concept assumes that gravity loads
are in the downward Z direction. You need to set all of the
Is there any restriction to the maximum thickness of slab that
can be modeled?
self-dead loading load factors to zero and create your own
self-weight loadings. You probably want to apply these
Concept's analysis of slab elements considers shear loads at the mid-slab depth; otherwise the eccentricity will
deformation as well as bending deformation. This ensures add a self-weight moment to the slab.
that Concept gives reasonable results for both thin slabs
and thick slabs. While Concept's design cross sections reports all of the
moments and forces on the design cross section, Concept
In general, Concept's design provisions apply the code does not perform design considering all of the forces and
requirements that are appropriate for slabs with typical moments. Specifically, Concept does not consider the Mz
span-to-depth ratios. If the geometry of your slab is outside value in design, because Concept does not specify the
the usual ranges, you may need to consider if any special positioning of reinforcement that is important for Mz
design considerations are necessary. design.
Can Concept design more than one story at a time? Concept does not consider “P-delta” effects.
Not by itself. You can use the RAM Structural System to What does “hybrid” mean?
integrate numerous floors into one large model.
A hybrid floor is one that contains both PT and RC areas.
Can I use Concept to design slab-on-ground? Most post-tensioned floors have some RC elements such as
pour strips and elevator core slabs. By selecting the
The expression “slab-on-ground” is often used to described appropriate design rules these regions can be designed at
residential house slabs. The designer has to use engineering the same time as the PT elements.
judgment to determine if mat analysis and design
techniques are suitable for such structures. See the FAQ for
“Mats (rafts)” on page 174.
RAM Concept 171

Chapter 37
37.2 Files 37.3 Plans and perspectives
What is the difference between creating a mat (raft) file and an What's the difference between a plan and a layer?
elevated slab file?
A layer is an organizational concept. A layer is a collection
There is really no difference; all files give you the same of related objects and results and each object and result
capabilities. The default files are setup differently because resides on one and only one layer. For example, all slab
there are usually additional load cases and plans for a mat elements are on the Element layer.
(lateral load cases, soil bearing plans, etc.). With some
work, you could turn any elevated slab file into a mat file Plans, on the other hand, are a display and editing concept.
and vice versa. Each plan is a filtered view of all of Concept’s layers. A
plan can be set up to edit a particular layer, but the plan
Can I save the data file with results? does not “own” the layer. All changes that are made to the
layer using the plan will be visible in all other plans,
This cannot be done with the current version - you need to because all plans are viewing the same set of layers.
open the file and recalculate. We expect to add this feature
in a future version (but the “save with results” files will be See Chapter 3, “Understanding Layers” and Chapter 4,
huge). “Using Plans and Perspectives” for more information.
Can I work from CAD drawings? How do I delete unwanted plans?
Yes. See Chapter 13, “Using a CAD Drawing”. 1 Choose Layers > Delete.
A dialog box appears.

Is it necessary to start a model with a DWG or DXF file?
2 Click OK to confirm the deletion.
No. For straightforward geometry it may be quicker to
draw “from scratch”. It can be useful to specify a grid and Can I view all information on one plan?
then use snap to grid to locate columns and walls.
Yes, but it is generally not advised. You can turn on all
I deleted the imported drawing – can it be brought back? objects from one layer in one operation, and then repeat for
the next layer.
Yes. It is sometimes a good idea to delete the imported
drawing as it affects the extent that Concept displays and 1 Make the plan or perspective the active window.
prints. Any DWG or DXF file can be re-imported if 2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ).
necessary.
3 Click on the tab for the object’s layer.
If you moved the imported drawing or structure after the
The plan or perspective’s layer is the one initially selected.
first import then the new import will not match. You can
move the new drawing if necessary. 4 Check the Show All box, and click OK.
Can Concept export to a drawing file to aid in drafting? Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
includes the Visible Objects command.
Yes. See “Exporting a plan” on page 155 of Chapter 33.
How can I tell if there is an object on a layer?
Can I export results?
See “Determining which plans contain objects” on page 10
Yes. See “Exporting a table” on page 155 of Chapter 33. of Chapter 3, “Understanding Layers”.
Can I change the default new file settings? I have two items at the same location, how do I select just one
of them?
Yes. See “About templates” on page 6.
Double click at the location and you should select just one
Can I set the default file for an RC design? object. Hold down shift and double click again and you
select the other object.
Yes. You could create a template that is suited to RC
design, such as eliminating the Initial Service Load Why do I see nothing in a perspective display?
Combination and Initial Service Rule Set, and unchecking
the Consider as Post-Tensioned option in the span segment The perspective “camera” may be looking in the wrong
properties. See “About templates” on page 6.
direction. Click Zoom Extent ( ) or Show Print
Viewpoint ( ).
172 RAM Concept

Chapter 37
Why can I not see the area springs in a perspective? Without the priority system the modeling of floors would
require one of two methods:
Area springs can take a long time to generate in a
perspective and so are not turned on in the default files. • Objects for slabs of different thicknesses, beams,
You need to turn them on with the Visible Objects dialog. openings etc. could not overlap - this would be very
tiresome for all but very simple floors, or
What does “conflicting” mean in a Selected Items field?
• Depths would have to additive. For example, you would
This means that more than one object has been selected and have to deduct slab depth from beam depth. If you had to
they have different values for that property. For example, if change the slab depth then a change would be required for
you select two slab objects that have different thicknesses the beam, unless its depth changed by the same amount.
then the thickness field displays “conflicting”.
Can I copy columns or walls below to the same above?
Note: In versions prior to 3.0 the field would be blank in
such instances. Yes.
1 Select all of the columns or walls you wish to copy.
2 Choose Edit > Copy (or right-click and choose Copy
37.4 Units from the popup menu that appears).
3 Choose Edit > Paste (or right-click and choose Paste from
the popup menu that appears).
What units can I use?
See Chapter 7, “Choosing Units”. The pasted objects are the current selection.
Can I switch units after creating a file? choose Selection Properties.
See “Changing the units” on page 21. 5 Change Support Set from Below to Above, and click OK.
Note: It is important that you do not abandon the process

after pasting. Otherwise, you will have two supports below
37.5 Codes at various locations, which causes calculation errors.
The meshing operation produces a very irregular mesh. Is this

Can I change codes after creating a file? satisfactory?
Yes. See “Code options” on page 126. This depends upon a number of factors. See “Deciding
what mesh element size to use” on page 61 and “Improving
the mesh” on page 62.
37.6 Sign Conventions Can I vary the mesh intensity at different locations?
Indirectly. See “Selectively refining the mesh” on page 62.

What is the sign convention for moments shears and
reactions? What value should I use for the area springs Z force constant?
See “Selecting sign convention” on page 23 and “About The geotechnical engineer commonly provides a value
plot sign convention” on page 24. called the “subgrade modulus” or “modulus of subgrade
reaction”.
Can I change the sign convention?
As a guide only: realistic values vary from 100 pci
Yes. See “Changing the sign convention” on page 24.
(approx. 25 MN/m3) for soft clay to 750 pci (approx. 200
MN/m3) for very dense gravel.
37.7 Structure
37.7.2 Element layer
How can I view the slab without the mesh?

37.7.1 Mesh Input layer
Choose Layers > Element > Slab Summary Plan
Why is it necessary to have priorities?
RAM Concept 173

Chapter 37
What is the difference between beam and slab elements? 37.7.5 Mats (rafts)
There is no difference unless you modify their behavior.
How do I design a mat foundation?
See discussion of behavior in “Slab area properties” on
page 56 and “Beam properties” on page 57. The Chapter 44, “Mat Foundation Tutorial” introduces the
concepts for mat design.
How many nodes or elements are allowed?
Does Concept ignore soil tension?
There is no limit, other than the limitations of your
computer. You can reduce the tension by iteration. The tension gets
closer to zero with an increase in the number of iterations.
How many elements should I use per span or panel?
See “Zero tension iteration options” on page 126 for more
This cannot be answered directly as it depends upon the information.
structure and loads. See “Deciding what mesh element size
to use” on page 61. Does Concept design for soil heave?
Not directly. You could draw spring supports that

37.7.3 Columns approximate varying soil support.
Do columns restrain the slab? Do I need to draw the columns above in a mat foundation
model?
Depending upon the defined fixity, columns can provide
No, but it is a good idea. It ensures a node is placed at that
rotational and lateral restraint.
location where there is likely to be a heavy point load.
If the far end of a column is defined as a “roller” support
(or both ends of the column are pinned) then the column Can Concept design for pile supports?
does not provide any lateral restraint to the slab.
Yes. Use either (flexible) columns under, or point springs.
Skin friction is not considered.
Do columns above the slab support the slab vertically?
No. Columns only restrain the slab rotationally and Can Concept design for pile and mat (raft) action together?
laterally.
Yes, but the results could be very susceptible to variations
in geotechnical parameters. For example, if the soil’s
stiffness is overestimated, the actual pile reactions could be
37.7.4 Walls significantly underestimated. Use caution.
Do walls restrain the slab laterally?
Does the area spring support have to match the mesh?
Yes, if you select Shear Wall as a property. If the Shear
No.
Wall is unchecked then the slab is allowed to slip freely
over the top of the wall. The walls rotational stiffness is Can the soil stiffness vary?
independent of the Shear Wall setting; use the fixity
settings to control the walls rotational stiffness about its Yes. You can vary the stiffness in two directions. See “Area
longitudinal axis. spring properties” on page 55.
What is the effect of specifying walls above? Where do I select the allowable soil bearing pressure?
Wall elements can be used to model the stiffness and This is not an input parameter. You need to look at soil
spanning ability of walls connected to the slab. You should bearing pressure plans (which have a maxima / minima
exercise caution when using them. See “Walls above” on legend) to assess the maximum pressures. Also, see the
page 167. FAQ on “Soil bearing” on page 183 (in the results section).
Do walls above the slab support the slab vertically? Does Concept iterate to remove tension in a point or line
spring?
No, they act like beams. See “Walls above” on page 167.
No, only for area springs.
Do walls above the slab provide rotational restraint?
There is no restraint at the far end of a wall above. (Even if

“Rotationally Fixed at Far End” is checked, it is ignored).
174 RAM Concept

Chapter 37
37.8 Tendons Does it matter how I draw “half” tendons?
Yes. The inflection point is measured from the first point

Why are some tendons shown at the wrong elevation in the clicked and the profiles are specified in the order of the
tendon perspective? points clicked. To be compatible with the tendons created
using the Full Span Tendon tool, we strongly recommend
The soffit elevation at each profile point is determined
that you always start at the high point.
during the Analyze All and Calculate All commands. If one
of these commands is not performed since the drawing (or Can I terminate some strands past a column?
moving, etc.) of a tendon, or since a change in the mesh,
the tendon elevations in perspectives are not accurate. This can be done with one of two methods.
The same is true for elevations optionally shown as text on 1 The tendon can be “forked” such that the number of
the plans. strands decreases. As shown in Figure 37-1, if the transition
is from 15S (15 strands) to 10S (because an adjacent span
does not require that many strands) then terminate 5S using
It is quicker to analyze (but not using “Calculate All”) with
a half span tendon. It is common to terminate strands at
Process > Analyze All. This avoids processing the design
quarter span and at the slab centroid.
calculations.
Note: You should only use this method for tendons with no
What do “Latitude” and “Longitude” Tendons mean?
jacks attached. This is because a jack attached to tendons of
In the USA, Britain and other countries it is typical practice different lengths has inaccurate seating (wedge draw-in)
to place all the tendons in one direction in a concentrated loss calculations.
band over column lines. If the designer is using another
practice then we recommend that you still use the Latitude
and Longitude tendon layers because it makes editing the
PT easier. i.e. Put the tendons in the X direction on one
layer and the Y tendons on the other. Latitude and
Longitude are just layer names.
Figure 37-1 Termination of strands (no jacks)
Do I have to draw the tendons for a post-tensioned slab?
2 The second method can be used when jacks are modeled.
Yes. It is not difficult, and encourages you to address If the total number of strands is 15S then one tendon with
detailing issues before they become field problems. 10S needs to be continuous with an additional tendon with
5S alongside. It is common to terminate tendons at quarter
How do I draw tendons?
span and at the slab centroid.
See “About drawing tendons” on page 118, “Drawing
single tendons” on page 118 and “Drawing multiple
tendons” on page 119.
You double click the tendon tool to change default tendon

properties and then draw tendons span by span, or panel by
panel. Figure 37-2 Termination of strands / tendons (jacked). Plan alignment of
tendons is subjective.
You can select a specific tendon segment and right-click to
change that segment’s properties. Does Concept check to make sure the number of strands in
connected tendon segments is consistent?
You can seek and change profile points that have the same
value in one operation. See “Change profiles tool” on Yes. See section 38.3.3 of Chapter 38, “Errors and
page 121. Warnings”.
Can I harp tendons? How does Concept calculate friction losses?
Yes. Any tendon segment can be declared to be harped. The Concept only calculates friction losses if jacks are
“half-span” tendon tool is useful for any harp point (or any specified.
low point) that is not at mid-span. Multiple harp points can
Concept performs friction loss calculations considering the
be located in any span by using multiple tendon segments.
(elevation view) curvature of the tendons, the (plan view)
horizontal kinks in the tendon and the jacking and friction
parameters. The stress in the tendon is assumed to vary
linearly along each tendon segment.
RAM Concept 175

Chapter 37
Along each tendon the following formula used is: Does Concept calculate elongations (extensions)?
P2 = P1 * exp-(mu * theta + k * L) Yes, if jacks are specified. Use the Visible Objects dialog to
view Jack Elongation on a plan.
where
Do the elongations (extensions) include the effect of the
• P1 is the known stress at one end of a tendon segment seating distance (wedge draw-in)?
• P2 is the unknown stress at the other end of a tendon
Yes. The elongation reported includes the deduction of the
segment
seating distance.
• mu is the angular friction coefficient (in units of
1/radians) Where are tendon profiles measured from?
• theta is the total angular change along the tendon See discussion on Profile in “Tendon properties” on
segment page 117.
• k is the wobble coefficient (in units of 1/length)
It's much easier to take all the strands and put them into one
• L is the tendon segment length tendon bundle instead of having to lay them all out. Is there
much difference to the model whether you distribute tendons
Note: Some engineering communities (Australia in over the tributary or not?
particular) use a definition of wobble coefficient that is the
accidental angular change per unit length. These commu- This is a matter of engineering judgment. There is certainly
nities can calculate the wobble coefficient that Concept no need to lay out individual strands and it is usually
uses, k, with the following relationship: k = AngularWob- satisfactory to group strands in larger tendon groups than
bleCoefficient * mu. that installed in the field. Keep in mind that design strip
cross sections consider only the tendons that they cut
At the joints between tendon segments Concept uses the through to calculate strength etc. There could be instances
following formula: where you want to model banded tendons in multiple
groups (if the band is very wide).
P4 = P3 * exp-(mu * angle)
I have laid out the longitude tendons but want to change the
where
number of strands per group. Do I have to lay them out again?
• P4 is the unknown stress in the next tendon segment
No. The number of strands in a tendon does not have to be
• P3 is the known stress in the previous tendon segment an integer, so you can change it by any increment.
(or the jack stress)
Can I determine the force in a tendon?
• mu is the same angular friction coefficient as above
• angle is the total angle change at the tendon profile Yes. Use the Visible Objects dialog to view the Tendon
point (includes both horizontal and vertical kinks) Forces on a plan.
Concept incorporates seating loss (wedge draw-in loss) Does Concept check for tendons being outside of the
into the losses using the standard strain integration concrete?
formulation. The equations above are still used, but the
Yes. See discussion in sections 38.3.4 and 38.3.5 of
known and unknown values are swapped. Concept adjusts
Chapter 38, “Errors and Warnings”.
the tendon stresses iteratively until the integration of the
strain change in the tendon equals the specified anchorage Do I need to do a load balancing calculation with all the
seat loss. tendons?
Long term losses are input by the user as a jack parameter. No. The load balance tool is available to help you calculate
low points, but is not mandatory.
See “About jacks” and “Jack properties” on page 121 for
more information. The load balancing percentage shown on the design strips plan
does not make sense. How is this calculated?
Do I have to specify jacks?
Concept’s balanced load percentage calculation assumes
No. Concept uses the relevant value of fse (specified in the that what you define as a span, actually behaves like a span.
Materials criteria page) as the effective stress for any Sometimes this is not the case.
tendon without a jack.
To calculate the effective dead load applied, Concept uses:
D = 8 Md / L2
176 RAM Concept

Chapter 37
Where: Example 37-1 Lateral SE
D is the dead load to be calculated Consider the structure with two elevated floors shown in
Figure 37-3. Each level is 3m high and the structure is 10m
Md is the total dead load span moment (calculated from the wide.
moments at the first, middle and last cross sections of the
span)
L is the span length (as determined from the span segments,

support conditions, etc.)
The calculation for the effective balance load is similar:
B = 8 Mb / L2
The percentage balanced is 100 . (-B/D)
If, for example, the dead load moments at the start, middle
and end cross sections are not negative, positive and
negative then percentage balance calculation will not be
useful.
This does not mean your strips are wrong, but it might
mean that your tendon layout is not doing what you think it
Figure 37-3 Example with two elevated floors
is doing. Look at the DL (or DL + LL) deflections (without
balance loading) and try to get a better feeling for how the
structure is working and from there determine where to add Assume the following:
and remove tendons. • a frame analysis has been performed on the building for
this 100kN loading and the column forces are known
• a very simple distribution of forces (reasonable for
37.9 Loadings beams much stiffer than columns)
The forces on the top level slab (including column

Is pattern loading possible? reactions) are:
Yes. See Chapter 20, “Creating Pattern Loading”.
For an irregular structure it is very time consuming to draw the

area loads to match the structure. Is there a faster way?
It is not necessary for area loads to match the structure.

Area loads can overlap each other and they can “overhang”
the floor. This is shown in the PT tutorial.
Figure 37-4 Forces on top level slab
Are area loads additive or does the maximum govern?
Loads are additive. Fx0 = 100kN
How do Lateral Self Equilibrium loadings work?

Fx1 = -50kN Fx2 = -50kN
Refer to “Self-equilibrium analysis” on page 313 of Fz1 = -15kN Fz2 = 15kN

Chapter 46, “Analysis Notes”.
My1 = 75kN-m My2 = 75kN-m
However, the best way to understand Lateral SE could be
this simple example: These forces are in equilibrium and are applied directly to
the slab in a lateral SE loading. Concept then calculates the
correct forces in the slab, design strips and punching
checks.
RAM Concept 177

Chapter 37
For the intermediate level there are more forces to consider 37.11 Design Issues
(all of these are from the frame analysis). The forces that
the columns apply to the slab are:
What support width is used for round columns?
Concept calculates the support width for an equivalent (in

area) square column.
What is the relevance of the Include Detailed Section Analysis

box in Criteria > Design Rules?
That box instructs Concept to do a cracked section analysis

even if one is not required for the code criteria.
The only reason to check the box is if you want to see

Figure 37-5 Forces on intermediate level slab cracked section stresses even when they are not used for
code checking / design.
Fx3 = 50kN Fx4 = -50kN The only reason not to check the box is that cracked section
analyses can be slow. See “Detailed Section Analysis” on
Fx5 = 50kN Fx6 = -50kN
page 128 of Chapter 27, “Calculating Results”.
Fz3 = 15kN Fz4 = -45kN
Fz5 = -15kN Fz6 = 45kN

37.12 Results

37.12.1 Reactions
These forces are in equilibrium and are applied directly to
the slab in a lateral SE loading. Does Concept include the weight of columns and walls in self
weight calculations?
Since the “3” and “4” forces occur at the same location,
Concept never includes the weight of supports below.
they can be added together and applied as a single load
(same for “5” and “6”). You decide if the weight of supports above is included.
This is a choice you can make in the Calculation Options.
Concept then calculates the correct forces in the slab,
design strips and punching checks.
Can I choose which column and wall reactions are shown?
Note: There is one simplification - if you do not care about Yes - you can change what Concept plots. See “Reaction”
diaphragm forces, then you can ignore all the Fx and Fy on page 139 and Figure on page 139.
forces. This assumes that the Fx and Fy forces act at the
center of your slab and that the centroid elevation of your If there are columns (and or walls) above and below an
slab is constant. When these two assumptions are not true, elevated slab you can select (through the Plot dialog) which
the effects of these forces are typically still not large, but you reactions are shown. The choices are
may need to use some judgment before you ignore them.
• the total reaction on the slab (below and above)
• the reaction below
• the reaction above
37.10 Analysis
The reaction plans show many small values for Fx and Fy
Should I use “Auto-stabilize structure in X and Y directions” in which makes the plan difficult to read. Can I look at just Fz?
the Calc Options?
You can control this in two ways. The simplest way is to
This is only necessary if your structure has no lateral turn off Fx and Fy with the plot settings. See “Changing
stability, such as an elevated floor with columns on rollers, which results plot” on page 132.
or a mat (raft) with no X or Y direction springs. Auto-
stabilize does not work if there are lateral loads. Alternatively, you can filter out small reactions and
moments through the Units window. See “Specifying
report as zero” on page 21.
178 RAM Concept

Chapter 37
The wall reactions are shown per straight section of wall. Can I I have a pinned column at the edge of the slab. Why is there
see the reaction per wall element? moment shown at the edge about an axis parallel to the edge?
No. This is not available because there would be too much

information shown.
I have modeled columns at the end of walls. The column

reactions are huge and the wall reaction is negative. Is this
realistic?
The huge result is mathematically correct but may not be

realistic. Try modeling the column and walls in question as
vertically compressible. This may reduce the column
reaction to a more realistic value.
How can I determine the reaction at the end of a wall?
Reactions are reported for continuous walls, so if you need The explanation is the same as the preceding question.
discrete reactions leave a gap in the wall or specify a
column at the end of a wall. Why are there two lines for deflection in the strip plots?
The two plots for maximum and minimum differ if you

have one of the following conditions:
37.12.2 Plots
• Alternate envelope factors that are not the same as the
Why is there moment shown at a free edge about an axis load factors (see “About alternate envelope factors” on
parallel to the edge? page 37 of Chapter 11, “Specifying Load Combinations”).
• For example, for the service load combination, the
load factor on live load could be 1.0 and the
alternate envelope factor could be 0.0. This would
produce differing maximum and minimum values.
• Pattern loadings
• More than one load combination using the same rule set.
The default plot shows the maximum and minimum

deflections. You could choose to show just the maximum
values via the plot dialog, but remember that the absolute
of minimum could be more than the maximum. It would be
possible that minimum governs if you have upward
Figure 37-6 Plan of moment about Y-Y axis at opening. The circled mo-
ment is displayed as non-zero.
deflection.
Note: This also applies for plots of demand for resultants

The plotted moments are smoothed curves of the element such as moment or shear.
center moments.
A slab element at a free edge may have a small moment at 37.12.3 Envelopes
it center. The values shown between element centers are
interpolated, but since there is no element outside the edge, What is the significance of Envelopes in the Audit?
there is no way for that value to ever reach zero.
An envelope is a resultant (set of forces) in which one of
For better visual results (values closer to zero at the edge), the force values is a maximum or minimum for an item
you should use smaller elements at the edge. The distance (such as a cross section) under consideration. All of the
from the edge to the edge element center is the most force values within a single envelope occur simultaneously.
important parameter.
Audit envelopes are created by the following process:
• for each rule set, 6 envelopes are added to a list (Max M,
Min M, Max V, Min V, Max P, Min P)
• duplicates are removed (if Max M and Max V are
identical, one of them will be removed)
RAM Concept 179

Chapter 37
• torsion conversion is performed (this can modify the 1 The floor is post-tensioned and yet you have not checked
torsion values, it can also create additional envelopes) the Consider as Post-Tensioned option. Concept is ignoring
the tendons. See the description in “Span segment
The result is a list of envelopes (possibly just one, but also properties” on page 82.
possibly up to 12).
2 The depth of the span segment strip cross section
Note: Some “torsion conversions” (such as modifying the contributes to a large amount of minimum reinforcement.
bending moment due to the torsion) can double the number This may be because the cross section depth is based upon
of envelopes in effect. a thickened area.
3 The bonded tendons are not in the tensile zone.
37.12.4 Reinforcement Why are the reinforcement results on the Design Status layer in
different colors?
Can I determine the reinforcement spacing?
The default Appearance scheme uses different colors for
Yes. “Failed Span Design” and “OK Span Design”.
1 Choose the appropriate reinforcement plan.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ). 37.12.5 AS3600 specific reinforcement
3 Check Bar Spacings under the Span Designs or Section questions
Designs columns.
I am getting more reinforcement than expected. Why is this?
Note: Plotted reinforcement quantities cannot show bar
spacing. The default setting for design strip Environment is Normal.
Changing to Protected can reduce the amount of
Why is the Minimum Reinforcing required placed on the wrong reinforcement. See “Section 9.4.3.2 Shrinkage and
slab face? Temperature” on page 419 for further clarification.
This sometimes happens for an ACI318 or BS8110 / TR43
design. 37.12.6 BS8110 / TR43 specific reinforcement
Concept locates the minimum reinforcing required by questions
certain design criteria on the tension face of the slab (or the
face with the least amount of compression); this normally Why is there bottom steel at the column?
works well for both elevated slabs and mat foundations. There are a couple of possibilities.
However, in certain cases the moment at a design strip 1 See “Why is the Minimum Reinforcing required placed
cross section is of the opposite sign of what would be on the wrong slab face?” on page 180.
expected given the location. For an elevated slab this can
2 TR43 (1st Edition) clause 6.10.5 states that “additional
lead to reinforcing at columns being at the bottom of the
un-tensioned reinforcement shall be designed to cater for
slab and reinforcing at mid-span being at the top of the
the full tension force generated by the assumed flexural
slab.
tensile stresses in the concrete” for “Support zones in all flat
For example, for ACI318 or TR43 if there is no tension at a slabs”.
slab location under service conditions, then Concept places
The note under TR43 table 2 states that “the support zone
the minimum support rebar on the face with the least
shall be considered as any part of the span under
amount of compression. This could be the bottom face at a
consideration within 0.2 x L of the support, where L is the
column.
effective span”.
You can overrule this by choosing Elevated Slab for the
This often means that there is tension on the bottom face
design strip property CS Min. Reinforcement Location.
near the “edge” of the support zone, beyond contraflexure.
See “Span segment properties”, which starts on page 82.
Per 6.10.5, Concept adds reinforcement to the bottom face
The description of CS Min. Reinforcement Location
in such instances.
follows Figure 21-7.
Note: Concept might draw reinforcement bars to the
I am getting more reinforcement than expected. Why is this? column, but a plot could reveal that is only required over a
This can be for a number of reasons. The common ones are: limited zone.
Note: Using column and middle strips for a TR43 PT flat

plate tends to increase the likelihood of this situation.
180 RAM Concept

Chapter 37
Why is there mild service reinforcement near midspan of a

bonded post-tensioned flat plate?
When designing to TR43 (BS8110) with bonded tendons,

many designers are surprised to see bottom service
reinforcement.
TR43 (1st Edition) clause 6.10.5 states that “.... additional

un-tensioned reinforcement shall be designed to cater for Figure 37-9 Example 2: ineffective tendons in tension zone: (i) small num-
ber of strands (ii) near neutral axis
the full tension force generated by the assumed flexural
tensile stresses in the concrete for .... span zones in flat
slabs using unbonded tendons where the tensile stress
37.12.7 Punching Shear
exceeds 0.15 f cu .”
How does Concept check punching shear?
Many designers consider that they do not have to provide
un-tensioned reinforcement if they use bonded tendons. See Chapter 57, “Punching Shear Design Notes”.
However, what they miss is that the reinforcement “shall be
Does Concept check punching shear at the ends of the walls?
placed in the tensile zone, as near as practicable to the outer
fibre”. No.
Concept examines the location of the bonded tendons and What is the stress ratio?
determines if it is effective. See “Calculation of
Supplemental Reinforcement Per TR 43, 6.10.5” on The ratio of maximum stress to allowable stress.
page 437 for further explanation.
Does Concept use redistributed moments in punching shear
checks?
The following figures show where bonded tendons would
not provide serviceability crack control. No. The biaxial moments are factored elastic moments.
Is the design insufficient if the stress ratio exceeds 1.0?
The punching shear at such a column is either:

1 sufficient if provided with design punching shear
reinforcement, or
2 insufficient (reinforcement cannot solve the problem and
the concrete form needs revision).
Why is there a punching failure at a beam? I thought that

punching shear failures occur only in flat slabs.
Figure 37-7 Assumed stress distribution The code provides formula for calculating punching shear.
This does not apply any logic as to whether a punching
failure can occur.
Concept is only doing a punching check at a column

supporting a beam because the user drew a punching check
there. You should decide the nature of the potential failure
mechanism and thus whether punching check is
appropriate.
Figure 37-8 Example 1: tendons in compression zone (not effective) Shallow beams could certainly have punching failure. Deep
beams are less likely to have punching failure, and one-way
shear failure would be the likely failure mechanism.
For example, column A in Figures 37-10 and 37-11 is

satisfactory for one-way shear (with reinforcement in the
beam) but the code equation determines that there is a
punching failure. You need to decide if this is appropriate.
RAM Concept 181

Chapter 37
It would be possible, but very rare, for a punching failure at 37.12.8 Shear reinforcement (one-way)
column B since it is satisfactory for one-way shear in the
beam (with reinforcement). Why does my flat slab (or flat plate) model have one-way shear
reinforcement results? I would expect punching shear to
govern, not one-way shear.
[Similarly: Why does my flat slab (or flat plate) model have one-
way shear failures?]
When engineers design flat slabs by hand, they often

IGNORE the one-way checks. They decide that punching
is all that is appropriate. (This is often decided without
much consideration – it just “seems right”).
Concept does not make this decision, as nowhere does the

code advise to ignore one-way shear checks in a flat slab or
flat plate. Nonetheless - you should decide what the
possible failure mechanism is and so what is appropriate. It
may, or may not, be appropriate to ignore the one-way
shear results. For example, columns C in Figures 37-10 and
37-11 are satisfactory for punching shear (without
reinforcement) but the mathematics of the code requires
Figure 37-10 Mixed form: flat slab with column capitals and beams one-way shear reinforcement. It is up to you to decide if
this is appropriate.
Note: In fact, ACI 318-02 rule 11.12.1.1 specifically

requires a one-way shear check in flat plates.
The results have a lot more shear reinforcement than
expected.
This is likely to be a shear core issue. Refer to “About shear

core” on page 91 and “Shear core in slabs” on page 91 of
Chapter 21, “Defining Design Strips”.
For a post-tensioned beam, the reason could be that

Concept is deducting a fraction of the (bonded) duct from
the web width per the appropriate code rules.
Concept calculates the number of duct by dividing the

Strands per tendon by the Max strands per duct (as
specified in the Materials) and rounding up to the next
integer.
Refer to the following sections for an explanation of

Concept’s shear web calculation:
• For AS 3600, “Section 8.2 Shear Design” on page 415
• For BS 8110, “Section 3.4.5 Design shear resistance of
Figure 37-11 Shear results beams” on page 432.
• For IS 456, “Section 22.4 Design shear resistance of
beams” on page 460.
Note: There is no ACI318 rule concerning deduction of

ducts.
What does this audit text mean: “Depth “d” is zero - replacing
with “column” effective depth. Depth is still zero - giving up.”?
The is likely a combination of two things:
182 RAM Concept

Chapter 37
• there is net compression force and a small moment, and Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Soil Bearing Design >
as such the bending designer does not provide any Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan
reinforcement
• the minimum designer has been turned off
If this is the case, you should consider turning the 37.13 Performance
minimum designer back on.
My computer ran out of memory - what can I do?
1 Choose Help > Machine Settings
37.12.9 Deflection
2 Change Optimization from Speed to Memory.
Is cracking taken into account for deflection?
Not all deflection results consider creep and cracking. It is

very important that you understand which ones do and
which do not. See Chapter 56, “Estimating deflections”.
Why are there two lines for the LT Deflection plot?
See “Why are there two lines for deflection in the strip
plots?” on page 179.
Does Concept warn if deflection is too high?
No. Allowable deflection is a very subjective issue and

Concept does not warn if deflections exceed conventional Figure 37-12 Machine Settings dialog box
limits.
What are the graphics cards requirements?
Note: Concept does display a warning when deflections
are so large that the analysis itself may no longer be valid. It is recommended that you use a graphics card supported
This typically happens for structures that are unstable or by DirectX 9.0. See the graphics card manufacturer for
nearly unstable. Often the instability is related to latest information on DirectX drivers.
unrestrained lateral displacements.
If no graphics card supported by DirectX can be found,
Concept attempts to use software emulation under
37.12.10 Soil bearing Windows XP SP2 and Vista. At least 128 MB of video
RAM is recommended, but 256 MB is more desirable. For
There are many soil bearing pressure plans. Is there a optimal performance, graphics display color depth should
summary? be set to 24-bit or higher. When using a color depth setting
of 16-bit, some inconsistencies will be noted.
The Soil Bearing Design rule set envelopes the maximum
and minimum bearing pressures for all load combinations.
RAM Concept 183

Chapter 37
184 RAM Concept

Chapter 38
38 Errors and Warnings
RAM Concept has many error and warning messages that 3 Check the Priorities boxes under Beams and Slab Areas,
can be triggered during modeling and analysis. Some then click OK.
messages are self-explanatory and do not warrant further 4 Use the coordinates in the error dialog box to find the
explanation. location of the problem, and revise the assigned priorities.
This chapter explains some of the more complicated Usually this requires making sure that the thickest slab or
warning and error messages that commonly arise. beam have the higher priority (the lowest priority is 1).
Most errors and warnings advise of a coordinate (x,y) or an Note: The highest priority is not always assigned to the
object number. Concept shows coordinates at the bottom of thickest element. For example, where a standard slab area
the workspace (see Figure 2-1 on page 5). You can turn on overlaps a depressed slab area.
object numbers with the Visible Objects ( ) dialog box.

38.1.2 Line is too short at (x,y)
To show an object number:
1 Choose Layers > Plan. Concept has a minimum element size of 50 mm
(approximately 2 inches). This is effectively a “snap”
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ). distance. When an object such as a slab area has two nodes
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that closer than this distance the line between them is too short.
includes the Visible Objects command. In such cases, Concept merges the two nodes together and
reports the coordinates of this occurrence in the dialog box.
3 Check the Numbers box under the appropriate object’s
column, then click OK. You can view the resulting elements and nodes in the
element standard plan.
38.1 Meshing 38.1.3 Feature eliminated at (x,y)

This warning is a result of one of two things:
Concept can generate several different errors and warnings
• A feature is too small to model (for example, a 1"
for meshing. A general description of meshing limitations
(25mm) wide slab area), or
is in “Limitations of the automatic meshing” on page 61.
• Failure to use snapping, causing small overlaps.
It is strongly advised that you heed such errors and
warnings and fix the problems. Otherwise, Concept
generates the mesh everytime you do a “Calc All”. 38.1.4 Recursion too deep
Note: Nearly all meshing problems are due to the user’s If the mesh ends up with 3 nodes at a tight angle, Concept
failure to use snapping properly. attempts to use recursion numerous times to adjust the
nodes and make the minimum angle larger. In such a case,
the standard number of recursions did not solve the tight
38.1.1 Two or more slab areas or beams with angle, so the warning message reported that the recursion
the same priority overlap at (x,y) was too “deep”.
Overlapping slabs and beams should have different This does not generally cause a problem, although it is
priorities. This is explained in “The priority method” on indicative that there is a “pointy” element which can affect
page 56. the contour plots. Generally it is best to avoid this situation.
See “Feature eliminated at (x,y)”.
The error is generated when two or more overlapping slab
or beam objects have the same priority. Note: You should investigate the meshing / modeling of the
problem area to ensure that Concept's elements are
To fix this error: reasonable for the area.
1 Choose Layers > Mesh Input Layer > Standard Plan.
Note: This error is usually caused by a failure to use
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ). snapping while drawing: two lines that are supposed to be
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that in the same place are instead slightly off parallel and
includes the Visible Objects command. intersect.
RAM Concept 185

Chapter 38
38.1.5 An error has been found. Two column 38.3 Tendons

elements below the slab are at the same
location. Delete column element #a or #b.
This error occurs when you inadvertently draw a column at 38.3.1 Tendon # has a radius (a) that is less
the same location twice, or copy and paste a column and do than the minimum allowable (b).
not change the Support Set (above or below).
Parabolic tendons with a large drape relative to their length
To fix this error:
have a small radius. A warning is triggered when the
tendon segment radius is less than the minimum radius for
1 Choose Layers > Mesh Input Layer > Standard Plan. that tendon system.
A tendon’s minimum (vertical) radius is specified in the
3 Check the Column numbers box. Materials section. Concept does not check horizontal radii
4 Place the cursor at the appropriate column, double click as tendon segments are straight in plan.
and delete.
The radii shown are suggestions based on industry
standards. You can change them based on advice from
38.1.6 An error has been found. A column prestress companies.
element below the slab is not attached to the Note: The warning can be indicative of an overbalanced
slab. Revise column element #a (below the condition (too much uplift) for parabolic tendons.
slab)
To remove the warning you can adjust the tendon profile or
This error occurs when a column is outside the slab change the minimum radius in the Material section.
boundary (or within an opening). To fix the problem you
should move the column or edit the slab such that the To edit the minimum radius:
column is within the slab boundary. 1 Choose Criteria > Materials.
2 Edit the minimum radius for the PT system.
38.2 Loads
38.3.2 Cannot auto-position profile point at
(x,y) due to profile point value
38.2.1 An error has occurred while This warning occurs when both of the following are true
assembling the load vector. A point load is not for two tendon segments that share a Profile Point 2:
on the slab. Revise point load #a. 11The tendon segments have the Position Profile Point 2 for
equal balance loads option checked, and
A point load that is not on a finite element is considered an
error. Apart from generating the error, Concept essentially 12One, and only one, of the tendon segments is flat (that is, the
ignores the load. values for Profile Point 1 and Profile Point 2 produce a flat
tendon segment: this usually occurs when the two values are
equal).
38.2.2 An error has occurred while
assembling the load vector. A line load is not The Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads option
totally on the slab. Revise line load #a. is intended to move the plan position of Profile Point 2 so
that the uplift is equal for both tendon segments. This is not
A line load that is not completely on finite elements possible when one tendon segment is flat (zero drape) as
generates this error. There may be times you ignore the there is no uplift in that tendon segment.
error, such as when a line load crosses an opening. Concept
ignores the part of the load crossing the opening.
38.3.3 An error has occurred while trying to
Note: You should closely investigate such an error. A line calculate a profile. A profile point is not on the
load may appear to be on a slab edge, but actually be
slab. Click on the Fix button to correct the
outside it. If you believe you have a line load across an
profile point at (x,y).
opening and ignore the error, you may miss a real problem.
This occurs when a tendon extends beyond the slab edge.
To fix this error, stretch the profile point so its end is on the
edge or slightly inside the slab edge.
186 RAM Concept

Chapter 38
The dialog box offers an automatic fix (Click on the Fix To avoid the warning go to the appropriate tendon layer
button). If you click this button, Concept moves the profile (the dialog box indicates on which layer the tendon is
point to the nearest concrete element. located) and change the number of strands in the tendon.
Note: It is usually best to use the Select Connected Tendons

38.3.4 An error has occurred while trying to tool.
calculate a profile. A profile point is not within See “Can I terminate some strands past a column?” on
the slab (vertically). Adjust the profile at (x,y). page 175 of Chapter 37, “Frequently Asked Questions” for
more advice.
This occurs when a tendon profile point is not within the
slab thickness. Profile values are always relative to the slab
or beam soffit at the location of the profile point. The
38.3.8 An error has occurred while trying to
easiest way to find these problems is to look at a tendon
perspective.
calculate the tendon effective stresses. A
tendon is not connected to any jacks.
If a profile point is at a top or bottom surface step, Concept Investigate tendon #a. [If any tendons are
moves the profile point so that there is no ambiguity. You stressed then all tendons must be stressed.]
should check that the profile point is within the expected
slab area. Concept calculates losses in tendons that have one or two
jacks attached. Concept does not allow a (latitude or
longitude) tendon layer to have some tendons with jacks
38.3.5 An error has occurred while trying to but other tendons with no jacks. You can have one tendon
calculate the tendon profiles. A tendon is out layer (say, latitude) with jacked tendons and the other
of the slab at (x,y). tendon layer with no jacks.
This is different to 38.3.4 in that the profile points are When you encounter this error, find the tendon (from the
within the slab, but the tendon is out of the slab somewhere number given) and draw at least one jack on the tendon.
between the profile points. This usually occurs when there
is a top or bottom surface step.
38.4 Miscellaneous
38.3.6 Tendon #a is harped, and hence
violates the minimum allowable radius (b)
38.4.1 An Error occurred while trying to
A harped tendon has (vertically) straight segments. There is
calculate everything. An error has occurred
thus a zero radius at the profile point(s).
while triangularizing the stiffness matrix. The
To avoid the harped tendon warning: structure is unstable at node: a, DOF: Y-Axis
1 Choose Criteria > Materials.
Translation. Revise the structure.
2 Create a new PT system (possibly called “Harped”). This means that the structure has no lateral stability. You
need to either provide some lateral stability (e.g. shear
3 Set the minimum radius for the new PT system to zero.
walls, columns with sufficient moment connections, lateral
4 Use the new system for the harped tendons. springs etc.) or auto-stabilize the structure.
To auto-stabilize the structure:

38.3.7 An error has occurred while trying to 1 Choose Criteria > Calc Options
calculate the tendon effective stresses. A
2 Check the Auto-stabilize structure in X and Y directions
tendon has a different number of strands than
box.
an adjacent tendon. Investigate tendon #a.
Note: This does not work if there are lateral loads.
You can vary the number of strands along a continuous
tendon, but it is discouraged. This warning alerts you that
the number of strands within the tendon is variable.
RAM Concept 187

Chapter 38
38.4.2 An error occurred: Loading has 38.4.5 Rule Set “Strength Design” is being
horizontal loads, but the structure is used by load combinations that appear to
automatically stabilized in the X and Y have load factors set for different purposes.
directions. This is likely an error.
You cannot auto-stabilize the structure if there are Any load combination that uses the Strength (or Ductility)
horizontal loads (other than tendons). rule sets should logically have a load factor (and alternate
envelope factor) of 1 for the Hyperstatic Loading
You must (1) uncheck the Auto-stabilize structure in X and (regardless of the presence of tendons). Concept provides
Y directions box in the Calc Options, and (2) provide some the warning when this is violated.
lateral stability (e.g. shear walls, columns with sufficient
moment connections, lateral springs etc.). The warning usually occurs when you have added load
combinations and forgotten to enter the Hyperstatic
Loading load factors. To avoid the warning change all load
38.4.3 The code rules selected in Rule Set factors (and alternate envelope factors) for the Hyperstatic
“Service Design” do not appear compatible Loading to 1 for all of the load combinations that utilize the
with the load factors in the load combinations strength or ductility rule sets.
using the rule set. This is likely an error.
Any load combination that uses the Service (and Sustained 38.4.6 The mat / raft is likely unstable. There
Service / Max Service) rule sets should logically have a is less that 25% contact area.
load factor of 1 for the Balance Loading (regardless of the
presence of tendons) and load factors of no more than 1 for When the mat (raft) has a significantly reduced bearing
dead and live loadings. Concept provides the warning when area it is likely that bearing pressures are very high and
this is violated. there could be instability.
The warning usually occurs when you have added load

combinations and forgotten to enter the Balance Loading 38.4.7 Punching Check #a is not located at a
load factors. To avoid the warning change all load factors column
for the Balance Loading to 1 for all of the load
combinations that utilize the service (sustained service / This error occurs when a column is relocated after the
max service) rule sets. punching checks have been drawn and the punching check
is no longer centered on the column. You need to remove
and redraw the punching check. It usually helps to show the
38.4.4 Load Combination “Service” punching check number.
(Sustained Service / Max Service) has unusual
To display the punching check number (as opposed to column
balance and / or hyperstatic load factors. This
number):
is likely an error.
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Punching Checks Plan.
Any load combination that uses the Service (and Sustained 2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ).
Service / Max Service) rule sets should logically have a
load factor of 1 for the Balance Loading (regardless of the 3 Check the Punching Shear Checks numbers box.
presence of tendons) and a load factor (and alternate
envelope factor) of zero for the Hyperstatic Loading.
Concept provides the warning when this is violated. 38.4.8 An error has been found. The cross
section trimming for strip ab-c has caused
The warning usually occurs when you have added load there to be no concrete remaining at one or
combinations and forgotten to enter the Balance Loading more locations.
load factors. To avoid the warning change all load factors
for the Balance Loading to 1 for all of the load This error is typically reported at steps in the slabs.
combinations that utilize the service (sustained service /
The inter cross section slope limit is trimming the entire
max service) rule sets.
cross section away at the step. See “Inter Cross Section
Slope Limit Trimming” on page 93 for more information.
You can avoid the problem by setting the inter cross section
slope limit to a large value in spans containing large steps.
You should, however, consider the underlying reason for
the error.
188 RAM Concept

Chapter 38
38.4.9 An error has been found. [Design This is likely to happen with thin slabs, or steps.
strip] ab-c has reinforcing bars with too much
cover (the bottom bar is closer to the top than
the top bar).
The trimmed cross section has a thickness and covers such
that the location of the bars is illogical.
RAM Concept 189

Chapter 38
190 RAM Concept

Chapter 39
39 Simple RC Slab Tutorial
This chapter describes the steps for modeling a single panel 7 Right click over the plan and choose Grid.
two-way flat plate with uniform loads. 8 In the Grid Setup dialog box:
The objective of the tutorial is to help you learn some basic • Set x and y to 1 foot [0.25 meters].
modeling skills and expose you to a number of tools and
• Click OK.
methods that should prove useful for real projects.
9 Turn on Snap to Grid ( ).
The codes used are ACI 318-02, AS3600-2001,
10 Click the Column tool ( ).
BS8110:1997 and IS 456 : 2000.
11 Place the cursor near the following coordinates and click
The instructions show “US units” for an ACI 318 design, (the cursor will snap to the grid and the coordinates appear
with metric values and units in square brackets for AS3600, in the command line):
BS8110 and IS 456. The metric values are not exact
• 0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m]
conversions.
• 24, 0 ft. [7.25, 0 m]
For information on creating a new file, see “Creating and
opening files” on page 5. • 24, 20 ft. [7.25, 6 m]
• 0, 20 ft. [0, 6 m]
12 Go to “Draw the slab area:”, or select and delete the four
columns and try the next method.
39.1 Defining the structure
13 Draw the two columns at 0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m] and 24, 0 ft.
[7.25, 0 m] by one of the previous two methods.
You start by drawing the structure and generating the
element mesh. 14 Select the two columns.
15 Click the move tool ( ).
Define the column locations and properties:
16 Hold down shift and click anywhere on the workspace.
1 Choose Layers > Mesh Input > Standard Plan.
17 Type r0,20 [r0, 6], and press Return.
2 Double click the Column tool ( ).
Note: This copies the two columns using the relative
3 In the Default Column Properties dialog box:
command. See “Using relative coordinates” on page 16 for
• Choose a Concrete Strength of 5000 psi [32 MPa further explanation.
for AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110, M40 for IS 456].
Draw the slab area:
• Set Width to 24 inches [600 mm].
1 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
• Set Depth to 24 inches [600 mm].
2 If previously turned on, turn off Snap to Grid ( ).
4 Click OK.
3 Double click the Slab Area tool ( ) to edit the default
Define the column locations by one of the following three properties.
methods. We strongly recommend you try all of them for
4 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
the purpose of learning different procedures.
• Choose a Concrete Strength of 5000 psi [32 MPa
5 Enter the following coordinates (x, y) and press return for AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110, M40 for IS 456].
after each:
• Set Thickness to 12 inches [300 mm].
• 0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m]
• Leave Surface Elevation as 0 and Priority as 1.
• 24, 0 ft. [7.25, 0 m]
• Click OK.
• 24, 20 ft. [7.25, 6 m]
5 With the Slab Area tool ( ) selected, define the four
• 0, 20 ft. [0, 6 m] corners of the slab by snapping at the “outside” corner of
Note: The coordinates will appear in the command line, each column.
see Figure 2-1 on page 5. 6 Complete the rectangle by clicking at your starting point
(or type “c” in the command line and press Return).
Note: Do not enter the actual units (ft., m)
6 Go to “Draw the slab area:”, or select and delete the four Hatch the slab area:
columns and try the next method. 1 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ).
RAM Concept 191

Chapter 39
The Visible Objects dialog box will appear.

2 Check “Hatching” under “Slab Areas”, and then click
OK.
You have now defined the slab but the element mesh does
not yet exist.
Figure 39-2 Element: Standard Plan (ACI318 example dimensions).
Figure 39-1 After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows
the slab area (hatched), and the columns.
Generate the mesh:

1 Click Generate Mesh ( ).
2 In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to
2 feet [0.6 m].
3 Click Generate.
View the mesh: Figure 39-3 Element: Standard Plan (AS3600, BS8110 & IS 456 example).
1 Choose Layers > Element > Standard Plan.
You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This produces

reasonable results, but a regular mesh is better. You can
regenerate a significantly improved mesh once you have
defined design strips. This mesh is shown in Figure 39-4.
Figure 39-4 Element: Standard Plan after regeneration (for ACI318 ex-
ample; the metric codes produce a similar mesh)
192 RAM Concept

Chapter 39
View the structure:

1 Choose Layers > Element > Structure Summary
Perspective.
2 Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool ( ) to rotate
the floor.
3 Click the Set Print Viewpoint tool ( ).
Upon returning to this perspective, you can look at the

saved view by clicking Show Set Viewpoint ( ).
Figure 39-6 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads
hatching turned on): ACI318 example.
Figure 39-5 Element: Structure Summary Perspective.
39.2 Drawing the loads
RAM Concept calculates the concrete self-weight

automatically. There is no limit to the number of loadings
than can be specified but this example defines only Live
Loading.
Draw live loads: Figure 39-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live (Reducible) Loading > hatching turned on): AS3600, BS8110 & IS 456 example.
All Loads Plan.
2 Double click the Area Load tool ( ).
3 In the Default Area Load Properties dialog box: 39.3 Defining the design strips
• Change Fz to 50 psf [2.5 kN/m2].
Design strips are an essential part of RAM Concept
• Click OK. because they link finite element analysis with concrete
design. Their properties include reinforcement bar sizes,
This tool will now draw area loads of 50 psf [2.5 kN/ m2].
cover, and parameters that Concept uses to determine
4 Define an area load over the entire slab by clicking four which code rules are applicable for cross-section design.
corners of a quadrilateral and then typing “c”. This shape There are two directions named Latitude and Longitude.
need not match the slab’s exact dimensions, but should
cover the slab. It is normal practice to design two-way RC flat plates with
column and middle strips in two orthogonal directions, and
that practice is used here.
RAM Concept 193

Chapter 39
Draw latitude design strips:

1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Latitude Design Spans
Plan.
2 Double click the Span Segment tool ( ).
3 The Default Span Properties dialog box opens to the Strip
Generation properties.
• Set Column Strip Width Calc to Code Slab (this is
the default for the AS3600 and IS 456 templates).
• Click the General tab.
• Uncheck the Consider as Post-Tensioned box.
• Click the Column Strip tab.
• Change CS Top Bar to #6 [N20 for AS3600; T20
for BS8110; T20 for IS 456].
• Change CS Bottom Bar to #5 [N16 for AS3600;
T16 for BS8110; T16 for US 456].
Figure 39-9 Latitude direction spans
• Click the Middle Strip tab.
• Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip
Properties box.
• Click OK.
Generate Spans.
5 The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to
Generate set to Latitude (as shown in Figure 39-8):
• Set Minimum Span Length to 2 feet [0.6 meters].
• Click OK.
Figure 39-10 Latitude direction design strips (with hatching turned on)
Draw longitude design strips:

1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Longitude Design Spans
Plan.
3 Click the Column Strip tab in the Default Span Properties
Figure 39-8 Generate spans dialog box
dialog box.
The defaults set up in the Latitude Design Spans Plan will

The latitude spans appear, as shown in Figure 39-9. have remained the same. Since the cover cannot be the
same for both directions, change it for the longitudinal
6 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ), or choose Process >
direction.
Generate Strips.
• Change CS Top Cover to 2.25 inches [60 mm].
The latitude design strips appear, as shown in Figure 39-10.
• Change CS Bottom Cover to 1.38 inches [41 mm].
• Click OK.
194 RAM Concept

Chapter 39

Generate Spans.
5 In the Generate Spans dialog box:
• Set Spans to Generate to Longitude.
• Click the “up-down” orientation button, and click
OK.
Figure 39-13 Longitude direction design strips (with hatching turned on)
Now that there are design strips, you can generate a much
more regular mesh.
Regenerate the mesh:

Figure 39-11 Generate spans dialog box
2 Click Generate.
3 There is now a better mesh. View the mesh on the
The longitude spans appear, as shown in Figure 39-12.
Element Standard Plan.
Generate Strips. Refer to Figure 39-4 to view the new mesh.
The longitude design strips appear, as shown in Figure 39-

13.
39.4 Drawing punching shear checks
Drawing the punching checks is very straightforward.
Draw punching shear checks:

1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Punching Checks Plan.
2 Double click the Punching Shear Check tool ( ).
3 In the Default Punching Shear Check Properties dialog
box:
• Change Cover to CGS to 2.25 inches [60 mm] (the
average top cover)
• Click OK.
4 Fence the slab with the Punching Shear Check tool.
See Figure 39-14 to view the punching checks.
Figure 39-12 Longitude direction spans
RAM Concept 195

Chapter 39
Figure 39-14 Design Strip: Punching Checks Plan Figure 39-15 Design Status: Status Plan for ACI318, AS3600 & IS 456
39.5 Calculate and view the results
You can “run” the file at any time during modeling to

analyze and check for errors. After you have drawn design
strips, Concept can analyze and design. You can then view
the results.
Calculate:
1 Click Calc All ( ).
39.5.1 Design status

The purpose of status plans is to indicate whether there are
any violations of code limits for ductility, one-way shear,
and punching shear.
Figure 39-16 Design Status: Status Plan for BS8110
View Status:
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Status Plan.
39.5.2 Design reinforcement
For ACI318, AS3600 and IS 456, the status plan shows OK
for all design strips and punching shear checks. See Figure You can view reinforcement results as bar drawings or
39-15. plots.
The BS8110 status plan shows punching shear failure. See View Reinforcement:
Figure 39-16. 1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Reinforcement Plan.
Note: Status does not flag excessive deflections. This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each
of the eight design strips. See Figures 39-17 through 39-20.
196 RAM Concept

Chapter 39
Figure 39-20 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for IS 456

Figure 39-17 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for ACI318
Such plans often suffer from “information overload” with

congested results. For this reason, you can access plans in
the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement
according to: face (top or bottom), direction (latitude or
longitude), and type (flexural or shear). You should decide
which plans best convey the results without too much
clutter.
View Specific Reinforcement:

1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Latitude Bottom
Reinforcement Plan.
See Figures 39-21 through 39-24.
Concept provides you with the code clause numbers that

control the maximum top and bottom reinforcement at any
design strip cross section. The following uses latitude
bottom reinforcement as an example.
Figure 39-18 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for AS3600
View Reinforcement Controlling Criteria:
Reinforcement Plan.
3 In the span designs (not section designs) column:
uncheck Bar Descriptions and check Controlling Criteria,
and click OK.
See Figures 39-25 through 39-28 for latitude bottom

reinforcement controlling criteria.
Figure 39-19 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for BS8110
RAM Concept 197

Chapter 39
Figure 39-23 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for

BS8110.
ACI318.
Figure 39-24 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for IS

456.
AS3600.

ACI318 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and controlling Criteria
checked.
198 RAM Concept

Chapter 39

AS3600 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and Controlling Criteria
checked. Figure 39-28 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for IS
456 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and Controlling Criteria checked.
39.5.3 Design reinforcement plots

Concept has plotting options that you can use to view
various strip-based results such as moment, shear,
precompression, reinforcement and crack width.
This section steps you through setting up a reinforcement

plot.
You can bypass this section, but there are steps that help
you learn the more powerful aspects of the program.
To create a new plan that plots latitude bottom reinforcement:

1 Choose Layers > New Plan.
2 Enter a name for the plan, such as “Plot: Latitude Bottom
Reinforcement”. (Concept automatically prepends the layer
name and appends the word “Plan”).

3 Select the “Design Status” layer, and click OK.
BS8110 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and Controlling Criteria
checked. The Visible Objects dialog box appears.
4 Click Show Nothing and click OK.
The Plot dialog box appears with the Section Design

dialog.
6 Check the Active box.
7 Select the Bottom radio button.
8 Change Max Frame Number to 2, and click OK.
See Figures 39-29 to 39-32 for the reinforcement plots.
RAM Concept 199

Chapter 39
Figure 39-29 Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan Figure 39-31 Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan
for ACI318. for BS8110
Figure 39-30 Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan Figure 39-32 Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan
for AS3600 for IS 456
39.5.4 Punching shear

You can view punching shear results on dedicated plans.
View Punching Shear:

Plan.
You can see that, for ACI318, AS3600 and IS 456, the
unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0 and hence
punching shear capacity is satisfactory. These results are
shown in Figure 39-33, Figure 39-34 and 39-37.
200 RAM Concept

Chapter 39
The USR for BS8110 is 1.17, as shown in Figure 39-35.

Since the stress ratio exceeds 1.0, shear reinforcement is
required. Concept designs stud shear reinforcement (SSR)
for such situations.
View SSR:
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan.
The result for BS8110 is shown in Figure 39-36.
Figure 39-35 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for BS8110
Figure 39-33 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for ACI318.
Figure 39-36 Design Status: SSR Plan for BS8110
Figure 39-34 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for AS3600
Figure 39-37 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for IS 456
39.5.5 Deflection
Usually you are interested in deflections for Service (Dead
and Live Load plus PT if applicable) and Long Term
(Creep and Cracking Factors used).
RAM Concept 201

Chapter 39
Concept uses gross section inertia for deflection contours. .

You can investigate the effects of creep, shrinkage and
cracking with the strip based LT Deflection plot. See
Chapter 56, “Estimating deflections” for more information.
Note: The following deflection plans DO NOT consider

cracking, creep or shrinkage.
View service deflection:

Deflection Plan.
The service deflection contours should be visible, as shown

in Figures 39-38 through 39-41.
Note: These models use compressible columns and hence

the deflection includes column deflection.
Note: The AS3600 template uses 70% of live load for the
Service LC. Figure 39-40 Service LC: Deflection Plan for BS8110.
Figure 39-38 Service LC: Deflection Plan for ACI318. Figure 39-41 Service LC: Deflection Plan for IS 456.
View service deflection without colors:

Deflection Plan.
2 Right click over the plan and choose Plot ( ) to change
Plot Type from Color Contour to Contour.
Note: As previously mentioned, you are strongly advised to

review Chapter 56, “Estimating deflections” to understand
how Concept considers cracking, creep and shrinkage for
deflection calculations.
39.5.6 Bending Moments

While it is not necessary to view bending moments, it can
be useful, especially for irregular structures. Even though
principal moments are important, the default moment
Figure 39-39 Service LC: Deflection Plan for AS3600. contours plans are for Mx (moment about the x-axis) and
My. This is because most designers detail reinforcement
202 RAM Concept

Chapter 39
orthogonally, and the directions are usually the x- and y- See “About plot sign convention” on page 24 of Chapter 8,
axes. You can view moments about any axes, including the “Choosing Sign Convention” for further information.
principal axes.
It is not particularly easy to assess the moment contours.

This is why Plot Distribution Tools are so useful.
Note: Plot Distribution Tools are useful for qualitative

results but not quantitative results. Refer “Section distri-
bution plots” on page 132, and, in particular, the
“Summary” on page 134
View Moments:
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Code Specific
Load Combination > Mx Plan.
For ACI318, use Factored LC: 1.4D.
For AS3600, use Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5 L.
For BS8110, use Ultimate LC: 1.4D + 1.6L. Figure 39-42 Factored LC: 1.4D: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribu-
tion tool for ACI318.
For IS 456, use Ultimate LC: 1.5D + 1.5 L.
The contours are moment per unit length about the global
x-axis.
2 Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( )
3 Click the Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ).
4 Click first at the top of the structure and again on the
bottom side.
This shows the bending moment shape, about the x-axis,

along the line you have drawn. See Figures 39-42 through
39-45.
5 Now click from left to right across the structure.
This shows how Mx varies along the span. If you do it

through the column centers, you will see how the column
strip has large negative moments and a small positive
moment near midspan. If you do it in the middle strip, you Figure 39-43 Ultimate LC: 1.2D+1.5L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Dis-
tribution tool for AS3600.
will see only positive moments.
RAM Concept 203

Chapter 39
3 The Default Distributed Reinforcement Properties dialog

box opens.
• Note that Elevation Reference is set to Bottom
Cover.
• Change Elevation to 0.75 inches [25 mm for
AS3600, BS8110 and IS 456].
• Change Bar Type to #5 [N16 for AS3600; T16 for
BS8110; T16 for IS 456].
• Change Spacing to 12 inches [225 mm for
AS3600; BS8110 and IS 456].
4 Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ).
5 Click somewhere on the slab.
6 Click at another point to the left or right to define the
Figure 39-44 Ultimate LC: 1.4D+1.6L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Dis-
tribution tool for BS8110.
orientation of the (primary) reinforcement.
A polygon appears that is the shape of the slab. Once the

file is run you can view the individual bars via the Visible
Objects dialog box.
Note: This creates three objects: a polygon matching the

slab outline, a reinforcement object that belongs to the
latitude reinforcement layer and a reinforcement object that
belongs to the longitude reinforcement layer.
7 Using the Stretch tool, you can adjust the bar grip
postilions for a better appearance.
Refer to Figures 39-46 to 39-47 for ACI 318.
Refer to Figures 39-49 to 39-51 for AS3600, BS8110 and

IS 456.
Figure 39-45 Ultimate LC: 1.5D+1.5L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Dis-
tribution tool for IS 456.
39.6 Drawing reinforcement
Version 3.0 introduces vastly improved tools for drawing

reinforcement bars.
39.6.1 Drawing a bottom reinforcement mat

In this section you are shown how to draw a bottom
reinforcement mat and see the ramifications.
Draw bottom reinforcement:

1 Choose Layers > Reinforcement > Bottom Bars Plan.
2 Double click the Distributed Reinf. Cross in Perimeter
Figure 39-46 ACI 318: Reinforcement > Bottom Bars Plan
tool ( ).
204 RAM Concept

Chapter 39
Figure 39-47 Bottom mat defined by clicking at points A and B. Point C

appears such that AC = AB. The bars are shown to points A and B but the
symbol indicates the reinforcement continues to the slab edges.
Figure 39-49 AS3600, BS8110, IS456: Reinforcement > Bottom Bars Plan
Figure 39-48 Bottom mat modified by stretching grip points at B and C.

Figure 39-50 Bottom mat defined by clicking at points A and B. Point C
appears such that AC = AB. The bars are shown to points A and B but the
symbol indicates the reinforcement continues to the slab edges.
RAM Concept 205

Chapter 39
Figure 39-51 Bottom mat modified by stretching grip points at B and C.
206 RAM Concept

Chapter 40
40 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-05
This chapter describes the steps for modeling a post- Draw the slab area:
tensioned two-way flat plate with uniform loads. 1 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ) and Snap to Point
( ).
The objective of this tutorial is to build on the skills learned
in the Chapter 39 RC tutorial and introduce new steps, such 2 Double click the Slab Area tool ( ) to edit the default
as using a CAD drawing and post-tensioning. properties.
Some tools and methods described in the RC tutorial are
not used here. As such, it is highly recommended that you • Choose a Concrete Strength of 5000 psi.
first do the RC tutorial. • Set Thickness to 10 inches.
This is not a particularly “aggressive” design. After you • Leave Surface Elevation as 0 and Priority as 1.
have completed the tutorial, you may wish to make the slab
• Click OK.
thinner to investigate the ramifications.
4 With the Slab Area tool ( ) selected, define the 10
You could also use this as a reinforced concrete tutorial by vertices of the slab outline by snapping to the imported
making a few adjustments (for example, a thicker slab). drawing’s slab corners.
For information on creating a new file, see “Creating and Note: There are two vertices near each other near B-5 at
opening files” on page 5. 86, 27 ft and 86, 29 ft. Cursor plan coordinates display next
to the command prompt.
5 Complete the polygon by clicking at your starting point
40.1 Import the CAD drawing (or type “c” in the command line and press Enter).
The CAD file you import is located in your RAM Concept

program directory
Import the CAD file:

1 Choose File > Import Drawing.
2 Select the CAD drawing file flat_plate.dwg.

3 Select Inches (the units used in the CAD file) and click
OK.
40.2 Define the structure
To use the CAD file you need to make it visible on the

Mesh Input layer.
Show the drawing on the mesh input layer:

Figure 40-1 The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ). Draw the balcony slab area:
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that 1 Double click the Slab Area tool ( ) to edit the default
includes the Visible Objects command. properties.
3 Click the Drawing Import tab.
4 Click Show All, and then click OK. • Change Thickness to 8 inches.
• Change Surface Elevation to -2 inches.
• Change the Priority to 2, and click OK.
RAM Concept 207

Chapter 40
3 With the Slab Area tool ( ) selected, define the six Draw the opening:
vertices of the balcony outline by clicking at each vertex, 1 Select the Slab Opening tool ( ).
and then click at your starting point (or type “c” in the
2 Define the four corners of the opening by clicking at each
command line and press Enter).
location, and then click at your starting point.
Figure 40-2 The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Draw the drop caps:

properties.
2 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box: Figure 40-3 The opening on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
• Change Thickness to 20 inches.

Hatch the slab areas:
• Change Surface Elevation to 0, and leave the
Priority as 2.
• Click OK. The Visible Objects dialog box will appear.
3 With the Slab Area tool ( ) selected, define the four 2 Check “Hatching” under “Slab Areas”.
drop caps with four or five vertices as appropriate. 3 Check “Hatching” under “Slab Openings”, and click OK.
4 Go to “Draw the opening:”, or try the next method
5 With the Selection tool ( ), select (by double-clicking) includes the Visible Objects command.
and delete the drop cap at B-2.
6 Click Redraw ( ). Define the column locations and properties:
1 Double click on the Column tool ( ).
Some tool button icons have a small triangle in the lower
right corner ( ). This indicates that there are other similar
tools available for this button. • Choose a Concrete Strength of 5000 psi.
7 Place the mouse over the Slab Area tool ( ) and press • Set Width to 24 inches.
down on the left mouse button for one second. • Set Depth/Diameter to 24 inches.
A pop-up menu appears. 3 Click OK.
8 Select the Drop Cap tool from the menu. 4 Click at the center of all 13 column locations shown on
the imported drawing.
The selected tool becomes current for that button.
Define the wall location and properties:
9 Click at the column at B-2.
A Drop Cap Tool dialog box appears.
2 Double click on the Wall tool ( ).
10 Enter an angle of zero degrees. 3 In the Default Wall Properties dialog box:
11 Enter a side dimension of 3.75 feet and click OK. • Choose a Concrete Strength of 3000 psi.
4 Click OK.
208 RAM Concept

Chapter 40
5 Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on 3 Click Generate.
the centerline.
View the mesh:
• Place the cursor near 29.5, 87 ft and it will snap to
where the center of the wall intersects the edge of 1 Choose Layers > Element > Standard Plan.
the slab, and click.
You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This will still
• Place the cursor at the center of the column at C-2 produce reasonable results, but will significantly improve
(it will snap orthogonally) and click. when you regenerate it later on.
You have now defined the structure but the element mesh
does not yet exist.
6 Go to “Generate the mesh:”, or try the next method.
7 The wall should be highlighted as it is the current
selection. If not, select it by double-clicking and press
Delete.
8 Click Redraw ( ).
9 Place the mouse over the Wall tool ( ) and press down
on the left mouse button for one second.
A pop-up menu appears.

10 Select the Left Wall tool from the menu.
11 Click at the extreme corner of the slab near D-2.
12 Click at Grid C, near C-2.
Figure 40-5 Element: Standard Plan.
View the structure:

Perspective.
2 Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool ( ) to rotate the
floor.

the slab areas and opening (hatched), the columns and the wall.
Generate the mesh:

1 Click Generate Mesh ( ). Figure 40-6 Element: Structure Summary Perspective.

3 feet.
RAM Concept 209

Chapter 40
40.3 Define the loads

automatically.
Concept uses superposition of loads. The easiest way to

define areas with increased area loads is to draw a
“blanket” area load over the entire floor, and then draw the
additional loads.
There is no limit to the number of loadings than can be

Figure 40-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the bal-
specified. cony area load).
Define the typical live load:

1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live (Reducible) Loading >
All Loads Plan.
3 In the Default Area Load Properties dialog box:
• Change Fz to 40 psf and click OK.
This tool will now draw area loads of 40 psf.

4 Define an area load over the entire slab by clicking four
corners of a quadrilateral and then typing “c”. This shape
cover the slab.
Define the balcony live load:

2 Define an area load by snapping to the six vertices of the
balcony (and then type “c”). In this situation, it is best for
the load to match the balcony’s dimensions.
You have drawn another 40 psf load. This load should be

highlighted as it is the current selection. If not, select it Figure 40-8 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads
hatching turned on).
before proceeding by double-clicking with the selection
tool.
Define the other dead loading:
3 Choose Edit > Selection Properties, or right-click and 1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live (Reducible) Loading >
choose Selection Properties. All Loads Plan.
4 In the dialog box, change Fz to 60 psf and click OK. 2 With the Selection tool ( ), select both area loads
There is now a total live load on the balcony of 100 psf. (fencing the balcony load selects both loads).
3 Choose Edit > Copy.
Note: You could have drawn the 60 psf load by first
4 Choose Layers > Loadings > Other Dead Loading > All
changing the area load default properties and then using the
tool. Loads Plan.
5 Choose Edit > Paste.
This pastes the live loads onto the Other Dead Loading: All
Loads Plan, ready for editing.
6 With the Selection tool ( ), select the “blanket” load
by double clicking in the center of the floor.
7 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
from the popup menu.
8 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to 20 psf, and
click OK.
210 RAM Concept

Chapter 40
9 Double-click the balcony load.
The balcony load should be the only selected load.

11 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to -20 psf, and
click OK.
The balcony other dead load is now effectively zero.
Figure 40-9 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatch-
ing turned on).
RAM Concept 211

Chapter 40
40.4 Define the post-tensioning • Click at the corner of the slab near D-2.
• Right click, and then click Enter.
Post-tensioning methodology varies from country to 11 Turn off Snap Orthogonal ( ).
country. In the USA it is common to use the “banding”
12 Double click the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) to edit its
technique for detailing tendons in two-way slabs. Banding
default properties.
means concentrating the tendons over support points in one
direction, and distributing them uniformly in the 13 In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box:
orthogonal direction. This method is generally used in • Set Strands per Tendon to 20, and click OK.
conjunction with full-panel design strips. That is, column
14 With the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) selected, draw a
and middle strips are not used.
tendon along grid B:
Note: RAM Concept has two layers for tendons called • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
latitude and longitude. Refer to “Using the latitude and section B-1.
longitude tendon layers” on page 117 for more information.
• Click at the center of the column at B-2.
Note: The tutorial in Chapter 45 explains the use of Strip • Click at the center of the column at B-3.
Wizard to establish an estimate of the number of strands
required for the critical band. • Click at the center of the column at B-5.
• Right click, and then click Enter.
Define the latitude tendons:
1 Choose Layers > Latitude Tendon > Standard Plan.
tendon along grid C:
• Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
3 Click the Drawing Import tab. section B.8-1.
4 Click Show All, and click OK. • Click at the center of the column at C-2.
Showing the CAD file makes the following instructions • Click at the center of the column at C-3.
easier to follow. • Click at the center of the column at C-4.
5 Double click the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) to edit its • Right click, and then click Enter.
default properties.
6 In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box: The latitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a
number of profile points. Any profile point at the end of a
• Set Strands per Tendon to 9. tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 10-inch slab.
• Set Profile at end 1 to 8.75 inches.
16 With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the terminated
• Set Profile at end 2 to 1.25 inches, and click OK. tendon segments, other than those over a drop cap, by:
Note: The one-inch cover to the half-inch diameter strand • Double clicking at grid intersection B-1.
determines these profiles. • Hold the Shift key down and double click at B.8-
1.
8 With the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) selected, draw a • Hold the Shift key down and double click at C-4.
tendon along grid A: • Hold the Shift key down and double click at D-2.
• Click at the center of the column at grid inter- • Hold the Shift key down and double click at D-4.
section A-1.
• Click at the center of the column at A-2. from the popup menu.
• Click at the center of the column at A-3. 18 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 5
• Right click, and then click Enter. inches and click OK.
tendon segments over a drop cap, by:
• Double clicking at grid intersection A-1.
tendon along grid D:
• Click at the center of the column at grid inter- • Hold the Shift key down and double click at A-3.
section D-4. • Hold the Shift key down and double click at B-5.
• Click at the center of the column at D-3. 20 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
212 RAM Concept

Chapter 40
21 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 15

inches and click OK.
Note: This sets the tendon anchorage profile to the

centroid of the 10-inch slab, rather than the centroid of the
drop cap.
22 With the Selection tool ( ), double click the tendon
segment at B-2.
24 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 18.75
segment at C-2.
inches, and click OK.
Note: This accounts for the step near this location. Figure 40-10 Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan
28 With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segments
between C-2 and C-3. Define the longitude tendons:
29 Click the Calc Profile tool ( ). 1 Choose Layers > Longitude Tendon > Standard Plan.
The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the
current balance load is -2.58 kips/ft. If this is not the 3 Double click the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) to
number then you probably selected only one tendon edit its default properties.
segment. 4 In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box:
30 Click Cancel. • Set Strands per Tendon to 4.
31 With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon between • Set Profile at end 1 to 8.75 inches.
C-3 and C-4.
• Set Profile at end 2 to 1.25 inches, and click OK.
32 Click the Calc Profile tool ( ).
Note: The one-inch cover to the half-inch diameter strand
33 Input the desired balance load as -2.6 kips/ft in the Calc
determines these profiles. Strictly speaking, you should
Tendon Profile dialog box and click Calc.
adjust Profile at end 1 at columns (to avoid a clash with
The low point (end 2) adjusts to 5.01 inches. latitude tendons) but you can ignore for this tutorial.
34 With the Selection tool ( ), select all the end span 5 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
tendons between grids 3 and 5. draw tendons in the bottom left panel:
35 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
from the popup menu. section A-1.
36 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 2 to 5 • Click at the center of the column at B-1.
inches, and click OK. • Click at the center of the column at B-2.
Note: These steps first used the Calc Profile tool to • Click at the center of the column at A-2.
determine a low point that produces a similar average uplift
6 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
in an end span as the adjacent span, and then manually
changed the low points for practical reasons. • Set Tendon Spacing to Equal.
• Set Spacing to 6 feet, and click OK.
Note: This spacing exceeds some code maxima, but the

tendon layout is for design purposes and not necessarily for
detailing.
RAM Concept 213

Chapter 40
7 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, 19 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
draw tendons in the next panel: draw tendons in the next panel:
• Click at the center of the column at grid inter- • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
section B-1. section B-2.
• Click at the center of the column at B.8-1. • Click at the center of the column at C-2.
• Click at the center of the column at C-2. • Click at the center of the column at C-3.
• Click at the center of the column at B-2. • Click at the center of the column at B-3.
8 In the Tendon Panel dialog box: 20 In the Tendon Panel dialog box, click OK to accept the
• Set Auto Connect, and click OK. last choices. Alternatively, you could select Auto Connect,
but you would have to uncheck Skip Start Tendon.
9 Turn on Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) and Snap
21 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
draw tendons in the next panel:
Orthogonal ( ).
10 With the Half Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
Note: This sequence is counterclockwise.
draw tendons in the balcony: • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
• Click at the center of the column at grid intersection C-3.
section B.8-1. • Click at the center of the column at D-3.
• Click at the edge of the slab at 0, 59 ft. • Enter 31, 86 (feet).
• Click at the tendon profile point at 24, 56.6 ft.
• Turn off Snap Orthogonal ( ).
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 24, 59 ft. • Click at the center of the column at C-2.
• Click at the tendon profile point at 24, 56.6 ft. 22 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
11 In the Tendon Panel dialog box: • Set Auto Connect.
• Set Auto Connect, and click OK. • Uncheck Skip start tendon, and click OK.
12 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties 23 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
from the popup menu. draw tendons in the next panel:
13 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 6 • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
inches and Profile at end 2 to 4 inches, and click OK. section B-3.
14 With the Selection tool ( ), select the two shortest of
• Click at the center of the column at C-3.
the half-span (cantilever) tendon segments.
from the popup menu. • Click at the center of the column at B-5.
16 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 4 24 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
inches, and click OK. • Set Layout to Splayed.
Note: This makes the short tendon segments flat. • Set Tendon Spacing to Equal.
17 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, • Set Spacing to 6 feet.
• Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
section A-2.
• Click at the center of the column at B-3. section C-3.
• Click at the center of the column at A-3. • Click at the center of the column at D-3.
18 In the Tendon Panel dialog box: • Click at the center of the column at D-4.
• Set Tendon Spacing to Equal. • Click at the center of the column at C-4.
• Set Spacing to 6 feet. 26 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
• Check Skip start tendon, and click OK. • Set Auto Connect.
214 RAM Concept

Chapter 40
• Uncheck Skip start tendon, and click OK. 38 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 15
inches, and click OK.
Note: Auto-connect will ignore the tendons at the first click
because there are already two tendon segments connected at Note: This sets the tendon anchorage profile to the
that point. centroid of the 10-inch slab, rather than the centroid of the
drop cap.
The panel in the top right has too many tendons and some
should be deleted. 39 With the Selection tool ( ), double click the tendon
segment at B-2.
27 Select the second tendon in this panel.
28 Hold down shift and select the fifth tendon in this panel, from the popup menu.
and press Delete.
29 With the Half Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, inches and click OK.
draw tendons that terminate in this panel:
Finally, you need to move the tendon that goes through the
• Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ). opening.
• Click at the profile point at 63.2, 58 ft. 42 With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segment
• Type r0,7. that passes through the opening.
• Click at the last tendon profile point at 72.8, 58 ft. 43 Choose the Move tool ( ).
44 Click anywhere on the plan, and type r-1.5,0.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 72.8, 65 ft.
45 With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segment
• Click at the last tendon profile point at 72.8, 58 ft. above the moved tendon.
30 In the Tendon Panel dialog box: 46 Choose the Stretch tool ( ).
• Set Auto Connect, and click OK. 47 Stretch the end of the tendon segment to meet the end of
31 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties the moved tendon.
from the popup menu. 48 Repeat for the tendon segment below the moved tendon.
Note: You could cut down the number of steps in moving
inches, and click OK. the tendon from the opening by using the Utility tool. This
The longitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a combines the selection tool with move and stretch. Refer to
number of profile points. Any profile point at the end of a “Expanding tool buttons” on page 6 and “Using the Utility
tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 10-inch slab. tool to move and stretch” on page 17 for further infor-
mation.
tendon segments, other than those over a drop cap or within
the balcony slab:
• Fence the tendon segments that end on grid A.
• Hold the Shift key down and repeat the procedure
until you have selected all applicable end tendon
segments (tendon segments terminating at grids B
and D).
• Hold the Shift key down and double click at A-3.
• Hold the Shift key down and double click at B-5.
from the popup menu. Figure 40-11 Longitude Tendon: Standard Plan.
RAM Concept 215

Chapter 40
40.5 Create the design strips

because they link finite element analysis with concrete
which code rules are applicable for section design. There
are two directions called Latitude and Longitude.
Generate the latitude spans:

1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Spans
Plan.
The Default Span Properties dialog box opens to the Strip

3 Click the General tab.
4 Change Environment to Class U (corrosive).
Note: This actually has no effect because ACI 318 requires Figure 40-12 Design Strip: Latitude Design Spans Plan.
two-way post-tensioned slabs to be designed as class U.
Two span segments are skewed. How you treat skewed
Note: The Consider as Post-Tensioned box is already strips is often a subjective matter, but in this tutorial we
checked in the ACI 318 template.
suggest one strip is straightened and the other edited in a
5 Click the Column Strip tab. different manner.
6 Set Cross Section Trimming to Max Rectangle.
Generate the latitude strips:
7 Change CS Top Cover to 1 inch.
8 Change CS Code Min. Reinforcement Location to Generate Strips.
Elevated Slab.
The design strips appear in the latitude direction.
9 Click OK.
Generate Spans.
The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to

Generate set to Latitude.
11 Set Minimum Span Length to 2 feet and click OK.
The span segments appear in the latitude direction.
Figure 40-13 Latitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some edit-
ing is now required.
Concept uses imperfect algorithms that do not always

produce acceptable span segments and span segment strips,
216 RAM Concept

Chapter 40
as shown in Figures 40-14 through 40-16. You can make Edit the span cross section orientation:
corrections with a number of tools 1 Select span segment 3-1 as shown in Figure 40-15.
You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned 2 Select the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( ).
on. 3 Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ).
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again above
Hatch the strips:
or below the first click.
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now
The Visible Objects dialog box will appear. “vertical”.
2 Check Hatching under Latitude Span Segment Strips, and
click OK.
Figure 40-14 Skewed span segment that snapped to end of wall
Straighten a span segment: Figure 40-16 Design strip with excessive width.
1 Select span segment 4-2 (between the wall and grid D3),
as shown in Figure 40-14. Draw a Span Boundary Polyline:
2 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ). 1 Select the Span Boundary Polyline tool ( ).
3 Select the Rotate tool ( ). 2 Click at the intersection of Grid B and Grid C design
4 Click at the end of the span segment at grid D3. strips near Grid 3 (point A in Figure 40-16).
5 Click at the end of the span segment at the wall. 3 Click to the right of the slab edge (point B).
4 Right-click, and click enter.
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle.
6 Enter 180 and press Enter. Regenerate the latitude span strips:
1 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ).
The selected span segment is now horizontal.
The two edited spans produce improved span strips, as
shown in Figure 40-17.
Figure 40-15 Diagonal strip that warrants manual improvement.
RAM Concept 217

Chapter 40
Figure 40-18 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan.

Figure 40-17 Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after strip regen-
eration.
Straighten a span segment:
Generate the longitude spans: 1 Select the span segment between grid B2 and C2 (the
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Longitude Design highlighted span segment in Figure 40-18).
Spans Plan. 2 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
2 Double click the Span Segment tool ( ). 3 Select the Rotate tool ( ).
3 Click the Column Strip tab. 4 Click at the end of the span segment at grid B2.
The defaults set up in the Latitude Design Spans Plan will 5 Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
have remained the same. Since the cover cannot be the
same for both directions, change it for the longitudinal
direction. 6 Enter 90 and press Enter.
• Change CS Top Cover to 1.63 inches. The selected span segment is now vertical.
• Change CS Bottom Cover to 1.25.
Delete the span segment over the wall:
• Click OK.
1 Select the span segment that overlays the wall, and press
4 Click the Generate Spans tool ( ), or choose Process > Delete.
Generate Spans.
Edit the span cross section orientation:
1 Select the diagonal span segment between B-5 and C-4.
• Set Spans to Generate to Longitude.
2 Select the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( ).
• Click the “up-down” orientation button tool ( ). 3 Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ).
• Click OK. 4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again to the
left or right of the first click.
The spans appear in the longitude direction, as shown in
Figure 40-18. The orientation line half way along the span strip is now
“horizontal”.
One span segment on grid 2 is slightly skewed due to the
column wall detail at C2. Another span segment overlays a Generate the longitude strips:
wall and is unnecessary since the slab is continuously
supported (see “Drawing design strips near walls” on 1 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ), or choose Process >
page 98 for discussion). Generate Strips.
The design strips appear in the longitude direction.
218 RAM Concept

Chapter 40
40.6 Regenerate the mesh
The presence of design strips can significantly improve the

regularity of the finite element mesh. We recommend that
the mesh.

2 Enter Element Size of 2.5 feet and click Generate.
There is now a better mesh. View the mesh on the Element:

Standard Plan.
Figure 40-19 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after strip gen-
eration.
Check for punching shear:

2 Double click the Punching Shear Check tool ( ).
box:
• Change Cover to CGS to 1.63 inches (cover to
centroid of top reinforcement).
• Click OK.
4 Fence the slab with the Punching Shear Check tool. Figure 40-21 Element: Standard Plan after regeneration.
Figure 40-20 Design Strip: Punching Checks Plan.
RAM Concept 219

Chapter 40
40.7 Calculate and view the results The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the
Max Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that setting
is causing a problem because of the combination of the
After you run the model, you can view the results of the drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
analysis and design calculations.
Edit span segment 6-2:
Review Calc Options:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Longitude Design
1 Choose > Criteria > Calc Options Spans Plan.
2 Review the options, and click OK. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ).
Note: See “Calculating the results” on page 125 of 3 Check the Numbers box under Longitude Span
Chapter 27 for more information. Segments, and click OK.
4 Select span segment 6-2.
Calculate:
An error message appears concerning a problem with a 6 Click the Column Strip tab.
tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2.
7 Change CS Cross Section Trimming to Inverted T or L,
2 Click Continue three times to clear the error message. and click OK.
The source of the error messages must be investigated. Recalculate:

View the design strips with tendons:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Longitude Cross Concept completes the calculations without errors.
Sections Perspective.
See “Cross Section Trimming” on page 91 for a thorough
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ). explanation of Cross Section trimming.
3 Click the Tendons tab.
4 Select the Longitude Tendons layer, check Tendons, and
click OK. 40.7.1 Design status
5 Use the Rotate about X and Y axes tool ( ) and the Look at design status:
Zoom Rectangle ( ) tool to view the problem location
shown in Figure 40-22 and Figure 40-23.
Figure 40-22 Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude ten-

dons visible.
Figure 40-24 Design Status: Status Plan.
This shows OK for all design strips. This means that there
are no violations of code limits for ductility, flexural stress
Figure 40-23 Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in Figure 40- and one-way shear. Note that status does not flag excessive
22. deflections.
220 RAM Concept

Chapter 40
There are punching shear status results at each column.

You can see these more easily on the dedicated punching
plan.
Plan.
Concept has noted “Non-standard section” at six column

locations and “OK with SSR” at one column.
“Non-standard Section” is a warning, not an error. What it

means is that at least one of the critical sections that
Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly
fit one of the three ACI 318-05 cases: interior, edge and
corner. Concept still calculates a stress ratio for non-
standard sections. Refer to “Non-Standard Sections: ACI
318” on page 135 of Chapter 28 for more information.
Where the unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0,

the column’s punching shear is satisfactory without any
reinforcement (subject to the comments above concerning
“Non-standard section)).
Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports

Figure 40-26 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan.
“OK with SSR”.
If Concept reports “Failed” then SSR does not solve the This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each
problem and a thickening is required. of the design strips. Since the slab is post-tensioned, there
is not much reinforcement. You might choose to view all
Note: Choose > Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan to design reinforcement on the one plan, or you can access
view the stud shear reinforcement. plans in the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement
according to: face (top or bottom) and direction (latitude or
longitude).
2 Choose the plans that best convey the results without too
much clutter.
Figure 40-25 Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan.
40.7.2 Design reinforcement Figure 40-27 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan.
Look at design reinforcement:

The Reinforcement layer plans show detailed
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Reinforcement Plan.
reinforcement. In particular, the top bars are rationalized so
that the number is consistent each side of columns.
RAM Concept 221

Chapter 40
Look at detailed top reinforcement: • Click OK

Choose Layers > Reinforcement > Top Bars Plan.
Figure 40-29 Service Design: Top Stress Plan.

Figure 40-28 Reinforcement: Top Bars Plan
To view the Max Demand more easily you can uncheck

40.7.3 Concrete stresses Max Capacity in the plot options.
ACI 318-05 has limits for the hypothetical stresses due to Similarly, you can view the bottom stress plan at Layers >
flexure and axial loads. The code bases the rules upon Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Bottom Stress Plan.
“averaging” rather than peak values.
Stress contour plots of the net flexural stresses are available 40.7.4 Deflection
in Concept. Most designers will not be interested in these
plots because, in following the code, Concept does not use Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term
the contours directly in design. deflections. The Service LC (dead and live load plus post-
tensioning if applicable) and LT Uncracked Deflection LC
What will likely be of interest are the plans that show the (load factors used to simulate creep and shrinkage) provide
concrete stresses plotted along the design strips. These are contour plans for deflection.
the average stresses based upon the design strip widths.
RAM Concept uses gross section inertia for these
View top stress plan: deflection contours.
1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > You can investigate the effects of creep, shrinkage and
Top Stress Plan. cracking with “ECR” and long-term deflection strip-based
2 Right click over the plan and choose Plot ( ). plots. See Chapter 56, “Estimating deflections” for more
3 In the Plot Settings dialog box:
information.
• Change Max Frame # to 4. Note: The strip based long-term deflection plots are not
overly useful for two-way post-tensioned flat plates
designed to ACI318. This is because the design method
assumes uncracked sections.
222 RAM Concept

Chapter 40
View service deflection: 40.7.5 Bending Moments

Max Deflection Plan. While it is not necessary to view bending moments, it can
contours plans are for Mx (moment about the x-axis) and
orthogonally, and the directions are usually the x- and y-
axes. You can view moments about any axes, including the
principal axes.

View Factored LC Moments:

1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC:
1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr > Mx Plan.
The Mx contours should be visible.

4 Click first at grid intersection B-3, and then click at grid
intersection D-3.
This shows the bending moment shape along the line you
Figure 40-30 Service LC: Max Deflection Plan.
have drawn.
2 Right click over the plan and choose Plot ( ) to change 5 While pressing the Shift key, click at grid intersection B-
Plot Type from Color Contour to Contour. 1, and then click at grid intersection B-3.
This shows how Mx varies across the panel, and highlights

View long-term uncracked deflection:
the approximate nature of the ACI318-05 post-tension
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > LT Uncracked design method.
Deflection LC > Max Deflection Plan.
See “Section distribution plots” on page 132 for more
information.
Figure 40-31 LT Uncracked Deflection LC: Max Deflection Plan

Figure 40-32 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr: Mx Plan showing use of
Plot Distribution tool.
RAM Concept 223

Chapter 40
View the balanced load percentages: 3 Choose “Balanced Load Percentages” in the Visible
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Strips Objects dialog box and click OK.
Plan
See “Calculating the balanced load percentages” on
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ). page 315 for more information.
224 RAM Concept

Chapter 41
41 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: AS3600-2001
( ).
not used here. As such, it is highly recommended that you • Choose a Concrete Strength of 32 MPa.
first do the RC tutorial. • Set Thickness to 250 mm.
• Click OK.
opening files” on page 5. 26.05, 8.2 m and 26.05, 8.8 m. Cursor plan coordinates
display next to the command prompt.

program directory

2 Select the CAD drawing file flat_plate_metric.dwg.

3 Select Millimeters (the units used in the CAD file) and
click OK.

Mesh Input layer.

4 Click Show All, and then click OK. • Change Thickness to 200 mm.
• Change Surface Elevation to -50 mm.
RAM Concept 225

Chapter 41
Draw the drop caps:

properties.
• Change Thickness to 500 mm.

Priority as 2.
drop caps with four or five vertices as appropriate. 3 Check “Hatching” under “Slab Openings”, and then click
4 Go to “Draw the opening:”, or try the next method OK.
5 With the Selection tool ( ), select (by double-clicking) Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
and delete the drop cap at B-2. includes the Visible Objects command.
6 Click Redraw ( ).
Some tool button icons have a small triangle in the lower 1 Double click on the Column tool ( ).
tools available for this button.
• Choose a Concrete Strength of 32 MPa.
7 Place the mouse over the Slab Area tool ( ) and press
down on the left mouse button for one second. • Set Width to 600 mm.
• Set Depth/Diameter to 600 mm.
3 Click OK.
8 Select the Drop Cap tool from the menu.
4 Click at the center of all 13 column locations shown on
The selected tool becomes current for that button. the imported drawing.
A Drop Cap Tool dialog box appears. 1 Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ).
10 Enter an angle of zero degrees. 2 Double click on the Wall tool ( ).
11 Enter a side dimension of 1.2 m and click OK. 3 In the Default Wall Properties dialog box:
226 RAM Concept

Chapter 41
4 Click OK. 2 In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to
5 Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on 1 m.
the centerline: 3 Click Generate.
• Place the cursor near 8.825, 26.3 m and it will
View the mesh:
snap to where the center of the wall intersects the
edge of the slab, and click. 1 Choose Layers > Element > Standard Plan.
• Place the cursor at the center of the column at C-2 You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This will still
(it will snap orthogonally) and click. produce reasonable results, but will significantly improve
when you regenerate it later on.
does not yet exist.
Delete.
8 Click Redraw ( ).

View the structure:

Perspective.
floor.

Generate the mesh:

Figure 41-6 Element: Structure Summary Perspective.
RAM Concept 227

Chapter 41

automatically.

additional loads.
There is no limit to the number of loadings than can be Figure 41-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the bal-
cony area load).
specified.

All Loads Plan.
• Change Fz to 2 kN/m2 and click OK.
This tool will now draw area loads of 2 kN/ m2.

cover the slab.

You have drawn another 2 kN/m2 load. This load should be hatching turned on).
highlighted as it is the current selection. If not, select it
before proceeding by double-clicking with the selection Define the other dead loading:
tool. 1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live (Reducible) Loading >
All Loads Plan.
choose Selection Properties. 2 With the Selection tool ( ), select both area loads
4 In the dialog box, change Fz to 3 kN/ m2 and click OK.
(fencing the balcony load selects both loads).
There is now a total live load on the balcony of 5 kN/ m2. 4 Choose Layers > Loadings > Other Dead Loading > All
2
Note: You could have drawn the 3 kN/ m load by first Loads Plan.
changing the area load default properties and then using the 5 Choose Edit > Paste.
tool.
by fencing the entire area.
8 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to 1 kN/ m2, and
click OK.
228 RAM Concept

Chapter 41

11 In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to -1 kN/ m2, and
click OK.
ing turned on).
RAM Concept 229

Chapter 41
41.4 Define the post-tensioning • Click at the center of the column at B-2.
Post-tensioning methodology varies from country to • Click at the grid intersection C-1.
country. In Australia, engineers use column and middle
strips for post-tensioned flat plate design, and, generally,
detail (bonded) tendons in both the column and middle • Set Tendon Spacing to Equal.
strips. • Set Spacing to 2 m,
Note: RAM Concept has two layers for tendons called • Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
latitude and longitude. Refer to “Using the latitude and
draw tendons in the next two panels:
Note: The tutorial in Chapter 45 explains the use of Strip • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
Wizard to establish an estimate of the number of strands section A-2.
required for the critical band.
• Click at the center of the column at A-3.
Define the latitude tendons: • Click at the center of the column at C-3.
1 Choose Layers > Latitude Tendon > Standard Plan. • Click at the center of the column at C-2.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ). 13 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
3 Click the Drawing Import tab. • Set Auto Connect.
4 Click Show All, and then click OK.
• Uncheck Skip start tendon, and click OK.
Showing the CAD file makes the following instructions 14 Turn off Snap Orthogonal ( ).
easier to follow.
5 Double click the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) to draw tendons in the next panel:
edit its default properties. • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
6 In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box: section B-3.
• Set Strands per Tendon to 4. • Click at the center of the column at B-5.
• Set Profile at end 1 to 212 mm. • Click at the center of the column at C-4.
• Set Profile at end 2 to 38 mm, and click OK. • Click at the center of the column at C-3.
Note: The 25 mm cover to the 19 mm high duct (containing 16 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
12.7 mm diameter strand) determines these profiles. • Set Auto Connect, and click OK.
7 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ) and Snap Orthogonal 17 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
( ). • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
8 With the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, section C-2.
draw tendons in the bottom left panel: • Click at the center of the column at C-3.
• Click at the center of the column at grid inter- • Click at the center of the column at D-3.
section A-1.
• Click at grid intersection D-2.
• Set Tendon Spacing to Equal.
• Set Spacing to 2 m.
• Set Spacing to 2 m, and click OK. draw tendons in the next panel:
10 With the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
draw tendons in the next panel: section C-3.
• Click at the center of the column at grid inter- • Click at the center of the column at C-4.
section B-1.
230 RAM Concept

Chapter 41
• Click at the center of the column at D-4. • Hold the Shift key down and double click at B-5.
• Set Auto Connect.
mm and click OK.
Note: Auto-connect will ignore the tendons at the first click centroid of the 250 mm slab, rather than the centroid of the
because there are already two tendon segments connected at drop cap.
that point.
21 With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, segment at B-2.
double-click the tendon on grid B.
22 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties from the popup menu.
23 In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon mm and click OK.
to 10, and click OK.
24 With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, segment at C-2.
double-click the tendon directly above grid B.
41 Hold down the Shift key, and double click the tendon
25 Hold down shift and double-click the tendon directly segment immediately below (profile point at (9,15.7)).
below grid B.
to 5, and click OK.
Note: This accounts for the step near this location.
The latitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a
number of profile points. Any profile point at the end of a 44 With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segments
tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab. between D-2 and D-3.
tendon segments, other than those over a drop cap or within The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the
the balcony slab: current balance load is -5.67 kN/m. If this is not the number
• Fence the tendon segments that end on grid 1. then you probably selected only one tendon segment.
• Hold the Shift key down and repeat the procedure 46 Click Cancel.
until you have selected all applicable end tendon 47 With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon between
segments (tendon segments terminating at grids 2, 3, C-3 and C-4.
4 and 5).
49 Input the desired balance load as -6 kN/m in the Calc
mm and click OK. The low point (end 2) adjusts to 126 mm.
31 With the Selection tool ( ), double click the tendon 50 With the Selection tool ( ), select all the end span
segment above B.8-1 that terminates within the 200 mm tendons between grids 3 and 5.
balcony slab. 51 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
from the popup menu. 52 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 2 to 125
33 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 100 mm and click OK.
mm and click OK.
Note: These steps first used the Calc Profile tool to
34 With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the tendon determine a low point that produces a similar average uplift
segments that terminate over a drop cap, by: in an end span as the adjacent span, and then manually
• Double clicking at grid intersection A-1. changed the low points for practical reasons.
RAM Concept 231

Chapter 41
Finally, you need to adjust the tendon that goes through the • Click at the center of the column at A-2.
opening.
53 Turn on Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) and Snap • Set Tendon Spacing to Equal.
• Set Spacing to 2 m, and click OK.
Orthogonal ( ).
54 With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segment draw tendons in the next panel:
that passes through the opening.
section B-1.
• Click at the center of the column at B.8-1.
mm and click OK. • Click at the center of the column at C-2.
57 Choose the Stretch tool ( ). • Click at the center of the column at B-2.
58 With the one tendon segment selected, stretch the profile 6 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
point at grid 3 to the other side of the opening. • Set Auto Connect, and click OK.
Note: The Snap Nearest Snapable Point snaps the cursor 7 Turn on Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) and Snap
to the edge of the opening. Orthogonal ( ).
draw tendons in the balcony:
section B.8-1.
• Click at the edge of the slab at 0, 17.8 m.
• Click at the tendon profile point at 7.2, 17.1 m.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 7.2, 17.8 m.

• Set Auto Connect, and click OK.
mm and Profile at end 2 to 100 mm, and click OK.
Figure 41-10 Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan. the half-span (cantilever) tendon segments.
Define the longitude tendons: from the popup menu.
1 Choose Layers > Longitude Tendon > Standard Plan. 14 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 100
Note: The defaults set up in the Latitude Tendon Plan mm, and click OK.
remain the same. Strictly speaking, you should adjust Note: This makes the short tendon segments flat.
Profile at end 1 at columns (to avoid a clash with latitude
tendons) but you can ignore for this tutorial. 15 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
3 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, section A-2.
draw tendons in the bottom left panel:
section A-1. • Click at the center of the column at B-3.
• Click at the center of the column at B-1. • Click at the center of the column at A-3.
• Click at the center of the column at B-2. 16 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
232 RAM Concept

Chapter 41
• Set Spacing to 2 m. 24 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
17 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, • Uncheck Skip start tendon, and click OK.
• Click at the center of the column at grid inter- because there are already two tendon segments connected at
section B-2. that point.
• Click at the center of the column at C-3. should be deleted.
• Click at the center of the column at B-3. 25 With the Selection tool ( ), select the second tendon in
18 In the Tendon Panel dialog box, click OK to accept the this panel.
last choices. Alternatively, you could select Auto Connect, 26 Hold down shift and select the fifth tendon, and press
but you would have to uncheck Skip Start Tendon. Delete.
19 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, 27 With the Half Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
draw tendons in the next panel: draw tendons that terminate in this panel:
Note: This sequence is anti-clockwise. • Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ).
• Click at the center of the column at grid inter- • Click at the profile point at 19, 17.5 m.
section C-3.
• Type r0,2.1.
• Click at the center of the column at D-3.
• Click at the last tendon profile point at 22, 17.5 m.
• Enter 9.25, 26, and press Enter.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 22, 19.6 m.
20 In the Tendon Panel dialog box: • Set Auto Connect, and click OK.
• Uncheck Skip Start Tendon, and click OK. from the popup menu.
21 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, 30 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 2 to 125
draw tendons in the next panel: mm, and click OK.
• Click at the center of the column at grid inter- 31 With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected,
section B-3. double-click the tendon on grid 2.
• Click at the center of the column at C-3. 32 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
33 In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon
• Click at the center of the column at B-5. to 10, and click OK.
22 In the Tendon Panel dialog box: 34 With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected,
• Set Layout to Splayed. double-click the tendon directly to the left of grid 2.
• Set Tendon Spacing to Equal. 35 Hold down shift and double-click the tendon directly to
the right of grid 2.
• Set Spacing to 1.8 m.
• Check Skip start tendon, and click OK. from the popup menu.
23 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, 37 In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon
draw tendons in the next panel: to 5, and click OK.
The longitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a
section C-3.
• Click at the center of the column at D-3. tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab.
RAM Concept 233

Chapter 41

the balcony slab:
and D).
mm and click OK.
42 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties Figure 41-11 Longitude Tendon: Standard Plan.
mm, and click OK. 41.5 Create the design strips
centroid of the 250 mm slab, rather than the centroid of the Design strips are an essential part of RAM Concept
drop cap. because they link finite element analysis with concrete
44 With the Selection tool ( ), double click the tendon design. Their properties include reinforcement bar sizes,
segment at B-2. cover, and parameters that Concept uses to determine
45 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties are two directions called Latitude and Longitude.
46 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 462 Generate the latitude spans:
mm and click OK. 1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Spans
Plan.
opening. 2 Double click the Span Segment tool ( ).
47 With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segment The Default Span Properties dialog box opens to the Strip
that passes through the opening. Generation properties.
48 Choose the Move tool ( ). 3 Click the General tab.
49 Click anywhere on the plan, and type r-.5,0. 4 Change Environment to Protected.
above the moved tendon.
Note: This setting often has a significant effect on
reinforcement quantities.
51 Choose the Stretch tool ( ).
52 Stretch the end of the tendon segment to meet the end of
Note: The Consider as Post-Tensioned box is already
checked in the AS3600 template.
the moved tendon.
53 Repeat for the tendon segment below the moved tendon. 5 Click the Column Strip tab.
the tendon from the opening by using the Utility tool. This 7 Change CS Top Cover to 25 mm.
combines the selection tool with move and stretch. Refer to 8 Click the Middle Strip tab.
“Expanding tool buttons” on page 6 and “Using the Utility 9 Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties
tool to move and stretch” on page 17 for further infor- box.
mation.
234 RAM Concept

Chapter 41
10 Click OK.
Generate Spans.

Accept the Minimum Span Length as 0.5 meters.

12 Click OK.

as shown in Figures 41-14 through 41-17. You can make
corrections with a number of tools.
You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned
on.
Figure 41-12 Design Strip: Latitude Design Spans Plan.
Hatch the strips:
strips is often a subjective matter, but in this tutorial we The Visible Objects dialog box will appear.
suggest one strip is straightened and the other edited in a
different manner. 2 Check Hatching under Latitude Span Segment Strips, and
click OK.
Generate the latitude strips:
1 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ), or choose Process > includes the Visible Objects command.
Generate Strips.

1 Select the span segment between the wall and grid D3 (as
shown in Figure 41-14).
RAM Concept 235

Chapter 41
3 Select the Rotate tool ( ). 3 Click to the right of the slab edge (point B).
4 Click at the end of the span segment at grid D3. 4 Right-click, and click enter.
5 Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
Regenerate the latitude span strips:
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle. 1 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ).
6 Enter 180 and press Enter. The three edited spans produce improved span strips. There
The selected span segment is now horizontal. is one more to edit.

1 Select the diagonal span strip as shown in Figure 41-15. Figure 41-17 Span segment C-2 to C-3.

Draw a Span Boundary Polyline:
1 Select the Span Boundary Polyline tool ( ).
2 Click at the intersection of Grid B and Grid C design
strips near Grid 2 (point A in Figure 41-17).
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now 3 Click at point B.
“vertical”.
5 Click at point C.
6 Click at point D.
8 Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool( ).
9 Click at point E as shown in Figure 41-17.
10 Click at point F, to the right of the opening.
12 Select the span segment (between grid C2 and C3).
14 In the Properties dialog box, change Span Width Calc to
Manual.
15 Uncheck Detect Supports Automatically.
16 Change Support Width at End 2 from 600 to 610 mm, and
Figure 41-16 Design strip with excessive width. click OK.
Draw a Span Boundary Polyline: This ensures that the first (design strip) cross section passes
through the opening, and hence uses less concrete section.
17 Click the Generate Selected Strips tool ( ).
236 RAM Concept

Chapter 41
The edited spans produce improved span strips, as shown

in Figure 41-18.

Figure 41-18 Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after regenera-
tion.
column wall detail at C2. Another span segment overlays a
supported (see “Drawing design strips near walls” on
Generate the longitude spans:
page 98 for discussion).
Spans Plan. Straighten a span segment:
2 Double click the Span Segment tool ( ). 1 Select the span segment between grid B2 and C2
3 Click the Column Strip tab. (highlighted in Figure 41-19).
have remained the same. Since the cover cannot be the 3 Select the Rotate tool ( ).
same for both directions, change it for the longitudinal 4 Click at the end of the span segment at grid B2.
direction.
• Change CS Top Cover to 41 mm.
• Change CS Bottom Cover to 37 mm.
6 Enter 90 and press Enter.
• Click OK.
The selected span segment is now vertical.
Generate Spans. Delete the span segment over the wall:
5 In the Generate Spans dialog box: 1 Select the span segment that overlays the wall.
• Set Spans to Generate to Longitude. 2 Press Delete.
• Click the “up-down” orientation button tool ( ). Generate the longitude strips:
• Click OK. 1 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ), or choose Process >
Generate Strips.
The spans appear in the longitude direction.
RAM Concept 237

Chapter 41
8 Click at point C and D.

12 Click at point F (the corner of the opening) and point G
(another corner).
14 Select the span segment between grid B3 and C3.

1 Select the diagonal span strip between B-5 and C-4.
4 Click near the diagonal span strip and then again to the
eration. The orientation line half way along the span strip is now
“horizontal”.
The area to the left of the opening has no design strip. You
can use the tools to locate a middle strip in that area.
The new design strips appear, as shown in Figure 41-22.
Figure 41-21 Grid B3-C3 span segment and strips.
Edit span segment with Span Boundaries and Strip Boundaries

1 Select the span segment between grid B3 and C3 (the
highlighted line in Figure 41-20).
Figure 41-22 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after editing.
from the popup menu. Note: Some of the latitude and longitude design strips
3 Change Span Width Calc to Manual, and click OK. (span segment strips) have different widths either side of a
4 Select the Span Boundary Polyline tool ( ). column. You could rationalize these strips such that they
have similar widths at the column, especially the cantilever.
5 Click at point A as shown in Figure 41-21. See the discussion in “Defining strip boundaries manually”
6 Click at point B. on page 88 of Chapter 21, “Defining Design Strips”. In
7 Right-click, and click enter. particular, Example 21-2 on page 88 and Example 21-4 on
page 90.
238 RAM Concept

Chapter 41
Check for punching shear: 41.6 Regenerate the mesh

2 Double click the Punching Shear Check tool ( ). The presence of design strips can significantly improve the
3 In the Default Punching Shear Check Properties dialog regularity of the finite element mesh. We recommend that
box: once you have completed the design strips, you regenerate
the mesh.
• Change Cover to CGS to 41 mm (cover to
centroid of top reinforcement). Regenerate the mesh:
• Click OK. 1 Click Generate Mesh ( ).
4 Fence the slab with the Punching Shear Check tool. 2 Enter Element Size of 0.75 m and click Generate.

Standard Plan.

Figure 41-24 Element: Standard Plan after regeneration.
RAM Concept 239

Chapter 41
After you run the model, you can view the results of the

1 Choose > Criteria > Calc Options
2 Review the options, and click OK.
Note: See “Calculating the results” on page 125 of

Chapter 27 for more information.
Figure 41-26 Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in Figure 41-
25.
Calculate:
1 Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All. The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the
An error message appears twice concerning a problem with Max Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that setting
a tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2. is causing a problem because of the combination of the
drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
2 Click Continue twice to clear the error message.
The source of the tendon error messages must be
investigated. 1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Longitude Design
Spans Plan.
Two more errors appear to do with reinforcement detailing. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ).
3 Click Continue twice to clear the reinforcement error 3 Check the Numbers box under Longitude Span
messages. Segments, and click OK.
View the design strips with tendons: 4 Select span segment 6-2.
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Longitude Cross 5 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
Sections Perspective. from the popup menu.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ). 6 Click the Column Strip tab.
3 Click the Tendons tab. 7 Change CS Cross Section Trimming to Inverted T or L,

and click OK.
click OK. Edit span segment 2-3:
5 Use the Rotate about X and Y axes tool ( ) and the 1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Spans
Zoom Rectangle ( ) tool to view the problem location Plan.
3 Check the Numbers box under Latitude Span Segments,
and click OK.
6 Click the Column Strip tab.
7 Change CS Cross Section Trimming to None.
Figure 41-25 Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude ten- 8 Change CS Inter Cross Section Slope Limit to 0.
dons visible.
9 Click the Middle Strip tab.
10 Uncheck the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties
box.
11 Change MS Top Cover to 25 mm.
12 Change MS Span Detailer to None, and click OK.
240 RAM Concept

Chapter 41
The above changes are made to eliminate the reinforcement 2 Choose Layers > Design Status > Punching Shear Status
warnings. In a proper design you should investigate this Plan.
further.
You can see that ten columns have an unreinforced stress
Recalculate: ratio (USR) of less than 1.0. Two columns report “OK with
SSR” which means stud shear reinforcement is required.
One column fails in punching. SSR does not solve the
Concept completes the calculatons without errors. problem. A thickening is required.
Note: See “Cross Section Trimming” on page 91 for a Concept has noted “Non-standard section” at five column
thorough explanation of Cross Section trimming. locations. “Non-standard Section” is a warning, not an
error. What it means is that at least one of the critical
sections that Concept is investigating for that column does
41.7.1 Design status not perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and
Look at design status: standard sections. Refer to “Non-Standard Sections:
1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Status Plan. AS3600, BS8110 and IS 456” on page 136 of Chapter 28

“Non-standard section)).
Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports

“OK with SSR”.
Note: Choose > Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan to
view the stud shear reinforcement.
are no violations of code limits for ductility or one-way
shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections.

plan.
RAM Concept 241

Chapter 41
41.7.2 Design reinforcement 41.7.3 Deflection
Look at design reinforcement: Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term
deflections. The Max Service LC (dead and live load plus
post-tensioning if applicable) and LT Uncracked Deflection
LC (load factors used to simulate creep and shrinkage)
provide contour plans for deflection.

deflection contours.
You can investigate the effects of creep, shrinkage and

cracking with “ECR” and long-term deflection strip-based
plots. See Chapter 56, “Estimating deflections” for more
information.
View service deflection:

1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Max Service LC
> Max Deflection Plan.
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each

of the design strips. You might choose to view all design
reinforcement on the one plan, or you can access plans in
the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement
longitude).
much clutter.
Figure 41-31 Max Service LC: Max Deflection Plan.

Plot Type from Color Contour to Contour
Similarly, you can view the long term uncracked deflection

from the LT Uncracked Deflection LC layer.
View strip-based long-term deflection:

1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Max Service Design
> L.T. Deflection Plan.
2 Right click over the plan and choose Plot ( ).
3 Uncheck Minimum Demand.
Figure 41-30 Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan.
242 RAM Concept

Chapter 41
4 Change Max Frame Number to 4, and click OK. 4 Click first at grid intersection B-3, and then click at grid
intersection D-3.
have drawn.
5 While pressing the Shift key, click at grid intersection B-
1, and then click at grid intersection B-3.

the different column and middle strip moments.

information.
Figure 41-32 Max Service Rule Set: L.T. Deflection Plan.

principal axes. Figure 41-33 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L Mx Plan showing use of Plot Dis-
tribution tool.
This is why Plot Distribution Tools are so useful. View the balanced load percentages:
View Factored LC Moments: 1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Strips
Plan
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Ultimate LC:
1.2D + 1.5L > Mx Plan. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ).
3 Choose “Balanced Load Percentages” in the Visible
Objects dialog box and click OK.
3 Click the Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ). page 315 for more information.
RAM Concept 243

Chapter 41
244 RAM Concept

Chapter 42
42 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: BS8110 / TR43
This chapter describes the steps for modeling a post- 3 Click the Drawing Import tab.
tensioned two-way flat plate with uniform loads. 4 Click Show All, and then click OK.
Draw the slab area:
in the Chapter 39 RC tutorial and introduce new steps, such
as using a CAD drawing and post-tensioning. 1 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ) and Snap to Point
( ).
not used here. As such, it is highly recommended that you
properties.
first do the RC tutorial.
This is not a particularly “aggressive” design. After you
• Choose a Concrete Strength of C32/40.
thinner to investigate the ramifications. • Set Thickness to 250 mm.
You could also use this as a reinforced concrete tutorial by • Leave Surface Elevation as 0 and Priority as 1.
making a few adjustments (for example, a thicker slab). • Click OK.
BS8110 does not cover post-tensioned flat plates, and 4 With the Slab Area tool ( ) selected, define the 10
refers the designer to “specialist literature”. The Concrete vertices of the slab outline by snapping to the imported
Society prepared Technical Report 43 for this purpose. drawing’s slab corners.
RAM Concept currently uses the first edition of TR43.
Note: There are two vertices near each other near B-5 at
For information on creating a new file, see “Creating and 26.05, 8.2 m and 26.05, 8.8 m. Cursor plan coordinates
opening files” on page 5. display next to the command prompt.
(or type “c” in the command line and press Return).
42.1 Import the CAD drawing

program directory


click OK.

Mesh Input layer.
1 Choose Layers > Mesh Input > Standard Plan. Draw the balcony slab area:
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ). 1 Double click the Slab Area tool ( ) to edit the default
properties.
includes the Visible Objects command. 2 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
RAM Concept 245

Chapter 42
• Change Surface Elevation to -50 mm. 11 Enter a side dimension of 1.2 m and click OK.
Draw the opening:
3 With the Slab Area tool ( ) selected, define the six 1 Select the Slab Opening tool ( ).
vertices of the balcony outline by clicking at each vertex,
and then click at your starting point (or type “c” in the 2 Define the four corners of the opening by clicking at each
command line and press Return). location, and then click at your starting point.
Draw the drop caps:

properties. Figure 42-3 The opening on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
• Change Thickness to 500 mm. Hatch the slab areas:
• Change Surface Elevation to 0, and leave the 1 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ).
Priority as 2. The Visible Objects dialog box will appear.
• Click OK. 2 Check “Hatching” under “Slab Areas”.
3 With the Slab Area tool ( ) selected, define the four 3 Check “Hatching” under “Slab Openings”, and click OK.
drop caps with four or five vertices as appropriate.
4 Go to “Draw the opening:”, or try the next method Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
5 With the Selection tool ( ), select (by double-clicking)
and delete the drop cap at B-2. Define the column locations and properties:
6 Click Redraw ( ). 1 Double click on the Column tool ( ).
Some tool button icons have a small triangle in the lower 2 In the Default Column Properties dialog box:
right corner ( ). This indicates that there are other similar • Choose a Concrete Strength of C32/40.
• Set Width to 600 mm.
7 Place the mouse over the Slab Area tool ( ) and press • Set Depth/Diameter to 600 mm.
down on the left mouse button for one second.
3 Click OK.
8 Select the Drop Cap tool from the menu. the imported drawing.
The selected tool becomes current for that button. Define the wall location and properties:
9 Click at the column at B-2. 1 Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ).
A Drop Cap Tool dialog box appears. 2 Double click on the Wall tool ( ).
3 In the Default Wall Properties dialog box:
10 Enter an angle of zero degrees.
• Choose a Concrete Strength of C20/25.
246 RAM Concept

Chapter 42
4 Click OK. View the mesh:
5 Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on 1 Choose Layers > Element > Standard Plan.
the centerline.
• Place the cursor near 8.825, 26.3 m and it will produce reasonable results, but will significantly improve
snap to where the center of the wall intersects the when you regenerate it later on.
edge of the slab, and click.
• Place the cursor at the center of the column at C-2
(it will snap orthogonally) and click.
does not yet exist.
Delete.
8 Click Redraw ( ).

12 Click at Grid C, near C-2. Figure 42-5 Element: Standard Plan.
View the structure:

Perspective.
floor.

the slab areas and opening (hatched), the columns and the wall. Figure 42-6 Element: Structure Summary Perspective.
Generate the mesh:

1 Click Generate Mesh ( ). 42.3 Define the loads
1 m.
3 Click Generate. automatically.
RAM Concept 247

Chapter 42

additional loads.
There is no limit to the number of loadings than can be

specified.

All Loads Plan.
Figure 42-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the bal-
2 Double click the Area Load tool ( ). cony area load).

cover the slab.

You have drawn another 2 kN/m2 load. This load should be

before proceeding by double-clicking with the selection
tool.
choose Selection Properties. Figure 42-8 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads
hatching turned on).
There is now a total live load on the balcony of 5 kN/ m2.
Note: You could have drawn the 3 kN/ m2 load by first All Loads Plan.
changing the area load default properties and then using the
2 With the Selection tool ( ), select both area loads
tool.
Loads Plan.
5 Choose Edit > Paste.
click OK.
248 RAM Concept

Chapter 42

click OK.
ing turned on).
RAM Concept 249

Chapter 42
42.4 Define the post-tensioning 10 With the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) selected, draw a
tendon along grid D:
Post-tensioning methodology varies from country to • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
country. In the USA it is common to use the “banding” section D-4.
technique for detailing tendons in two-way slabs. Banding • Click at the center of the column at D-3.
means concentrating the tendons over support points in one
• Click at the corner of the slab near D-2.
direction, and distributing them uniformly in the
orthogonal direction. This method is generally used in • Right click, and then click Enter.
conjunction with full-panel design strips. That is, column 11 Turn off Snap Orthogonal ( ).
and middle strips are not used.
In the United Kingdom, engineers are directed towards default properties.
Technical Report 43 (BS8110 does not cover post- 13 In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box:
tensioned flat plates) and that document encourages the use
of full panel design strips with the banding technique. This • Set Strands per Tendon to 20, and click OK.
method, with bonded tendons, is used in this tutorial. 14 With the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) selected, draw a
tendon along grid B:
Note: RAM Concept has two layers for tendons called
latitude and longitude. Refer to “Using the latitude and • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
longitude tendon layers” on page 117 for more information. section B-1.
Note: The tutorial in Chapter 45 explains the use of Strip
Wizard to establish an estimate of the number of strands • Click at the center of the column at B-3.
required for the critical band. • Click at the center of the column at B-5.
Define the latitude tendons: • Right click, and then click Enter.
1 Choose Layers > Latitude Tendon > Standard Plan. 15 With the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) selected, draw a
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ). tendon along grid C:
3 Click the Drawing Import tab. • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
section B.8-1.
Showing the CAD file makes the following instructions
easier to follow.
default properties. • Right click, and then click Enter.
6 In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box: 16 With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected,
• Set PT System to 12.9mm Bonded. double-click the tendon on grid B.
• Set Strands per Tendon to 9.
• Set Profile at end 1 to 212 mm.
• Set Profile at end 2 to 38 mm, and click OK. to 25, and click OK.
Note: The 25 mm cover to the 19 mm high duct (containing The latitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a
12.9 mm diameter strand) determines these profiles. number of profile points. Any profile point at the end of a
tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab.
7 Turn Snap to Intersection ( ).
8 With the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) selected, draw a 19 With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the terminated
tendon along grid A: tendon segments, other than those over a drop cap, by:
• Click at the center of the column at grid inter- • Double clicking at grid intersection B-1.
section A-1. • Hold the Shift key down and double click at B.8-
• Click at the center of the column at A-2. 1.
• Click at the center of the column at A-3. • Hold the Shift key down and double click at C-4.
• Right click, and then click Enter. • Hold the Shift key down and double click at D-2.
9 Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ). • Hold the Shift key down and double click at D-4.
250 RAM Concept

Chapter 42
20 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties 39 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 2 to 125
from the popup menu. mm and click OK.
21 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 125 Note: These steps first used the Calc Profile tool to
mm and click OK. determine a low point that produces a similar average uplift
22 With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the terminated in an end span as the adjacent span, and then manually
tendon segments over a drop cap, by: changed the low points for practical reasons.
mm and click OK.

centroid of the 250 mm slab, rather than the centroid of the
drop cap.
segment at B-2.
mm and click OK.
Figure 42-10 Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan
segment at C-2.
Define the longitude tendons:
1 Choose Layers > Longitude Tendon > Standard Plan.
30 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 162 Note: The defaults set up in the Latitude Tendon Plan
mm and click OK. remain the same. Strictly speaking, you should adjust
Note: This accounts for the step near this location. tendons) but you can ignore for this tutorial.
31 With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segments 2 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
between C-2 and C-3.
3 Double click the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) to
32 Click the Calc Profile tool ( ). edit its default properties.
The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the 4 In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box:
current balance load is -32.4 kN/m. If this is not the number • Set Strands per Tendon to 4, and click OK.
then you probably selected only one tendon segment.
33 Click Cancel. draw tendons in the bottom left panel:
34 With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon between • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
C-3 and C-4. section A-1.
35 Click the Calc Profile tool ( ). • Click at the center of the column at B-1.
36 Input the desired balance load as -30 kN/m in the Calc • Click at the center of the column at B-2.
The low point (end 2) adjusts to 126 mm.
37 With the Selection tool ( ), select all the end span • Set Tendon Spacing to Equal.
tendons between grids 3 and 5.
from the popup menu. 7 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
RAM Concept 251

Chapter 42
• Click at the center of the column at grid inter- • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
section B-1. section B-2.
• Click at the center of the column at B.8-1. • Click at the center of the column at C-2.
• Click at the center of the column at C-2. • Click at the center of the column at C-3.
• Click at the center of the column at B-2. • Click at the center of the column at B-3.
8 In the Tendon Panel dialog box: 20 In the Tendon Panel dialog box, click OK to accept the
• Set Auto Connect, and click OK. last choices. Alternatively, you could select Auto Connect,
but you would have to uncheck Skip Start Tendon.
9 Turn on Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) and Snap
Orthogonal ( ).
Note: This sequence is anti-clockwise.
draw tendons in the balcony: • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
• Click at the center of the column at grid intersection C-3.
section B.8-1. • Click at the center of the column at D-3.
• Click at the edge of the slab at 0, 17.8 m. • Enter 9.25, 26, and press Enter.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 7.2, 17.8 m. • Click at the center of the column at C-2.
• Click at the tendon profile point at 7.2, 17.1 m. 22 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
11 In the Tendon Panel dialog box: • Set Auto Connect.
• Set Auto Connect, and click OK. • Uncheck Skip Start Tendon, and click OK.
12 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties 23 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
from the popup menu. draw tendons in the next panel:
13 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 150 • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
mm and Profile at end 2 to 100 mm, and click OK. section B-3.
14 With the Selection tool ( ), select the two shortest of • Click at the center of the column at C-3.
the half-span (cantilever) tendon segments.
from the popup menu. • Click at the center of the column at B-5.
16 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 100 24 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
mm, and click OK. • Set Layout to Splayed.
Note: This makes the short tendon segments flat. • Set Tendon Spacing to Equal.
17 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, • Set Spacing to 1.8 m.
draw tendons in the next panel: • Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
section A-2.
• Click at the center of the column at B-3. section C-3.
• Click at the center of the column at A-3. • Click at the center of the column at D-3.
18 In the Tendon Panel dialog box: • Click at the center of the column at D-4.
252 RAM Concept

Chapter 42
• Uncheck Skip start tendon, and click OK. 40 With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the terminated
Note: Auto-connect will ignore the tendons at the first click the balcony slab:
because there are already two tendon segments connected at
that point. • Fence the tendon segments that end on grid A.
should be deleted.
27 With the Selection tool ( ), select the second tendon in and D).
this panel. 41 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
28 Hold down shift and select the fifth tendon, and press from the popup menu.
Delete. 42 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 125
29 With the Half Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, mm and click OK.
draw tendons that terminate in this panel: 43 With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the terminated
• Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ).
• Click at the profile point at 19, 17.5 m.
• Type r0,2.1.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 22, 19.6 m. from the popup menu.
• Click at the last tendon profile point at 22, 17.5 m. 45 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 375
mm, and click OK.
• Set Auto Connect, and click OK. Note: This sets the tendon anchorage profile to the
centroid of the 250 mm slab, rather than the centroid of the
drop cap.
32 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 2 to 125 46 With the Selection tool ( ), double click the tendon
mm, and click OK. segment at B-2.
33 With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, 47 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
double-click the tendon on grid 2. from the popup menu.
34 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties 48 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 462
from the popup menu. mm and click OK.
35 In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon Finally, you need to move the tendon that goes through the
to 10, and click OK. opening.
36 With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, 49 With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segment
double-click the tendon directly to the left of grid 2. that passes through the opening.
37 Hold down shift and double-click the tendon directly to 50 Choose the Move tool ( ).
51 Click anywhere on the plan, and type r-.5,0.
to 5, and click OK.
The longitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a the moved tendon.
55 Repeat for the tendon segment below the moved tendon.
tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab.
the tendon from the opening by using the Utility tool. This
combines the selection tool with move and stretch. Refer to
RAM Concept 253

Chapter 42
“Expanding tool buttons” on page 6 and “Using the Utility

tool to move and stretch” on page 17 for further infor-
mation.
Figure 42-11 Longitude Tendon: Standard Plan.
254 RAM Concept

Chapter 42

Generate the latitude spans:

The Default Span Properties dialog box opens to the Strip

Note: Column Strip Width Calc is already set to Full

Width.
Note: Environment is already set to Class 3 - 0.1 mm.

Note: The Consider as Post-Tensioned box is already
checked in the BS8110 template.
3 Click the Column Strip tab. strips is often a subjective matter, but in this tutorial we
4 Set Cross Section Trimming to Max Rectangle. suggest one strip is straightened and the other edited in a
different manner.
5 Change CS Top Cover to 25 mm.
6 Change CS Code Min. Reinforcement Location to Generate the latitude strips:
Elevated Slab. 1 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ), or choose Process >
7 Click OK. Generate Strips.
8 Click the Generate Spans tool ( ), or choose Process > The design strips appear in the latitude direction.
Generate Spans.


9 Click OK.

RAM Concept 255

Chapter 42
as shown in Figures 42-14 through 42-16. You can make Edit the span cross section orientation:
corrections with a number of tools 1 Select the diagonal span strip as shown in Figure 42-15.
You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned 2 Select the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( ).
on. 3 Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ).
Hatch the strips:
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now
The Visible Objects dialog box will appear. “vertical”.
click OK.

Figure 42-16 Design strip with excessive width.
2 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ). Draw a Span Boundary Polyline:
3 Select the Rotate tool ( ). 1 Select the Span Boundary Polyline tool ( ).
4 Click at the end of the span segment at grid D3. 2 Click at the intersection of Grid B and Grid C design
5 Click at the end of the span segment at the wall. strips near Grid 3 (point A in Figure 42-16).
3 Click to the right of the slab edge (point B).
6 Enter 180 and press Return.
The selected span segment is now horizontal.
1 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ).
The two edited spans produce improved span strips, as

shown in Figure 42-17.
256 RAM Concept

Chapter 42

tion.
Generate the longitude spans: column wall detail at C2. Another span segment overlays a
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Longitude Design wall and is unnecessary since the slab is continuously
Spans Plan. supported (see “Drawing design strips near walls” on
3 Click the Column Strip tab. Straighten a span segment:
1 Select the span segment between grid B2 and C2
(highlighted in Figure 42-18).
have remained the same. Since the cover cannot be the
same for both directions, change it for the longitudinal 2 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
direction. 3 Select the Rotate tool ( ).
• Change CS Top Cover to 41 mm. 4 Click at the end of the span segment at grid B2.
• Change CS Bottom Cover to 37 mm. 5 Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
• Click OK. The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle.
4 Click the Generate Spans tool ( ), or choose Process > 6 Enter 90 and press Return.
Generate Spans.
5 In the Generate Spans dialog box: The selected span segment is now vertical.
• Set Spans to Generate to Longitude. Delete the span segment over the wall:
1 Select the span segment that overlays the wall, and press
• Click the “up-down” orientation button tool ( ).
Delete.
• Click OK.
1 Select the diagonal span segment between B-5 and C-4.
5 The orientation line half way along the span strip is now
“horizontal”.
RAM Concept 257

Chapter 42
Generate the longitude strips:

Generate Strips.

Check for punching shear: The presence of design strips can significantly improve the
2 Double click the Punching Shear Check tool ( ). the mesh.
box:
centroid of top reinforcement). 2 Enter Element Size of 0.75 m and click Generate.
• Click OK. There is now a better mesh. View the mesh on the Element:
4 Fence the slab with the Punching Shear Check tool. Standard Plan.
258 RAM Concept

Chapter 42
42.7 Calculate and view the results The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the
Max Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that setting
is causing a problem because of the combination of the
After you run the model, you can view the results of the drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
1 Choose > Criteria > Calc Options Spans Plan.
2 Review the options, and click OK. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ).
Note: See “Calculating the results” on page 125 of 3 Check the Numbers box under Longitude Span
Chapter 27 for more information. Segments, and click OK.
Calculate:
An error message appears concerning a problem with a 6 Click the Column Strip tab.
tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2.
2 Click Continue three times to clear the error message. and click OK.
The source of the error messages must be investigated. Recalculate:

1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Longitude Cross Concept completes the calculations without errors.
Sections Perspective.
See “Cross Section Trimming” on page 91 for a thorough
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ). explanation of Cross Section trimming.
click OK. 42.7.1 Design status
5 Use the Rotate about X and Y axes tool ( ) and the Look at design status:
Zoom Rectangle ( ) tool to view the problem location
Figure 42-22 Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude ten-

dons visible.
This shows “OK” for all but one design strip. “OK” means
that there are no violations of code limits for ductility,
flexural stress and one-way shear. Note that status does not
Figure 42-23 Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in Figure 42- flag excessive deflections.
22.
RAM Concept 259

Chapter 42
The failure clause shown for design strip 2C-3 is “TR43 42.7.2 Design reinforcement
6.10.2”. You can look up this clause in TR43 to see that it is
the “transfer condition”. It is known as the Initial Service Look at design reinforcement:
Rule Set in Concept. 1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Reinforcement Plan.
It is not surprising that there is a problem in this span as
there are 25 strands in half a panel. A solution would be to
terminate some strands at grid 3.

plan.
Plan.

locations and “OK with SSR” at eight columns.
“Non-standard Section” is a warning, not an error. What it

fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and corner. Concept
still calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections.
Refer to “Non-Standard Sections: AS3600, BS8110 and IS
reinforcement (subject to the comments above concerning This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each
“Non-standard section)). of the design strips. Since the slab is post-tensioned, there
is not much reinforcement. You might choose to view all
Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports design reinforcement on the one plan, or you can access
“OK with SSR”. plans in the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement
Note: Choose > Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan to longitude).
view the stud shear reinforcement.
much clutter.
260 RAM Concept

Chapter 42
The Reinforcement layer plans show detailed • Click OK

reinforcement. In particular, the top bars are rationalized so
that the number is consistent each side of columns.
Look at detailed top reinforcement:
Choose Layers > Reinforcement > Top Bars Plan.
Figure 42-29 Service Design: Top Stress Plan.
To view the Max Demand more easily you can uncheck

Max Capacity in the plot options.
Figure 42-28 Reinforcement: Top Bars Plan Similarly, you can view the bottom stress plan at Layers >
Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Bottom Stress Plan.
42.7.3 Concrete stresses

42.7.4 Deflection
TR43 has limits for the hypothetical stresses due to flexure
and axial loads. The code bases the rules upon “averaging” Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term
rather than peak values. deflections. The Service LC (dead and live load plus post-
Stress contour plots of the net flexural stresses are available (load factors used to simulate creep and shrinkage) provide
in Concept. Most designers will not be interested in these contour plans for deflection.
plots because, in following the code, Concept does not use
the contours directly in design. RAM Concept uses gross section inertia for these
deflection contours.
What will likely be of interest are the plans that show the
concrete stresses plotted along the design strips. These are You can investigate the effects of creep, shrinkage and
the average stresses based upon the design strip widths. cracking with “ECR” and long-term deflection strip-based
plots. See Chapter 56, “Estimating deflections” for more
View top stress plan: information.
Top Stress Plan.
Note: The strip based long-term deflection plots are not
overly useful for two-way post-tensioned flat plates
2 Right click over the plan and choose Plot ( ). designed to TR43. This is because the design method
3 In the Plot Settings dialog box: assumes uncracked sections.
• Change Max Frame # to 4.
RAM Concept 261

Chapter 42
View service deflection: 42.7.5 Bending Moments

Deflection Plan. While it is not necessary to view bending moments, it can
principal axes.


1.4D + 1.6L > Mx Plan.

intersection D-3.
Figure 42-30 Service LC: Deflection Plan. This shows the bending moment shape along the line you
have drawn.
2 Right click over the plan and choose Plot ( ) to change 5 While pressing the Shift key, click at grid intersection B-
Plot Type from Color Contour to Contour. 1, and then click at grid intersection B-3.
View long-term uncracked deflection: This shows how Mx varies across the panel, and highlights
the approximate nature of the TR43 post-tension design
1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > LT Uncracked
method.
Deflection LC > Deflection Plan.
information.
Figure 42-31 LT Uncracked Deflection LC: Deflection Plan.

Figure 42-32 Ultimate LC: 1.4D + 1.6 Mx Plan showing use of Plot Dis-
tribution tool.
262 RAM Concept

Chapter 42
View the balanced load percentages: 3 Choose “Balanced Load Percentages” in the Visible
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Strips Objects dialog box and click OK.
Plan
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ). page 315 for more information.
RAM Concept 263

Chapter 42
264 RAM Concept

Chapter 43
43 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: IS 456 : 2000
( ).
not used here. As such, it is highly recommended that you • Choose a Concrete Strength of M40.
first do the RC tutorial. • Set Thickness to 250 mm.
• Click OK.
opening files” on page 5. 26.05, 8.2 m and 26.05, 8.8 m. Cursor plan coordinates
display next to the command prompt.

program directory


click OK.

Mesh Input layer.

4 Click Show All, and then click OK. • Change Thickness to 200 mm.
• Change Surface Elevation to -50 mm.
RAM Concept 265

Chapter 43
Draw the drop caps:

properties.

Priority as 2.
drop caps with four or five vertices as appropriate. 3 Check “Hatching” under “Slab Openings”, and then click
4 Go to “Draw the opening:”, or try the next method OK.
5 With the Selection tool ( ), select (by double-clicking) Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that
and delete the drop cap at B-2. includes the Visible Objects command.
6 Click Redraw ( ).
Some tool button icons have a small triangle in the lower 1 Double click on the Column tool ( ).
7 Place the mouse over the Slab Area tool ( ) and press
down on the left mouse button for one second. • Set Width to 600 mm.
• Set Depth/Diameter to 600 mm, and click OK.
8 Select the Drop Cap tool from the menu.
the imported drawing.
The selected tool becomes current for that button.
A Drop Cap Tool dialog box appears. 2 Double click on the Wall tool ( ).
10 Enter an angle of zero degrees. 3 In the Default Wall Properties dialog box:
11 Enter a side dimension of 1.2 m and click OK. • Choose a Concrete Strength of 20 MPa.
4 Click OK.
266 RAM Concept

Chapter 43
5 Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on 3 Click Generate.
the centerline:
View the mesh:
• Place the cursor near 8.825, 26.3 m and it will
snap to where the center of the wall intersects the 1 Choose Layers > Element > Standard Plan.
edge of the slab, and click.
• Place the cursor at the center of the column at C-2 produce reasonable results, but will significantly improve
(it will snap orthogonally) and click. when you regenerate it later on.
does not yet exist.
Delete.
8 Click Redraw ( ).

View the structure:

Perspective.
floor.

Generate the mesh:

1 Click Generate Mesh ( ). Figure 43-6 Element: Structure Summary Perspective.

1 m.
RAM Concept 267

Chapter 43

automatically.

additional loads.
There is no limit to the number of loadings than can be Figure 43-7 Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the bal-
cony area load).
specified.

All Loads Plan.

cover the slab.

You have drawn another 2 kN/m2 load. This load should be hatching turned on).
before proceeding by double-clicking with the selection Define the other dead loading:
tool. 1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Live (Reducible) Loading >
All Loads Plan.
choose Selection Properties. 2 With the Selection tool ( ), select both area loads
There is now a total live load on the balcony of 5 kN/ m2. 4 Choose Layers > Loadings > Other Dead Loading > All
2
Note: You could have drawn the 3 kN/ m load by first Loads Plan.
changing the area load default properties and then using the 5 Choose Edit > Paste.
tool.
click OK.
268 RAM Concept

Chapter 43

click OK.
ing turned on).
RAM Concept 269

Chapter 43
43.4 Define the post-tensioning • Click at the center of the column at B-2.
Post-tensioning methodology varies from country to • Click at the grid intersection C-1.
country. In India, engineers commonly use column and
middle strips for post-tensioned flat plate design, and,
generally, detail (bonded) tendons in both the column and • Set Tendon Spacing to Equal.
middle strips. • Set Spacing to 2 m,
Note: RAM Concept has two layers for tendons called • Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
latitude and longitude. Refer to “Using the latitude and
draw tendons in the next two panels:
Note: The tutorial in Chapter 45 explains the use of Strip • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
Wizard to establish an estimate of the number of strands section A-2.
required for the critical band.
Define the latitude tendons: • Click at the center of the column at C-3.
1 Choose Layers > Latitude Tendon > Standard Plan. • Click at the center of the column at C-2.
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ). 13 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
3 Click the Drawing Import tab. • Set Auto Connect.
Showing the CAD file makes the following instructions 14 Turn off Snap Orthogonal ( ).
easier to follow.
5 Double click the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) to draw tendons in the next panel:
edit its default properties. • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
6 In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box: section B-3.
• Set Strands per Tendon to 4. • Click at the center of the column at B-5.
• Set Profile at end 1 to 212 mm. • Click at the center of the column at C-4.
• Set Profile at end 2 to 38 mm, and click OK. • Click at the center of the column at C-3.
Note: The 25 mm cover to the 19 mm high duct (containing 16 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
12.7 mm diameter strand) determines these profiles. • Set Auto Connect, and click OK.
7 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ) and Snap Orthogonal 17 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
( ). • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
8 With the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, section C-2.
draw tendons in the bottom left panel: • Click at the center of the column at C-3.
• Click at the center of the column at grid inter- • Click at the center of the column at D-3.
section A-1.
• Click at grid intersection D-2.
• Set Spacing to 2 m.
• Set Spacing to 2 m, and click OK. draw tendons in the next panel:
10 With the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, • Click at the center of the column at grid inter-
draw tendons in the next panel: section C-3.
• Click at the center of the column at grid inter- • Click at the center of the column at C-4.
section B-1.
270 RAM Concept

Chapter 43
• Click at the center of the column at D-4. • Hold the Shift key down and double click at B-5.
mm and click OK.
Note: Auto-connect will ignore the tendons at the first click centroid of the 250 mm slab, rather than the centroid of the
because there are already two tendon segments connected at drop cap.
that point.
21 With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, segment at B-2.
double-click the tendon on grid B.
to 10, and click OK.
24 With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, segment at C-2.
double-click the tendon directly above grid B.
41 Hold down the Shift button, and double click the tendon
25 Hold down shift and double-click the tendon directly segment immediately below (profile point at (9,15.7)).
below grid B.
to 5, and click OK.
Note: This accounts for the step near this location.
The latitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a
number of profile points. Any profile point at the end of a 44 With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segments
tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab. between D-2 and D-3.
tendon segments, other than those over a drop cap or within The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the
the balcony slab: current balance load is -5.27 kN/m. If this is not the number
• Fence the tendon segments that end on grid 1. then you probably selected only one tendon segment.
• Hold the Shift key down and repeat the procedure 46 Click Cancel.
until you have selected all applicable end tendon 47 With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon between
segments (tendon segments terminating at grids 2, 3, C-3 and C-4.
4 and 5).
49 Input the desired balance load as -5.3 kN/m in the Calc
mm and click OK. The low point (end 2) adjusts to 128 mm.
31 With the Selection tool ( ), double click the tendon 50 With the Selection tool ( ), select all the end span
segment above B.8-1 that terminates within the 200 mm tendons between grids 3 and 5.
balcony slab. 51 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
from the popup menu. 52 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 2 to 125
33 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 100 mm and click OK.
mm and click OK.
Note: These steps first used the Calc Profile tool to
34 With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the tendon determine a low point that produces a similar average uplift
segments that terminate over a drop cap, by: in an end span as the adjacent span, and then manually
• Double clicking at grid intersection A-1. changed the low points for practical reasons.
RAM Concept 271

Chapter 43
Finally, you need to adjust the tendon that goes through the • Click at the center of the column at A-2.
opening.
53 Turn on Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) and Snap • Set Tendon Spacing to Equal.
Orthogonal ( ).
54 With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segment draw tendons in the next panel:
that passes through the opening.
section B-1.
• Click at the center of the column at B.8-1.
mm and click OK. • Click at the center of the column at C-2.
57 Choose the Stretch tool ( ). • Click at the center of the column at B-2.
58 With the one tendon segment selected, stretch the profile 6 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
point at grid 3 to the other side of the opening. • Set Auto Connect, and click OK.
Note: The Snap Nearest Snapable Point snaps the cursor 7 Turn on Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) and Snap
to the edge of the opening. Orthogonal ( ).
draw tendons in the balcony:
section B.8-1.
• Click at the edge of the slab at 0, 17.8 m.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 7.2, 17.8 m.

• Set Auto Connect, and click OK.
mm and Profile at end 2 to 100 mm, and click OK.
Figure 43-10 Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan. the half-span (cantilever) tendon segments.
Define the longitude tendons: from the popup menu.
1 Choose Layers > Longitude Tendon > Standard Plan. 14 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 100
Note: The defaults set up in the Latitude Tendon Plan mm, and click OK.
remain the same. Strictly speaking, you should adjust Note: This makes the short tendon segments flat.
tendons) but you can ignore for this tutorial. 15 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
3 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, section A-2.
draw tendons in the bottom left panel:
section A-1. • Click at the center of the column at B-3.
• Click at the center of the column at B-1. • Click at the center of the column at A-3.
• Click at the center of the column at B-2. 16 In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
272 RAM Concept

Chapter 43
17 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, • Uncheck Skip start tendon, and click OK.
• Click at the center of the column at grid inter- because there are already two tendon segments connected at
section B-2. that point.
• Click at the center of the column at C-3. should be deleted.
• Click at the center of the column at B-3. 25 With the Selection tool ( ), select the second tendon in
18 In the Tendon Panel dialog box, click OK to accept the this panel.
last choices. Alternatively, you could select Auto Connect, 26 Hold down shift and select the fifth tendon, and press
but you would have to uncheck Skip Start Tendon. Delete.
19 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, 27 With the Half Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected,
draw tendons in the next panel: draw tendons that terminate in this panel:
Note: This sequence is anti-clockwise. • Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ).
• Click at the center of the column at grid inter- • Click at the profile point at 19, 17.5 m.
section C-3.
• Type r0,2.1.
• Enter 9.25, 26, and press Enter.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 22, 19.6 m.
20 In the Tendon Panel dialog box: • Set Auto Connect, and click OK.
• Uncheck Skip Start Tendon, and click OK. from the popup menu.
21 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, 30 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 2 to 125
draw tendons in the next panel: mm, and click OK.
• Click at the center of the column at grid inter- 31 With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected,
section B-3. double-click the tendon on grid 2.
• Click at the center of the column at C-3. 32 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
• Click at the center of the column at B-5. to 10, and click OK.
22 In the Tendon Panel dialog box: 34 With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected,
• Set Layout to Splayed. double-click the tendon directly to the left of grid 2.
• Set Tendon Spacing to Equal. 35 Hold down shift and double-click the tendon directly to
• Set Spacing to 1.8 m.
• Check Skip start tendon, and click OK. from the popup menu.
23 With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, 37 In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon
draw tendons in the next panel: to 5, and click OK.
The longitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a
section C-3.
• Click at the center of the column at D-3. tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab.
RAM Concept 273

Chapter 43

the balcony slab:
and D).
mm and click OK.
42 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties Figure 43-11 Longitude Tendon: Standard Plan.
mm, and click OK. 43.5 Create the design strips
centroid of the 250 mm slab, rather than the centroid of the Design strips are an essential part of RAM Concept
drop cap. because they link finite element analysis with concrete
44 With the Selection tool ( ), double click the tendon design. Their properties include reinforcement bar sizes,
segment at B-2. cover, and parameters that Concept uses to determine
45 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties are two directions called Latitude and Longitude.
46 In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 462 Generate the latitude spans:
mm and click OK. 1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Spans
Plan.
opening. 2 Double click the Span Segment tool ( ).
47 With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segment The Default Span Properties dialog box opens to the Strip
that passes through the opening. Generation properties.
48 Choose the Move tool ( ). Note: Column Strip Width Calc is already set to Code Slab.
49 Click anywhere on the plan, and type r-.5,0.
4 Check the Consider as Post-Tensioned box.
the moved tendon. 7 Change CS Top Cover to 25 mm.
53 Repeat for the tendon segment below the moved tendon. 8 Click the Middle Strip tab.
9 Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties
box.
the tendon from the opening by using the Utility tool. This
combines the selection tool with move and stretch. Refer to 10 Click OK.
“Expanding tool buttons” on page 6 and “Using the Utility 11 Click the Generate Spans tool ( ), or choose Process >
tool to move and stretch” on page 17 for further infor- Generate Spans.
mation.
274 RAM Concept

Chapter 43


12 Click OK.

as shown in Figures 43-14 through 43-17. You can make
Figure 43-12 Design Strip: Latitude Design Spans Plan. corrections with a number of tools.
You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned
Two span segments are skewed. How you treat skewed on.
strips is often a subjective matter, but in this tutorial we
suggest one strip is straightened and the other edited in a Hatch the strips:
different manner.
Generate the latitude strips: The Visible Objects dialog box will appear.
Generate Strips.
click OK.

RAM Concept 275

Chapter 43
3 Select the Rotate tool ( ). 3 Click to the right of the slab edge (point B).
4 Click at the end of the span segment at grid D3. 4 Right-click, and click enter.
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle. 1 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ).
6 Enter 180 and press Enter. The three edited spans produce improved span strips. There
The selected span segment is now horizontal. is one more to edit.

1 Select the diagonal span strip as shown in Figure 43-15. Figure 43-17 Span segment C-2 to C-3.

Draw a Span Boundary Polyline:
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now 3 Click at point B.
“vertical”.
5 Click at point C.
6 Click at point D.
10 Click at point F, to the right of the opening.
12 Select the span segment (between grid C2 and C3).
14 In the Properties dialog box, change Span Width Calc to
Manual.
15 Uncheck Detect Supports Automatically.
16 Change Support Width at End 2 from 600 to 610 mm, and
Figure 43-16 Design strip with excessive width. click OK.
Draw a Span Boundary Polyline: This ensures that the first (design strip) cross section passes
through the opening, and hence uses less concrete section.
276 RAM Concept

Chapter 43
The edited spans produce improved span strips, as shown

in Figure 43-18.

tion.
column wall detail at C2. Another span segment overlays a
supported (see “Drawing design strips near walls” on
Generate the longitude spans:
Spans Plan. Straighten a span segment:
2 Double click the Span Segment tool ( ). 1 Select the span segment between grid B2 and C2
3 Click the Column Strip tab. (highlighted in Figure 43-19).
have remained the same. Since the cover cannot be the 3 Select the Rotate tool ( ).
same for both directions, change it for the longitudinal 4 Click at the end of the span segment at grid B2.
direction.
• Change CS Top Cover to 41 mm.
• Change CS Bottom Cover to 37 mm.
6 Enter 90 and press Enter.
• Click OK.
The selected span segment is now vertical.
Generate Spans. Delete the span segment over the wall:
5 In the Generate Spans dialog box: 1 Select the span segment that overlays the wall.
• Set Spans to Generate to Longitude. 2 Press Delete.
• Click the “up-down” orientation button tool ( ). Generate the longitude strips:
• Click OK. 1 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ), or choose Process >
Generate Strips.
RAM Concept 277

Chapter 43
8 Click at point C and D.

12 Click at point F (the corner of the opening) and point G
(another corner).
14 Select the span segment between grid B3 and C3.

1 Select the diagonal span strip between B-5 and C-4.
eration. The orientation line half way along the span strip is now
“horizontal”.
The area to the left of the opening has no design strip. You
can use the tools to locate a middle strip in that area.
The new design strips appear, as shown in Figure 43-22.
Figure 43-21 Grid B3-C3 span segment and strips.
Edit span segment with Span Boundaries and Strip Boundaries

1 Select the span segment between grid B3 and C3 (the
highlighted line in Figure 43-20).
Figure 43-22 Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after editing.
from the popup menu. Note: Some of the latitude and longitude design strips
3 Change Span Width Calc to Manual, and click OK. (span segment strips) have different widths either side of a
4 Select the Span Boundary Polyline tool ( ). column. You could rationalize these strips such that they
have similar widths at the column, especially the cantilever.
5 Click at point A as shown in Figure 43-21. See the discussion in “Defining strip boundaries manually”
6 Click at point B. on page 88 of Chapter 21, “Defining Design Strips”. In
7 Right-click, and click enter. particular, Example 21-2 on page 88 and Example 21-4 on
page 90.
278 RAM Concept

Chapter 43
Check for punching shear: 43.6 Regenerate the mesh

2 Double click the Punching Shear Check tool ( ). The presence of design strips can significantly improve the
3 In the Default Punching Shear Check Properties dialog regularity of the finite element mesh. We recommend that
box: once you have completed the design strips, you regenerate
the mesh.
centroid of top reinforcement). Regenerate the mesh:
• Click OK. 1 Click Generate Mesh ( ).
4 Fence the slab with the Punching Shear Check tool. 2 Enter Element Size of 0.75 m and click Generate.

Standard Plan.

RAM Concept 279

Chapter 43
After you run the model, you can view the results of the

2 Review the options, and click OK.
Note: See “Calculating the results” on page 125 of

Chapter 27 for more information.
Figure 43-26 Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in Figure 43-
25.
Calculate:
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the
An error message appears twice concerning a problem with Max Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that setting
a tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2. is causing a problem because of the combination of the
drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
2 Click Continue twice to clear the error message.
The source of the tendon error messages must be
investigated. 1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Longitude Design
Spans Plan.
One more error appears to do with reinforcement detailing.
3 Click Continue to clear the reinforcement error message. 3 Check the Numbers box under Longitude Span
Segments, and click OK.
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Longitude Cross
Sections Perspective. 5 Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties
and click OK.
click OK.
5 Use the Rotate about X and Y axes tool ( ) and the Edit span segment 2-3:
Zoom Rectangle ( ) tool to view the problem location 1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Spans
shown in Figure 43-25 and Figure 43-26. Plan.
3 Check the Numbers box under Latitude Span Segments,
and click OK.
6 Click the Middle Strip tab.
Figure 43-25 Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude ten- 7 Uncheck the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties
dons visible. box.
8 Change MS Top Cover to 25 mm.
9 Change MS Span Detailer to None, and click OK.
The above change is made to eliminate the reinforcement

warning. In a proper design you should investigate this
further.
280 RAM Concept

Chapter 43
Recalculate: Where the unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0,
1 Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All. the column’s punching shear is satisfactory without any
Concept completes the calculatons without errors. “Non-standard section)).
Note: See “Cross Section Trimming” on page 91 for a Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports
thorough explanation of Cross Section trimming. “OK with SSR”.
Note: Choose > Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan to
43.7.1 Design Status view the stud shear reinforcement.
Look at design status:


43.7.2 Design reinforcement
Look at design reinforcement:

are no violations of code limits for ductility or one-way
shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections.

plan.
Plan.
You can see that seven columns have an unreinforced stress

ratio (USR) of less than 1.0. Six columns report “OK with
SSR” which means stud shear reinforcement is required.

locations. “Non-standard Section” is a warning, not an
error. What it means is that at least one of the critical
sections that Concept is investigating for that column does
not perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and
standard sections. Refer to “Non-Standard Sections:
AS3600, BS8110 and IS 456” on page 136 of Chapter 28
RAM Concept 281

Chapter 43
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each You can investigate the effects of creep, shrinkage and
of the design strips. You might choose to view all design cracking with “ECR” and long-term deflection strip-based
reinforcement on the one plan, or you can access plans in plots. See Chapter 56, “Estimating deflections” for more
the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement information.
longitude). View service deflection:
2 Choose the plans that best convey the results without too 1 Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Service LC >
much clutter. Max Deflection Plan.
Figure 43-31 Service LC: Max Deflection Plan.


43.7.3 Deflection Plot Type from Color Contour to Contour
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term Similarly, you can view the long term uncracked deflection
deflections. The Service LC (dead and live load plus post- from the LT Uncracked Deflection LC layer.
(load factors used to simulate creep and shrinkage) provide View strip-based long-term deflection:
contour plans for deflection. 1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design >
L.T. Deflection Plan.
deflection contours. 2 Right click over the plan and choose Plot ( ).
3 Uncheck Minimum Demand.
4 Change Max Frame Number to 4, and click OK.
282 RAM Concept

Chapter 43

intersection D-3.
have drawn.
5 While pressing the Shift key, click at grid intersection B-
1, and then click at grid intersection B-3.

the different column and middle strip moments.

information.
Figure 43-32 Service Rule Set: L.T. Deflection Plan.

principal axes. Figure 43-33 Ultimate LC: 1.5D + 1.5L Mx Plan showing use of Plot Dis-
tribution tool.
This is why Plot Distribution Tools are so useful. View the balanced load percentages:
1 Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Strips
Plan
1.5D + 1.5L > Mx Plan. 2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ).
3 Choose “Balanced Load Percentages” in the Visible
The Mx contours should be visible. Objects dialog box and click OK.
3 Click the Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ). page 315 for more information.
RAM Concept 283

Chapter 43
284 RAM Concept

Chapter 44
44 Mat Foundation Tutorial
This chapter will walk you through the steps for modeling a 3 Click the Drawing Import tab.
mat foundation, also known as a raft. Alternative metric 4 Click Show All, and then click OK.
values and units are identified in square brackets [] next to
the US units. The metric values are not exact conversions. Draw the slab area:
The code used is ACI 318-05.
1 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ) and Snap to Point
For information on creating a new file, see “Creating and ( ).
opening files” on page 5. You should ensure that you select 2 Double click the Slab Area tool ( ) to edit the default
“mat foundation” in the new file dialog box. properties.
Most mats support columns and walls. You may choose to 3 In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
model the columns and walls but you should be aware that • Choose a Concrete Strength of 4000 psi [25 MPa
this could affect the mat behavior. In particular, if there are for AS3600; C25/30 for BS8110].
lateral loads then you should be very careful in defining the
supports above as having no horizontal restraint.
Otherwise, the supports above rather than the soil (springs) • Leave Surface Elevation as 0 and Priority as 1.
below could resist some lateral moment and shear.
• Click OK.
A mat need not have columns and walls modeled above. 4 With the Slab Area tool ( ) selected, define the four
The reasons to model columns and walls above include corners of the slab by snapping to the imported drawing’s
improving the appearance of the model, and providing snap slab corners.
points for point and line loads. Additionally, a wall above
will stiffen the mat in a beneficial way. Note: You can type “c” to close the polygon instead of
entering the last point.

44.1 Import the CAD drawing 1 Turn on Snap to Center ( ).
2 Double click on the Column tool ( ).
The CAD file you import is located in your RAM Concept 3 In the Default Column Properties dialog box:
program directory.
for AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110].
1 Choose File > Import Drawing. • Set Height to 10 feet [3 m].

2 Select the CAD drawing file mat_tutorial.dwg • Set Support Set to “Above”.
[mat_tutorial_metric.dwg]. • Set Width to 30 inches [750 mm].
The File Units dialog box appears. • Set Diameter to 30 inches [750 mm].
3 Select Inches [Millimeters] (the units used in the CAD • Check “Roller at Far End”.
file) and click OK. • Uncheck “Fixed Near” and “Fixed Far”.
4 Click OK.
44.2 Define the structure the imported drawing.

Mesh Input layer. 1 Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ).
2 Double click on the Wall tool ( ).
3 In the Default Wall Properties dialog box:
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ). for AS3600; C20/25 for BS8110].
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that • Set Height to 10 feet [3 m].
includes the Visible Objects command. • Set Support Set to “Above”.
RAM Concept 285

Chapter 44

• Uncheck “Shear Wall”.
• Uncheck “Fixed Near” and “Fixed Far”.
4 Click OK.
5 Define each wall by snapping to the start and end points
of the wall centerlines shown on the CAD drawing.
Define the area spring location and properties:

1 Double click on the Quad-Area Spring tool ( ).
2 In the Default Area Spring Properties dialog box:
• Set an r-force constant of 0.1 pci [0.00001
N/mm3].
• Set an s-force constant of 0.1 pci [0.00001
N/mm3].
• Set a z-force constant of 250 pci [0.07 N/mm3],
and click OK.
Note: You need horizontal springs (r and s) with very small

stiffnesses since there are lateral loads.
3 Define an area spring over the entire slab by clicking four
corners of a quadrilateral. This shape need not match the
slab’s exact dimensions, but should cover the entire slab.
does not yet exist. Figure 44-1 Mesh Input: Standard Plan
Generate the mesh:

2 feet [0.7 m].
3 Click Generate.
View the mesh:

1 Choose Layers > Element > Standard Plan.
produce reasonable results, but will significantly improve
when you regenerate it later on.
View the structure:

Perspective.
floor.
Figure 44-2 Element: Standard Plan
286 RAM Concept

Chapter 44
44.3 Define the loads 4 Choose Edit > Paste.
This pastes the other dead loads onto the Live (Reducible)
Mat loads could consist of point, line and area loads for a Loading: All Loads Plan.
number of loadings (such as live, other dead, north seismic,
east seismic, north wind and east wind). For simplicity, this
tutorial will not use area loads (except for the automatic
calculation of self-weight) and will adopt loads belonging
only to other dead, live, and ultimate seismic east loadings.

Loads Plan.
Showing the CAD file makes the following instructions

easier to follow.
6 Double click the Point Load tool ( ).
7 In the Default Point Load Properties dialog box:
• Change Fz to 40 Kips [180 kN], and click OK.
8 Define 40 Kip [180 kN] point loads by snapping to
column centers at the following locations:
• A-1
Figure 44-3 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan
• A-3
• D-1
• D-3
9 Define the rest of the point loads as shown in Figures 44-
3 and 44-4.
10 Double click the Line Load tool ( ).
11 In the Default Line Load Properties dialog box:
• Set Fz to 8 kip/ft [120 kN/m], and click OK.
12 With the Line Load tool ( ) selected, draw a Line Load
along the centerline of the wall on grid 2.
13 Repeat for the wall at grid “2.5” with a load of 5.5 kip/ft
[80 kN/m].
Note: Draw these loads to the outside face of the inter-

secting walls.
Copy to the live (reducible) loading layer:
For simplicity, use the same loads for other dead and live
(reducible) loads
1 With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the other dead
loads by fencing the entire slab.
2 Choose Edit > Copy. Figure 44-4 Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan [METRIC]
All Loads Plan.
RAM Concept 287

Chapter 44
Define the ultimate seismic east loading: 8 Double click the Line Load tool ( ) and in the Default
1 Choose Layers > Loadings > Ultimate Seismic East Line Load Properties dialog box:
Loading > All Loads Plan. • Set Fy to -12.8 kip/ft [-174 kN/m].
2 Choose View > Visible Objects ( ). • Click OK.
3 Click the Drawing Import tab. 9 Draw a line load by snapping to the wall intersection
4 Click Show All, and then click OK. points, as shown in Figure 44-7 and Figure 44-8.
5 Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ). 10 Double click the Line Load tool ( ) and in the Default
6 Double click the Line Load tool ( ) and in the Default Line Load Properties dialog box:
Line Load Properties dialog box: • Set Fy to (+)12.8 kip/ft [(+)174 kN/m].
• Set the elevation above the slab surface to 360 • Click OK.
inches [9000 mm].
11 Draw a line load by snapping to the wall intersection
• Set Fx to 4.1 kip/ft [60 kN/m]. points, as shown in Figure 44-7 and Figure 44-8.
• Set all other items in the dialog box to 0.
• Click OK.
7 Draw a line load by snapping to the wall intersection
points, as shown in Figure 44-5 and Figure 44-6.
Figure 44-7 East Seismic: All Loads Plan (second set)
Figure 44-5 East Seismic: All Loads Plan
Figure 44-8 East Seismic: All Loads Plan (second set) [METRIC]
Note: The seismic loads are approximations for a five-

storey building. The load elevation is the average floor
height (third storey).
Figure 44-6 East Seismic: All Loads Plan [METRIC] Note: The loads in the y-direction cancel the couple about
the mat centroid.
288 RAM Concept

Chapter 44

Draw latitude design strips:

1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Latitude Design Spans
Plan.
3 The Default Span Properties dialog box opens to the Strip
• Set Column Strip Width Calc to Code Slab (this is Figure 44-9 Generate spans dialog box
the default for the AS3600 template).
• Click the General tab.
• Uncheck the Consider as Post-Tensioned box.
• Click the Column Strip tab.
• Change CS Top Bar and CS Bottom Bar to #8
[N25 for AS3600; T25 for BS8110].
• Change CS Top Cover and CS Bottom Cover to 2
inches [50 mm].
• Set the Min. Reinforcement Location to Tension
Face.
• Click the Middle Strip tab.
• Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip
Properties box.
• Click OK.
Generate Spans.
5 The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to
Generate set to Latitude (as shown in Figure 44-9).
6 Click OK.
Choosing span segments in a mat is a subjective matter.

produce acceptable span segments and span segment strips.
It is recommended that some span segments in this tutorial
are deleted.
7 With the Selection tool ( ), select the seven span
segments highlighted in red in Figure 44-10 and press
Delete.
RAM Concept 289

Chapter 44
Generate the latitude strips: Regenerate the latitude span strips:

1 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ), or choose Process > 1 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ), or choose Process >
Generate Strips. Generate Strips.
Hatch the strips:

The Visible Objects dialog box will appear.

click OK.
Figure 44-12 Latitude design strips after editing and regeneration.
Draw longitude design strips:

Spans Plan.
ing is now required. 6 Click the Column Strip tab.
7 Change CS Top Cover and CS Bottom Cover to 3 inches
Two span segments are slightly skewed. How you treat [75 mm], and click OK.
skewed strips is also a subjective matter, but in this tutorial 8 Click the Generate Spans tool ( ), or choose Process >
we suggest the span segment strips’ cross sections are Generate Spans.
manually reoriented.
Edit the cross section orientation: • Set Spans to Generate to Longitude.
1 With the Selection tool ( ), select span segments 5-2
and 6-2 as shown in Figure 44-11. • Click the “up-down” orientation button tool ( ).
2 Click the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( ). • Click OK.
3 Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ). 10 The spans appear in the longitude direction, as shown in
4 Click near one of the span segments, and then again Figure 44-13.
above or below the first click. Similar to the latitude direction, some editing of the span
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now segments is required.
“vertical”.
290 RAM Concept

Chapter 44

choose Selection Properties.
19 In the dialog box:
• Uncheck Detect Supports Automatically.
• Uncheck Consider End 2 as Support.
• Change Support Width at End 1 to 12 inches [300 mm],
and click OK.
11 With the Selection tool ( ), select the span segments

over the walls (highlighted in red in Figure 44-13) and press
Delete.
13 With the Span Segment tool ( ), draw a span segment
by clicking at the wall intersections at point A and B in
Figure 44-14.
choose Selection Properties.
Figure 44-14 Manually drawn span segments
15 In the dialog box, change:
• Min Number of Divisions to 0. Generate the longitude strips:
• Max Division Spacing to 30 feet [10 m], and click OK. 1 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ), or choose Process >
Generate Strips.
This span segment has been drawn to assist with Concept’s
span segment strip width calculation. The design strips appear in the longitude direction.
16 Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ) and Snap Nearest Two span segments are slightly skewed. We suggest the
Snapable Point ( ). span segment strips’ cross sections are manually
reoriented.
17 With the Span Segment tool ( ), draw a span segment
by clicking at the wall intersection at point B and then at
point C in Figure 44-14 (it should snap to the visible grid
line).
RAM Concept 291

Chapter 44
Figure 44-15 Longitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some ed-
iting is now required.
Figure 44-16 Longitude design strips after editing and regeneration
Edit the cross section orientation:
1 With the Selection tool ( ), select span segments 9-3 Note: Many of the latitude and longitude design strips
and 12-1 as shown in Figure 44-15. (span segment strips) have different widths either side of a
2 Click the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( ). column. You could rationalize these strips such that they
have similar widths at the column, especially the canti-
3 Click near one of the span segments, and then again to the levers. See the discussion in “Defining strip boundaries
left or right of first click. manually” on page 88 of Chapter 21, “Defining Design
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now Strips”. In particular, Example 21-2 on page 88 and
“horizontal”. Example 21-4 on page 90.
Regenerate the longitude span strips: Check for punching shear:
1 Click the Generate Strips tool ( ), or choose Process > 1 Choose Layers > Design Strip > Punching Checks Plan.
Generate Strips. 2 Double click the Punching Shear Check tool ( ).
box:
• Change Cover to CGS to 3 inches [60 mm] (cover
to centroid of top reinforcement).
• Click OK.
4 Fence the slab with the Punching Shear Check tool.
292 RAM Concept

Chapter 44

2 Enter Element Size of 2 feet [0.7m] and click Generate.

Standard Plan.
The presence of design strips can significantly improve the

once you have completed the design strips, you regenerate Figure 44-18 Element: Standard Plan after regeneration.
the mesh.
RAM Concept 293

Chapter 44
44.6 Calculate and view the results 2 Choose Layers > Design Status > Punching Shear Status
Plan.
After you run the model, you can view the results of the Concept has noted “Non-standard section” at the corner
analysis and design calculations. column locations.
Review Calc Options: “Non-standard Section” is a warning, not an error. What it

2 Review the options. fit one of the three ACI 318-02 cases: interior, edge and
3 Uncheck “Auto-stabilize structure in x- and y-direc- corner. Concept still calculates a stress ratio for non-
tions”, and click OK. standard sections. Refer to “Non-Standard Sections: ACI
Note: See “General options” on page 126 of Chapter 27
Calculate:
Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All.
Look at reinforcement and design status:

1 Choose Layers > Design Status > Total Status Plan.
This shows OK for all design strips and punching checks.

This means that there are no violations of code limits for
ductility, one-way shear, and punching shear. Note that
status does not flag excessive deflections.
3 Choose Layers > Design Status > Total Reinforcement

Plan.
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each

of the design strips. The results are, however, too congested
to be useful. You can access plans in the Design Status
layer that separate reinforcement according to: face (top or
bottom), direction (latitude or longitude), and type (flexural
or shear). You should decide which plans best convey the
results without too much clutter.
View Specific Reinforcement:

Reinforcement Plan.
You can see these more easily on the dedicated punching The Visible Objects dialog box will appear.
plan.
3 Check Bar Spacings under Latitude Span Designs, and
click OK.
294 RAM Concept

Chapter 44
Figure 44-22 Service LC: Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.

2 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Soil Bearing Design
44.6.1 Bearing stresses > Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
Maximum bearing stress is a critical consideration when

designing a mat. Contour plots of the bearing stresses are
available in RAM Concept. These will vary according to
the load combination. Note that the minimum and
maximum bearing values often occur for different load
combinations.
The Soil Bearing Design rule set envelopes the maximum

and minimum bearing pressures for all load combinations.
The maximum bearing pressure plan is probably the most
useful for your design.
View bearing stress plans:

Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
Figure 44-23 Soil Bearing Design: Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan
RAM Concept 295

Chapter 44
296 RAM Concept

Chapter 45
45 Strip Wizard Tutorial
This chapter walks you through the steps for using Strip 45.3 Enter the span data
Wizard to provide a preliminary design for the slab (grid B)
in the PT Flat Plate Tutorial.
Enter the span dimensions and data on the Span Data page.
Alternative metric values and units are identified in square (The type of data entered depends on which structural
brackets [] next to the US units. The metric values are not system you chose on the General Parameters page.)
exact conversions.
Set the span data as follows:
The codes used are ACI 318-02, AS3600-2001, and
1 Set the length of Span 1 and 2 to 30 ft [9 m].
BS8110:1997.
2 Set the length of Span 3 to 25 ft [7.75 m].
For more information, see “Using Strip Wizard” on
3 Set the thickness of all three spans to 10 inches [250 mm].
page 161.
Note: To set all the values in a column at once, enter the
value in the “Typical” row (first row) of that column. For
example, for the step above, you can simply type 10 [250] in
45.1 Start Strip Wizard the “Typical” row of the “Thickness” column to set the
thickness of all three spans to 10 inches [250 mm].
When you choose File > Strip Wizard, the New File dialog 4 Set the left start width of Span 1 to 11.5 ft [3.5 m].
automatically opens before the Strip Wizard dialog box is
5 Set the left start width of Span 2 and 3 to 15 ft [4.5 m].
opened. After you create the new RAM Concept file, the
Strip Wizard dialog appears. 6 Set the right start width of Span 1 and 2 to 14 ft [4.25 m].
7 Set the right start width of Span 3 to 1 ft [0.3 m].
Start the Strip Wizard:
8 Set the left end width of Spans 1, 2 and 3 to 15 ft [4.5 m].
1 Choose File > Strip Wizard.
9 Set the right end width of Span 1 and 2 to 14 ft [4.25 m].
2 In the New File dialog box, set the Structure Type to
Elevated and choose the Code. 10 Set the right end width of Span 3 to 1 ft [0.3 m].
3 Click OK.
4 The Strip Wizard dialog box appears; click Next to
proceed to the General Parameters page.
45.2 Set the general parameters
On the General Parameters page, you define the structure

type, number and type of spans, and concrete mixes.
Set the general parameters as follows:

1 Choose Two-Way as the structural system.
2 Check “Post-tensioned”.
3 Set the number of spans to 3.
4 Check “Asymmetric strip”.
Figure 45-1 The Span Data page.
5 Set the concrete mix for slabs and beams to 5000 psi [32
MPa for AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110].
11 Click Next to proceed to the Support Data page.
6 Set the concrete mix for supports to 5000 psi [32 MPa for
AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110].
7 Click Next to proceed to the Span Data page.
RAM Concept 297

Chapter 45
45.4 Create the supports below Set the loads as follows:

1 Set the typical Dead Area Load to 20 psf [1 kN/m2].
Add the four supports in the Supports Below table on the 2 Set the typical Live Area Load to 40 psf [2 kN/m2].
Support Data page. 3 Click Next to proceed to the Post-Tensioning page.
Set the supports below as follows: Note: You can leave the Dead Line Load and Live Line
1 Set the depth of all four supports below to 24 inches [600 Load fields blank (no need to enter zero).
mm].
2 Set the width of all four supports below to 24 inches [600
mm]. 45.7 Define the post-tensioning
3 Set the height of all four supports below to 10 ft [3 m].
4 Leave the bottom and top fixity of all supports below as Enter the post-tensioning parameters on the Post-
“Fixed”. Tensioning page.
5 Click Next to proceed to the Drop Caps and Drop Panels
page. Set the post-tensioning as follows:
1 Uncheck the stressing “Start” and “End” check boxes.
2 Set the minimum P/A to 140 psi [1 MPa].
45.5 Add drop caps 3 Set the minimum balance load percentage to 65%.
4 Click Next to proceed to the Reinforcement page.
Enter the dimensions for a drop cap at Supports 2 and 4 in

the Drop Caps table (top table) on the Drop Cap and Drop
Panels page.
45.8 Specify the reinforcement
Set the drop cap data as follows: parameters
1 For Support 2 in the Drop Caps table set the following
values: Enter the reinforcement parameters on the Reinforcement
• Set the thickness to 20 inches [500 mm]. page.
• Set the left width to 22.5 inches [600 mm]. Set the reinforcement as follows:
• Set the right width to 22.5 inches [600 mm]. 1 Set the top reinforcing bar to #5 [N16 for AS3600; T16
• Set the before length to 22.5 inches [600 mm]. for BS8110].
2 Set the bottom reinforcing bar to #4 [N12 for AS3600;
• Set the after length to 22.5 inches [600 mm].
T12 for BS8110].
2 For Support 4 in the Drop Caps table set the following
3 Set the top and bottom reinforcement clear cover to 1
values:
inch [25 mm].
• Set the thickness to 20 inches [500 mm].
Note: Strip Wizard does not differentiate between cover to
• Set the left width to 33 inches [900 mm]. tendons and reinforcement bar.
• Set the right width to 12 inches [300 mm].
4 Check the Perform punching shear checks box.
• Set the before length to 33 inches [900 mm]. 5 Set Cover to CGS to 1.625 inch [41 mm].
• Set the after length to 0 inches [0 mm]. 6 Click Next to proceed to the Completion page.
3 Click Next to proceed to the Loads page.
45.9 Complete the Strip Wizard

45.6 Specify the loads
Completing the Strip Wizard is the final page of the Strip
Enter the area loads on the Loads page. Wizard dialog box. You can save the data you just entered
in a Strip Wizard Settings file by clicking Save. When you
click Finish, Strip Wizard creates your strip in the open
RAM Concept file.
298 RAM Concept

Chapter 45
Complete the strip:

1 Click Save and name the file in the Save Strip Wizard
File As dialog box that appears.
2 Click Finish.
45.10 Proceed with RAM Concept

Figure 45-5 The completed strip on the Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan.
After you have completed Strip Wizard, you can proceed
with RAM Concept. After you have created your strip,
generate the mesh (with a 2.5-foot [0.75 m] mesh) and run
a calculation analysis. Refer to the relevant manual
45.11 Comparison with PT Flat Plate
chapters, or one of the three PT Flat Plate tutorials for Tutorial
further information.
The results of the Strip Wizard analysis are similar but not
View your strip:
the same as the PT Flat Plate Tutorial. The reasons for
1 Choose Layers > Mesh Input > Standard Plan. different results include:
• Strip Wizard does not automatically consider transverse
continuity effects.
• Increased balcony loads not considered by Strip Wizard.
• Strip Wizard automatically modified the drapes in spans
2 and 3 (you can change these if you wish).
• Longitude tendons not considered by Strip Wizard.
Figure 45-2 The completed strip on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
45.12 Conclusion
Strip Wizard allows you to perform a preliminary or final

design for a strip within a floor. The results are similar to
those generated by any strip program, but not as accurate as
a RAM Concept model that considers all of the
irregularities within a floor.
Figure 45-3 The Element: Standard Plan showing the completed strip af-
ter the mesh has been generated.
Figure 45-4 The Element: Standard Plan after calculation and mesh re-
generation.
RAM Concept 299

Chapter 45
300 RAM Concept

Chapter 46
46 Analysis Notes
This chapter provides general information on finite element method (FEM) plate analysis as well as specific information on
how RAM Concept calculates analysis results.
46.1 Review of plate behavior
In RAM Concept, slab areas are modeled as plates. Engineers have historically used approximate methods for designing
plates; these approximate methods assume that the plate behaves in a beam-like manner in two perpendicular directions.
Because engineers have used these approximate methods for so long, RAM Concept’s true elastic plate analysis results can
sometimes be confusing. This section will review plate analysis theory, so engineers can better understand RAM Concept’s
results.
46.1.1 In-plane and out-of-plane behavior

Slabs are subject to both in-plane and out-of-plane forces.
In-plane forces stretch and shear the slab, but do not cause it to deviate from the plane defined by the slab centroid. For
horizontal slabs (like those in RAM Concept), in-plane forces cause stretching, compressing and shearing of the centroid
plane in plan view only.
Out-of-plane forces cause the slab to bend and twist, moving it perpendicular to the plane defined by the slab centroid. For
horizontal slabs (like those in Concept), out-of-plane forces cause the slab to deflect vertically from the original centroid
plane.
In a horizontal slab that has one continuous centroid elevation, the equilibrium equations of in-plane and out-of-plane forces
are totally separate. However, if there is a shift in the centroid, the two sets of forces become interrelated due to equilibrium
considerations and must be solved for simultaneously; RAM Concept handles this interrelation automatically.
For slabs that are not made of a linear-elastic material, the strains due to the in-plane and out-of-plane forces can no longer
be linearly superimposed, so the equilibrium equations of the two force systems become indirectly related through their
strains.
This interrelation of the two force systems’ strains for non-linear elastic materials can be seen in the simple example of a flat
concrete slab that is subject to transverse loads that cause out-of-plane forces and deflections. If a uniform in-plane
compression force is applied to the same slab, the slab will have less cracking, smaller out-of-plane displacements and a
somewhat different out-of-plane force pattern.
Concept’s global analysis of structures assumes that the concrete behaves like a linear-elastic material. However, the
following discussion of the in-plane and out-of-plane forces is based purely on equilibrium considerations, and therefore is
valid for any material.
Note: “P-delta” effects are not considered.
46.1.2 In-plane behavior

In-plane forces can be quantified as an axial stress in two perpendicular directions, along with a shear stress. For a
differential element (with no loads applied) the stresses are shown as follows:
RAM Concept 301

Chapter 46
From equilibrium considerations, the variation of the in-plane forces can be shown to be:
∂Fx/∂x + ∂Vxy/∂y = -Px
∂Fy/∂y + ∂Vxy/∂x = -Py
where Px and Py are applied loads.
If a different set of coordinate axes is used for references, the forces in terms of these new axes have a Mohr’s circle
relationship to the forces in terms of the original axes:
Fr = Fx cos2 α + Fy sin2 α + 2Fxy sin α cos α
Fs = Fx sin2 α + Fy cos2 α – 2Fxy sin α cos α
Vrs = Vxy (cos2 α –sin2 α) + (Fy – Fx) sin α cos α
This Mohr’s circle relationship is based on equilibrium considerations, so it is valid for all materials.
For every point in the slab there will be a set of two perpendicular “principal axes” where the shearing stresses are zero and
the forces in the two perpendicular directions are at their maximum and minimum values. The angle between the principal
axes and the x- and y-axes will vary from point to point in the slab.
302 RAM Concept

Chapter 46
46.1.3 Out-of-plane behavior

Out-of-plane forces can be quantified as bending moment about two perpendicular axes, a torsional moment and vertical
shears on the two perpendicular faces. For a differential element the moments and shears are shown as follows:
From equilibrium considerations, the variation of the out-of-plane forces can be shown to be:
∂Vxz/∂x + ∂Vyz /∂y = -Pz
∂Mx/∂y + ∂Txy/∂x = -Vyz
∂My/∂x + ∂Txy/∂y = -Vxz
where Pz is an applied load.
If a different set of coordinate axes is used for references, the moment in terms of these new axes have a Mohr’s circle
relationship to the forces in terms of the original axes, the shear forces have a simple vector-like relationship:
RAM Concept 303

Chapter 46
Mr = Mx cos2 α + My sin2 α - 2Txy sin α cos α
Ms = Mx sin2 α + My cos2 α + 2Txy sin α cos α
Trs = Txy (cos2 α –sin2 α) + (Mx – My) sin α cos α
Vrz = Vxz cos α + Vyz sin α
Vsz = -Vxz sin α + Vyz cos α
Again, these relationships are based on equilibrium considerations, so they are valid for all materials.
For every point in the slab there will be a set of two perpendicular “principal axes” where the torsion moments are zero and
the bending moments about the two perpendicular directions are at their maximum and minimum values. The angle between
the principal axes and the x- and y-axes will vary from point to point in the slab.
46.1.4 Interaction of in-plane and out-of-plane behavior

Where the centroid plane of a slab changes elevation, there is an interaction of in-plane and out-of-plane forces. The
interaction of the two sets of forces is simple and is defined purely by moment and force equilibrium. A simple centroid step
is shown in elevation view below:
304 RAM Concept

Chapter 46
Fx’ = Fx
Vxy’ = Vxy
Vxz’ = Vxz
My’ = My - Fx d
Mxy’ = Mxy - Vxy d
46.1.5 RAM Concept plotting and relevant axes

RAM Concept can plot its results relative to the x-axis, the y-axis, a specific axis (specified with an angle) or a maximum or
minimum axis. The minimum axis is defined as the axis at each and every point that gives the minimum value for the
quantity being plotted; the angle of the axis used will vary from point to point in the plot. Similarly the maximum axis is
defined as the axis at each and every point that gives the maximum value for the quantity being plotted; the angle of the axis
used will vary from point to point in the plot.
46.2 Finite element analysis
RAM Concept uses a linear-elastic finite element formulation based on gross section properties for its global analysis.
46.2.1 About finite element analysis

Finite element analysis (also known as the finite element method) has become the standard way for engineers to analyze
complicated structures. While explaining the theory of the finite element method is beyond the scope of this chapter,
engineers using RAM Concept should understand how the parameters they specify affect the program's analysis.
46.2.2 Finite element formulation used in RAM Concept

RAM Concept models the slab portion of the structure with triangular or quadrilateral slab elements. These slab elements are
based on a formulation by Robert Cook [“Two Hybrid Elements for Analysis of Thick, Thin and Sandwich Plates”,
International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering, Volume 5, pages 277-288, 1972]. The elements consider both
in-plane and bending deformation. Five degrees of freedom are used per node.
46.2.3 Slab element general properties

The slab elements used in RAM Concept have the following general properties:
• The elements consider both in-plane and out of plane forces.
RAM Concept 305

Chapter 46
• The elements can (optionally) have different stiffnesses in two orthogonal directions.
• The elements consider transverse shear deformations.
• The elements consider the relative elevations of adjacent slab elements.
46.3 Orthotropic behavior
RAM Concept allows you to specify six stiffness factors that modify the behavior of the slab elements (see description of the
orthotropic behavior settings in “Slab area properties” on page 56 and “Beam properties” on page 57 of Chapter 16,
“Defining the Structure”). When all of the factors are set to 1.0, the slab element behave as an isotropic material (a material
having the same properties in all directions). When the factors are different from each other, the slab elements behave as an
orthotropic material (a material having different properties along its three perpendicular axes.)
Care must be used when setting these stiffness factors. With certain combinations of factors, the structure can become
unstable and the results can become unreliable. Also, the interaction of the stiffness factors may be more complex than it
appears upon first inspection. This section gives some guidance to assist in avoiding these issues.
46.3.1 K Factors and Instability

When K factors other than 1 are used (either directly, or indirectly by setting the slab or beam Behavior), it is possible that
the structure may become unstable or nearly unstable. This is generally not a problem unless the Custom option is used.
Interaction of KMrs and KMr or KMs Stiffness Factors
If custom settings are used, and both KMrs and KMr or both KMrs and KMs are reduced, the elements may become unstable
and the analysis results may be suspect. For this reason we recommend that these parameters be kept within a limited range:
• KMr / KMs > 0.5 or KMrs / KMs > 0.5
• KMs / KMr > 0.5 or KMrs / KMr > 0.5
Similar instabilities can occur with KVrs and KFr/KFs.
46.3.2 Interaction of in-plane and out-of-plane stiffnesses

In situations where the centroid of the slab is not at a uniform elevation, the in-plane and out-of-plane stiffnesses of
Concept's slab elements will interact. For example, in a T-beam, the axial stiffness of the web and the flanges will interact
with their bending stiffnesses (creating a stiffer section than just the web and flange bending stiffnesses added together).
In these situations, you may need to modify the in-plane behavior to modify the out-of-plane behavior. For example, if you
want to reduce a T-beam bending stiffness by half, you would need to set both KMs and KFr to 0.5.
46.4 Deep beam considerations
46.4.1 Analysis of slab and beam elements

RAM Concept assumes that beam elements and slab elements behave the same; unless their “behavior” is specified for the
finite elements.
The first analysis assumption that Concept makes for slab elements is that “linear sections remain linear”; this is analogous
to “plane sections remain plane” in beam theory.
306 RAM Concept

Chapter 46
Figure 46-6 Linear Sections Before Defor- Figure 46-7 Linear Sections After Defor-
mation mation
The second analysis assumption that RAM Concept makes for slab elements is that the force and stress patterns in the
element are that of a typical slab location. The following table shows the possible slab element forces and their associated
stresses.
Symbol Force Related Stress

Fx Axial force on x-face Uniform axial stress σx
Fy Axial force on y-face Uniform axial stress σy
Vxy In-plane shear force Uniform shear stress σxy
Vxz Transverse shear force on x-face Parabolic (along z-axis) shear stress σxz
Vyz Transverse shear force on y-face Parabolic (along z-axis) shear stress σyz
Mx Bending moment about x-axis Linear (along z-axis) axial stress σy
My Bending moment about y-axis Linear (along z-axis) axial stress σx
Txy Torsional moment Linear (along z-axis) shear stress σxy

Table 46-4 Relation between force and stress
Figure 46-8 In-Plane Actions (Plan View) Figure 46-9 Out-of-Plane Actions (Plan
View)
RAM Concept 307

Chapter 46
46.4.2 Analysis and design of deep beams For bending moment and shear
Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, Concept will assume a linear distribution of bending
stress over the deep beam, while the actual stress distribution will be non-linear.
Figure 46-10 RAM Concept Analysis Bending Stresses
Figure 46-11 “True” Bending Stresses
These analysis simplifications are generally not significant and are normally ignored.
In design, Concept will not perform any special capacity calculations that are appropriate only for deep beams and Concept
will not provide any deep beam detailing information. Concept’s shallow beam calculations will generally be conservative
for deep beams.
The engineer will need to ensure that the deep beam is laterally stable. The engineer will also need to provide appropriate
detailing for the deep beam.
308 RAM Concept

Chapter 46
46.4.3 Analysis and design of deep beams with transverse bending moments
Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, Concept will over-estimate the stiffness of a deep beam
subjected to transverse bending moments. Concept’s analysis will assume that the entire beam is effective in resisting the
transverse moment.
Figure 46-12 RAM Concept Analysis Bending/Axial Stresses
Figure 46-13 “True” Bending/Axial Stresses
This over-estimation of the stiffness is generally not significant and is normally ignored.
In design, it is important that Concept’s design sections have the appropriate ignore depth settings, so only the portion of the
beam that is truly effective is used in the capacity calculations.
Figure 46-14 Before Ignore Depth
RAM Concept 309

Chapter 46
Figure 46-15 After Ignore Depth
46.4.4 Analysis of deep beams with torsion

Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, Concept will over-estimate the torsional stiffness of
deep beams. At the worst case, Concept’s assumptions lead to a torsional stiffness at the deep beam that is proportional to
bh3, while the true torsional stiffness is proportional to b3h. Typically Concept’s overestimation is not that great as the slab
elements have a transverse shear stiffness that makes the beams more flexible. The larger the number of elements across a
deep beam, the smaller the overestimation of torsional stiffness.
Figure 46-16 RAM Concept Analysis Torsion Shear Stresses
Figure 46-17 “True” Torsion Shear Stresses
The torsion in the beam may be necessary for a complete structural load path - for this reason it cannot be ignored. It may be
appropriate to reduce the torsional stiffness of the beam (this will modify the structural load path to one that is less
310 RAM Concept

Chapter 46
dependent upon the beam torsional capacity). Concept provides four options of considering this torsion in design. See
“Torsion Considerations” on page 330 for more information.
Note: When the torsion stiffness of a beam has been reduced using a “K-factor”, it is generally recommended to provide a
minimum level of torsion stirrups/ligatures/links to ensure that the beam can torsionally crack without precipitating a failure.
46.4.5 Analysis and design of moment transfer through step-beams

Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, Concept will not consider that a step beam could bend
about its longitudinal axis. Concept’s assumption that “linear sections remain linear” prohibits this type of bending and will
cause Concept to over-estimate the stiffness of the step-beam for moment transfer.
Figure 46-18 RAM Concept Step-Beam Bending Stresses
Figure 46-19 “True” Step-Beam Bending Stresses
This over-estimation of the stiffness is generally not significant and is normally ignored. However, it is up to the engineer to
assure that step-beam has the capacity and detailing to transfer the analyzed moment.
46.5 Wall behavior
46.5.1 Walls above slab

RAM Concept considers walls above the slab to act as beams. It appropriately analyzes the influence of these walls on the
slab, but it does not report the wall-beam forces nor does it design the wall-beams. Design strips and design sections that
cross walls ignore both the capacity of the wall-beam in the cross section and the forces in the wall-beam. Wall-beams
interpret some wall properties differently than walls below the slab:
RAM Concept 311

Chapter 46
Fixed Near = wall has torsional stiffness
Fixed Far = (ignored)
Shear Wall = beam has axial stiffness
Compressible = (ignored)
Note that while the prediction of the bending behavior of the slab and beam is accurate, the division of shear between the
wall and the slab is not well predicted. For a combined wall-beam / slab section the proportion of the vertical shear force
carried by the slab will be between the two extremes:
As / Atotal, and
Is / Itotal
Where
As = cross-sectional area of slab in section
Atotal = cross-sectional area of slab and wall together
Is = moment of inertia of slab
Itotal = moment of inertia of slab and wall together
46.6 Post-tensioning loadings
46.6.1 Hyperstatic loading

RAM Concept calculates the effects of the hyperstatic loading for all objects (elements, springs, support, design sections,
design strip segment cross sections and punching checks) by using the following vector relationship:
Fh = Fb - Fp
where
Fh = the hyperstatic forces and moments
Fb = the balance loading forces and moments (tendon forces on real structure)
Fp = the “primary” forces and moments in the object (forces in object due to PT if the object was not restrained, but
still contained tendons – if any)
For objects that do not contain tendons (walls, columns, springs, rigid supports, design sections without tendons and design
strips without tendons), Fp is zero, so:
Fh = Fb
For slab elements the calculation of Fp for every element is not performed, as there is no clear definition of Fp for anything
except a cross section. Concept’s slab analysis plots assume Fp = Fb (Fh = 0), but these plotted values are NOT used in the
slab design and checking. Concept calculates design section and design strip cross section forces (without the assumption of
Fp = Fb) as follows:
Fh = Fb - Fp
312 RAM Concept

Chapter 46
Concept bases the calculation of Fp on the tendons at each cross section.
Note: Because of this issue, it is incorrect to use Concept’s slab analysis plots for cross-section design values in PT struc-
tures. (It is not recommend using slab analysis plots in RC slabs either, but that is because design strips and design sections
provide much higher accuracy).
Note: For a more detailed discussion, refer to “Complete Secondary (Hyperstatic) Effects” by A. Bommer; PTI Journal,
January 2004, Vol 2 No. 1).
46.7 Self-equilibrium analysis
RAM Concept can analyze loadings using a self-equilibrium analysis.
46.7.1 About self-equilibrium analysis

Any static loading on a structure, when combined with the structure support reactions (considered as additional loads), is a
self-equilibrium loading. In such a loading the total loads upon the structure are in force and moment equilibrium. However,
the equilibrium loads still produce moments and forces in the structure.
In certain cases, it is desirable to analyze a self-equilibrium loading upon a floor system while ignoring the effects of the
floor system supports. We call this type of analysis a self-equilibrium analysis.
46.7.2 Uses of Self-Equilibrium Analyses
Load Paths Compatible with Full Building Lateral Analysis
The most common use of self-equilibrium analyses is to ensure that a load path in Concept is consistent with a load path in a
lateral analysis performed by a separate program.
If a lateral analysis of a building (perhaps using RAM Frame) is performed, and that analysis considers the slab to be part of
the lateral load path, the slab - including the slab-column connections - needs to be designed to resist the forces and moments
determined in the lateral analysis. This design can be performed using a self-equilibrium analysis. The forces/reactions from
all of the supports (above and below the slab) onto the slab are considered as loads to the slab, any forces directly applied to
the slab (such as a story-force in a seismic analysis) are also included.
The result of this self-equilibrium analysis is a slab load path that is fully consistent with the lateral analysis of the entire
building. The distribution of forces (and the displacements) within the slab may not match those in the building lateral
analysis, but the distribution of slab forces in Concept is almost always more accurate than those predicted in the full-
building analysis.
Other Uses
While there are other potential uses of the self-equilibrium analysis, they are rare and not covered in this manual.
46.7.3 Using Self-Equilibrium Analyses
Setting the Loading Analysis Type
To have Concept analyze a loading using a self-equilibrium analysis, the loading's analysis type must be changed to “Lateral
SE” (lateral self equilibrium). The loading analysis type can be changed in the loading window. See “Changing Analysis” on
page 31 of Chapter 10, “Specifying Loadings”.
Note: The term “Lateral SE” is used instead of “Self Equilibrium” to remind users that this analysis type is primarily
intended for lateral loadings.
RAM Concept 313

Chapter 46
Defining the Loads
There is no limit to the type or quantity of loads that can be applied in a self-equilibrium loading. However, the loads applied
must be nearly in self-equilibrium. If the loads are out of equilibrium Concept will apply restraints to the slab to ensure that
equilibrium can be maintained. The restraint reactions can be viewed in the Calc Log.
Note: See “Importing a database” on page 45 of Chapter 14, “Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System” for
information on how to automatically import self-equilibrium lateral loads.
Note: Mat/Raft foundations are typically not well suited for self-equilibrium analyses as the soil reactions are not known
before the analysis.
46.7.4 Self-Equilibrium Analyses Details
“Floating” Stiffness Matrix
If you use self-equilibrium loadings, Concept creates an internal floating stiffness matrix in addition to the regular stiffness
matrix. The floating stiffness matrix considers the slab, but not the supports above or below the slab. Concept also adds some
minimal supports to the matrix to make it stable.
Minimal Supports
The minimal supports that Concept adds to the floating stiffness matrix are located at real support locations, but not at every
real support location. Typically, Concept adds three supports to provide full stability, but not to provide any restraint.
Note: Concept gives a warning if there are not at least two support locations where minimal supports can be added.
The motivation for adding the minimal supports at the same location as real supports is that these locations are likely to be
locations where self-equilibrium loads are applied, so any reactions at these locations can typically be considered as
“corrections” to the self-equilibrium loads.
Punching Check Reactions
Punching checks consider the loads applied at the punching check location in their reaction calculations. Punching checks
are the only “support” that have reactions from self-equilibrium analyses.
Displacements
Concept reports all displacements for self-equilibrium loadings as zero. Self-equilibrium loadings have no effect on the
displacements calculated for load combinations or rule sets.
Pattern Loading
Pattern loading can be used in a self-equilibrium analysis, but it should almost never be used. When used, all patterns should
contain a self-equilibrium set of loads.
Note: For an example, see Example 37-1 on page 177 of Chapter 37, “Frequently Asked Questions”.
46.8 Design strip and design section forces
46.8.1 Design section axes and sign convention

Design sections have a local coordinate system, with r, s and z axes:
• R-axis is collinear with the design section and is positive in the direction from end 1 to end 2. This direction is also referred
to as “Lateral”.
• S-axis is 90 degrees counter-clockwise to the r-axis (still in the x-y plane) and goes through the “design centroid” (see
below). This direction is also referred to as “Axial”
314 RAM Concept

Chapter 46
• Z-axis is parallel to the global z-axis and goes through the “design centroid”. This direction is also referred to as “Vertical”
Forces for the design section are considered as the forces that the structure in the positive-s region applies to the structure in
the negative-s region.
A design section drawn from point B to point A will have the same forces as a design section drawn from point A to point B
except that the following two forces will have opposite signs:
• Vz (vertical shear on the s-face)
• Mz (moment about the z axis)
46.8.2 Design strip segment axes and sign convention

Design strip segments have a local coordinate system for each internal cross section. An internal cross section is
perpendicular to the design strip segment spine and extends from the left tributary boundary to the right tributary boundary.
Each internal cross section is treated exactly like a Design Section with its own r, s and z axes (see above).
All of a DSS’s cross sections will have coordinate systems that are parallel, but for certain structure geometries the s-axes of
each cross section will not be collinear. This is due to each cross section determining its own “design centroid” (see below).
46.8.3 Design centroids

Each design strip (span segment strip) segment cross section and design section and determines its own design centroid
location. The location is determined as follows:
1 A final cross section is determined by considering (i) the trimmed cross section for design strip segments, and (ii) the top
and bottom “ignore” depths for design sections.
2 The centroid z-elevation of this final cross section is the design centroid z coordinate.
3 A cross section “core” is determined (see “Concrete “Core” Determination” on page 330). For a T shaped section the core
will be the stem from the bottom of the section to the top of the section. For a rectangular section, the core will be the entire
section.
4 The core’s x and y centroid coordinates are the design centroid’s x and y coordinates.
5 You can view the centroid of a design strip segment cross section in the first page of an audit. See Chapter 30, “Using the
Auditor” for more information.
46.8.4 Calculating the forces on the cross section

RAM Concept calculates the cross section forces about the design centroid of the cross section (after trimming has been
taken into account).
For each of the same slab elements that make up the initial concrete cross section (before trimming has been taken into
account), the elements’ nodal forces (for all the elements’ nodes on one side of the design section) are transformed to the
centroid of the final concrete section and added to the design section forces. For slab elements that contain the end of the
design section, only a fraction (proportional to the length of the design section in the element divided by the length across
the element along a line collinear with the design section) of the nodal forces are included.
Nodal forces are used in place of integrations of slab stresses because slab stress results may have local spikes caused by
odd-shaped elements. These local spikes can significantly alter the total integrated value. The nodal forces used by Concept
are not affected by the local stress spikes and always give results that will be in equilibrium with the nodal loads.
46.8.5 Calculating the balanced load percentages

RAM Concept calculates the percentage of load that is balanced by the post-tensioning within design strips. See “Viewing
balanced load percentages” on page 130 for instructions on accessing this information.
Each design strip segment reports two values:
RAM Concept 315

Chapter 46
xx% DL Balanced
xx% DL + RLL Balanced
The values reported are valid for the last Calc All (tendon changes after that are not reflected).
The values are calculated based on the total static moment for the span, for the balanced loadings and the dead and live
loadings.
For a cantilever span, the effective load is:
2
w = 2M ⁄ L
where:
M = moment at first cross section
L = clear span
For a regular span (with supports at both ends), the effective load is:
2
w = 8M ⁄ L
where
M = (M1 + M2)/2 - M3
M1 = moment at first cross section
M2 = moment at last cross section
M3 = moment at cross section closest to midway between first and
last cross sections
L = clear span
The percentage is defined as:
% = -100 Wb/Wl
where
Wb = effective load due to balance and transfer balance loadings
Wl = effective load due to load combination under consideration
(“DL” or “DL + RLL”)
There is no possible calculation for design strip segments that are not part of a span. These have an “undefined” balance load
percentage.
The balance calculation may have some differences from the calculation available in the tendon plans. The difference are
due to:
• diversion of PT effects
• clear span vs total span
• moment taken at first and last sections, not at support centerlines
In the calculations, “DL” is based on the “dead” loading types, and means:
Self Weight + Dead + Dead (transfer) but does NOT include Stressing Dead
316 RAM Concept

Chapter 46
In the calculations, “RLL” is based on the new loading types, and means:
Live (reducible) + Live (unreducible) + Live (storage) + Live (roof) + Live (reducible)(transfer) + Live
(unreducible)(transfer) + Live (storage)(transfer) + Live (roof)(transfer)
All of these loadings are reduced per the live load reduction code before addition to the total.
46.8.6 Using the “Don't Reduce Integrated M and V due to Sign Change” option
Design sections and span segments contain an option (checkbox) with the label “Don't reduce Integrated M and V due to
Sign Change”. If this option is selected, Concept will perform five integrations of the cross section forces for every loading
and load pattern:
1. Standard Integration - this is as described in “Calculating the forces on the cross section” on page 315.
2. Max Moment Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would increase the integrated bending moment
value are considered.
3. Min Moment Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would decrease the integrated bending moment
value are considered.
4. Max Shear Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would increase the integrated vertical shear value
are considered.
5. Min Shear Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would decrease the integrated vertical shear value
are considered.
The intent of this option is to allow for safe, conservative designs where cross sections include regions of moment (or shear)
with opposite signs that cause the moment (or shear) recorded for the cross section to be less than that for a shorter sub- cross
section.
The values from the above integrations may not be considered in certain circumstances:
• Standard Integration - all values always considered.
• Max Moment Integration - bending moment value considered if bending moment is same sign as bending moment in
Standard Integration.
• Min Moment Integration - bending moment value considered if bending moment is same sign as bending moment in
Standard Integration.
• Max Shear Integration - vertical shear value considered if vertical shear is same sign as vertical shear in Standard
Integration.
• Min Shear Integration - vertical shear value considered if vertical shear is same sign as vertical shear in Standard
Integration.
When the “Don't reduce Integrated M and V due to Sign Change” option is selected, the design forces are always more
conservative than when the option is not selected. This option should not be used without due consideration.
Note: These selective integrations are performed independently for each loading. Load(ing) Combinations cross section
forces therefore may include (and exclude) forces from different elements in each loading. This adds to the conservatism of
the option.
46.9 Result categories in RAM Concept
RAM Concept keeps track of 2 categories of results: “standard” and “envelope”.
RAM Concept 317

Chapter 46
46.9.1 Standard results
Standard results - loadings
Standard Results for a loading are the results due to the application of all loads of the loading with no patterns considered.
These results consists of the results on the Slab tab, the “Standard” context results on the Reaction tab and the “Standard”
context results for the Strip tab.
Standard results - load combinations
Standard Results for a load combination are the linear combination of loading standard results using the standard load
factors. These results consist of the results on the Slab tab, the “Standard” context results on the Reaction tab and the
“Standard” context results for the Strip tab.
Note: Standard results also include all of the results for items other than design strip segments, design sections and punching
checks. Items such as slab bending moments, column reactions and soil reactions are included in the standard (non-
enveloped) results.
Note: For rule set layers, there are no standard results; only envelope results are calculated.
46.9.2 Envelope results

Envelope results are kept for only 3 object types - design strip segments, design sections and punching checks. Envelope
results fully consider pattern loadings and alternate envelope factors (as well as standard factors).
For design strip segments and design sections all of the cross-section forces are calculated, and there are six envelope result
sets kept:
Max M (forces in place at time of maximum M)
Min M (forces in place at time of minimum M)
Max V (forces in place at time of maximum V)
Min V (forces in place at time of minimum V)
Max P (forces in place at time of maximum P)
Min P (forces in place at time of minimum P)
Note: “Min” refers to the minimum “signed” value, not the minimum absolute value.
For punching checks all the reaction forces are calculated and there are 6 envelope result sets kept:
Max Fz (reaction forces at time of maximum Fz reaction)
Min Fz (reaction forces at time of minimum Fz reaction)
Max Mx (reaction forces at time of maximum Mx reaction)
Min Mx (reaction forces at time of minimum Mx reaction)
Max My (reaction forces at time of maximum My reaction)
Min My (reaction forces at time of minimum My reaction)
46.9.3 How RAM Concept calculates envelope results
Envelope Results - Loadings
Envelope results for a loading are determined by comparing the results for the full loading and the results of all of the pattern
loadings (considering the pattern factors). Envelope results consist of a subset of results which occur simultaneously with
minimum and maximum values of certain resultants.
318 RAM Concept

Chapter 46
For example, for a design section, all of the pattern results would be compared, and the pattern result with the largest
bending moment would become the Max M result for that design section; other design sections’ Max M results might be
determined by other patterns.
If the loading is not patterned, then all of the envelope results are identical to the standard results.
Envelope Results - Load Combinations
Envelope results for a load combination are determined by comparing all the permutations of standard and alternate load
factors multiplied by all envelopes for each loading in the load combination. For each location and envelope type, the chosen
load factors are those that create the most extreme envelope.
In mathematical terms:
• There are 2n(p+1) results for n loadings and p patterns.
• These 2n(p+1) results are enveloped together.
The actual calculations that RAM Concept uses do not consider 2n(p+1) load combinations, but the result of the RAM
Concept’s calculations is the same as if it did.
Envelope Results - Rule Sets
Envelope results for rule sets are determined by comparing all the envelopes for all of the load combinations that use the rule
set. For each location and envelope type, the chosen values are those that occur simultaneously with the most extreme
envelope.
Envelope results for a loading, load combination or rule set are all the results on the Reaction tab and Strip tab except for
those with the “Standard” context. The Standard context for these plots is sometimes referred to as the “standard envelope”,
but technically it is not an envelope at all.
Note: RAM Concept’s enveloping finds the critical cases in most regular and complicated models. It would be possible,
however, for the six envelopes to miss the critical case. If you believe that a set of forces not included in the envelopes may be
critical for the design, you can manually create additional loadings (without patterning) and/or additional load combinations
(without alternate load factors) and/or additional rule sets (using a single load combination) to ensure that the force set of
concern is considered in the design.
RAM Concept 319

Chapter 46
320 RAM Concept

Chapter 47
47 Section Design Notes
This chapter explains RAM Concept’s general approach to the analysis and design of cross sections. The specific handling of
each code’s requirements are detailed in the chapters that follow.
47.1 General Design Approach
47.1.1 Strip and Section Design – A 3 Step Process

RAM Concept performs its design in 3 steps:
Step 1: Each Rule set performs its “Phase 1” selection of reinforcement. For most rule sets this is the entire design.
Step 1b: The selected reinforcement of all the rule sets is summarized.
Step 2: Each Rule set performs its “Phase 2” selection of reinforcement needed in addition to that summarized in step 1b. For
most rule sets nothing happens in this step, but for some rule sets –such as shear design and ductility design the summarized
step 1 reinforcement needs to be known before the design can be performed.
Step 2b: The selected reinforcement of all the rule sets is summarized.
Step 3: Each Rule set performs a final check (no reinforcement is added in this step) and final analysis.
47.1.2 Non-prestressed Reinforcement Stress-Strain Curves

RAM Concept considers mild steel reinforcement to be a perfectly elastic/plastic material as defined by the modulus of
elasticity and the yield stress.
47.1.3 Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves

RAM Concept uses a post-tensioning steel stress-strain curve base on a standard “power formula” that has been used in
various forms for 25 years:
fp = εp [A + B/{1 + (C εp)D}1/D] ≤ fpu
Where A, B, C and D are coefficients chosen to best fit the experimental stress-strain curve data.
RAM Concept uses coefficients A, B, C and D based on an analysis of prestressing steel stress-strain curves included a paper
by Develapura and Tadros [Develapura, R. K. and Tadros, M. K.,“Critical Assessment of ACI 318 Eq. (18-3) for
Prestressing Steel Stress at Ultimate Flexure”, ACI Structural Journal, V. 89, No. 5, September-October 1992, pp. 538-546].
RAM Concept’s values are:
A = 0.0311 Ep
B = Ep - A
C = 0.958 Ep/fpy
D = 7.36
These values provide exact correspondence with the recommended parameters for 270 ksi (1860 MPa) strand with fpy of 0.9
fpu. For other prestressing materials, there may be small differences (a few percent) from the theoretical curves in the region
between the start of yield and ultimate strength.
RAM Concept 321

Chapter 47
300
300
200
Fp(strain)
Fpu
Fpy
100
0 0
0 0.005 0.01 0.015 0.02 0.025 0.03 0.035
0.00 strain 0.04
47.1.4 Relationship of Bonded Post-tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains

The strains in a cross section can be determined using the “plane sections remain plane” assumption. However, due to the
effects of prestressing and the sequence of construction, the strains in the post-tensioning in a cross section are not equal to
the strains in the adjacent concrete.
Conceptually, to calculate the strain in a bonded tendon at that corresponds to the adjacent concrete strain is simple:
εp = εc + (εpi – εci)
Where
εp = strain in tendon
εc = strain in concrete adjacent to tendon
εpi = strain in tendon at time of bonding
εci = strain in adjacent concrete at time of bonding (typically negative)
RAM Concept uses the following procedure and assumptions when calculating the εpi and εci values for each tendon in each
design cross section:
• All tendon “long-term losses” (relaxation, elastic shortening, creep and shrinkage) occur before bonding.
• The formwork applies an upward force on the concrete exactly the same as the weight of the concrete. The only forces in
the concrete are those due to the balance loading.
• The concrete strains can be determined using gross section properties and the “initial” concrete modulus.
47.1.5 Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves –General Theory

RAM Concept’s treatment of the effect of cross section strains on ultimate unbonded tendon stresses is loosely based on a
paper by Naaman, Burns, French, Gable and Mattock [Naaman, A. E. et. al, “Stresses in Unbonded Prestressing Tendons at
Ultimate: Recommendation”, ACI Structural Journal, V. 99, No. 4, July-August 2002, pp. 518-529]. In the paper the
authors, who are members of the Subcommittee of Stresses in Unbonded Tendons of Joint ASCE-ACI committee 423,
Prestressed Concrete, recommend code modifications for ACI 318.
The paper provides an equation for estimating tendon stresses at ultimate bending strength of a cross section. The proposed
equation is shown to have a correlation with test results that is 2.5 times better than the ACI equations 18-4 and 18-5. The
equation is:
322 RAM Concept

Chapter 47
fps = fse + Ωu Ep εcu(dp/c – 1)(L1/L2) ≤ 0.80fpu
where
fps = tendon stress at ultimate bending strength
fse = effective prestress in prestressed reinforcement
Ep = elastic modulus of prestressed reinforcement
εcu = failure strain of concrete (typically assumed as 0.003)
dp = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressed reinforcement.
c = depth of neutral axis at ultimate strength
L = span under consideration
L1 = sum of lengths of loaded spans
L2 = total length of tendon between anchorages
Ωu = K(dp/L) where K = 3 for uniform or third point loadings and 1.5 for midspan loading
fpu = specified tensile strength of prestressed tendons
It can be shown that:
∆ε p ≈ ε cu ( d p ⁄ c – 1 )
where
∆εp = change in strain in concrete adjacent to the tendon from effective prestress level to ultimate bending
With this substitution (and the one for Ωu) the equation becomes:
fps = fse + K(dp/L) Ep ∆εp (L1/L2) ≤ 0.80fpu
L can both realistically and conservatively be assumed to equal L1 as it is unlikely for two spans to simultaneously have
large inelastic deformations. This simplifies the equation further to:
fps = fse + Ep (Kdp /L2) ∆εp ≤ 0.80fpu
It is obvious that in the above equations that (Kdp /L2) is a strain reduction factor that accounts for the distribution of the
localized strain over the length of the tendon. The numerator is a consideration of the length of the yielding (high strain)
region, while the denominator is a consideration of the length over which this strain is distributed.
47.1.6 Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves – Program Implementation

RAM Concept assumes that unbonded post-tensioning stresses are not affected by service loading.
For ultimate strength considerations, RAM Concept treats unbonded tendons as partially bonded tendons:
fps = F(εpse + k ∆εp) ≤ flimit
where
fps = tendon stress at ultimate bending strength
F() = post-tensioning material stress strain curve (described above)
RAM Concept 323

Chapter 47
εpse = strain in tendon at effective prestress level
∆εp = change in strain in concrete adjacent to the tendon from effective prestress level to ultimate bending
k = strain reduction factor, taken as 0.1
flimit = limit stress as defined by the effective code
For ACI 318-99, flimit is defined by equations 18-4 and 18-5. In the calculation of ρp used in the ACI equations, RAM
Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the tendon centroid (the same limiting stress value is
used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
For AS 3600-2001, flimit is defined by section 8.1.6. In the calculation of befdp used in the AS equations, RAM Concept
assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the tendon centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for
both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
47.1.7 Tendons – External Load or Internal Force?

Tendons need to be considered as an external load for some purposes and as an internal force for other purposes. It is
important that the tendon treatment be consistent throughout a calculation.
RAM Concept always considers tendons as internal forces in strength calculations. The full force of the tendon is an internal
force, while any hyperstatic effects generated by the tendons are considered as external forces. The balance loading should
never be included in load combinations used for strength calculations, while the hyperstatic loading should always be
included (as an external load) in strength calculations.
Concept always considers the initial prestress in tendons as external forces in service calculations. Changes in the tendons
stress (from effective stress levels) – if any – are considered as internal forces. For example if a bonded tendon is stressed
with a final effective stress of 175 ksi (1207 N/mm2), but applying the service loadings to the structure results in a stress
increase to 185 ksi (1276 N/mm2), then Concept will consider the 10 ksi (69 N/mm2)stress change as an internal force, while
the 175 ksi (1207 N/mm2) initial stress is assumed to be considered in the applied loads. For this reason, the balance loading
should always be included in load combinations used for service calculations, The hyperstatic loading should never be
included in service calculations.
47.1.8 Tendons – inclusion of force vector on a cross section

Tendons are excluded from a cross section if they cross the section at an angle of less than 15 degrees (i.e. if they are nearly
parallel to the cross section).
47.1.9 Tendons – calculation of number of ducts

The calculation of number of tendon ducts for Code bar spacing rules uses the following:
• an integral number of ducts is calculated from the area of prestressing steel and the specified Aps / duct
• the number is then modified by the vector component of the tendon
This is true regardless of the angle of the tendon to the cross section, so long as the tendon is considered in the cross section
(see Section 47.1.8).
47.1.10 Concrete Stress-Strain Curves

RAM Concept uses a parabolic-plastic stress-strain curve for concrete based on the Portland Cement Association’s parabolic
stress-strain curve [see PCA’s Notes on ACI 318-99 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, Figure 6-8]. This
curve is used for both strength and service cross section analyses. The curve is totally defined by two parameters:
f’c = Concrete Cylinder Strength
324 RAM Concept

Chapter 47
Ec = Concrete Elastic Modulus (tangent at zero strain)
A third parameter, the strain at which the concrete behavior changes from parabolic to linear, is calculated:
ε0 = 2 (0.85 f’c)/ Ec
For εc < 0 (tension)
fc = 0
For 0 < εc < ε0 (parabolic range)
fc = 0.85 f’c [2(εc/ε0) – (εc/ε0)2]
For ε c ≥ ε 0 (plastic range)
fc = 0.85 f’c
4000
3000
Fc(strain)
2000
⋅
0.85fc
1000
0
0 0.001 0.002 0.003 0.004
strain
47.1.11 Creep and Shrinkage Effects

RAM Concept considers creep and shrinkage in any cross section by modifying the concrete stress strain curves to be:
σ = f((ε - εcs)/kc)
where:
σ = stress in concrete
kc = concrete creep factor (typically 3.35 = 2.35 + 1.0)
ε = strain in cross section
εcs = shrinkage strain
f()= concrete material short-term stress-strain curve
This modified concrete stress-strain curve is only used in the ECR calcs. It is never used for gross-section or cracked-section
stress predictions.
Note: ACI 209 reports the value of 3.35 as an average creep value. RAM Concept files adopt this value as a default.
RAM Concept 325

Chapter 47
47.1.12 Cracked Section Analyses

RAM Concept performs cracked section analyses by iteratively solving for a cross section strain (top strain and bottom
strain) that results in the cross section bending moment and axial force being equal to the applied moment and axial force.
In the cracked section analyses, Concept considers concrete to have no tension strength. Since concrete obviously does have
some tension strength, Concept’s assumption is equivalent to considering that the concrete has been previously cracked by
some other loading condition. Concept’s assumption is conservative. This pre-cracked assumption is used to determine the
cracked cross section stresses and the cracked moment of inertia. This assumption does not effect the ECR calculations as
Branson’s formula does not consider the cracked moment of inertia unless the cross section stresses exceed the modulus of
rupture.
When a cross section with no concrete tension strains is analyzed with a cracked section analysis, Concept’s analysis
methods result in a transformed section analysis.
The parameters considered in a Rule Set’s cracked section analysis are

• For ECR (Effective Curvature Ratio) Calcs Only - The creep coefficient as specified in the Calc Options window. This
coefficient is the value of (total strain under constant stress) / (initial strain under same stress); a typical value is 3.35 (1.0
for initial strain and 2.35 for creep strain)
• For ECR Calcs Only - The shrinkage strain as specified in the Calc Options window.
• The standard instantaneous concrete stress-strain curve as defined above.
• All mild steel reinforcement (from all rule sets) in each cross section – this is the value reported by the Design Status area
of steel plots, which will often be somewhat less than the value of the detailed reinforcement (number of bars and lengths).
• The displacement of concrete by reinforcement is not considered.
• The tendon stress strain curve for the type of rule set (see “Tendons – External Load or Internal Force?” on page 324).
Cracked section analysis is not available for rule sets – such as Minimum Design – that do not inherently have a tendon
stress-strain curve type associated with them.
47.1.13 Branson’s Stress Ratio

The most common method for determining an effective moment of inertia in concrete members is Branson’s Formula:
Ie = (Mcr/Ma)4 Ig + [1 – (Mcr/Ma)4] Icr
where
Ie = the effective moment of inertia
Ig = the gross concrete moment of inertia
Icr = the cracked concrete moment of inertia
Mcr = the gross cross section cracking moment
Ma = the applied moment
As Branson’s formula does not consider axial forces which may be present (especially in post-tensioned structures), we have
modified it to consider axial forces:
Ie = (fcr/fa)4 Ig + [1 – (fcr/fa)4] Icr
where
fcr = the concrete flexural tensile strength
fa = the cross-section tensile fiber stress (based on gross section properties)
326 RAM Concept

Chapter 47
If there is no axial force, then this formulation is identical to Branson’s formula. If there are axial forces, this formulation is
a reasonable (but not theoretically identical) extrapolation of Branson’s formula.
We call the value (fcr/fa)4 “Branson’s Stress Ratio”. Its value is always limited to be less than or equal to 1.0.
Note that you will more commonly see Branson’s formula used with a power of 3 instead of 4. The power of 3 is appropriate
when a peak moment in a span is used to determine an effective moment of inertia for the entire span. The power of 4 is
appropriate for determining a local effective moment of inertia using local section forces [Branson, Dan E., “Instantaneous
and Time-Dependent Deflections of Simple and Continuous Reinforced Concrete Beams”, Report #7, Part 1, Alabama
Highway Research Department, Bureau of Public Roads, August 1963, pp.1-78].
47.1.14 Calculation of Effective Curvature Ratio

RAM Concept calculates an “effective curvature ratio” at every cross section:
ECR = Ce / Cg
Where
ECR = the effective curvature ratio
Ce = the effective cross section curvature (see calc below)
Cg = the gross section curvature
Ce is calculated by the approximate formula:
Ce = (kc BSR Cg) + ((1 – BSR) Cccs)
where
kc = the concrete material creep factor (often 3.35) = total strain / elastic strain
BSR = Branson’s Stress Ratio (see “Branson’s Stress Ratio” on page 326)
Cccs = the cross section curvature considering cracking, creep and shrinkage (see “Cracked Section Analyses” on
page 326)
Note that if gross-section stresses are kept below the concrete tensile strength, then the effective curvature ratio will be equal
to the concrete material creep factor (kc).
If post-tensioning is considered as an internal force (not an external load) for the active design rules, then the gross-section
calculations are performed with the post-tensioning primary forces added to the calculated cross section forces.
It is unusual, but possible, for the ECR value to be less than the concrete material creep factor (kc). These cases occur if the
amount of reinforcement is so large that the cracked stiffness (including concrete creep) is greater than the gross stiffness
(including concrete creep).
47.1.15 Use of ECR

ECR values are defined for curvatures of cross sections - we need to be able to transform them into a span deflection
multiplier for convenient design use.
The deflection of a span is proportional to the elastic energy in the span. Considering only bending energy of the gross
section:
∆ g = k ∫ ( M ) ( M ⁄ EI )dl
RAM Concept 327

Chapter 47
Considering the ECR as “softener” of the gross section stiffness, this equation becomes:
∆ ecr = k ∫ ( M ) ( ECR ) ( M ⁄ EI )dl
From these two equations we can create a span deflection multiplier for convenient design use:
Deflection Multiplier = ∆ecr / ∆g
Deflection Multiplier = k ∫ ( M ) ( ECR ) ( M ⁄ EI )dl ⁄ k ∫ ( M ) ( M ⁄ EI )dl
Deflection Multiplier = ∫ ( M ) ( ECR ) ( M ⁄ EI )dl ⁄ ∫ ( M ) ( M ⁄ EI )dl

Note that this multiplier will likely be conservative for indeterminate structures as the bending moments in the structure will
become rearranged (stiffer sections will attract more moment) in a manner that will reduce ∆ecr.
Note: The deflection multiplier will always be less than the maximum ECR value in the span.
Note: The L.T. deflection plot uses this integral. See “Using strip based deflection plots for slabs” on page 475.
47.1.16 Crack Width Predictions

Unless the design code in use specifies a calculation for estimating crack widths, RAM Concept estimates crack widths
based on a paper by Frosch [Frosch, R. J.,“Another Look at Cracking and Crack Control in Reinforced Concrete”, ACI
Structural Journal, V. 96, No. 3, May-June 1999, pp. 437-442].
In cracked concrete, with the concrete assumed to carry only small tension stress, the crack width can be calculated as:
wc = ε c s c
where:
wc = crack width
εc = cross section strain at crack elevation
sc = crack spacing
The cross section strain (εc) at the crack elevation can be easily calculated in a cracked-section analysis using the “plane
sections remain plane” assumption.
The crack spacing (sc) is more difficult to predict.
For reinforcement with no bond to the concrete, the crack spacing can be shown to be:
h ≤ sc ≤ 2 h
where:
h = height of the tension zone
For reinforcement with “no-slip” with the concrete, the crack spacing can be shown to be:
d* ≤ sc ≤ 2 d*
where:
d* = distance from crack to centroid of nearest reinforcement
2 2
= ( c + ( sb ⁄ 2 ) ) for a single layer of reinforcement
328 RAM Concept

Chapter 47
where:
c = perpendicular (shortest) distance from concrete face to reinforcement centroid
sb = spacing of reinforcement
For deformed bars without special coatings (such as epoxy), Frosch has shown that:
s c = 2 d*
leads to reasonable predictions of the maximum crack width. RAM Concept uses this assumption, but limits d* to a
maximum value of h (the crack height); this limiting value typically only controls in slabs without bonded reinforcement.
The final equation RAM Concept uses for crack width calculation can be written as:
wc = 2 ε c d * (d* ≤ h)
For multiple bars and layers of reinforcement, the reinforcement can be optimally placed such that:
2 2
d* = ( c i + ( s i ⁄ 2 ) ) for all reinforcement i
w = Σs i
where:
ci = perpendicular (shortest) distance from concrete face to reinforcement i centroid
si = length along on concrete tension face allocated to reinforcement i
w = width of concrete tension face
RAM Concept iteratively solves for d* (to within 1 mm), using all bonded reinforcement that when considered minimizes
the value of d*. When using bonded post-tensioning, each duct is considered as a reinforcing bar equivalent. Unbonded and
external post-tensioning are ignored. Tendons at an angle of less than 45 degrees to the cross section are ignored also.
47.1.17 “Cracking Moment” Used in Design Calculations

Many design codes require that cross sections have a minimum moment capacity of at least some factor (often 1.2) times the
cracking load of the cross section. The cracking load is derived as follows:
fcr = (ML + MB)/S – (PL + PB)/A
where:
fcr = the cracking stress
ML = the bending moment due to applied loads at time of cracking
MB = the bending moment due to the balance loading (same sign as ML)
S = the section modulus for the direction of bending (Z in some communities)
PL = the axial compression due to applied loads at time of cracking
PB = the axial compression due to the balance loading
A = the section area
Solving for ML results in:
ML = (fcr + (PL + PB)/A)S - MB
RAM Concept 329

Chapter 47
Assuming that PL is zero:
ML = (fcr + PB/A)S - MB
Replacing MB with MP + MH and PB with PP + PH:
ML = (fcr + (PP + PH)/A)S – (MP + MH)
where:
MP = the “primary” post-tensioning bending moment
MH = the hyperstatic post-tensioning bending moment
PP = the “primary” post-tensioning axial compression
PH = the hyperstatic post-tensioning axial compression (typically negative)
Multiplying by 1.2 to get “1.2 times the cracking load”:
1.2 ML = 1.2 (fcr + (PP + PH)/A) S – 1.2 (MP + MH)
To get the design bending moment, we add in the hyperstatic bending moment:
MD = 1.2 ML + MH = 1.2 (fcr + (PP + PH)/A) S – 1.2 (MP + MH) + MH
Simplifying:
MD = 1.2 (fcr +(PP + PH)/A) S – 1.2 MP – 0.2 MH
It is common and usually conservative to assume that PH is zero:
MD = 1.2 (fcr +PP/A) S – 1.2 MP – 0.2 MH
It is common (although not technically correct) to ignore the 0.2 MH, giving the final design moment equation:
MD = 1.2 (fcr + PP/A) S – 1.2 MP
47.1.18 Concrete “Core” Determination

• The “core” of the cross section is used in various calculations.
• Refer to “About shear core” on page 91 of Chapter 21, “Defining Design Strips” for explanation of the core calculation.
• Tendon ducts in this core are investigated.
• Ducts are assumed to have the same heights as their widths and are assumed to be rectangular in shape. For all
standard ducts, these assumptions give a conservative approximation of overlapping.
• Ducts are assumed to be centered on the prestressing steel that they contain (this is not true in the real structure, but
this assumption rarely has any impact on the calculation result).
• Any horizontal line across the core is investigated to determine the maximum total width of duct across the shear
area. Bonded duct widths and unbonded duct widths are multiplied by factors that differ for each code. For example,
in BS 8110, 2/3 of bonded duct widths are considered, and full unbonded duct widths are considered. For ACI, the
factors are zero, so the duct width is never excluded.
• The web width is equal to the core width minus the maximum total width of duct across the shear area.
47.1.19 Torsion Considerations

RAM Concept can consider torsion on a cross section in four different ways, depending upon the properties of the design
strip segment or the design section. The four approaches are:
330 RAM Concept

Chapter 47
The methods considered are:

• Beam
• Considers torsion by designing with code beam torsion equations.
• As Shear
• Assumes torsion is carried entirely by varying shear across the cross-section “core” length L.
• The shear force per unit length is v = 6 T / L2
• The design shear force is Vd = V +/- 6 T / L
• As Bending
• Considers torsion by adding the torsion to the bending moment and designing bending for the combined total Md =
M +/- T.
• Wood-Armer
• Refer to “Wood-Armer Torsion Design” on page 331.
• None
• Torsion is not considered in any way.
47.1.20 Wood-Armer Torsion Design

This new torsion design option allows the designer to use the “Wood-Armer” approach to handle twisting moments in slabs.
To provide this torsion design options, a new cross section analysis quantity, Absolute Twist, is calculated.
You can plot Absolute Twist, as shown in Figure 29-5 of Chapter 29, “Plotting Results”.
When you choose the Wood-Armer torsion design, every set of design forces is converted into two sets of design forces,
identical to the original except with the design moments changed to:
Md = M + AT, and
Md = M - AT
where AT = absolute twist
The Wood-Armer method (as originally developed by Wood and Armer) was intended to be applied at every point in the
slab; Concept’s implementation is an extrapolation of the method for use in cross sections.
The Wood-Armer method is NOT applicable to beams, and is not recommended for strips containing beams.
References
• Wood, R. H., “The Reinforcement of Slabs in Accordance with a Pre-Determined Field of Moments,” Concrete, vol. 2,
pp. 69-76, February 1968.
• Armer, G. S. T., “Discussion,” Concrete, vol. 2, pp. 319-320, August 1968.
RAM Concept 331

Chapter 47
332 RAM Concept

Chapter 48
48 Live Load Reduction Notes
This chapter details RAM Concept’s implementation of live load reduction.
48.1 Live Load Reduction for Loadings, Load Combinations and Rule Sets
RAM Concept individually applies live load reduction to each loading of each column, punching check, design strip
segment and design section. For example, the reduction factor for a column may be different for a Live (Reducible) Loading
than for a Live (Storage) Loading.
48.1.1 Loadings
While RAM Concept calculates the live load reductions per loading (and per member), the reductions do not affect the
loading analysis. The analysis results that Concept displays for loadings are never reduced by live load reduction.
48.1.2 Load Combinations and Rule Sets

When RAM Concept combines loadings into load combinations, it considers the live load reduction of each loading added to
the load combination. The analysis results that Concept displays for load combinations are always reduced by live load
reduction.
Similarly when Concept envelopes load combinations into Rule Sets, it considers live load reduction as all of the load
combinations being enveloped have already been modified by the reduction factors. The analysis results that Concept
displays for rule sets are always reduced by live load reduction.
Note: Remember that Concept only reduces live load on columns, punching checks, design strip segments and design
sections.
Note: See “Viewing live load reduction results” on page 131 for more information.
48.2 Tributary Area Calculations
When a loading on a structure is uniform, it is common to assign to each structural member a “tributary area” that the
member (alone) supports. This assignment is typically performed by a simplistic visual analysis. The assigned area is not
truly supported by only the member to which it is assigned. The effects of the (true) uniform loading on the member are
similar to the effects if the entire load of the tributary area was applied to the member. Most design codes use the tributary
area as the primary parameter in the live load reduction calculations.
RAM Concept calculates tributary areas by applying a unit uniform load to the entire slab and analyzing the flow of the
vertical forces. The tributary areas for the following members are calculated from the unit load as follows:
Columns - the vertical reaction, but not less than zero.
Walls - (not currently reduced).
Punching Checks - the vertical reaction, but not less than zero.
Design Strip Segments - the absolute value of the difference between the vertical shears at both ends. When multiple
segments make up a span, the segments combined tributary areas are used in calculations.
Design Sections - the absolute value of the shear.
With the above calculations, it is possible (but not common) for the sum of the tributary areas of walls and columns to
exceed the total floor area. This happens when one or more of the support reactions are negative.
RAM Concept 333

Chapter 48
48.3 Influence Area Calculations
ASCE-7 and IBC 2003 use an “influence area” instead of a tributary area in their live load reduction calculations. The
influence area is defined as the “floor area over which the influence surface for structural effects is significantly different
from zero”.
Influence areas are not calculated when BS 6399 or AS/NZ 1170.1 are used.
RAM Concept uses heuristic methods to calculate influence areas. These methods tend to define areas that are similar to
those of that engineers would produce visually, but the methods do not calculate areas that are exactly the same as an
engineer might calculate manually. Concept's influence areas can be shown on the plans so you can inspect the areas that
Concept is using in its live load reduction calculations.
Per ASCE-7 and IBC 2003, Concept limits the influence areas to be no larger than the following multiple of the tributary
area:
Tributary Area Multiple
Columns 4
Punching Checks 4
Beam Design Strips 2
Slab Design Strips 1
Figure 48-1 Maximum multiple of influence area to tributary
48.3.1 Example of Influence Areas

Figure 48-2 through Figure 48-6 shows RAM Concept's influence areas and the influence areas commonly used by
engineers for a few slab conditions.
Some engineers might (erroneously) suggest that the tributary area of the column in Figure 48-2 is 600 square feet, but
continuity effects would obviously increase that value. The results show that the tributary area is actually 952 square feet.
Figure 48-2 Slab layout with dimensions in feet from center of column to centerline of walls. An engineer would typically deem the influence area to be 2400
square feet.
334 RAM Concept

Chapter 48
Figure 48-3 Column and punching check influence areas as calculated by RAM Concept
Figure 48-4 Design strip segments
RAM Concept 335

Chapter 48
Figure 48-5 Design strip segment influence areas as calculated by RAM Concept
Figure 48-6 Column and punching check influence areas for an irregular floor.
48.4 ASCE-7 Live Load Reduction
ASCE-7 live load reduction is specified in code section 4.8. Live load effects on members with influence areas of less than
400 square feet are not modified by live load reduction.
ASCE-7 requires that live loads in excess of 100 psf and live loads from passenger car garages shall not be reduced, except
that members supporting two or more floors may be reduced up to 20% per code sections 4.8.2 and 4.8.3. These two load
types must be drawn on a “Live (storage)” loading to be considered appropriately.
ASCE-7 requires that live loads of 100 psf or less in public assembly occupancies cannot be reduced per section 4.8.4. These
loads must be drawn on a “Live (unreducible)” loading to be considered appropriately
The tributary area of one-way slabs is not limited per section 4.8.5. However, if you limit the design strip width to 1.5 times
the span length, and the behavior is that of a one-way slab, then the requirements of this code section will be met.
Note: ASCE-7 actually defines an “application factor” not a “reduction factor” (reduction factor = 1 - application factor).
336 RAM Concept

Chapter 48
48.5 IBC 2003 Live Load Reduction
IBC 2003 live load reduction is specified in code section 1607.9. Live load effects on members with influence areas of less
than 400 square feet are not modified by live load reduction.
IBC 2003 requires that live loads in excess of 100 psf and live loads from passenger car garages shall not be reduced, except
that members supporting two or more floors may be reduced up to 20% per code sections 1607.9.1.1 and 1607.9.1.2. These
two load types must be drawn on a “Live (storage)” loading to be considered appropriately.
IBC 2003 requires that live loads of 100 psf or less in public assembly occupancies cannot be reduced per section
1607.9.1.3. These loads must be drawn on a “Live (unreducible)” loading to be considered appropriately.
The reduction of live loads for one-way slabs is not permitted per section 1607.9.1.4. RAM Concept will never reduce one-
way slab loads if IBC 2003 is selected.
Note: IBC 2003 actually defines an “application factor” not a “reduction factor” (reduction factor = 1 - application factor).
48.6 UBC 1997 Live Load Reduction
UBC 1997 live load reduction is specified in code section 1607.5. Live load effects on members with tributary areas of 150
square feet or less are not modified by live load reduction.
Equation (7-2) [R = 23.1 (1 + D/L)] is not considered in live load reduction calculations. This value needs to be calculated
and set by the user in the maximum reduction property.
UBC 1997 requires that storage loads in excess of 100 psf shall not be reduced, except that live loads on columns may be
reduced up to 20%. These loads must be drawn on a Live (Storage) loading to be considered appropriately.
UBC 1997 requires that other live loads in excess of 100 psf or in places of public assembly occupancies cannot be reduced.
These loads must be drawn on a Live (Unreducible) loading to be considered appropriately.
UBC 1997 can be used as IBC 2003 alternate live load reduction in accordance with IBC section 1607.9.2. Because
minimum parking loads in UBC 1997 are higher than IBC 2003 minimum parking loads, it may not be appropriate to apply
UBC 1997 parking garage reduction provisions to IBC 2003 loadings. For this reason, parking garage loads should be drawn
on a Live (Storage) loading and thus will get a maximum 20% reduction on columns and no live load reduction on other
members.
48.7 AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Live Load Reduction
AS/NZS 1170.1 live load reduction is specified in code section 3.4.2.
When using AS/NZS 1170.1 to perform live load reduction, only live loadings with the “Live (Reducible)” type are reduced.
Live (Storage) loadings are assumed to have loads greater than 5 kPa and are therefore not reducible per 3.4.2(ii).
Loading effects on one-way slabs are not reduced per 3.4.2(v).
For other member types, the reduction is calculated per the formula in 3.4.2(b).
Note: Section 3.4.2 actually defines an “application factor” not a “reduction factor” (reduction factor = 1 - application
factor).
RAM Concept 337

Chapter 48
48.8 BS 6399-1:1996 Live Load Reduction
BS 6399 live load reduction is specified in code sections 6.1 through 6.3.
Only live loadings with the “Live (Reducible)” type are reduced.
For columns, the Table 2 and Table 3 values from the code are calculated and the greater of the two reductions is used. For
other members, the Table 3 values are used.
For columns, the moment and shear values are reduced by the same reduction factor as the axial force values; this is different
from what is specified in the note in Section 6.2 of BS 6399. This does not affect any design in RAM Concept (or the RAM
Structural System), but it does affect the reported column reaction values.
Live load reduction is not used for one-way and two-ways slabs.
48.9 IS 875 (Part 2) - 1987 Live Load Reduction
IS 875 live load reduction is specified in code section 3.2.
For columns, only live loadings with the “Live (Reducible)” type are reduced. For beams, both “Live (Reducible)” and
“Live (Storage)” loadings are reduced.
For columns, the table in section 3.2.1 is implemented. The 5 kN/m2 provisions in section 3.2.1.1 are not implemented.
For columns, the moment and shear values are reduced by the same reduction factor as the axial force values.
For beams, the reductions in section 3.2.2 are implemented. The limitations of subsections “a” through “d” are not
implemented as all loads on a “Live (Reducible)” or “Live (Storage)” loading layer are assumed to be reducible.
Live load reduction is not used for one-way slabs, two-way slabs and punching checks.
48.10 Mat Foundations
In the design of mat foundations supporting columns (and/or walls) supporting levels above, the live load reductions need to
be applied to the loads instead of the member forces. The loads need to be reduced instead of the member forces for two
reasons: 1) there is a clear understanding of the tributary area for the loads while (in most cases) there is not a clear
understanding of the tributary area for the design strips; and 2) the zero-tension soil reaction iterations need to be performed
with the reduced loads.
For mat foundations, the live load reduction code should always be set to “None”. Otherwise the live loads may be reduced
twice.
Mat foundation loads that are imported from the RAM Structural System will be automatically reduced appropriately (by the
RAM Structural System). User-drawn loads will need to be reduced manually.
48.11 Special Member Considerations
48.11.1 Columns Above the Slab

Columns above the slab will have zero tributary area and zero influence area assigned to them in the automated area
calculations. If you want to have live load reduction applied to columns above the slab you will need to manually specify the
areas to use.
338 RAM Concept

Chapter 48
48.11.2 Columns Above and Below the Slab

When the reactions for columns above and below the slab are reported together, the live load reduction for the column below
the slab is used.
Because of this, the separate reported reactions for the column below and the column above will not necessarily sum to the
reported reaction for the column above and below.
RAM Concept 339

Chapter 48
340 RAM Concept

Chapter 49
49 Reinforcement Notes
This chapter provides information on how RAM Concept contraflexure, assumed to be 20% of a continuous span's
utilizes span detailing, calculates reinforcement length (hence the factor of 5 applied to Lc).
development lengths and lays out and details
reinforcement. Span Detailing is controlled via the span segment dialog.
See Section 21.5 of Chapter 21, “Defining Design Strips”.
49.1 Span detailing
“Span Detailing” is the process of determining the peak

reinforcement requirements in a region (normally support
or mid-span) and then extending the reinforcement based
upon code or user defined rules.
Code based span detailing are rules prescribed by the

applicable building code. The detailed reinforcement for
these spans can be non-symmetrical depending upon
whether or not the span is continuous. The Code span
detailing option uses the applicable code rules for
continuous and end spans (as well as cantilevers), where
applicable. Concept's Code span detailing generally
implements some, but not all, of the specified detailing
rules for a code. Refer to the code span detailing sections
for further information (Sections 49.1.3, 49.1.4, 49.1.5 and
49.1.6 on page 342).
User defined span detailing rules are controlled via the Figure 49-2 Span segment dialog box
following screen accessed via Criteria > Detailing Rules.
49.1.1 About Concept’s detailing calculations

Two sets of design results are calculated in Concept - With
span detailing and Without span detailing.
Without span detailing simply considers the results without

extending any reinforcement for span detailing. This is
termed the raw reinforcement.
With Span Detailing considers the results considering the

Figure 49-1 Span Detailing Parameters (Criteria > Detailing Rules)
detailed reinforcement as a minimum requirement.
A, B, and C represent different sets of reinforcement used Some other modifications to the “span detailed” summary
to detail rebar in the support region. E, F, and G represent diagram are done. The developed requirements are
different sets of reinforcement used to detail rebar in the removed from inside the support regions (there is still the
span region. Each set of reinforcement has an associated requirement that the reinforcement is developed at the face
“fraction” which is the amount of the peak reinforcement of the support). Also, for cantilevers, the span detailed
quantity to assign to that set. The sum of the three fractions requirements are removed from the last cross section to the
should always be between 0 and 1. The R1, R2 values end of the span. Also, in the summary reinforcement, at the
represent factors to be multiplied by the span length to end of each pass an assumed amount of developed
arrive at a set's desired bar lengths. reinforcement is calculated from the AsRaw requirements
and the length available for development, and applied as a
Span detailing in accordance with user rules is always minimum AsDev requirement in each cross section.
symmetrical in a span (but not in a cantilever). The “R1”
value is applied to the cantilever such that the cantilever is
assumed to be that portion of a full span up to the point of
RAM Concept 341

Chapter 49
49.1.2 Span detailing assumptions The pass 0 summarized span detailed design requirements
are used as the starting point for the pass 2 span detailed
The following general assumptions are made when design.
performing span detailing:
• The peak reinforcement in each region is determined by
taking the maximum reinforcement demand in every cross 49.1.3 ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02, and ACI 318-05
section over the following regions: Code Span Detailing Rules
• Support - from support to 0.15L into the span RC Beams and One-Way Slabs Rule 12.12.3 is
• Span - from 0.35L to 0.65L implemented in support regions. For this provision, the
inflection point is assumed to be 30% of the clear span
• For a cantilever, the entire span is considered to be in the from the face of support. ACI 12.11.1 is implemented in
support region, and none of the span is considered to be in span regions.
the span region
RC Two-Way Slabs Figure 13.3.8 (without drop panels)
• For a span with no supports defined, the entire span is
is implemented in support and span regions.
considered to be in the span region, and none of the span
is considered to be in the support region PT Beams, One-Way Slabs, and Two-Way Slabs
• Bar length calculations either consider the span length Rule 18.9.4.2 is implemented in support regions. Rule
to center of support, or the clear span length depending 18.9.4.1 is implemented in span regions.
upon the code rules (see specific code sections for more
details: sections 49.1.3, 49.1.4, 49.1.5 and 49.1.6).
49.1.4 AS 3600 - 2001 Code Span Detailing
• Bar length calculations consider the support width as Rules
necessary (see specific code section for more details)
• At the supports, the lengths of the adjacent span's bar RC and PT Beams Rule 8.1.8.6 (a) and (b) is
sets are considered in order to keep the detailed bars implemented in support and span regions.
centered on the supports as much as possible. If an RC and PT One-Way Slabs Figure 9.1.3.2 is
adjacent span has different fractions than the one being implemented in support and span regions.
detailed, the bar length for this span is determined by
selecting the longer of the following length fractions: RC and PT Two-Way Slabs Figure 9.1.3.4 is
implemented in support and span regions.
• the span length and length fraction corresponding
to this bar set
• the span length and length fraction of any adjacent 49.1.5 BS 8110 - 1997 Code Span Detailing
span bar set whose fraction overlaps this bar set's Rules
fraction
RC Beams and Slabs, PT Beams and One-Way
The span detailing is performed in pass 0 before the main Slabs Figures 3.24 and 3.25 are implemented in support
design steps begin. The following outlines the pass 0 and span regions.
process:
PT Two-Way Slabs TR-43 rule 6.10.6 is implemented in
1 Any user defined reinforcement is removed from the
support and span regions.
cross sections in the span.
2 A normal pass 1 is designed on the span (with the user
defined reinforcement removed). 49.1.6 IS 456 - 2000 Code Span Detailing
3 From the resulting design, the peak reinforcement in each Rules
region (support and span) is detailed according to the user
RC and PT Beams and One-Way Slabs Rule 26.2.3.4
specified or code span detailing rules.
is implemented in support regions. For this provision, the
4 The user defined reinforcement is subtracted from the inflection point is assumed to be 30% of the clear span
step 3 requirements, which results in the final pass 0 “span from the face of support. Rule 26.2.3.3 is implemented in
detailed” requirements. The resulting pass 0 design can be span regions.
approximate if the subtracted user defined reinforcement
does not have the same properties as the program designed RC and PT Two-Way Slabs Figure 16 (without drop
reinforcement at that location. The final designed panel) is implemented in support and span regions.
reinforcement for each cross section, which will be deter-
mined in future passes, will always be accurate.
342 RAM Concept

Chapter 49
49.2 Development lengths / anchorage
Note: The term development length is used in this chapter.

In some countries, the term anchorage is used rather than
development length.
This section presents an overview of the development

length calculations performed in RAM Concept.
Development length calculations in Concept can be treated

as per Code Rules, or development lengths can be specified
by the user for a particular reinforcing bar as a multiple of Figure 49-3 Effective development at any point along a bar. (This does not
apply to AS3600 - see Figure 49-4)
the bar diameter.
The general implementation used for calculating • When laying out program-designed bars, Concept uses
development lengths is: the first option in the following list that fits in the slab:
• The clear spacing of the bars will be detailed to be • Straight bar end with full development length and
greater than twice the minimum cover. This is the respon- full extension length.
sibility of the user, and is not checked by Concept.
• Straight bar end with full development length and
• Each Code has a desired extension length beyond the partial (or no) extension length.
theoretical cutoff point of the reinforcement.
• 90 degree hook bar end with 90 degree hook
• The desired extension length for ACI 318, BS 8110, and development length
IS 456 is the maximum of d (effective depth) or 12 times
• 180 degree hook bar end with 180 degree hook
the diameter of the bar. This is required primarily because
development length
diagonal tension cracks in a flexural member without
transverse shear reinforcement may shift the location of • Anchored bar end with no development length
the calculated tensile stress in a bar approximately d • If the end of a bar is closer to a slab edge than the
(effective depth) towards a point of zero moment. Refer to specified end cover, the bar will automatically be labeled
ACI 318 12.10.3, BS 8110 3.12.9.1, and IS 456 26.2.3.1. “anchored” in Concept and considered to be fully
• For AS 3600, the desired extension length, D, is used to developed.
satisfy provision 8.1.8.1 requiring use of a shifted moment • Development lengths of bars in compression are not
diagram for design. While this implementation is not in considered. Tension development lengths are used in all
strict compliance with the Code provisions near the ends locations where development of reinforcement is
of a member, it meets the design intent away from the required, regardless of the actual stresses on the
ends. reinforcing bar.
• For a user defined bar, the effective development for any
point along the bar is calculated in accordance with the
following diagram. This approach is not used for AS 3600 49.2.1 ACI 318-99, 318-02, 318-05
- see section 49.2.2 on page page 344 for more details. development lengths
• The end of any user defined bar that is close to a Basic straight tension development length is calculated
slab edge such that it could not be extended will use using equation 12-1. The following factors are used in this
a desired extension length of zero. equation:
• For any length less than the additional extension
length, the effective development is zero. α = reinforcement location factor
• For any length greater than or equal to the desired • “concrete below” is taken as the depth from the rebar
additional extension length, but less than the full center to the bottom of the concrete section
development length, the effective percentage devel- • 1.3 for concrete below > 12 inches
opment is (provided length)/(full development
length) x 100%. This is accomplished by consid- • 1.0 for concrete below < 12 inches
ering a fraction of each bar developed.
β = coating factor
• For any length greater than the full development
length, the effective development is 100%. • 1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of bar)
less than 3db (spacing is not calculated)
• 1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars
RAM Concept 343

Chapter 49
• 1.0 for uncoated bars tions, the desired extension length is D, the overall
depth of the member
Note: the product αβ is never taken as greater than 1.7.
• For any length less than the desired extension
γ = reinforcement size factor length D, the effective development is zero.
• 0.8 for #6 and smaller bars • For any length greater than or equal to the
additional extension length, but less than the full
• 1.0 for #7 and larger bars development length, the effective percentage devel-
opment is (provided length - desired extension
λ = lightweight aggregate concrete factor
length) / (full development length) x 100%. This is
• 1.3 for concrete density < 120 pcf accomplished by considering a fraction of each bar
developed.
• 1.0 for concrete density > 120 pcf
• For a program designed bar, when the bar is
c = cover dimension, vertical distance from the center of detailed the bar will be extended the full devel-
the bar to the nearest concrete surface (spacing is not opment length plus the desired extension length. If a
considered) bar is unable to be extended this full desired length,
Concept will attempt to extend the bar just the
The term (c + Ktr)/db is never taken greater than 2.5
straight development length, then the 90 degree
Ktr = conservatively assumed to be zero hook development length, and the 180 degree hook
development length. If there is not enough extension
For development of standard hooks, basic tension space to satisfy any of these conditions, an “anchor”
development length is calculated in accordance with the will be placed at the end of the bar and it will be
following equation: considered fully developed from that point.
1200d b
------------------
fc
The following factors are used to modify this basic length:

• Bar yield strength factor = fy / 60 where fy is in ksi
(12.5.3.1)
Figure 49-4 Effective development at any point along a bar for the undis-
• Lightweight aggregate concrete factor:(12.5.3.5) placed moment diagram (for AS3600 ONLY)
• 1.3 for concrete density < 120 pcf

Basic straight tension development length is calculated
• 1.0 for concrete density > 120 pcf
using equation 13.1.2.1(a). The following factors are used
• Epoxy-coated reinforcement factor = 1.2(12.5.3.6) in this equation:
• The following factors / provisions are not used: k1 = reinforcement location factor
• Concrete cover (12.5.3.2) and Ties or stirrups
• “concrete below” is taken as the depth from the
(12.5.3.3)
bar center to the bottom of the concrete section
In accordance with ACI 318 12.10.3, the extension length • 1.25 for concrete below > 300 mm
used for this Code is the maximum of 12 db or the effective
• 1.0 for concrete below < 300 mm
depth of the member, taken as the maximum vertical
distance from the center of the reinforcing bar to the • k2 = 2.4 (conservatively)
farthest concrete surface.
• fsy = yield stress of bar
• Ab = cross sectional area of reinforcing bar
49.2.2 AS 3600 2001 Development Lengths
• 2a + db = twice the vertical distance from the
• For a user defined bar, the effective development for any nearest concrete surface to the center of the bar
point along the bar is calculated in accordance with Figure
49-4. In addition, the following factors (from ACI 318) are
• The end of any user defined bar that is close to a applied:
slab edge such that it could not be extended will use • coating factor
a desired extension length of zero. For other situa-
344 RAM Concept

Chapter 49
• 1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of • coating factor
bar) less than 3db (spacing is not calculated) • 1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of
• 1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars bar) less than 3db (spacing is not calculated)
• 1.0 for uncoated bars • 1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars
• lightweight aggregate concrete factor: • 1.0 for uncoated bars
• 1.3 for concrete density < 1900 kg/m3 • lightweight aggregate concrete factor:
• 1.0 for concrete density > 1900 kg/m3 • 1.3 for concrete density < 1900 kg/m3
For development of standard hooks, basic tension • 1.0 for concrete density > 1900 kg/m3
development length is calculated as half the straight tension For development of hooks, the internal bend radius is
development length in accordance with Clause 13.1.2.4. assumed to be 2db for bar diameters less than or equal to
In accordance with 8.1.8.1, the extension length used for 18mm and 3.5db for bar diameters greater than 18mm.
this Code is the overall depth of the section. This extension
For 90 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is
is applied in addition to the required development length.
4 times the internal bend radius but not to exceed 12db in
Concept applies the extension length to satisfy the Code
provision requiring the displacement of the bending accordance with 3.12.8.23 (b)
moment envelopes by a distance D. There are some For 180 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook
noteworthy differences between Concept's approach and is 8 times the internal bend radius but not to exceed 24db in
the Code provision:
accordance with 3.12.8.23 (a)
• In most circumstances, extending the bar by a distance
D beyond the required development length will satisfy the In accordance with 3.12.9.1, the extension length used for
intent of the Code. this Code is the maximum of 12 db or the effective depth of
the member, taken as the maximum vertical distance from
• Near the ends of members, where the displaced moment
the center of the reinforcing bar to the farthest concrete
diagram would cause an increased design moment,
surface.
Concept will design for the unmodified moment diagram,
but will still ensure proper development is satisfied.
49.2.4 IS 456-2000 Development Lengths
49.2.3 BS 8110-1997 Development Lengths Basic straight tension development length is calculated
using clause 26.2.1:
Basic straight tension development length is calculated
using combined equations 48 and 49. fy ⋅ φ
l d = ---------------
fy ⋅ db 4 ⋅ τ bd
The resulting equation is: l d = -------------------------------------
γ m ⋅ 4 ⋅ β ⋅ f cu where:
where: fy = yield stress of the bar
fy = yield stress of the bar φ = diameter of the bar

db = diameter of the bar τ bd = design bond stress given in Table 26.2.1.1
γ m = material strength reduction factor For high strength deformed bars, the bond stress can be
increased by 60 percent. This increase is assumed for any
β = 0.5 (assumed Type 2 bars with minimum links in bar with fy > 250 N/mm2.
beams)
In addition, the following factors (from ACI 318) are
Note: If any bars other than Type 2 deformed bar are used applied:
or if minimum links in accordance with Table 3.7 are not
provided, the development lengths will need to be specified • coating factor
manually. Table 3.27 can assist with this. • 1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of
In addition, the following factors (from ACI 318) are bar) less than 3db (spacing is not calculated)
applied: • 1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars
RAM Concept 345

Chapter 49
• 1.0 for uncoated bars For each requirement group, Concept then finds
requirements in a region that may be able to be satisfied by
• lightweight aggregate concrete factor:
the same reinforcement callout.
• 1.3 for concrete density < 1900 kg/m3
Step 3 Create preliminary callouts for each region
• 1.0 for concrete density > 1900 kg/m3
For each region's requirements, Concept creates an optimal
For development of hooks, the internal bend radius is set of reinforcement callouts considering the cost factors
assumed to be 2db for bars with yield stress less than or specified in the Calc Options dialog. These preliminary
equal to 250 N/mm2 and 4db for bars with yield stress callouts do not consider development lengths.
greater than 250 N/mm2. Step 4 Consider development lengths
For 90 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is For each preliminary callout, Concept investigates all of
8 times the diameter of the bar in accordance with 26.2.2.1 the related cross sections and determines (considering the
(1). area of developed reinforcement and the total area of
reinforcement required at each cross section) the necessary
For 180 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook extension of the bar beyond the related cross sections.
is 16 times the diameter of the bar in accordance with
26.2.2.1 (2). If the required bar extension cannot be provided (due to a
slab edge or bar end cover requirements), reduced
In accordance with 3.12.9.1, the extension length used for extensions using 90-degree or 180-degree hooks are
this Code is the maximum of 12 db or the effective depth of investigated. If the hooks will not provide the adequate
the member, taken as the maximum vertical distance from development, “anchors” will be placed at the end of the bar.
the center of the reinforcing bar to the farthest concrete
surface. Note: Any bar that is required to extend to within the end
cover distance of a slab edge will be given an “anchor” end
condition.
Step 5 Convert to concentrated program reinforcement

49.3 How RAM Concept lays out program
reinforcement As a final step, Concept converts the bar callouts (including
development lengths and bar end conditions) into
concentrated program reinforcement.
Note: This section describes Concept's layout of longitu-
dinal program reinforcement. Neither transverse See also “Reinforcement layout and detailing parameters”
reinforcement nor SSR are considered here. on page 127 of Chapter 27, “Calculating Results”.
Concept considers all of the spans' and all of the design
sections' designs when laying out program reinforcement.
Concept's layout algorithm uses 5 steps as follows: 49.4 How Concept details user and
Step 1 Divide reinforcement requirements into groups. program reinforcement
Concept divides all the span and section reinforcement
requirements into similar groups by considering the Concept generates individual bars from concentrated and
following characteristics: distributed user reinforcement. This facilitates the
consideration of the individual bars in its cross section and
• Span Direction - latitude or longitude span design calculations.
• Slab Face - top or bottom
Also, the generation of individual bars allows Concept to
• Reinforcement Elevation - the absolute elevation of the display program or user reinforcement in perspective
reinforcement drawings.
• Reinforcement Orientation - the plan view orientation of The bars are still tagged as “user” since they are generated
the reinforcement (always perpendicular to the cross directly from user reinforcement.
sections)
Concept also generates individual bars from its
Requirements with all similar characteristics are grouped concentrated design reinforcement. These program
together for further processing. individual bars are for display purposes only and are not
Step 2 Find regions of overlapping and nearby used in calculations.
requirement
346 RAM Concept

Chapter 49
The concentrated and distributed reinforcement is detailed “user” bars and those generated by “program”
into individual bars in 5 steps as follows: reinforcement to be “program” bars.
Step 1 Create a preliminary layout of bars Note: The detailing of user reinforcement takes place
before the design calculations and the detailing of program
Using the shape of the reinforcement region (rectangle or reinforcement takes place after the design calculations.
parallelogram for concentrated, and polygon for
distributed), the reinforcement orientation and the
spacing/quantity of bars, Concept determines a preliminary
layout of parallel bar locations.
For Concentrated bars, the first and last bars from the edge
are always inset by a half bar spacing distance.
Step 2 Determine the elevation of the bars
Each concentrated or distributed reinforcement callout has

an elevation reference point. For Concentrated
reinforcement, the elevation reference point is the location
where the (symbolic) bar and the extent arrow intersect.
For distributed reinforcement, the elevation reference point Figure 49-5 Stepped one-way slab with two reinforcement objects identi-
is shown as a circle in the center of the (symbolic) bar. cal except for the respective location of the elevation reference point.
The elevation of the surface and soffit of the slab are

determined at the elevation reference point and this
information along with the reinforcement elevation
reference (absolute, above surface, above soffit, top cover
or bottom cover) and elevation values determines the
absolute elevation of the bars that the callout creates. See
Figures 49-5 and 49-6.
Step 3 Determine the slab shape at the bar elevation
For each bar elevation, Concept determines the shape of the

slab. This shape may be one contiguous shape or it may be
comprised of multiple separate shapes.
Step 4 Trim the preliminary layout of bars with the

elevation slab shape
The preliminary layout of bars is trimmed by the slab shape

determined in step 3. Additionally, the required end cover
(as defined in the Calc Options window) may shorten a bar
further. This trimming may convert a single bar into
multiple bars, or may eliminate a bar altogether.
Note that bars with “anchor” ends do not consider the

required end cover. They are only trimmed by the slab Figure 49-6 Reinforcement bars detailed by Concept from Figure 49-5
shape at the bar elevation.
Step 5 Convert the trimmed bar locations to individual

bars
49.5 How Concept treats transverse
Lastly, Concept converts the trimmed preliminary layout of reinforcement and individual transverse
bars into individual bars. This conversion sets the bars
individual bars generated from “user” reinforcement to be
Concept generates transverse reinforcement and individual

transverse bars from the results of its shear and torsion
calculations. This generated reinforcement is for display
purposes only - it is not used in calculations and cannot be
changed to “user” reinforcement.
RAM Concept 347

Chapter 49
At locations of complicated geometry (such as multiple Note that with code detailing:
beams in a single span design, or curved beams), Concept
• the top bars are longer
may not be able to create an appropriate representation of
the reinforcement required by the design calculations. The • some bottom bars are continuous
correct design quantities can always be viewed in the
Section Design plots of the Design Status layer.
Note: The “no detailing” example is very similar to results
obtained with version 2.1.
Note: Reinforcement required for torsion should always
have 2 legs selected in the design spans. Otherwise
Concept's design will show a correct overall quantity of
Reinforcement layer
reinforcement, but will not show a correct selection of
closed and open ties. The following figure shows the effect of code detailing on
the reinforcement on the reinforcement layer.
Note: Transverse reinforcement required by design
sections is NOT shown on the Reinforcement layer. This is
another reason why design spans are preferable to design
sections.
49.6 Example 1: reinforcement results
The introduction of the reinforcement layer and

reinforcement detailing makes Concept much more
powerful and complicated.
Figure 49-8 Reinforcement: Standard Plan
The following example shows the effect, for a two span
slab supported by walls, of:
Note that:
• using the span detailer set to code in design strips, and
• these program bars are rationalized such that the number
• different plot options of top bars is consistent either side of a support
• using Reinforcement Layout and Detailing Parameters • these program bars could be changed to User bars
in Calc options
• individual bars can be shown via the visible objects
• two different rule sets: strength and code minimum
• Concept details the top bars at the right hand support
with a 90 degree bend
49.6.1 Strength (only) calculations
This section shows results where only the strength rule set
Effect of Reinforcement Layout and Detailing Parameters
is considered.
The Reinforcement Layout and Detailing Parameters affect
Design Status layer the reinforcement bar layout, Figure 49-9 exhibits different
The following figure shows the effect of code detailing on reinforcement results from Figure 49-8 when changes are
the reinforcement for the design status layer. made to one parameter (in this case, the Bar Length Cost
parameter is 3 rather than 1). See “Reinforcement layout
and detailing parameters” on page 127 of Chapter 27,
“Calculating Results”.
Figure 49-7 Design Status: Reinforcement Plan
348 RAM Concept

Chapter 49
Note that the design strips' span detailer setting of code

produces more reinforcement.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom (Developed) with span

detailing:
This plot is exactly the same as “Bottom without span

detailing” (that is, the Raw reinforcement) because this
example uses just the Strength Rule Set and all such
reinforcement must be developed.
Figure 49-9 Reinforcement: Standard Plan with the Bar Length Cost pa-
rameter set to 3.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom without span detailing:
For this plot, the design strips' span detailer setting of code
has no effect.
Figure 49-12 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom (Developed) WITH

Span Detailing
49.6.2 Code Minimum and Strength

calculations
This section shows results where both the Code Minimum
and Strength rule sets are considered.
Reinforcement layer
Figure 49-10 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [without span detailing]
The following figure shows the reinforcement for
Note: See Section 29.6 of Chapter 29, “Plotting Results” minimum and strength.
for more information about reinforcement plotting.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom with span detailing:
The span detailing plot uses “skyline” plotting.
Figure 49-13 Reinforcement: Standard Plan
Note that the minimum designer has increased the bottom

bars in the left hand span for the no detailing case. See
Figure 49-8.
Figure 49-11 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [with span detailing]
RAM Concept 349

Chapter 49
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom without span detailing: Design Status layer with plot: Bottom (Developed) without span
detailing:
For this plot, the design strips' span detailer setting of code
has no effect. This plot is different from “Bottom without span detailing”
(that is, the Raw reinforcement) because the Minimum
reinforcement is not required to be developed.
Figure 49-14 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [WITHOUT span de-
tailing]
Figure 49-16 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom (Developed) WITHOUT
span detailing
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom with span detailing:
The span detailing plot uses “skyline” plotting. Design Status layer with plot: Bottom (Developed) with span
detailing:
This plot is different from “Bottom with span detailing”

(that is, the Raw reinforcement) because the Minimum
reinforcement at the end supports is not developed, and so
the plotted value is zero.
Additionally, portions of the raw reinforcement are now

assumed to be developed because the span detailing
process for the design status layer considers that
continuous bars, whether they are required to be developed
or not, become at least partially developed.
Figure 49-15 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [WITH span detailing]
Note that the design strips' span detailer setting of code

produces more reinforcement.
Figure 49-17 Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom (Developed) WITH

span detailing
350 RAM Concept

Chapter 50
50 ACI 318-99 Design
This chapter details RAM Concept’s implementation of ACI 318-99.
The six sections outline the following:

• Default loadings
• Default load combinations
• Live load factors
• Material behaviors
• How code rules are selected for cross section design
• Implementation of code rules
50.1 ACI 318-99 default loadings
This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new ACI 318-99
file. As the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly noteworthy are
discussed here.
50.1.1 Temporary Construction (At Stressing) Loading

This loading type describes a temporary loading that is present during construction when the contractor stresses the tendons.
As it is a temporary load, it is generally only included in the Initial Service Load Combination.
If a permanent load is present at stressing, you should define the load on the Temporary Construction (At Stressing) loading
layer as well as the appropriate permanent loading layer. Alternatively, you can include a permanent loading present at
stressing with appropriate use of load factors.
50.2 ACI 318-99 default load combinations
This section provides information on the default load combinations (technically, loading combinations) that RAM Concept
creates when you start a new ACI 318-99 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can remove
or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from ACI 318-
99, unless noted otherwise.
RAM Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations.
Note: Some load combinations in mat (raft) files are of the Lateral Group type and use a “Zero-Tension” analysis. Since a
load combination using a “Zero-Tension” analysis does NOT use Alternate Envelope Factors, then such load combinations
in mat files have been expanded into multiple load combinations. See Chapter 11, “Specifying Load Combinations” for
further description.
50.2.1 All Dead LC

This load combination sums all of the dead loadings, with a load factor of 1.0, that act simultaneously in the standard service
condition. This load combination is for information only - it is not used by RAM Concept for design purposes.
RAM Concept 351

Chapter 50
50.2.2 Initial Service LC

This load combination is intended for checking requirements upon application of prestress. The load factors used are:
Balance Loading: 1.13 (std & alt) (this includes a 13% increase for long-term losses, which have normally not occurred at
this stage)
Note: Although elastic shortening produces a short-term loss, in RAM Concept elastic shortening losses are considered part
of the long term loss lump sum.
Self-Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 1.0 (std & alt)
50.2.3 Service LC: D + (1.0 | 0.0) L

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000
section 1605.3.1. The load factors used are:
Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
50.2.4 Sustained Service LC

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state. For the purpose of this load combination, 100%
of the Live (Storage) Loading and 50% of all other live loading is assumed to be permanent loading. The load factors used
are:
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
50.2.5 DL + 0.25LL LC
This load combination is intended for checking the requirements of UBC section 1918.9.2.2. This load combination is used
by the DL + 0.25LL Design Rule Set. The load factors used are:
50.2.6 Factored LC: 1.4D + 1.7L

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state. The load factors used are:
Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Dead Loading: 1.4 (std) and 0.9 (alt)
Live Loading: 1.7 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
352 RAM Concept

Chapter 50
50.2.7 LT Uncracked Deflection LC

This load combination is intended for investigation of long term deflections with no consideration of cracking. The load
factors are:
Balance Loading: 3.35 (std & alt) [1.0 initial + 2.35 creep]
Live (Reducible) Loading: 2.18 (std & alt) [0.5(3.35) + 0.5(1.0)]
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 2.18 (std & alt) [0.5(3.35) + 0.5(1.0)]
Live (Roof) Loading: 2.18 (std & alt) [0.5(3.35) + 0.5(1.0)]
50.2.8 Service Wind LC: D + L + W (Service Wind Loading)

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind and live loads. It is currently
only generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load factors used
are:
Live Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
50.2.9 Service Wind LC: 0.6D + W (Service Wind Loading)

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind loads. It is currently only
generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load factors used are:
50.2.10 Service Seismic LC: D + L + 0.7E (Ultimate Seismic Loading)

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic and live loads. It is
currently only generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load
factors used are:
Ultimate Seismic Loading: 0.7 (std & alt)
50.2.11 Service Seismic LC: 0.6D + 0.7E (Ultimate Seismic Loading)

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic loads. It is currently only
generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load factors used are:
RAM Concept 353

Chapter 50
50.2.12 Factored Wind LC: 1.05D + 1.28L + 1.6W (Service Wind Loading)
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind and live loads. The load factors
used are:
Dead Loading: 1.05 (std & alt) [0.75(1.4)]
Live Loading: 1.28 (std & alt) [0.75(1.7)]
50.2.13 Factored Wind LC: 0.9D + 1.6W (Service Wind Loading)

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind loads. The load factors used are:
Note: Since directionality factors were introduced in ASCE 7-98, the wind portion of the “Factored Wind LC: 1.05D + 1.28L
+ 1.6W (Service Wind Loading)” and “Factored Wind LC: 0.9D + 1.6W (Service Wind Loading)” load combinations have
been increased to 1.6 to account for this effect. The need for this change is described in detail in ACI-02 9.2.1(b) and
commentary. If directionality factors are not applied to the wind loads, the wind factors may be reduced in accordance with
the original ACI 318-99 combinations.
50.2.14 Factored Seismic LC: 1.2D + f1L + E (Ultimate Seismic Loading)

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic and live loads. This load
combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.2.1. The load factors used are:
50.2.15 Factored Seismic LC: 0.9D + E (Ultimate Seismic Loading)

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic loads. This load combination is
taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.2.1. The load factors used are:
354 RAM Concept

Chapter 50
50.3 ACI318-99 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors
It is recommended that, in order to get the appropriate factors, you draw:

• parking garage loads on a Live (Storage) layer
• assembly loads (or live loads in excess of 100 psf) on a Live (Unreducible) layer
Note: If you draw parking loads on a Live (Storage) layer, however, RAM Concept applies a (conservative) load factor of
1.0 in the Sustained Service LC, and a (conservative) load factor of 3.35 in the LT Uncracked Deflection LC.
50.4 ACI 318-99 material behaviors
This section explains how RAM Concept models the concrete, non-prestressed reinforcement and prestressed reinforcement
when using ACI 318-99.
50.4.1 Concrete Behavior

You define the concrete elastic modulus in the materials window. You can choose to use code equation 8.5.1 with or without
the inclusion of Wc, an equation from another code, or a specified value.
When you directly specify values, there must be two elastic modulus values:
Eci = value for initial service (transfer) cross section analyses
Ec = value for all other conditions
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (w/ Wc) is selected the following values are used:
1.5
E ci = w c 33 f ci
1.5
Ec = wc 33 f c
When the ACI code equation 8.5.1 (no Wc) is selected the following values are used:
E ci = 57000 f ci
E c = 57000 f c
Where
fci = cylinder strength at stressing
fc = 28 day cylinder strength
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress or
strain limits.
RAM Concept 355

Chapter 50
For detailed cross section analyses the stress strain curves are described in “Concrete Stress-Strain Curves” on page 324 of
Chapter 47, “Section Design Notes”.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit strain.
50.4.2 (Non-prestressed) Reinforcement Behavior

This material is described in “Non-prestressed Reinforcement Stress-Strain Curves” on page 321 of Chapter 47, “Section
Design Notes”.
50.4.3 Bonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior

This material is described in “Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves” on page 321, and “Relationship of Bonded
Post-tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains” on page 322, of Chapter 47, “Section Design Notes”.
50.4.4 Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior

For service conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendon stresses are not affected by cross section strains.
For DL + 0.25LL strength conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendons have no stress.
For ultimate resistance moment calculations, RAM Concept’s general approach to unbonded tendon stress-strain curves is
detailed in “Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves – Program Implementation” on page 323 of Chapter 47,
“Section Design Notes”.
For ACI 318-99, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, flimit, is defined by equations 18-4 and 18-5. In the calculation of ρp,
RAM Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting
stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
50.5 ACI 318-99 code rule selection
The following explains how RAM Concept decides which ACI 318-99 code rules to apply based on the design strip segment
or design section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.
50.5.1 Minimum Reinforcement

• The structural system (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (beam, one-way slab, two-
way slab).
• The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
• The placement of the reinforcement is based on the “min. reinforcement location” selection for the design strip segment
or design section:
• Elevated Slab – Reinforcement is at top near supports and bottom near midspan.
• Mat Foundation – Reinforcement is at bottom near supports and top near midspan.
• Tension Face – Reinforcement location is determined by the design moment envelope for the rule set
(reinforcement may be required on both faces).
• Top – Reinforcement is always located at the top of slab (Engineer discretion advised)
• Bottom – Reinforcement is always located at the bottom of slab (Engineer discretion advised)
• None – No reinforcement is provided (Engineer discretion advised)
• Section 18.9.3.2 is not applied (here), as that is a service reinforcement requirement, not a minimum reinforcement
requirement (see “Service” on page 357).
356 RAM Concept

Chapter 50
• Section 18.8.3 is not applied to two-way slabs with bonded post-tensioning, even though the code technically requires it.
• Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.1 18.8.3, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.3, 18.9.2
Two-Way Slab 7.12 18.9.3.3 (at supports only)

Table 50-1 Minimum reinforcement rule mapping
50.5.2 Initial Service

• Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load factors).
• The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement may be required
on both faces).
• Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
One-Way Slab (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b

Table 50-2 Initial service rule mapping
50.5.3 Service
on both faces).
• Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.6.4 18.4.2b, 18.4.2c
One-Way Slab 10.6.4 18.4.2b, 18.4.2c
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.4.2b, 18.4.2c, 18.9.3.2

Table 50-3 Service rule mapping
50.5.4 Sustained Service

• The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur on both
faces).
RAM Concept 357

Chapter 50
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.2a
One-Way Slab (none) 18.4.2a
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.4.2a

Table 50-4 Sustained service rule mapping
50.5.5 Strength
• Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
faces).
• See “Torsion Considerations” on page 330 for how torsion is implemented.
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
One-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
Two-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7

Table 50-5 Strength rule mapping
Note: * - 11.6 is applied only if “beam” torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
50.5.6 Ductility
• The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before ductility
reinforcement is added.
• The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility could be
required for both positive and negative moments).
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.3.3 18.8.1
One-Way Slab 10.3.3 18.8.1
Two-Way Slab 10.3.3 18.8.1

Table 50-6 Ductility rule mapping
50.5.7 UBC DL + 0.25 LL

• UBC section 1918.9.2.2 is implemented.
358 RAM Concept

Chapter 50
faces).
• Unbonded tendons are assumed to have no stress.
• A strength reduction factor (φ) of 1.0 is used in the ACI calculations.
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 11.4, 18.7 (φ=1)
One-Way Slab (none) 11.4, 18.7 (φ=1)
Two-Way Slab (none) (none)

Table 50-7 UBC DL + 0.25LL rule mapping
50.6 ACI 318-99 code implementation
50.6.1 Section 7.12 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement

• 7.12.2.1 and 7.12.2.2 are implemented
• The gross area of concrete after taking into account the “ignore top depth” and the “ignore bottom depth” is used to
determine the reinforcement specified in 7.12.2.1.
• For members that contain rebar with different yield stresses, the ratios of 7.12.2.1(a) or 7.12.2.1(c) will be satisfied for
whichever provides the least amount of reinforcement. In the calculation of 7.12.2.1(c) only reinforcement with fy = 60,000
psi will be used in the calculation.
• Ratio is limited to a lower bound of 0.0014 in accordance with 7.12.2.1
• The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for satisfying the maximum spacing in 7.12.2.2.
The number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded up to the next whole
number in the reinforcement summary. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements.
Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the
total number of provided bars for spacing calculations.
• For the “elevated slab” and “mat foundation” minimum reinforcement patterns, an inflection point ratio of 0.2113 is
assumed.
• Post-tensioning is ignored.
50.6.2 Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed)

• Reinforcement areas are not deducted from the concrete area.
• Strain compatibility design is used
• RAM Concept’s design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an over-
reinforced section. See “Ductility” on page 358 for more information on applying ductility requirements.
• Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored
• Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section of design
strip segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the
required moment simultaneously with the given axial force.
RAM Concept 359

Chapter 50
• At “T”, “L” and “Z” beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at different
elevations) that are required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam, these forces will largely
cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a cross section extends only part way across a flanged beam,
then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads
(by selecting the appropriate design section or design strip segment properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
• User Es values are used
• For sections with multiple values of f’c, the f’c of each concrete block is used appropriately.
• For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the
amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which
would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM Concept selects is that necessary for
axial force equilibrium in the cross section.
50.6.3 Section 10.3.3 Ductility (Non prestressed)

• The strain distribution used in section 10.2 calculations is used (see “Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non
prestressed)” on page 359 for details).
• The neutral axis depth is limited to:
(0.75) * (0.003 /(0.003 + εy)) * d
where
εy = maximum reinforcement yield strain of all reinforcement in the cross section in tension
d = depth of tensile reinforcement centroid (excluding PT)

• Due to very large bar covers or other unusual conditions, the “compression” bar will be considered when determining “d”
if the “compression” bar is in tension.
• For details on how the neutral axis depth limit is related to the code criterion, see “Unified Design Recommendations for
Reinforced....” by Antoine Naaman in ACI Structural Journal, pp 200-210, Vol 89, no.2, April-March 1992
50.6.4 Section 10.5.1 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non Prestressed)

• Equation 10-3 and the 200 bwd/fy criteria are implemented
• Equation 10-3 is calculated using the maximum fc’, minimum fy, and maximum d (of all bars on the appropriate face).
• bw is taken the core width (see “Concrete “Core” Determination” on page 330). If the core width is zero (there is no core),
then bw is taken as the width of the section.
• The bending strength of the section is designed to be at least 1.2 Mcr. This will only control in odd circumstances such as
where the specified cover is extremely large.
• Post-tensioning is ignored.

• Equation 10-5 and the 12(36/fs) criteria are implemented
• A cracked section analysis is performed to calculate the stress in the reinforcement.
• Iteration is used to find the minimum number of bars that meets the criteria. A non-integral number of bars may be used.
• The section width used to determine the spacing is the width of the solid areas of the extreme tension face. For beams with
stems in tension, this will typically be the sum of the stem widths.
• The spacing is considered as the width divided by the number of bars. An additional bar is not added to make the width
start and end with a bar.
• Post-tensioning is ignored (except as it naturally affects the cracked section calculations).
360 RAM Concept

Chapter 50
• RAM Concept may use more reinforcement than “necessary” in two circumstances:
• The reinforcement is necessary for equilibrium in the cracked section analysis.
• Compression reinforcement added later in the design process lowers the reinforcement demands.
50.6.6 Section 11.3 Shear Resistance of Beams (Non Prestressed)

• See “Concrete “Core” Determination” on page 330.
• For sections with multiple values of f’c, the minimum f’c is used
• Equations 11-5, 11-13, 11-15 are implemented.
• Section 11.1.2 is implemented (but optional 11.1.2.1 is not).
• Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented.
• Lightweight concrete is not considered.
• A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if the member is a slab, then this requirement is
waived per 11.5.5.1a.
• Axial Compression (or Tension) is not considered
• If “beam” torsion design is selected, see “Section 11.6 Beam Torsion” on page 361 for further requirements.
50.6.7 Section 11.4 Shear Resistance of Beams (Prestressed)

• See “Concrete “Core” Determination” on page 330.
• For sections with multiple values of f’c, the minimum f’c is used
• If stirrups are provided, the depth of the section is considered to be the larger of 0.8 h or the actual tension reinforcing
depth; otherwise the depth is considered to be the tension reinforcement depth.
• Lightweight concrete is not considered.
• Equation 11-9 is used if the 40% criterion of section 11.4.1 is met; otherwise equation 11-5 is used. When equation 11-5
is used, both the tension mild steel and the PT in the tension zone is used to determine ρw.
• Equations 11-13 and 11-15 are implemented.
• Section 11.1.2 is implemented (but optional 11.1.2.1 is not).
• Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.1, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented.
• A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if the member is a slab, then this requirement is
• Axial Compression (or Tension) is not considered
• If “beam” torsion design is selected, see “Section 11.6 Beam Torsion” on page 361 for further requirements.
• No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
50.6.8 Section 11.6 Beam Torsion

• Only the “core” of a cross section is used for torsion design.
• If the core consists of multiple ribs, then the torsion calculations are performed for an average rib:
• rib width = total core width / num ribs
• with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs) and capacity and reinforcement scaled back up
by the number of ribs (* num ribs).
• To get a more detailed and exact calculation, use a separate design section or design strip for each rib.
• The side cover is assumed to be equal to the lesser of the top cover and the bottom cover.
• Acp and pcp only consider the cross section “core”.
RAM Concept 361

Chapter 50
• Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85 Aoh per 11.6.3.6.

• θ in equations 11-21 and 11-22 is always taken as 45°.
• The balance loading axial force and the entire cross section area are used to determine fcp.
• The minimum f’c of the cross section is used in the unusual situation where a cross section contains multiple concrete
mixes.
• Torsion reinforcement is limited to 60 ksi per 11.6.3.4.
• Longitudinal Reinforcement:
• By rearranging code equations 11-21 and 11-22, the longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows:
A 1 f y1 = T n ( p h ⁄ 2A 0 ) cot θ
• By rearranging code equation 11-24, the minimum longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows:
A 1 f y1 = 5 ⋅ f′c ⋅ A cp – ( 25psi ) ⋅ p h ⋅ b w
• Longitudinal Reinforcement is designed in Pass 1.

• Longitudinal Reinforcement is added to the bending reinforcement and reported as being due to both designs:
• Transverse Reinforcement:
• Transverse reinforcement is designed in Pass 2.
• Stirrups/links are assumed to be closed hoops. RAM Concept will report the reinforcement in terms of the number
of legs specified (by the user), but the calculations assume a hoop shape. The link detailing reported by RAM
Concept will be difficult to decipher if the number of legs specified by the user is not 2.
• Section 11.6.3.1 (equation 11-18) is implemented such that shear capacity is reduced by torsion. For very high
torsions, this can make shear capacity negative.
• The spacing of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.6.1.
• The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.3.6
• Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.5.1 and 11.6.5.2
• Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when determining
effective depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.
50.6.9 Chapter 13 (Two-way slab systems)

• With the exception of span detailing, this chapter is not used for reinforcement design calculations, specifically:
Section 13.5.3.2 (Unbalanced moment transfer)

• This section is not considered.
50.6.10 Section 18.4.1a Initial (at stressing) Compressive Stress Limit

• 0.6 f’ci is the limiting value.
• For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress.
• For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported.
50.6.11 Section 18.4.1b Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit

• 3 f′ci is the limiting value.
362 RAM Concept

Chapter 50
• The limiting stress is reported, but reinforcement per section 18.4.1 is added to resist the total tensile force if necessary,
so no section will fail this criterion.
• Bonded tendons that are at an angle (vertical or horizontal) to the cross section will only have their component perpen-
dicular to the cross section considered.
• Usable reinforcing stresses are limited to 0.6fy and 30,000 psi.
• User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross
section considered.
50.6.12 Section 18.4.2a Sustained Compressive Stress Limit

• 0.45 f’c is the limiting value.
• Gross-section, linear-elastic stress calculations are used.
50.6.13 Section 18.4.2b Service Compressive Stress Limit

• 0.60 f’c is the limiting value.
50.6.14 Section 18.4.2c Service Tensile Stress Limit

• 6 f′c is the limiting value.
50.6.15 Section 18.7 Design Flexural Resistance (Prestressed)

• See “Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed)” on page 359. Note that if axial forces are included in
the design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports will
cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate.
• Post-tensioning Tendons are included.
• Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility (see detailed description “Relationship of Bonded Post-
tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains” on page 322).
• If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under consideration, then vector components of the cross
section strains and the tendon stresses are used.
RAM Concept 363

Chapter 50
• Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see detailed description “Unbonded Post-
tensioning Stress-Strain Curves – Program Implementation” on page 323).
• If tendon centroid is closer to the extreme compression fiber than the compression reinforcement, a solution may not be
possible.
50.6.16 Section 18.8.1 Ductility (Prestressed)

• The strain distribution used in section 18.7 calculations is used (see “Section 18.7 Design Flexural Resistance
(Prestressed)” on page 363 for details).
• The neutral axis depth is limited to:
(0.36/0.85) * d
where
d = depth of tensile reinforcement centroid

• To be rational (instead of literally following the code), “d” is taken as the depth of the total tension reinforcement, not just
the depth of the PT
• For details on how the neutral axis depth limit is related to the code criterion, see “Unified Design Recommendations for
Reinforced....” by Antoine Naaman in ACI Structural Journal, pp 200-210, Vol 89, no.2, April-March 1992
50.6.17 Section 18.8.3 Cracking Moment

• For a cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored
if the section location is outside of L/3 of the support.
• For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if
the section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support. It is assumed that these regions will
contain the peak moments and hence the first part of a span to crack;
• This criterion is not applied to bonded two-way slabs, even though the code technically requires it.
• The cracking is assumed to be top (negative moment) or bottom (positive moment) based on the “Min. Reinforcement
Pattern” selected in the design strip segment or design section.
• See ““Cracking Moment” Used in Design Calculations” on page 329 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking moment.
• Modulus of rupture (fcr) is 7.5 f′c times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum f’c for the cross section is used.
• Lightweight concrete factor is assumed to be Wc / 145 pcf ≤1.0. The maximum Wc for the cross section is used.
• The “twice that required” criterion is not checked.
50.6.18 Section 18.9.2 Minimum Reinforcement - One Way

the section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support.
• For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is
always applied.
• See “Minimum Reinforcement” on page 356 for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the
reinforcement will have the reinforcement added.
• This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs. For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should be applied to
two-way slabs that do not have a uniform thickness. Under IBC 2000 and ACI 318-02 this criterion need not be used for
any two-way slabs.
364 RAM Concept

Chapter 50
• User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post tensioning that is on the tension side of the centroid
is counted toward this requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement or bonded post-tensioning that is not
orthogonal to the cross section.
50.6.19 Section 18.9.3.2 Midspan Two Way Minimum Reinforcement

if the section location is inside of L/3 of the support.
the section location closer than L/6 from a support.
never applied.
• See “Minimum Reinforcement” above for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement
will have the reinforcement added.
• For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should only be used for two-way slabs of uniform thickness (RAM
Concept uses it for all slabs declared as “two-way”; section 18.9.2 should be used for two-way slabs that do not have a
uniform thickness. Under ACI 318-02 and IBC 2000 it is acceptable to use this criterion for all two-way slabs.)
• For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are calculated and
reported.
• If 2 f′c is exceeded the entire tensile load, Nc, is taken by bonded reinforcement.
• User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is in the tension zone is counted
toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning that are not orthogonal
to the cross section. Usable bonded tendon stresses are limited to the minimum of (fpy-fse), (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi.
• Reinforcing bar stresses are limited to the minimum of (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi.
• The reinforcement is only provided where stresses exceed 2 f′c , the minimum length requirements of 18.9.4.1 are not
considered.
50.6.20 Section 18.9.3.3 Support Two Way Minimum Reinforcement

• For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied at the face of support.
the section location further than L/6 from a support.
never applied.
• See “Minimum Reinforcement” above for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement
will have the reinforcement added.
• For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should only be used for two-way slabs of uniform thickness (RAM
Concept uses it for all slabs declared as “two-way”; section 18.9.2 should be used for two-way slabs that do not have a
uniform thickness. Under ACI 318-02 and IBC 2000 it is acceptable to use this criterion for all two-way slabs.)
• Acf is calculated as the maximum of the cross section area and the cross section depth times the span length. This will not
always exactly match the code requirement
• The location of bonded reinforcement (the 1.5 h requirement) is not checked.
RAM Concept 365

Chapter 50
• The number of bars (“4 bars or wires”) is not checked.

• User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is on the appropriate side of the
centroid is counted toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning that
is not orthogonal to the cross section.
50.6.21 Punching Shear Design

Refer to Chapter 57, “Punching Shear Design Notes”.
366 RAM Concept

Chapter 51
This appendix details RAM Concept’s implementation of ACI 318-02.

discussed here.

or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from ACI 318-02
/ IBC 2003, unless noted otherwise.
The load and strength reduction factors changed significantly in the ACI 318-02 code. In general, the load factors were
reduced and are now in agreement with the strength design of other materials. The strength reduction factors were generally
reduced in order to provide similar design results as the previous code (ACI 318-99).
RAM Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations. The factor on “L” in ACI
318-02 equations (9-3), (9-4), and (9-5) will be equal to 0.5 for Live (Reducible) Loading, 1.0 for Live (Unreducible)
Loading and 1.0 for Live (Storage) Loading.
RAM Concept 367

Chapter 51
51.2.1 All Dead LC


Balance Loading: 1.13 (std & alt) (this includes an 13% increase for long-term losses, which have normally not occurred at
this stage)
51.2.3 Service LC: D + (1.0 | 0.0) L

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state. The load factors used are:

are:
51.2.5 Factored LC: 1.4D

51.2.6 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr

368 RAM Concept

Chapter 51
Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
51.2.7 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6Lr


factors are:

only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are:

generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are:
RAM Concept 369

Chapter 51
51.2.11 Service Seismic LC: D + L + 0.7E (Ultimate Seismic Loading)

currently only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are:

51.2.13 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W (Service Wind Loading)
used are:
51.2.14 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.8W (Service Wind Loading)
used are:
370 RAM Concept

Chapter 51

51.2.16 Factored Seismic LC: 1.2D + f1L+ E (Ultimate Seismic Loading)

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic and live loads. The load factors
used are:

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic loads. The load factors used are:

RAM Concept 371

Chapter 51

1.5
E ci = w c 33 f ci
1.5
Ec = wc 33 f c
E ci = 57000 f ci
E c = 57000 f c
Where
strain limits.
51.4.2 Nonprestressed Reinforcement Behavior

Design Notes”.


372 RAM Concept

Chapter 51
RAM Concept assumes that the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same
limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
51.5.1 Code Minimum Reinforcement

way slab).
or design section:
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.1 18.8.2, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.2, 18.9.2

51.5.2 User Minimum Reinforcement

RAM Concept allows you to specify minimum reinforcement ratios for each span segment.
About User-Specified Minimum Reinforcement Ratios
Each span segment has four user-specified reinforcement ratio values:

• Column Strip Top Reinforcement
• Column Strip Bottom Reinforcement
• Middle Strip Top Reinforcement
• Middle Strip Bottom Reinforcement
RAM Concept 373

Chapter 51
Concept’s User Minimum Reinforcement rule set uses these values to design reinforcement at each cross section. These
values are not included in the reinforcement calculated for other rule sets. For example, the bending strength reinforcement
reported in the Strength Rule Set is not in addition to the reinforcement in the User Minimum Reinforcement rule set.
User Minimum Reinforcement Calculations
Concept’s User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after trimming) and
the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
Requirements
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least on load
combination.
Old Files
Pre-Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum Reinforcement
rule set added. See “Rebuilding load combinations” on page 35of Chapter 11, “Specifying Load Combinations” for further
information.

on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b

51.5.4 Service
on both faces).
• The design strip segment or design section property “Environment” is used to determine the class of post-tensioned
members as follows:
Protected: Class C
Normal: Class T
Corrosive: Class U
Very Corrosive: Class U
374 RAM Concept

Chapter 51
Design System RC PT Class U PT Class T PT Class C

Beam 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
One-Way Slab 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.3.3, 18.4.2b, (not applicable) (not applicable)

18.9.3.2

faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.2a

51.5.6 Strength
factors).
faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
One-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
Two-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7

51.5.7 Ductility
RAM Concept 375

Chapter 51
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.3.5 (none)
One-Way Slab 10.3.5 (none)
Two-Way Slab 10.3.5 (none)


7.12.2.1 and 7.12.2.2 are implemented.
The gross area of concrete after taking into account the “ignore top depth” and the “ignore bottom depth” is used to
For members that contain rebar with different yield stresses, the ratios of 7.12.2.1(a) or 7.12.2.1(c) will be satisfied for
Ratio is limited to a lower bound of 0.0014 in accordance with 7.12.2.1
The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for satisfying the maximum spacing in 7.12.2.2. The
number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded up to the next whole
In one-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4.
In “critical” span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 2h is utilized in accordance with 13.3.2. For cantilever
span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the “critical” span locations are those within
L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the
“critical” span locations are those within L/6 of a support or midspan location.
In other span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 5h is utilized.
For the “elevated slab” and “mat foundation” minimum reinforcement patterns, an inflection point ratio of 0.2113 is
assumed.
Post-tensioning is ignored.
Reinforcement in Fig. R7.12.3 is not implemented.

There is a significant difference in the strength design of axial/flexural members according to the 318-02 Code.
Axial/flexural members are classified as “compression controlled” or “tension controlled” in accordance with 10.3.3 and
10.3.4 depending upon the tensile strain in the extreme tension reinforcement at the ultimate strain conditions (when the
concrete compressive strain reaches 0.003). When the tensile strain is sufficiently large as to provide ample ductility, the
section is defined as “tension controlled” and a strength reduction factor of 0.9 is used. When the tensile strain is at or below
376 RAM Concept

Chapter 51
the balanced strain condition, the member is defined as “compression controlled” and a strength reduction factor of 0.65 is
used. Between these tensile strain values a linear transition between 0.65 and 0.9 is used.
RAM Concept uses the ratio of neutral axis depth to the depth of the resultant tensile force (rather than the depth of the
extreme tension steel) to calculate the strength reduction factor. For singly reinforced sections, the results will be identical to
using the depth of the extreme tension steel. For sections with multiple layers of reinforcement (including post-tensioning),
this implementation will provide a smoother transition and will be conservative. In determining the compression-controlled
strain limit, Concept uses the maximum of 0.002 and fy / Es. The tension-controlled strain limit is 0.005.
Reinforcement areas are not deducted from the concrete area.
Strain compatibility design is used.
Concept’s design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an over-reinforced
section. See “Ductility” on page 375 for more information on applying ductility requirements.
Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section of design strip
segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the required
moment simultaneously with the given axial force.
At “T”, “L” and “Z” beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at different
then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by
selecting the appropriate design section or design strip segment properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
User Es values are used
For sections with multiple values of f ’c, the f ’c of each concrete block is used appropriately.
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by Concept may exceed the amount
necessary. This is because Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which would be necessary
to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement Concept selects is that necessary for axial force equilibrium in the
cross section.

The strain distribution used in section 10.2 calculations is used (see “Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non
The ratio of neutral axis depth to the depth of the resultant tensile force is limited such that the section strain at the location
of the resultant tensile force is a minimum of 0.004.
Application of this section is limited to cross sections with net axial load (compression) less than 0.10fc’Ag, in accordance
with section 10.3.5.

Equation 10-3 and the 200 bwd/fy criteria are implemented.
Equation 10-3 is calculated using the maximum fc', minimum fy, and maximum d (of all bars on the appropriate face).
bw is taken the core width (see “Concrete “Core” Determination” on page 330). If the core width is zero (there is no core),
The bending strength of the section is designed to be at least 1.2 Mcr. This will only control in odd circumstances such as
RAM Concept 377

Chapter 51
A spacing limit of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4. For typically sized beams, this limit will not control the amount
of reinforcement.
The provisions of section 10.5.2 are not implemented.

Equation 10-4 and the 12(36/fs) criteria are implemented
A cracked section analysis is performed to calculate the stress in the reinforcement.
Iteration is used to find the minimum number of bars that meets the criteria. A non-integral number of bars may be used.
The section width used to determine the spacing is the width of the solid areas of the extreme tension face. For beams with
The spacing is considered as the width divided by the number of bars. An additional bar is not added to make the width start
and end with a bar.
Post-tensioning is ignored (except as it naturally affects the cracked section calculations).
RAM Concept may use more reinforcement than “necessary” in two circumstances:

See “Concrete “Core” Determination” on page 330.
For sections with multiple values of f ’c, the minimum f ’c is used.
Equations 11-5, 11-13 (including 50bws/fy), 11-15 are implemented.
Section 11.1.2 is implemented (but optional 11.1.2.1 is not).
Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.1, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented.
Lightweight concrete is not considered.
A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if the member is a slab, then this requirement is
Axial tension and compression are considered in accordance with sections 11.3.2.2 and 11.3.2.3.
If “beam” torsion design is selected, see “Section 11.6 Beam Torsion” on page 379 for further requirements.

For sections with multiple values of f ’c , the minimum f ’c is used
If stirrups are provided, the depth of the section is considered to be the larger of 0.8 h or the actual tension reinforcing depth;
otherwise the depth is considered to be the tension reinforcement depth.
Equation 11-9 is used to determine the shear capacity.
378 RAM Concept

Chapter 51
Equations 11-13 (including 50bws/fy) and 11-15 are implemented.
Axial Compression (or Tension) is not considered
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.

Only the “core” of a cross section is used for torsion design.
If the core consists of multiple ribs, then the torsion calculations are performed for an average rib:
The side cover is assumed to be equal to the greater of the top cover and the bottom cover.
Acp and pcp only consider the cross section “core”.
Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85 Aoh per 11.6.3.6.
θ in equations 11-21 and 11-22 is always taken as 45°.
The balance loading axial force and the entire cross section area are used to determine fcp.
For nonprestressed members, axial force is accounted for according to section 11.6.1(c).
The minimum f ’c of the cross section is used in the unusual situation where a cross section contains multiple concrete
mixes.
Torsion reinforcement is limited to 60 ksi per 11.6.3.4.
Longitudinal Reinforcement:
A 1 f y1 = T n ( p h ⁄ 2A 0 ) cot θ
At ·
A 1 f y1 = 5 ⋅ f′c ⋅ A cp –  ------ ⋅ p h ⋅ f yv
 s
Longitudinal Reinforcement is designed in Pass 1.
Longitudinal Reinforcement is added to the bending reinforcement and reported as being due to both designs.
Transverse Reinforcement:
RAM Concept 379

Chapter 51
Section 11.6.3.1 (equation 11-18) is implemented such that shear capacity is reduced by torsion. For very high torsions, this
can make shear capacity negative.
The spacing of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.6.1.
The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.3.6
Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.5.1 and 11.6.5.2
Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when determining effective
depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.

With the exception of span detailing, this chapter is not used for reinforcement design calculations, specifically:
This section is not considered.
51.6.10 Section 18.3.3 Service Tensile Stress Limit

A cross-section is defined as Class U, Class T, or Class C using the design strip segment or design section property
“Environment”. The limiting tensile stress values are outlined in the following table.
Class U Class T Class C

Assumed behavior Uncracked Transition between Cracked
uncracked and cracked
Section properties Gross section Gross section Cracked sec-

for stress calculation
tion
Tensile stress limit ft ≤ 7.5 fc′ 7.5 fc′ < ft ≤ 12 fc′ No limit
Deflection calcula- Gross section Consider effects of crack- Consider

tion ing effects of
cracking
Crack control No requirement No requirement 10.6.4 /

18.4.4
Computation of fs Not applicable Not applicable Cracked sec-

for crack control tion analysis
Table 51-7
If a design strip or section is defined as Class C, but the gross tensile stresses are within the Class T limits, the provisions of
10.6.4/18.4.4 will not be applied.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting stress.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are reported.
380 RAM Concept

Chapter 51

0.6 f ’ci is the limiting value.
3 f′ci is the limiting value.
The limiting stress is reported, but reinforcement per section 18.4.1 is added to resist the total tensile force if necessary, so no
section will fail this criterion.
User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular to the cross
section considered.
Usable reinforcing stresses are limited to 0.6fy and 30,000 psi.

0.45 f ’c is the limiting value.
Gross-section, linear-elastic stress calculations are used.

51.6.15 Section 18.4.4 Reinforcement Spacing Limits for Class C Members

The provisions of section 10.6.4 are utilized, modified by the provisions of 18.4.4.
See “Section 10.6.4 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non Prestressed)” on page 378.
The following procedure is used to determine the maximum bar spacing:

• The maximum fs in the cross section is determined, including all bonded tendons in the tension zone and all bar positions.
RAM Concept 381

Chapter 51
• For bonded PT in tension zone, an effectively reinforced width is calculated:
540 432 2
w i = min  --------------- – 2.5cci, --------------- ⋅ --- ⋅ numberofducts
 maxf s maxf s 3
• This width is subtracted from the total tension face width, and the rebar spacing is calculated using the remaining width.
• A stress limit is calculated using re-arranged equation (10-4) and compared with the fs calculated in the first step.
• Rebar is added and all steps are repeated until fs is within the calculated stress limit.
If tendons are used to reduce the required tension face reinforcement width, the tendon ∆fps will be limited to 36 ksi in
accordance with 18.4.4.3. Rebar will be added until this limit is met.
If any tendon wi or any required bar spacing is negative the bar or tendon is deemed ineffective for controlling crack width
and is ignored.
In the unusual circumstance where no bars or tendons are in the tension zone, no rebar will be added.

See “Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed)” on page 376. Note that if axial forces are included in the
design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports will cause a
hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate.
Post-tensioning Tendons are included.
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility (see detailed description “Relationship of Bonded Post-
If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under consideration, then vector components of the cross
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see detailed description “Unbonded Post-tensioning
Stress-Strain Curves – Program Implementation” on page 323).
If tendon centroid is closer to the extreme compression fiber than the compression reinforcement, a solution may not be
possible.

For a cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the
section location is outside of L/3 of the support.
For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is ignored if the
section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support. It is assumed that these regions will contain
the peak moments and hence the first part of a span to crack;
This criterion is not applied to bonded two-way slabs, even though the code technically requires it.
The cracking is assumed to be top (negative moment) or bottom (positive moment) based on the “Min. Reinforcement
See ““Cracking Moment” Used in Design Calculations” on page 329 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking moment.
Modulus of rupture (fcr) is 7.5 f′c times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum f ’c for the cross section is used.
Lightweight concrete factor is assumed to be Wc / 145 pcf ≤1.0. The maximum Wc for the cross section is used.
The “twice that required” criterion is not checked.
382 RAM Concept

Chapter 51

section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support.
For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is
always applied.
See “Minimum Reinforcement” above for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement will
have the reinforcement added.
This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs. For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should be applied to two-
way slabs that do not have a uniform thickness. Under IBC 2003 and ACI 318-02 this criterion need not be used for any two-
way slabs.
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post tensioning that is on the tension side of the centroid is
counted toward this requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement or bonded post-tensioning that is not

For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied at face of support when the span ratio is less that L/6, or in the middle
one-third of the span.
For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is never
applied.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are calculated and
reported.
If 2 f′c is exceeded the entire tensile load, Nc, is taken by bonded reinforcement.
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is in the tension zone is counted toward
the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning that are not orthogonal to the
cross section. Usable bonded tendon stresses are limited to the minimum of (fpy – fse), (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi.
Reinforcing bar stresses are limited to the minimum of (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi.
The reinforcement is only provided where stresses exceed 2 f′c , the minimum length requirements of 18.9.4.1 are not
considered.

For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied to the first cross section at a support if the span ratio is less than L/6.
RAM Concept 383

Chapter 51
Acf is calculated as the maximum of the cross section area and the cross section depth times the span length. This will not
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is on the appropriate side of the centroid
is counted toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning that is not
The location of bonded reinforcement (the 1.5 h requirement) is not checked.
The number of bars (“4 bars or wires”) is not checked.

384 RAM Concept

Chapter 52
This appendix details RAM Concept’s implementation of ACI 318-05.

discussed here.

or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from ACI 318-05
/ IBC 2006, unless noted otherwise.
Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations. The factor on “L” in ACI 318-
05 equations (9-3), (9-4), and (9-5) will be equal to 0.5 for Live (Reducible) Loading, 1.0 for Live (Unreducible) Loading
and 1.0 for Live (Storage) Loading.
52.2.1 All Dead LC

RAM Concept 385

Chapter 52

Balance Loading: 1.13 (std & alt) (this includes an 13% increase for long-term losses, which have normally not occurred at
this stage)
52.2.3 Service LC: D + (1.0 | 0.0) L

Note: This combination is used to cover IBC 2006 eq. 16-8 through 16-11. This combination is conservative for eq. 16-11,
and normally controls for structural elements supporting more than one level.

are:
52.2.5 Factored LC: 1.4D

52.2.6 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr

386 RAM Concept

Chapter 52
52.2.7 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6Lr


factors are:
52.2.9 Service Wind LC: D + W (Service Wind Loading)

52.2.10 Service Wind LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75W (Service Wind Loading)

only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are:
RAM Concept 387

Chapter 52

52.2.12 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.7E (Ultimate Seismic Loading)

52.2.13 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.75L + 0.525E (Ultimate Seismic Loading)

currently only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are:

52.2.15 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W (Service Wind Loading)
used are:
388 RAM Concept

Chapter 52
52.2.16 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.8W (Service Wind Loading)
used are:

52.2.18 Factored Seismic LC: 1.2D + f1L+ E (Ultimate Seismic Loading)

used are:

RAM Concept 389

Chapter 52


1.5
E ci = w c 33 f ci
1.5
Ec = wc 33 f c
E ci = 57000 f ci
E c = 57000 f c
Where
strain limits.
390 RAM Concept

Chapter 52
52.4.2 Nonprestressed Reinforcement Behavior

Design Notes”.


RAM Concept assumes that the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same
limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).

way slab).
or design section:
RAM Concept 391

Chapter 52
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.1 18.8.2, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.2, 18.9.2



Requirements
combination.
Old Files
information.

on both faces).
392 RAM Concept

Chapter 52
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b

52.5.4 Service
on both faces).
members as follows:
Protected: Class C
Normal: Class T
Corrosive: Class U
Very Corrosive: Class U

Design System RC PT Class U PT Class T PT Class C

Beam 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
One-Way Slab 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.3.3, 18.4.2b, (not applicable) (not applicable)

18.9.3.2

faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.2a

RAM Concept 393

Chapter 52
52.5.6 Strength
factors).
faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
One-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
Two-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7

52.5.7 Ductility
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.3.5 (none)
One-Way Slab 10.3.5 (none)
Two-Way Slab 10.3.5 (none)


7.12.2.1 and 7.12.2.2 are implemented.
The gross area of concrete after taking into account the “ignore top depth” and the “ignore bottom depth” is used to
For members that contain rebar with different yield stresses, the ratios of 7.12.2.1(a) or 7.12.2.1(c) will be satisfied for
Ratio is limited to a lower bound of 0.0014 in accordance with 7.12.2.1
394 RAM Concept

Chapter 52
The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for satisfying the maximum spacing in 7.12.2.2. The
number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded up to the next whole
In one-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4.
In “critical” span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 2h is utilized in accordance with 13.3.2. For cantilever
span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the “critical” span locations are those within
L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the
“critical” span locations are those within L/6 of a support or midspan location.
In other span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 5h is utilized.
For the “elevated slab” and “mat foundation” minimum reinforcement patterns, an inflection point ratio of 0.2113 is
assumed.
Reinforcement in Fig. R7.12.3 is not implemented.

There is a significant difference in the strength design of axial/flexural members according to the 318-05 Code.
Axial/flexural members are classified as “compression controlled” or “tension controlled” in accordance with 10.3.3 and
10.3.4 depending upon the tensile strain in the extreme tension reinforcement at the ultimate strain conditions (when the
concrete compressive strain reaches 0.003). When the tensile strain is sufficiently large as to provide ample ductility, the
section is defined as “tension controlled” and a strength reduction factor of 0.9 is used. When the tensile strain is at or below
the balanced strain condition, the member is defined as “compression controlled” and a strength reduction factor of 0.65 is
used. Between these tensile strain values a linear transition between 0.65 and 0.9 is used.
RAM Concept uses the ratio of neutral axis depth to the depth of the resultant tensile force (rather than the depth of the
extreme tension steel) to calculate the strength reduction factor. For singly reinforced sections, the results will be identical to
using the depth of the extreme tension steel. For sections with multiple layers of reinforcement (including post-tensioning),
this implementation will provide a smoother transition and will be conservative. In determining the compression-controlled
strain limit, RAM Concept uses the maximum of 0.002 and fy / Es. The tension-controlled strain limit is 0.005.
Strain compatibility design is used.
RAM Concept’s design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an over-
reinforced section. See “Ductility” on page 394 for more information on applying ductility requirements.
Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section of design strip
segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the required
moment simultaneously with the given axial force.
selecting the appropriate design section or design strip segment properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
User Es values are used
For sections with multiple values of f ’c , the f ’c of each concrete block is used appropriately.
RAM Concept 395

Chapter 52
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the

The strain distribution used in section 10.2 calculations is used (see “Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non
The ratio of neutral axis depth to the depth of the resultant tensile force is limited such that the section strain at the location
of the resultant tensile force is a minimum of 0.004.
Application of this section is limited to cross sections with net axial load (compression) less than 0.10fc’Ag, in accordance
with section 10.3.5.

Equation 10-3 and the 200 bwd/fy criteria are implemented.
Equation 10-3 is calculated using the maximum fc', minimum fy, and maximum d (of all bars on the appropriate face).
bw is taken the core width (see “Concrete “Core” Determination” on page 330). If the core width is zero (there is no core),
The bending strength of the section is designed to be at least 1.2 Mcr. This will only control in odd circumstances such as
A spacing limit of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4. For typically sized beams, this limit will not control the amount
of reinforcement.
The provisions of section 10.5.2 are not implemented.

Equation 10-4 and the 12(40,000/fs) criteria are implemented
A cracked section analysis is performed to calculate the stress in the reinforcement.
Iteration is used to find the minimum number of bars that meets the criteria. A non-integral number of bars may be used.
The section width used to determine the spacing is the width of the solid areas of the extreme tension face. For beams with
The spacing is considered as the width divided by the number of bars. An additional bar is not added to make the width start
and end with a bar.
Post-tensioning is ignored (except as it naturally affects the cracked section calculations).
RAM Concept may use more reinforcement than “necessary” in two circumstances:
396 RAM Concept

Chapter 52

For sections with multiple values of f ’c , the minimum f ’c is used.
Equations 11-5, 11-13 (including 50bws/fy), 11-15 are implemented.
Axial tension and compression are considered in accordance with sections 11.3.2.2 and 11.3.2.3.

For sections with multiple values of f ’c , the minimum f ’c is used
If stirrups are provided, the depth of the section is considered to be the larger of 0.8 h or the actual tension reinforcing depth;
otherwise the depth is considered to be the tension reinforcement depth.
Equation 11-9 is used to determine the shear capacity.
Equations 11-13 (including 50bws/fy) and 11-15 are implemented.
Axial Compression (or Tension) is not considered

Only the “core” of a cross section is used for torsion design.
The side cover is assumed to be equal to the greater of the top cover and the bottom cover.
RAM Concept 397

Chapter 52
Acp and pcp only consider the cross section “core”.
Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85 Aoh per 11.6.3.6.
θ in equations 11-21 and 11-22 is always taken as 45°.
The balance loading axial force and the entire cross section area are used to determine fcp.
For nonprestressed members, axial force is accounted for according to section 11.6.1(c).
The minimum f ’c of the cross section is used in the unusual situation where a cross section contains multiple concrete
mixes.
Torsion reinforcement is limited to 60 ksi per 11.6.3.4.
Longitudinal Reinforcement:
A 1 f y1 = T n ( p h ⁄ 2A 0 ) cot θ
At ·
A 1 f y1 = 5 ⋅ f′c ⋅ A cp –  ------ ⋅ p h ⋅ f yv
 s
Longitudinal Reinforcement is designed in Pass 1.
Longitudinal Reinforcement is added to the bending reinforcement and reported as being due to both designs.
Transverse Reinforcement:
Section 11.6.3.1 (equation 11-18) is implemented such that shear capacity is reduced by torsion. For very high torsions, this
can make shear capacity negative.
The spacing of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.6.1.
The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.3.6
Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.5.1 and 11.6.5.2
Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when determining effective
depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.

With the exception of span detailing, this chapter is not used for reinforcement design calculations, specifically:
This section is not considered.
398 RAM Concept

Chapter 52
52.6.10 Section 18.3.3 Service Tensile Stress Limit

A cross-section is defined as Class U, Class T, or Class C using the design strip segment or design section property
“Environment”. The limiting tensile stress values are outlined in the following table.
Class U Class T Class C

Assumed behavior Uncracked Transition between Cracked
uncracked and cracked
Section properties Gross section Gross section Cracked sec-

for stress calculation
tion
Tensile stress limit ft ≤ 7.5 fc′ 7.5 fc′ < ft ≤ 12 fc′ No limit
Deflection calcula- Gross section Consider effects of crack- Consider

tion ing effects of
cracking
Crack control No requirement No requirement 10.6.4 /

18.4.4
Computation of fs Not applicable Not applicable Cracked sec-

for crack control tion analysis
Table 52-7
Note: All post-tensioned two-way slabs are considered as Class U with ft <= 6 root fc'
If a design strip or section is defined as Class C, but the gross tensile stresses are within the Class T limits, the provisions of
10.6.4/18.4.4 will not be applied.

0.6 f ’ci is the limiting value.
3 f′ci is the limiting value.

The limiting stress is reported, but reinforcement per section 18.4.1 is added to resist the total tensile force if necessary, so no
section will fail this criterion.
section considered.
RAM Concept 399

Chapter 52
Usable reinforcing stresses are limited to 0.6fy and 30,000 psi.


52.6.15 Section 18.4.4 Reinforcement Spacing Limits for Class C Members

The provisions of section 10.6.4 are utilized, modified by the provisions of 18.4.4.
See “Section 10.6.4 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non Prestressed)” on page 396.
The following procedure is used to determine the maximum bar spacing:

• The maximum fs in the cross section is determined, including all bonded tendons in the tension zone and all bar positions.
• For bonded PT in tension zone, an effectively reinforced width is calculated:
600000 480000 2
w i = min  ------------------ – 2.5cci, ------------------ ⋅ --- ⋅ numberofducts
 maxf s maxf s  3
• This width is subtracted from the total tension face width, and the rebar spacing is calculated using the remaining width.
• A stress limit is calculated using re-arranged equation (10-4) and compared with the fs calculated in the first step.
• Rebar is added and all steps are repeated until fs is within the calculated stress limit.
If tendons are used to reduce the required tension face reinforcement width, the tendon ∆fps will be limited to 36 ksi in
accordance with 18.4.4.3. Rebar will be added until this limit is met.
If any tendon wi or any required bar spacing is negative the bar or tendon is deemed ineffective for controlling crack width
and is ignored.
In the unusual circumstance where no bars or tendons are in the tension zone, no rebar will be added.
400 RAM Concept

Chapter 52

See “Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed)” on page 395. Note that if axial forces are included in the
design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports will cause a
hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate.
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility (see detailed description “Relationship of Bonded Post-
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see detailed description “Unbonded Post-tensioning
Stress-Strain Curves – Program Implementation” on page 323).
possible.

section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support. It is assumed that these regions will contain
the peak moments and hence the first part of a span to crack;
This criterion is not applied to bonded two-way slabs, even though the code technically requires it.
The cracking is assumed to be top (negative moment) or bottom (positive moment) based on the “Min. Reinforcement
See ““Cracking Moment” Used in Design Calculations” on page 329 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking moment.
Modulus of rupture (fcr) is 7.5 f′c times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum f ’c for the cross section is used.
Lightweight concrete factor is assumed to be Wc / 145 pcf ≤1.0. The maximum Wc for the cross section is used.
The “twice that required” criterion is not checked.

section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support.
For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is
always applied.
This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs. For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should be applied to two-
way slabs that do not have a uniform thickness. Under IBC 2003 and ACI 318-02 this criterion need not be used for any two-
way slabs.
RAM Concept 401

Chapter 52
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post tensioning that is on the tension side of the centroid is
counted toward this requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement or bonded post-tensioning that is not

For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied at face of support when the span ratio is less that L/6, or in the middle
one-third of the span.
For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is never
applied.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are calculated and
reported.
If 2 f′c is exceeded the entire tensile load, Nc, is taken by bonded reinforcement.
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is in the tension zone is counted toward
the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning that are not orthogonal to the
cross section. Usable bonded tendon stresses are limited to the minimum of (fpy – fse), (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi.
Reinforcing bar stresses are limited to the minimum of (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi.
The reinforcement is only provided where stresses exceed 2 f′c , the minimum length requirements of 18.9.4.1 are not
considered.

For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied to the first cross section at a support if the span ratio is less than L/6.
Acf is calculated as the maximum of the cross section area and the cross section depth times the span length. This will not
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is on the appropriate side of the centroid
is counted toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning that is not
The location of bonded reinforcement (the 1.5 h requirement) is not checked.
The number of bars (“4 bars or wires”) is not checked.
402 RAM Concept

Chapter 52

RAM Concept 403

Chapter 52
404 RAM Concept

Chapter 53
53 AS 3600-2001 Design
This chapter details RAM Concept’s implementation of AS 3600-2001.

53.1 AS 3600-2001 default loadings
This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new AS 3600-2001
discussed here.

53.2 AS 3600-2001 default load combinations
creates when you start a new AS 3600-2001 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can
remove or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from
AS/NZS 1170.0, unless noted otherwise.
Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations. For the short-term case the
factor ψ will be equal to 1.0 for Live (Unreducible) and Live (Storage) and 0.7 for all other live loadings. For the long-term
and combination cases, the factor ψ will be equal to 0.6 for Live (Unreducible) and Live (Storage), 0.4 for Live (Reducible),
and 0.0 for Live (Roof).
53.2.1 All Dead LC

RAM Concept 405

Chapter 53

this stage)
Self-Dead Loading: 0.8 (std) & 1.15 (alt)
Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 0.8 (std) & 1.15 (alt)
53.2.3 Service LC: D + ψ L

Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.7 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
53.2.4 Max Service LC: D + (1.0 | 0.0) L

53.2.5 Ultimate LC: 1.35D

53.2.6 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L

406 RAM Concept

Chapter 53

factors are:
Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.64 (std & alt) [0.4(3.35) + (0.7-0.4)]
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 2.41 (std & alt) [0.6(3.35) + (1.0-0.6)]
Live (Storage) Loading: 2.41 (std & alt) [0.6(3.35) + (1.0-0.6)]
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.7 (std & alt) [0.0(3.35) + (0.7-0.0)]
53.2.8 Service Wind LC: D + ψ L + W (Service Wind Loading)

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind and live loads. The load
factors used are:

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind loads. The load factors used
are:
53.2.10 Service Seismic LC: D + ψ L + E (Service Seismic Loading)

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic and live loads. The load
factors used are:
RAM Concept 407

Chapter 53
Service Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
53.2.11 Service Seismic LC: D + E (Service Seismic Loading)

generated for mat / raft foundations. The load factors used are:
53.2.12 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + ψ L + W (Service Wind Loading)

used are:
Ultimate Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
53.2.13 Ultimate Wind LC: 0.9D + W (Ultimate Wind Loading)

Ultimate Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
53.2.14 Ultimate Seismic LC: D + ψ L + E (Ultimate Seismic Loading)

used are:
408 RAM Concept

Chapter 53
53.2.15 Ultimate Seismic LC: D + E (Ultimate Seismic Loading)

53.3 AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors

• car park loads on a Live (Storage) layer
• assembly loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer
• roof loads used for floor type activities on a Live (Reducible) layer or Live (Unreducible) layer
Note: If you draw car park loads on a Live (Storage) layer, however, RAM Concept applies a (conservative) load factor of
1.0 in the Service LC, a (conservative) load factor of 0.6 in the wind and seismic load combinations (both service and
ultimate), and a (conservative) load factor of 2.41 in the LT Uncracked Deflection LC.
Note: If you draw assembly loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer, however, RAM Concept applies a load factor of 2.41 in the
LT Uncracked Deflection LC.
53.4 AS 3600-2001 material behaviours
when using AS 3600-2001.

You define the concrete elastic modulus in the materials window. You can choose to use code equation 6.1.2, an equation
from another code, or a specified value.
When the AS 3600-2001 code section 6.1.2 is selected the following values are used:
1.5
E ci = ρ 0.043 f cmi
1.5
Ec = ρ 0.043 f cm
Where
fcmi = mean value of cylinder strength at stressing
RAM Concept 409

Chapter 53
fcm = mean value of 28 day cylinder strength
strain limits.
53.4.2 (Non-prestressed) Reinforcement Behaviour

Design Notes”.


For AS 3600-2001, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, flimit, is defined by section 8.1.6. In the calculation of befdp, RAM
Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting stress
value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
53.5 AS 3600-2001 code rule selection
The following explains how RAM Concept decides which AS 3600-2001 code rules to apply based on the design strip
segment or design section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.

way slab).
or design section:
410 RAM Concept

Chapter 53

Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
One-Way Slab 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
Two-Way Slab 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2



Requirements
combination.
Old Files
information.

on both faces).
RAM Concept 411

Chapter 53
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 8.1.4.2
One-Way Slab (none) 8.1.4.2
Two-Way Slab (none) 8.1.4.2

53.5.4 Service
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.6.1 (portions) 8.6.2
One-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) 9.4.2
Two-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) 9.4.2

53.5.5 Max Service

• This is intended for service load combinations where ψ = 1.0.
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.6.1 (portions) (none)
One-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) (none)
Two-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) (none)

Table 53-4 Maximum service rule mapping
53.5.6 Strength
factors).
faces).
• See “Torsion Considerations” on page 330 for an explanation how torsion is implemented.
412 RAM Concept

Chapter 53
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1, 8.2, 8.3* 8.1, 8.2, 8.3*
One-Way Slab 8.1, 8.2, 8.3* 8.1, 8.2, 8.3*
Two-Way Slab 8.1, 8.2, 8.3* 8.1, 8.2, 8.3*

53.5.7 Ductility
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1.3 8.1.3
One-Way Slab 8.1.3 8.1.3
Two-Way Slab 8.1.3 8.1.3

53.6 AS 3600-2001 code implementation
53.6.1 Concrete Modulus of Elasticity

• The modulus of elasticity for concrete is calculated per 6.1.2(a).
• The value of fcm in the calculation is taken from Table C6.1.2. Linear interpolation is used between the table values. Values
outside the range of the table are interpolated conservatively (if f’c < 20 MPa, fcm = 1.2 f’c; if f’c > 50 MPa, fcm = f’c + 6.5
MPa).
• This calculation must be selected in the Materials window to be used.
53.6.2 Concrete Flexural Tensile Strength

• The flexural tensile strength for concrete is calculated per 6.1.1.2(a).
53.6.3 Unbonded Post-Tensioning Stress-Strain Curves

• The bonded post-tensioning stress-strain curves are used, but altered as detailed below.
• For service level (elastic) analysis, unbonded tendon stresses are assumed to be independent of section strains.
• The tendon stress is never reduced below σp.ef.
• The tendon stress is never exceeds fpy.
RAM Concept 413

Chapter 53
• The tendon stress is limited by code section 8.1.6 equation (a) or (b) as appropriate.
Note: The program does not consider section 19.3.5 which states that unbonded tendons should only be used on grade; the
engineer needs to take this into account before starting the design.
53.6.4 Section 8.1 Strength of Beams in Bending

• Reinforcement areas are not deducted from the concrete area.
• Strain compatibility design is used. See “General Design Approach” on page 321 for a description of RAM Concept’s
strain compatibility design.
• See “Concrete Stress-Strain Curves” on page 324 and for tendon, concrete and mild steel reinforcement stress strain
curves
• User Es values are used
• For sections with multiple values of f’c, the f’c of each concrete block is used appropriately.
• RAM Concept’s design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an over-
reinforced section. See “Ductility” on page 413 for applying ductility requirements.
• If the section or strip is declared as not being post-tensioned, then post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored
• Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section or design
strip segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the
required moment simultaneously with the given axial force.
• At “T”, “L” and “Z” beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at different
then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads
(by selecting the appropriate design section or design strip segment properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
• For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the
• The diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports (and other regions of the structure) will cause a hyperstatic
(secondary) tension in many cross sections, as is appropriate.
• RAM Concept does not consider section 19.3.5 which states that unbonded tendons should only be used on grade; the
engineer needs to take this into account before starting the design.
• Section 8.1.8 (Detailing of flexural reinforcement and tendons) is not implemented.
• The standard strength reduction factor (φ) of 0.8 is used.
53.6.5 8.1.4 Minimum Flexural Strength

• Cross sections within 1/6 span from supports or 1/6 span from midspan are considered “at critical sections”.
• If the design section is not declared as post-tensioned in the design section or design strip segment, then the P/Ag and Pe
terms of 8.1.4.1 are assumed to be zero (even if the cross section includes tendons).
• See ““Cracking Moment” Used in Design Calculations” on page 329 for a theoretical discussion of the “cracking load”.
53.6.6 8.1.4.2 Transfer Compressive Stress Limits

• The second clause in 8.1.4.2 is implemented.
414 RAM Concept

Chapter 53
• The cross section is analyzed as cracked. This analysis is somewhat more conservative than the gross section calculation
suggested in the code.
• The concrete compressive stresses are limited to 0.5 fcp.
• If the limit stress is exceeded then reinforcement is added as required to limit the concrete stress; depending on the bending
moment and axial forces, either compression reinforcement, tension reinforcement or both will be added.
• For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the section limiting stress is reported as the smallest (absolute value) stress
limit of all of the individual concrete areas.
53.6.7 Section 8.1.3 Ductility of Beams in Bending

• See “General Design Approach” on page 321 for general information on cross section calculations.
• The neutral axis depth (ku) is limited to 0.4 per section 8.1.3. Reinforcement is added to minimise the neutral axis depth.
• If the reinforcing bar covers are such that the compression bar is outside of the 0.4 d zone, then a solution may not be
possible.
• In certain circumstances it may not be possible to simultaneously provide positive moment ductility and negative moment
ductility. This most commonly happens if there is a large post-tensioning tendon near the center of the cross section.
53.6.8 Section 8.2 Shear Design

• See “Concrete “Core” Determination” on page 330 for the web width (bw) calculations.
• Half of the width of bonded ducts and all of the width of unbonded ducts that are located in the shear core are deducted
from the bw width to determine the bv width. Where ducts are at different elevations within the core, the elevation with the
maximum effective duct width is used to determine bv.
• If the section is declared as “post-tensioned”, d0 is taken as the maximum of the depth of all tension reinforcement or
0.8D. No check is made to verify that the structure actually is post-tensioned.
• If the section is not post-tensioned d0 is taken as the maximum depth of all tension reinforcement.
• Ast is taken as the area of longitudinal reinforcement (excluding PT) that is in the tension zone for the cross section forces
under consideration.
• The vertical component of inclined prestressing tendons, Pv, is ignored (taken as zero).
• Flexure-shear Vuc is calculated per 8.2.7.2 (a) (for non-prestressed members the Apt and V0 evaluate to zero).
• V0 is calculated as M0/(M*/V*) for both determinate and indeterminate structures.
• β2 is taken as 1.0 (no axial force considered).
• β3 is taken as 1.0.
• Apt is taken as the sum of all post-tensioning (bonded and unbonded) in the tension zone. Vector components of the tendon
areas are used for tendons that are not perpendicular to the design section.
• Web-shear Vuc is calculated per 8.2.7.2 (b) (for both prestressed and non-prestressed members). The calculation is
performed at the centroid of the member, but the net web width (bv) is used to determine the shear stress at the centroid. The
balance analysis prestressing forces and the gross section properties are used to determine the axial stress at the centroid.
• Vus is calculated per 8.2.10 (a).
• No increases of capacity are considered for sections or loads close to supports.
• If “beam torsion” is selected, torsion design is also performed (see “Section 8.3 Beam Torsion Design” on page 416).
Maximum shear capacity is reduced by section 8.3.3. If torsion reinforcement is required, then Section 8.3.4(b) is used to
reduce available shear capacity.
• Stirrup spacings are reduced by a factor of 0.8 per 8.2.12.4(c).
RAM Concept 415

Chapter 53
53.6.9 Section 8.3 Beam Torsion Design

• Section 8.3 is followed.
• Torsion reinforcement is not provided if the requirements of 8.3.4(a)(i) are met [T* < 0.25 φ Tuc]. The requirements of
8.3.4(a)(ii) and (iii) are conservatively ignored.
• All torsion is assumed to be taken by the “core”. See “Concrete “Core” Determination” on page 330 for calculation of the
core.
• Where the core consists of multiple ribs, the calculations are based on an average rib (and then factored up by the number
of ribs).
• Section 8.3.3 is used to reduce the maximum shear capacity.
• In calculating At and ut, the side cover to the centroid of the longitudinal bar is assumed to be the maximum of the top
cover and bottom cover to the centroid of their respective longitudinal bars.
• Longitudinal torsion reinforcement in the compression zone is not reduced by the flexural compression force [8.3.6(a) is
used for both tension and compression faces]
• Torsion capacity is not reported; instead shear capacity is reduced by the fitments, etc. that are used to provide the required
torsion capacity.
• When shear acts simultaneously with torsion, Section 8.3.4(b) is considered when designing the transverse closed ties.
• Transverse closed ties (Asw) are provided for the lesser of T* and Tu,max. If T* is greater than Tu,max, then the section will
be reported as failing sections 8.2 and 8.3. The minimum requirements of 8.3.7(a) are also met.
• Longitudinal reinforcement is provided based on the Asw value calculated for the lesser of T* and Tu,max.
• Closed tie spacings are reduced by a factor of 0.8 per 8.2.12.4(c), even if the cross section is in pure torsion (no shear).
53.6.10 Section 8.6.1 RC Beam Crack Control

If there are no tension stresses in the cross section, no reinforcement is provided.
A “critical tensile zone” is considered as any cross section that has gross section stresses that equal or exceed 3 MPa for the
cross section forces under consideration (slightly different – and less conservative - than the code M*s.1 definition). Axial
compression (or tension) is considered in this stress calculation.
The cross section is considered as a “tension member” if both faces are in tension based on gross section stresses for the
cross section forces being considered. (The code uses the term “primarily tension”.).
Reinforcement is only fully designed on the face of the member with the highest tension stress (based on gross section
stresses). In the rare case of a tension member, reinforcement may be added to the “compression” face in order to satisfy
equilibrium, but that “compression” face reinforcement will not be sized to satisfy sections (i) and (ii).
section considered.
Section (i) – In the service design, this section is used if the cross section is a tension member or is a critical tensile zone. For
the max service design, this section is only used for critical tensile zones. This section never used in protected environments.
• The reinforcement is added based on the equation Ast,min = 3ks Act / fs
• A ks value of 0.8 is used for tension members; otherwise a ks value of 0.6 is used.
• fs is determined from Table 8.6.1(A). The maximum diameter of all reinforcement assigned to the tension face is used in
Table 8.6.1(A).
Section (ii) – This section is always used in the service design, but never used in the max service design.
• Reinforcement is added to limit maximum spacing to 300 mm. All bars on the appropriate face (including fractional
components for bars at an angle to the cross section) are considered for spacing requirements, including those that are less
than half the diameter of the largest bar in the section. A non-integral number of bars and spaces may be used.
Section (iii) – This section is used if the cross section is a tension member and the environment is not protected.
416 RAM Concept

Chapter 53
• For the service design:

• Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.1(A).
• The maximum diameter of all reinforcement assigned to a particular face is used in Table 8.6.1(A).
• For the max service design:
• Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses less than 0.8 fsy.
Section (iv) – This section is used if the cross section is not a tension member and the environment is not protected. The
second code option (the one beginning with “Alternately,…”) is used.
• For the service design:
• Reinforcement is added to both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.1(B).
• The bar spacing is calculated using all bars on the appropriate face (including fractional components for bars at an
angle to the cross section), including those that are less than half the diameter of the largest bar in the section. A
fraction number of bars and number of spaces may be used.
• For the max service design:
• Reinforcement is added to both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses less than 0.8 fsy.
53.6.11 Section 8.6.2 PT Beam Crack Control

• If the tensile stress in the concrete does not exceed 0.25 f′c then there is no need for crack control reinforcement and
none of the following applies.
• Section (a) with the 0.6 f′c limit is ignored because it does not give any guidance on how much reinforcement is
necessary. Section (b) is always used instead.
• Reinforcement is added to try to keep mild steel stress changes on the tension face within the 200 MPa as the moment
changes from decompression to service level.
• In extremely rare circumstances (where the service reinforcement stress in compression, even though the concrete
stress exceeds 0.25 f′c ) this criterion is skipped as adding reinforcement will reduce the compression (increase the
tension) making it impossible to satisfy the criterion by increasing the reinforcement.
• The decompression reinforcement stress is calculated using gross section strains, while the service reinforcement
stress is calculated using cracked section strains.
• Reinforcement is also added if necessary to provide a centre-to-centre reinforcement spacing of 200 mm or less.
• For this requirement, each bonded tendon duct that is in the tension zone (based on gross-section stresses) is
considered to be equivalent to a single mild steel bar (even if it is far from the tension face). In the spacing calcu-
lation, all effective tendon ducts are assumed to be optimally positioned to minimize the number of mild steel bars
required – the plan layout of the ducts is ignored.
• A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be specified to meet the spacing requirement.
section considered.
53.6.12 Section 9.1 Strength of Slabs in Bending

• Section 8.1 is used for calculating the bending strength of slabs. Any reinforcement required is reported as being due to
8.1. See “Section 8.1 Strength of Beams in Bending” above for details on the 8.1 implementation.
53.6.13 Section 9.4.1 RC Slab Crack Control

A “critical tensile zone” is considered as any cross section that has gross section stresses that equal or exceed 3 MPa for the
cross section forces under consideration. Axial compression (or tension) is considered in this stress calculation.
RAM Concept 417

Chapter 53
Reinforcement is only fully designed on the face of the member with the highest tension stress (based on gross section
stresses). In the rare case of a tension member, reinforcement may be added to the “compression” face in order to satisfy
equilibrium, but that “compression” face reinforcement will not be sized to satisfy sections (ii) and (iii).
section considered.
Section (i) –This section is not implemented here. Clause 9.1.1 is implemented in the minimum reinforcement design via
clause 8.1.4.1.
Section (ii) – In the service design and max service design, this section is used if the cross section is in a critical tensile zone
and is not in a protected environment.
• The reinforcement is added based on the equation Ast,min = 3ks Act / fs
• ks = 0.6
• fs is determined from Table 9.4.1(A). The maximum diameter of all reinforcement assigned to the tension face is used in
Table 9.4.1(A).
Section (iii) – This section is always used in the service design, but never used in the max service design.
• Reinforcement is added to limit maximum spacing to 300 mm or two times the cross section depth. All bars on the appro-
priate face (including fractional components for bars at an angle to the cross section) are considered for spacing require-
ments, including those that are less than half the diameter of the largest bar in the section. A fraction number of bars and
number of spaces may be used.
Section (iv) – This section is only used for service design, but is not used in protected environments. The second code option
(the one beginning with “Alternately,…”) is used.
• Reinforcement is added to both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 9.4.1(B).
• The bar spacing is calculated using all bars on the appropriate face (including fractional components for bars at an angle
to the cross section), including those that are less than half the diameter of the largest bar in the section. A fraction number
of bars and number of spaces may be used.
Section (v) – This section is only used for max service design, but is not used in protected environments.
• Reinforcement is added to both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses less than 0.8 fsy.
53.6.14 Section 9.4.2 PT Slab Crack Control

• If the tensile stress in the concrete does not exceed 0.25 f′c then there is no need for crack control reinforcement and
none of the following applies.
• Section (a) with the 0.5 f′c limit is ignored because it does not give any guidance on how much reinforcement is
necessary. Section (b) is always used instead.
section considered.
• Reinforcement is added to try to keep mild steel stress changes on the tension face within the 150 MPa as the moment
changes from decompression to service level. In extremely rare circumstances (where the service reinforcement stress in
compression, even though the concrete stress exceeds 0.25 f′c ) this criterion is skipped.
• The decompression reinforcement stress is calculated by determining gross section decompression cross-section strains
and applying the strains to the reinforcement.
• Reinforcement is also added if necessary to provide a centre-to-centre reinforcement spacing of 500 mm or less. For this
requirement, each bonded tendon duct (that is in the tension zone based on gross section stresses) is considered to be equiv-
alent to a single mild steel bar (even if it is far from the tension face). In the spacing calculation, all bonded tendon ducts
are assumed to be optimally positioned to minimize the number of mild steel bars required. A fractional number of bars and
number of spaces may be specified to meet the spacing requirement.
418 RAM Concept

Chapter 53
53.6.15 Section 9.4.3.2 Shrinkage and Temperature

• This criterion is applied as part of the minimum reinforcement designer as it is independent of the magnitude of forces
upon a cross section.
• This criterion is applied to both beams and slabs, although its application to beams is not required by AS 3600.
• Reinforcement may be applied to both faces if the cross section is subject to both positive and negative moments and the
“tension face” reinforcement location is chosen.
section considered.
• The amount of reinforcement provided is equal to 0.75 (per 9.4.3.2(b)) times the amount specified by either 9.4.3.4(a)(i),
9.4.3.4(b)(i), or 9.4.3.4(c).
• For “protected” environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: As = (0.75)(1.75 – 2.5 σcp)(Ag)/1000
• For “normal” environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: As = (0.75)(3.5 – 2.5 σcp)(Ag)/1000
• For “corrosive” or “very corrosive” environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: As = (0.75)(6.0 – 2.5
σcp)(Ag)/1000
• For non-PT design strips and design sections, σcp is taken as zero.

RAM Concept 419

Chapter 53
420 RAM Concept

Chapter 54
54 BS 8110: 1997 Design
This chapter details RAM Concept’s implementation of BS8110: 1997 (including Amendments 1 and 2) and Technical
Report 43 (known as TR 43).

54.1 BS 8110 / TR 43 default loadings
This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new BS 8110 file.
As the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly noteworthy are discussed
here.
54.1.1 Default Pattern Loading Factors

To fulfill the requirements of considering “Adverse” and “Beneficial” loadings required in code section 2.4.3.1, RAM
Concept uses pattern loading factors. For dead loadings, RAM Concept uses pattern factors of 1.0 and 1.0/1.4, or 0.71. For
live loadings, RAM Concept uses Pattern factors of 1.0 and 0. See “About load pattern” on page 32 for further information.

54.2 BS 8110 / TR 43 Default Load Combinations
creates when you start a new BS 8110 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can remove or
modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from BS8110-1:
1997 (including Amendments 1 and 2), unless noted otherwise.
RAM Concept 421

Chapter 54
54.2.1 All Dead LC


this stage)
54.2.3 Service LC: D + (1.0 | 0.0) L

54.2.4 Ultimate LC: (1.4 | 1.0)D + (1.6 | 0.0) L


factors are:
Live (Storage) Loading: 2.76 (std & alt) [0.75(3.35) + 0.25(1.0)]
422 RAM Concept

Chapter 54

only generated for mat / raft foundations. The load factors used are:

54.2.8 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.2L + 1.2W (Service Wind Loading)
used are:
54.2.9 Ultimate Wind LC: D + 1.4W (Service Wind Loading)

54.2.10 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.4D + 1.4W (Service Wind Loading)

RAM Concept 423

Chapter 54
54.2.11 Accident LC
This load combination is intended to fulfill the requirements of code section 2.4.3.2 and TR 43 section 6.10.4. The load
factors used are:
Live Loading: 0.35 (std) (this is 1.05/3) and 0.0 (alt)
This load combination is used by the Accident Design Rule Set.
54.3 BS 8110 / BS 6399-1 live load factors

2.76 in the LT Uncracked Deflection LC.
54.4 BS 8110/TR43 material behaviours
when using BS 8110 / TR 43.
54.4.1 Concrete Behaviour

This elastic modulus of concrete is defined by the user in the materials window. The user can choose to use the code equation
of BS8110 Figure 2.1, an equation from another code, or a specified value.
When values are directly specified, two elastic modulus values must be specified:
When the BS 8110 code equation is selected the following values are used:
E ci = 5500 ( f cui ⁄ 1.5 )
E c = 5500 ( f cu ⁄ 1.5 )
Where
fcui = cube strength at stressing
fcu = 28 day cube strength
For calculations based on the “concrete section”, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress
or strain limits.
424 RAM Concept

Chapter 54
For detailed cross section analyses four different stress strain curves are used. All four stress-strain curves are parabolic-
linear curves as detailed in. The transition strain from the parabolic to the linear curve is at 2fc/Ec, where fc is the peak stress
and Ec is the elastic modulus at zero strain.
For initial stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress strain curve is 0.67fcui .
For service stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is
0.67fcu.
For strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is
0.67fcu / 1.5
For accident (localised damage) strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.67fcu / 1.3.
For ECR calculations, the maximum tension stress in concrete is assumed to be 0.6 f cu .
For service design crack width calculations and for service design cracked stress analyses, a tension stiffened concrete stress
strain curve is used:
Use of this curve is similar, but not technically equivalent, to the provisions of BS 8110-2:1985 Figure 3.1. A comparison of
the stress diagrams for the Code provision and the Concept implementation are shown below:
RAM Concept 425

Chapter 54
Figure 3.1 provision
Concept implementation
Since Concept’s crack width design does a cracked stress analysis (with a non tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve)
for the 0.8 fy provision, the concrete and rebar stress results for members on which a crack width design is done will
represent the range of results between the tension stiffened and the non tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve.
Concrete and rebar stress results for all other members will represent use the tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve
only.
54.4.2 (Untensioned) Reinforcement Behaviour

Untensioned reinforcement is modeled as a perfectly elastic/plastic material, as is shown in code figure 2.2. The elastic
modulus is that specified by the user in the materials window instead of the code-specified 200,000 N/mm2.
For strength considerations, a γ m of 1.05 is used.
For all other considerations (including accident strength) a γ m of 1.0 is used.
54.4.3 Bonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behaviour

Prestressed reinforcement is modeled as using a power formula. The curve is defined by four parameters:
Eps = the elastic modulus at zero strain (from materials window)
Fpy = the “yield” stress of the reinforcement (from materials window)
Fpu = the ultimate stress of the reinforcement (from materials window)
γ m = partial safety factor for materials
These four parameters are used to calculate the three parameters needed for the power formula, as described in Chapter 47,
“Section Design Notes”. The three parameters are:
E ps' = E ps
F py' = F py ⁄ γ m
F pu' = F pu ⁄ γ m
For all other considerations (including accident strength) a γ m of 1.0 is used.
426 RAM Concept

Chapter 54
54.4.4 Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behaviour

For “accident” strength conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendons have no stress.
For ultimate resistance moment calculations, RAM Concept's general approach to unbonded tendon stress-strain curves is
detailed in Chapter 47, “Section Design Notes”. For BS 8110-1997, the maximum unbonded tendon stress (fpb, called flimit
in Chapter 47, “Section Design Notes”) is defined by equation 52 and 0.7fpu.
When equation 52 is used in a cross section that contains multiple tendons, the following terms are used in the calculation:
l / d = length of an individual tendon divided by its depth
fpu Aps = sum of all the individual tendons' fpu multiplied by the vector component of their Aps.
fcu bd = minimum concrete cube strength multiplied by the compression face width and the depth to the centroid of
the vector component tendon area
For BS 8110: 1997, the value used as a strain reduction factor for unbonded tendons is: k = 5d / L
where
L = length of the unbonded tendon.
d = depth of the post-tensioning tendon (measured from furthest concrete face)
This is equivalent to assuming a neutral axis depth of 0.5 d and “zone of inelasticity” of ten times this length [see BS 8110
code text that accompanies equation 52].
In equation 52, RAM Concept needs to determine “d” and “b”. RAM Concept assumes that each tendon is placed on the
more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative
moment capacity calculations at each cross section). This assumption typically has no impact on the ultimate stress in the
tendon as when the tendon is on the “wrong” side of the cross section centroid, the stress in the tendon is less than fpb, due to
the small tension strains (possibly compression strains) in the cross section at the tendon elevation.
The tendon length “l” in equation 52 is (conservatively) not modified to assume multiple simultaneous inelastic zones.
54.5 BS 8110 / TR 43 code rule selection
The following explains how RAM Concept decides which BS 8110 / TR 43 code rules to apply based on the design strip
segment or design section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.

way slab).
or design section:
RAM Concept 427

Chapter 54
Design System RC PT - bonded PT - unbonded

tendons tendons
Beam 3.12.5, 4.12.2 3.12.5,
3.12.11.2.4 3.12.11.2.4,
4.12.2,
TR43/6.10.6
One-Way Slab 3.12.5, 4.12.2 3.12.5,

3.12.11.2.7 3.12.11.2.7,
4.12.2,
TR43 / 6.10.6
Two-Way Slab 3.12.5, TR43 / 6.10.6 TR43 / 6.10.6

3.12.11.2.7


Requirements
combination.
Old Files
information.
428 RAM Concept

Chapter 54
54.5.3 Initial Service (“Transfer”)

on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 4.3.5.1
4.3.5.2
One-Way Slab (none) 4.3.5.1
4.3.5.2
Two-Way Slab (none) 4.3.5.1
4.3.5.2
54.5.4 Service
on both faces).
members as follows:
Protected: Class 3 (0.2 mm crack)
Normal: Class 3 (0.1 mm crack)
Corrosive: Class 2
Very Corrosive: Class 1

Design System RC PT
Beam 3.12.11.2.1 3.12.11.2.1
4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
One-Way Slab 3.12.11.2.1 3.12.11.2.1
4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
Two-Way Slab 3.12.11.2.1 4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
RAM Concept 429

Chapter 54
54.5.5 Strength
factors).
faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 3.4.4 4.3.7
3.4.5 4.3.8
3.4.5.13* 4.3.9*
One-Way Slab 3.4.4 4.3.7
3.4.5 4.4.1 / 4.3.8
3.4.5.13* 4.3.9*
Two-Way Slab 3.4.4 4.3.7
3.4.5 4.4.1 / 4.3.8
3.4.5.13* 4.3.9*
Note: * - 3.4.5.13 and 4.3.9 are applied only if “beam” torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
54.5.6 Ductility
Design System RC PT
Beam 3.2.2.1 4.2.3.1
One-Way Slab 3.2.2.1 4.2.3.1
Two-Way Slab 3.2.2.1 4.2.3.1

54.5.7 Accident
• Strength calculations in accordance with code sections 2.4.3.2, 2.4.4.2 and TR 43 section 6.10.4 are performed if appro-
priate.
• Unbonded post-tensioning tendons are assumed to have zero stress.
430 RAM Concept

Chapter 54
faces).
• Reduced γ m factors are used in the strength calculations. For concrete in flexure, γ m = 1.3 and for reinforcement, γ m =
1.0. Note that for shear reinforcement calculations, the “0.95fyv” values are changed to “1.0fyv”.
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.9* (reduced γ m )
One-Way Slab (none) 4.3.7
4.3.8
4.3.9* (reduced γ m )
Two-Way Slab (none) (none)

Table 54-6 Accident rule mapping
Note: * - 4.3.9 is applied only if “beam” torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
54.6 BS8110 / TR43 code implementation
54.6.1 Section 3.2.2.1 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check)

Included code sections - 3.2.2.1 (item b).
Excluded code sections - 3.2.2.1 (rest).
RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies “Condition 2” as a limit to the neutral axis depth, thereby
ensuring ductility.
The neutral axis depth is limited to 0.6 times the effective depth.
54.6.2 Section 3.4.4 Design resistance moment of beams

Included code sections - 3.4.4.1.
Excluded code sections - 3.4.4.2 through 3.4.4.5 (these are optional simplifications of section 3.4.4.1).
Items a, b, c, d and e of section 3.4.4.1 are followed.
The optional 0.1fcu clause at the end of section 3.4.4.1 is not followed
Strain compatibility design is used. The maximum compressive strain is 0.0035. The simplified stress block of Figure 3.3 is
not used.
See the Materials section for the material stress strain curves ( γ m = 1.5 for concrete; γ m = 1.05 for reinforcement).
Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored.
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the stress-strain curve of each concrete block is used appropriately.
RAM Concept 431

Chapter 54
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section or design span
under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the required moment
simultaneously with the given axial force.
selecting the appropriate design section or design span properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
reinforced section. See Ductility in the previous section for applying ductility requirements.
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may exceed the
54.6.3 Section 3.4.5 Design shear resistance of beams

Included code sections - 3.4.5.1 to 3.4.5.4, 3.4.5.5 (partial), 3.4.5.12
Excluded code sections - 3.4.5.5 (partial), 3.4.5.6 - 3.4.5.11, 3.4.5.13 (considered separately)
See “Concrete “Core” Determination” on page 330 for calculation of bv.
vc is calculated per Note 2 of Table 3.8, including the fcu modifier term.
Longitudinal reinforcement designed by Minimum, Service and Strength designers is considered in the determination of As
used in the calculation of vc.
100As / bvd is taken as 0.15 minimum, to follow the “=0.15” in table 3.8.
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used.
The effective depth is determined by a cracked section analysis using the bending moment and axial force in place at time of
the shear being investigated. If all of the reinforcement in the cross section is in compression, then the effective depth is
calculated as the distance from the compression-most face to the furthest active reinforcement (in this case 100As / bvd is
taken as 0.15).
vc’ is calculated as the minimum of Equation 6a and Equation 6b, but never less than zero.
fyv is limited to 460 N/mm2.
Links are provided per Table 3.7
Links are only provided in the regions required by calculation, not the whole length of the beam.
Maximum allowed shear stress is the smaller of 5 N/mm2 and 0.8 f cu .
Spacing of links along the span is 0.75 d. The spacing across the span is not considered.
Bent up bars and regions close to supports are not considered.
Bottom loaded beams are not considered.
The anchorage of longitudinal bars is not checked.
Net axial forces are considered if the “Consider Net Axial…” checkbox is checked.
432 RAM Concept

Chapter 54
54.6.4 Section 3.4.5.13 Torsion

Included code sections - 2.4.1, 2.4.2, 2.4.4 (part) to 2.4.8
Excluded code sections - 2.4.3, 2.4.4 (part), 2.4.9, 2.4.10
Note: All code references in this section refer to BS 8110, Part 2

Only the “core” of a cross section is used for torsion design. See “Concrete “Core” Determination” on page 330.
Torsional shear stress vt is calculated using section 2.4.4.1 equation 2.
Maximum combined shear stress vtu is calculated by Table 2.3, note 2 including the y1 modification factor and compared to
vt. Any remaining capacity is used to calculate maximum remaining shear capacity.
Shear and torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with Table 2.4.
Area of torsion links and longitudinal reinforcement is calculated in accordance with section 2.4.7.
Maximum spacing of links is the least of x1, y1 /2 or 200 mm.
If torsion design is selected, at least minimum links will be provided at all locations.
Note: Assume γ in equations in table 2.3, note 2 is a misprint, and should instead be .
54.6.5 Section 3.5.4 Resistance moment of solid slabs

Included code sections - 3.5.4
Excluded code sections - none
See section 3.4.4 for additional details.
54.6.6 Section 3.5.5 Shear resistance of solid slabs

Included code sections - 3.5.5.1 to 3.5.5.3
Excluded code sections - none
Section 3.4.5 for is used to determine the shear resistance of solid slabs, except that Table 3.16 (with bv determined using the
“shear core”) is used in place of Table 3.7.
54.6.7 Section 3.12.5 Minimum areas of reinforcement in members

Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned members that are primarily bonded. Refer to “Determination of Bonded vs.
Unbonded Cross Sections” on page 436 for discussion.
Included code sections - 3.12.5.1 through 3.12.5.3
Excluded code sections - 3.12.5.4
Reinforcement is provided per Table 3.25, assuming that sections are rectangular and subject to flexure.
Reinforcement is provided such that:
2
A s f y ≥ ( 0.0013 ) ( 460N ⁄ mm )A c
A s ≥ ( 0.0013 )A c
RAM Concept 433

Chapter 54
For sections that are not declared as post-tensioned, all post-tensioned reinforcement is ignored.
For post-tensioned beams and post-tensioned one-way slabs, bonded post-tensioning that is on the tension-most side of the
cross section centroid, or is within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation, is considered to be equivalent to
un-tensioned 460 N/mm2 reinforcement, and will reduce the amount of un-tensioned reinforcement necessary. Bonded
tendons at an angle to the cross section will have vector components of their reinforcement areas considered toward the
requirement. This interpretation is somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements.
section considered.
Note: This section is never used for post-tensioned two-way slabs.
54.6.8 Section 3.12.11.2.1 Bar spacing

For all RC structures, and PT beams and one-way slabs, crack checks are performed per Part 2, 3.8.2 and crack widths are
limited to 0.3 mm. This crack width design supersedes the other requirements in this section.
RAM Concept’s implementation of the crack width calculations are detailed in “Part 2, Section 3.8.3”.
User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section
consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for
spacing calculations.
54.6.9 Section 3.12.11.2.4 Beam Bar spacing

Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned beams that are primarily bonded. Refer to “Determination of Bonded vs.
In beams, the clear distance between bars is limited to 300 mm. This code section is applied even though it is not required as
crack widths are controlled per 3.12.11.2.1.
In post-tensioned beams, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the cross section centroid, or
are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as equivalent to an un-tensioned bar. These
ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes - their plan locations are ignored. This implementation is
somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements.
54.6.10 Section 3.12.11.2.7 Slab Bar spacing

Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned slabs that are primarily bonded. Refer to “Determination of Bonded vs.
In RC slabs and PT one-way slabs, the clear distance between bars is limited to the smaller of 750 mm or 3 d. This code
section is applied even though it is not required as crack widths are controlled per 3.12.11.2.1.
In one-way slabs, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the cross section centroid, or are
within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as equivalent to an un-tensioned bar. These
ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes - their plan locations are ignored. This implementation is
434 RAM Concept

Chapter 54
54.6.11 Section 4.2.3.1 Redistribution of Moments (Ductility Check)

RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies item “c” as a limit to the neutral axis depth, thereby
ensuring ductility.
54.6.12 Section 4.3.4.2 Compressive stresses in concrete

For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to 0.33fcu. The
increase to 0.40fcu for certain portions of continuous members is not implemented.
For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete sections, at the concrete section
centroid are limited to 0.25fcu.
Two-way slab compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete sections, at the concrete section centroid are limited to
0.24fcu in the support zone and 0.33fcu in the span zone [TR 43 Table 2].
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used to determine the limit stress and the peak stress reported
may be approximate.
No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned.
Note: Assume the in TR 43 table 2 for compressive stresses is a misprint.
54.6.13 Section 4.3.4.3 Flexural tension stresses in concrete

The interaction of the BS 8110 requirements, the TR 43 requirements, the different classes and the use of bonded and
unbonded tendons makes describing the service tensile stress limits and requirements in text form very confusing. In some
circumstances, BS 8110 and TR 43 conflict, while in other circumstances neither one explicitly considers a particular
configuration.
Our implementation of these requirements is detailed in the table below. For each combination of tendon type, structure type
and class, two limit stresses and a reinforcement calculation are listed. The first limit stress is the maximum stress allowed if
no supplemental un-tensioned reinforcement is used. The second limit stress is the absolute maximum stress allowed. The
reinforcement calculation details how to calculate the required supplemental reinforcement when stresses exceed the first
stress limit.
RAM Concept 435

Chapter 54
Tendons Member Class Tension limit Absolute Reinforce-

Type without sup- tension ment cal-
plementary limit culation
reinforce-
ment
Bonded Beam 1 0 0 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded Beam 2 0.36 f cu 0.36 f cu 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded Beam 3 / 0.1 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded Beam 3 / 0.2 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded One-way 1 0 0 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded One-way 2 0.36 f cu 0.36 f cu 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded One-way 3 / 0.1 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded One-way 3 / 0.2 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded Two-way All TR 43 Table 2 TR 43 Table 2 TR 43,

6.10.5
Unbonded Beam 1 0 0 TR 43,

6.10.5
Unbonded Beam 2 0 0.36 f cu TR 43,

6.10.5
Unbonded Beam 3 / 0.1 mm 0 Tables 4.2 / TR 43,

4.3* 6.10.5
Unbonded Beam 3 / 0.2 mm 0 Tables 4.2 / TR 43,

4.3* 6.10.5
Unbonded One-way 1 0 0 TR 43,

6.10.5
Unbonded One-way 2 0 0.36 f cu TR 43,

6.10.5
Unbonded One-way 3 / 0.1 mm 0 Tables 4.2 / TR 43,

4.3* 6.10.5
Unbonded One-way 3 / 0.2 mm 0 Tables 4.2 / TR 43,

4.3* 6.10.5
Unbonded Two-way All TR 43 Table 2 TR 43 Table 2 TR 43,

6.10.5
Table 54-7 Flexural tension limit rule mapping
Note: * - When Tables 4.2/4.3 are used with unbonded tendons, the values for “grouted post-tensioned tendons” and a
0.1mm crack width are used.
54.6.14 Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections

For the purposes of this section, a cross section is considered as being “with bonded tendons” if the majority of the tendons
in the cross section (based on vector-component areas) are bonded. Cross sections that do not qualify as “with bonded
tendons” are considered as being “with unbonded tendons”. A cross section without tendons is therefore considered as being
“with unbonded tendons”.
436 RAM Concept

Chapter 54
54.6.15 Calculation of Supplemental Untensioned Reinforcement

Supplemental reinforcement is calculated when the “unreinforced” stress limits are exceeded, even for the structure types
and classes where it is not anticipated by BS 8110. For example, if a class 1 beam has tension stresses exceeding 0 N/mm2, it
will be marked as having failed the 4.3.4.3 criterion; supplemental reinforcement will still be calculated for the class 1 beam
even though the reinforcement cannot solve the failure.
54.6.16 Calculation of Supplemental Reinforcement Per 4.3.4.3(c)

The calculation of supplemental reinforcement per 4.3.4.2(c) is as follows:
Stress Difference = Actual Stress - Supplemental Reinforcement Limit Stress
As = Act [(Stress Difference) / (400 N/mm2)]
where Act = cross-sectional area of the concrete in the tension zone
section considered.
54.6.17 Calculation of Supplemental Reinforcement Per TR 43, 6.10.5

0.625Asfy = F1 for support regions of two-way slabs
0.625(Asfy + Apsfp) = F1 for span regions of two-way slabs
0.625(Asfy + Apsfp) = F1 for all regions of beams and one-way slabs
where
F1 = tensile force in concrete
As = area of un-tensioned reinforcement added
fy = yield strength of un-tensioned reinforcement
Aps = vector component area of bonded (grouted) tendons in tension zone
fp = tendon yield stress - tendon effective stress
It is possible that the added un-tensioned reinforcement will not be in the tension zone if a very large concrete cover is
specified.
Note: For span regions of two-way slabs, and all regions of one-way slabs, this implementation is somewhat different from
a literal code interpretation as it considers the possibility of a mix of bonded and unbonded tendons in a cross section. It also
may require additional un-tensioned reinforcement for a cross section with bonded tendons, which the code does not require.
section considered.
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used to determine the limit stresses and the peak stress
reported may be approximate.
54.6.18 Section 4.3.5.1 Design compressive stresses (Transfer)

For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to 0.5fci.
RAM Concept 437

Chapter 54
For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete sections, at the concrete section
centroid are limited to 0.4fci.
For two-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to 0.24fci in the support
region and 0.33fci in the span region [TR 43, 6.10.2].
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fci is used to determine the limit stress and the peak stress reported
may be approximate.
No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned
Note: Assume the in TR 43 table 2 for compressive stresses is a misprint.
54.6.19 Section 4.3.5.2 Design tensile stresses in flexure (Transfer)

For beams and one-way slabs, tensile stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to:
Class 1: 1 N/mm2
Class 2: 0.36 f ci .
Class 3: 0.36 f ci .
For Class 2 and 3 beams and one-way slabs, where the stresses above are exceeded, bonded reinforcement is provided as
follows [TR 43, 6.10.2/6.10.5]: As = Fi / (0.625fy)
For two-way slabs without supplemental untensioned reinforcement, tensile stresses in concrete, based on the concrete
section, are limited to 0 in the support region and 0.15 f ci in the span region [TR 43, 6.10.2].
For two-way slabs with supplemental untensioned reinforcement, tensile stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section,
are limited to 0.45 f ci . Bonded reinforcement is provided as follows [TR 43, 6.10.2/6.10.5]:
As = Fi / (0.625fy)
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fci is used to determine the limit stress and the peak stress reported
may be approximate.
Two way slabs can never exceed 0.45 f ci , while there is no limit for beam and one-way slabs that are class 2 or 3.
Note: Clause 4.3.5.2 is unclear on this stress limit for Class 2, as it states that additional reinforcement should be provided
“if necessary”. This is interpreted as reinforcement is only necessary if the tensile stress exceeds 0.36 f ci (since this stress
is less than the cracking stress). Hence the stress may exceed this limit if the additional reinforcement is provided.
54.6.20 Section 4.3.7 Ultimate limit state for beams in flexure

Included code sections - 4.3.7.1, 4.2.7.2, 4.3.7.3 (partial)
Excluded code sections - 4.3.7.3 (partial), 4.3.7.4
See section 3.4.4 for general approach. Note that if axial forces are included in the design (per the design span or design
section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in
many design sections, as is appropriate.
Post-tensioning Tendons are included. See “Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves” on page 321 for tendon stress-
strain curves.
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility.
438 RAM Concept

Chapter 54
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor approach (see detailed description in “Unbonded
Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves –General Theory” on page 322).
possible.
Equation 51 and Table 4.4 are not used.
54.6.21 Section 4.3.8 Design shear resistance of beams

Included code sections - 4.3.8.1 to 4.3.8.8, 4.3.8.10
Excluded code sections - 4.3.8.9
Vco is calculated per equation 54. The flange/web intersection is not checked.
Vcr is calculated per equation 55
The value of Vc is used as shown in the following table.
Moment Vc Implementation
M < Mo Vc = Vco
Vc = (stress)bvh
M > Mo Vc = min (Vco, Vcr)
and tension is on the Vc = (stress)bvh

“tension” face *
and no tension on Vc = (stress)bvh

the “tension” face *
d = dt (assumed)
As = 0 (none in “tension zone”)
Aps = 0 (none in “tension zone”)

Table 54-8 Vc rule mapping
Note: * The calculation of Mo uses only 80% of the stress due to prestress. This can produce the rare case where the section
is in reality uncracked and has a tension face different to that calculated with Mo. For the unusual case of M > Mo and the
section is actually uncracked (when considering the full prestress force) the conservative assumptions of column four are
made.
“d” is defined as the depth to the centroid of the tension force in the tension zone (including rebar and post-tensioning). This
is slightly different (and likely more rational) than the distance from the extreme compression fibre to the centroid of the
tendons as defined in the code.
“dt” is defined as the maximum depth to any longitudinal mild reinforcement, or the depth to the centroid of the tendons,
whichever is greater.
The vertical tendon force component is ignored.
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used in calculations.
RAM Concept 439

Chapter 54
bv is adjusted by considering any tendons in the shear core. The full width of unbonded tendons is deducted, and two-thirds
of the width of bonded tendons is deducted from bv.
For cross sections with multiple tendons, the fpu and fpe values used in the calculations are averaged.
vc is calculated per Note 2 of Table 3.8, including the fcu modifier term, with (Aps + As) used in place of As. See section 3.4.5
for detail of the implementation of this table.
When unbonded tendons are used, the value of vc is reduced by a factor of 0.9 [TR 43, 6.11.1].
Shear reinforcement is calculated per 4.3.8.6 to 4.3.8.8.
Link spacing is calculated per 4.3.8.10, with lateral spacing requirements ignored. The “web thickness” used in the
calculations is the same as the shear core width - this may be incorrect if the core width is made up of multiple webs. In such
cases, multiple design sections or design strips can be used; each containing only one web.
Links are only provided in the regions required by calculation, not the whole length of the beam.
54.6.22 Section 4.3.9 Torsion

See section 3.4.5.13 for details.
54.6.23 Section 4.4.1 / 4.3.8 Slabs (shear)

One-way shear (not punching shear) design of prestressed slabs is calculated per section 4.3.8 with one exception. Links are
not required unless V is greater than or equal to Vc.
54.6.24 Section 4.12.2 Limitation on area of prestressing tendons

Un-stressed reinforcement is added to provide an ultimate moment capacity greater than the cracking moment.
The cracking is assumed to be top (hogging moment) or bottom (sagging moment) based on the “Min. Reinforcement
Only sections within 1/6 of the span length from supports or 1/6 of the span length from midspan are checked, as these are
considered as the likely locations of first cracking of concrete.
See ““Cracking Moment” Used in Design Calculations” on page 329 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking moment
(note that the 1.2 factor is not used in BS 8110)
The cracking stress is 0.6 f cu . For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the maximum fcu for the cross section is
used.
54.6.25 Part 2, Section 3.8.3 Assessment of Crack Widths

Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to ensure that the reinforcement stresses remain below 0.8fy.
Crack widths are calculated per BS 8110 Part 2, equation 12. A concrete stress strain curve that approximates tension
stiffening is used - see discussion on “Concrete Behaviour” on page 424. Creep is not considered.
Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to keep crack widths at or below 0.3mm (per 3.2.4.2).
This criterion is applied to two-way slabs, but equation 12 will not provide accurate crack width predictions for two way
slabs when wide design strip segments or wide design sections are used.
440 RAM Concept

Chapter 54
The crack-limiting capabilities of appropriately placed bonded post-tensioning tendons are considered, and the balance
loading will be considered if included in the load combinations.
In determining the effectiveness of bonded tendons, equation 12 can be manipulated as follows:
Crack width = (3acrεm) / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)]
= εm s c
sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)] = crack spacing
RAM Concept assumes the maximum crack spacing is 3(h-x).
RAM Concept assumes that each bar and bonded tendon is placed horizontally to give the same crack spacing. Bars and
tendons that - due to their elevation - cannot provide the crack spacing are ignored.
sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / ht ] where ht = (h-x) = height of tension zone
sc = 3acr ht / [ht +2(acr - cmin) ]
sc [ht +2(acr - cmin) ] = 3acr ht
sc ht +2scacr - 2sccmin = 3acr ht
sc ht - 2sccmin = 3acr ht - 2scacr
sc ht - 2sccmin = acr (3ht - 2sc)
acr = (sc ht - 2sccmin) / (3ht - 2sc)
2 2
However, a cr = s b + c min , where sb = half the horizontal spacing between reinforcement
2 2
s b + c min = ( s c h t – 2s c c min ) ⁄ ( 3h t – 2s c )
2 2 2 2
s b + c min = ( s c h t – 2s c c min ) ⁄ ( 3h t – 2s c )
2 2 2 2
s b = ( s c h t – 2s c c min ) ⁄ ( 3h t – 2s c ) – c min
2 2 2
sb = ( s c h t – 2s c c min ) ⁄ ( 3h t – 2s c ) – c min
Using this final equation, RAM Concept determines a spacing for each bar or bonded tendon that is effective in controlling
cracking. RAM Concept iteratively determines the sc that gives the sbs that sum to the tension face width.
For bonded tendons, the cover cmin is assumed to be the cover to the centroid of the tendon, and the “bar” diameter is
assumed to be zero. Both of these assumptions are conservative.
54.6.26 TR 43 / Section 6.10.6 Minimum un-tensioned reinforcement

Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned beams or one-way slabs that are primarily bonded. Refer to “Determination
of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections” on page 436 for discussion.
For post-tensioned beams and one-way slabs the requirements of 3.12.5 and 3.12.11.2 are also applied. (Note that “Table
3.27” in TR 43 refers to the 1985 BS 8110 - this table has been renumbered 3.25 in the 1997 edition). This interpretation is
For post-tensioned two-way slabs with bonded or unbonded tendons, un-tensioned reinforcement is provided in support
regions as follows:
RAM Concept 441

Chapter 54
As = 0.00075Ac.
For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied to the first cross section at a support if the span ratio is less than 0.2.
For design sections, this criteria is applied when the span ratio is less than 0.2.
The 300mm spacing requirement is not checked.
The recommendations for slab edge reinforcement are not implemented.
section considered.
54.6.27 Punching shear design

EC2 (EN 1992-2004) punching design is used instead of BS8110. Refer to Chapter 57, “Punching Shear Design Notes”.
442 RAM Concept

Chapter 55
55 IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
This chapter details RAM Concept’s implementation of IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980.

55.1 IS 456 / IS 1343 default loadings
This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new IS 456 file. As
the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly noteworthy are discussed
here.

55.2 IS 456 Default Load Combinations
creates when you start a new IS 456 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are given. You can remove or
modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load combinations are from IS 456 : 2000
unless noted otherwise.
55.2.1 All Dead LC


RAM Concept 443

Chapter 55
this stage)
55.2.3 Service LC: D + (1.0 | 0.0) L

55.2.4 Ultimate LC: (1.5 | 1.0)D + (1.5 | 0.0) L


factors are:
Note: 100% of live loads are assumed sustained for storage, and 70% for all other live loads in accordance with recommen-
dations in SP-24-1983 clause 35.4.1.
55.2.6 Service Wind LC: D + 0.8L + 0.8W (Service Wind Loading)

only generated for mat / raft foundations. The load factors used are:
444 RAM Concept

Chapter 55

55.2.8 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.2L + 1.2W (Service Wind Loading)
used are:


55.2.11 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.8L + 0.8E (Service Seismic Loading)

currently only generated for mat / raft foundations. Only the live load percentages specified in Table 8 of IS 1893 (Part 1):
2002 are applied. 25% of the Live (Unreducible) and Live (Reducible) loads are applied, and 50% of the Live (Storage)
loads are applied. No Live (Roof) loads are applied. These percentages are incorporated into the following combinations.
The load factors used are:
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.2 (std & alt) [0.25(0.8)]
RAM Concept 445

Chapter 55
Live (Storage) Loading: 0.4 (std & alt) [0.5(0.8)]
55.2.12 Service Seismic LC: D + E (Service Seismic Loading)

55.2.13 Ultimate Seismic LC: 1.2D + 1.2L + 1.2E (Service Seismic Loading)
This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic and live loads. Only the live load
percentages specified in Table 8 of IS 1893 (Part 1): 2002 are applied. 25% of the Live (Unreducible) and Live (Reducible)
loads are applied, and 50% of the Live (Storage) loads are applied. No Live (Roof) loads are applied. These percentages are
incorporated into the following combinations. The load factors used are:
Live (Storage) Loading: 0.6 (std & alt) [0.5(1.2)]
55.2.14 Ultimate Seismic LC: 0.9D + 1.5E (Service Seismic Loading)

55.2.15 Ultimate Seismic LC: 1.5D + 1.5E (Service Seismic Loading)

446 RAM Concept

Chapter 55
55.3 IS 875 (Part 2) live load factors

• storage loads on a Live (Storage) layer if you would like their effects to be reducible for beams (only), and on a Live
(Unreducible) layer if you do not want their effects to be reduced for any member.
2.76 in the LT Uncracked Deflection LC.
55.4 IS 456 material behaviours
when using IS 456/1343.
55.4.1 Concrete Behaviour

This elastic modulus of concrete is defined by the user in the materials window. The user can choose to use the code equation
of clause 6.2.3.1, an equation from another code, or a specified value.
When values are directly specified, two elastic modulus values must be specified:
When the IS 456 code equation is selected the following values are used:
E ci = 5000 f cui
E c = 5000 f cu
Where
fcui = cube strength at stressing
fcu = 28 day cube strength
For calculations based on the “concrete section”, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no stress
or strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses three different stress strain curves are used. All three stress-strain curves are parabolic-
linear curves as detailed in IS456 Fig 21. The transition strain from the parabolic to the linear curve is at 0.002.
For initial stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress strain curve is 0.67fcui .
For service stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.67fcu.
For strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is 0.67fcu / 1.5
RAM Concept 447

Chapter 55
Note: Calculations on the gross cross-section always use the Ec values calculated above, while the cracked cross-section
strain analyses use the stress strain curve of IS 456 Fig 21. The elastic modulus for these two conditions will therefore be
different for most concrete strengths. This may have an effect on initial concrete strains and ECR calculations.
For service design crack width calculations and for service design cracked stress analyses, a tension stiffened concrete stress
strain curve is used:
Use of this curve is similar, but not technically equivalent, to the provisions of IS 456 Annex F, Fig. 28. A comparison of the
stress diagrams for the Code provision and the Concept implementation are shown below:
Fig. 28 Provision
448 RAM Concept

Chapter 55
Concept Implementation
Since Concept’s crack width design does a cracked stress analysis (with a non tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve)
for the 0.8 fy provision, the concrete and rebar stress results for members on which a crack width design is done will
represent the range of results between the tension stiffened and the non tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve.
Concrete and rebar stress results for all other members will represent use the tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve
only.
55.4.2 (Untensioned) Reinforcement Behaviour
Untensioned reinforcement with a yield stress less than or equal to 250 N/mm2 is modeled as a perfectly elastic/plastic
material as is shown in code figure 23B. All other untensioned reinforcement uses the Cold Worked Deformed Bar curve as
is shown in code figure 23A. The elastic modulus is that specified by the user in the materials window instead of the code-
specified 200,000 N/mm2.
For all other considerations a γ m of 1.0 is used.
55.4.3 Bonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behaviour

Prestressed reinforcement is modeled as using a power formula. The curve is defined by four parameters:
Eps = the elastic modulus at zero strain (from materials window)
Fpy = the “yield” stress of the reinforcement (from materials window)
Fpu = the ultimate stress of the reinforcement (from materials window)
γ m = partial safety factor for materials
These four parameters are used to calculate the three parameters needed for the power formula, as described in Chapter 47,
“Section Design Notes”. The three parameters are:
E ps' = E ps
F py' = F py ⁄ γ m
F pu' = F pu ⁄ γ m
RAM Concept 449

Chapter 55
For all other considerations a γ m of 1.0 is used.
This curve is similar but slightly different than the Stress Relieved Curve as shown in IS : 1343 - 1980 Figure 5A for normal
prestressing materials, assuming this curve depicts strain percentage and not actual strains.
55.4.4 Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behaviour

For ultimate resistance moment calculations, RAM Concept's general approach to unbonded tendon stress-strain curves is
detailed in Chapter 47, “Section Design Notes”. For IS 456-2000, the maximum unbonded tendon stress (called flimit in
Chapter 47, “Section Design Notes”) is defined by IS 1343-1980 Appendix B, Table 12. For IS 1343: 1980, the value used as
a strain reduction factor for unbonded tendons is 0.1.
RAM Concept assumes that each tendon is placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting
stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section). This assumption
typically has no impact on the ultimate stress in the tendon as when the tendon is on the “wrong” side of the cross section
centroid, the stress in the tendon is less than fpb, due to the small tension strains (possibly compression strains) in the cross
section at the tendon elevation.
55.5 IS 456 code rule selection
The following explains how RAM Concept decides which IS456 code rules to apply based on the design strip segment or
design section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.

way slab).
or design section:
450 RAM Concept

Chapter 55
Design System RC PT
Beam 26.5.1.1 (456) 18.6.3.3 (1343)
One-Way Slab 26.5.2.1 (456) 18.6.3.3 (1343)
Two-Way Slab 26.5.2.1 (456) 18.6.3.3 (1343)
31.7.1 (456) 31.7.1 (456)



Requirements
combination.
Old Files
rule set added. See “Rebuilding load combinations” on page 35 of Chapter 11, “Specifying Load Combinations” for further
information.
55.5.3 Initial Service (“Transfer”)

on both faces).
RAM Concept 451

Chapter 55
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 22.8.2.1 (1343)
22.8.2.2 (1343)
One-Way Slab (none) 22.8.2.1 (1343)
22.8.2.2 (1343)
Two-Way Slab (none) 22.8.2.1 (1343)
22.8.2.2 (1343)
55.5.4 Service
on both faces).
• The design strip segment or design section property “Environment” is used to determine the “Type” of post-tensioned
members as follows:
Protected: Type 3 (0.2 mm crack)
Normal: Type 3 (0.1 mm crack)
Corrosive: Type 2
Very Corrosive: Type 1
452 RAM Concept

Chapter 55
Design System RC PT
Beam 26.3.3/Annex F (456) 22.7.1 (1343)
22.8.1.1 (1343)
22.8.1.2 (1343)
26.3.3/Annex F (456) (except Type 1)
One-Way Slab 26.3.3/Annex F (456) 22.7.1 (1343)
22.8.1.1 (1343)
22.8.1.2 (1343)
Two-Way Slab 26.3.3/Annex F (456) 22.7.1 (1343)
22.8.1.1 (1343)
22.8.1.2 (1343)

Note: Crack width design is done on all post-tensioned members except Type 1. This is required by IS 1343 11.3.2 and IS
456 26.3.3. Since the spacing provisions of 26.3.3 are not specifically applied, detailed crack width design is performed for
all members in accordance with 26.3.3. Crack width design is not required for Type 1 members as by definition they have no
tensile stresses, and thus no cracking. See code implementation for additional information.
55.5.5 Strength
factors).
faces).
RAM Concept 453

Chapter 55
Design System RC PT
Beam 38 (456) 22.1 (1343)
40 (456) 22.4 (1343)
41 (456) 22.5 (1343)
26.5.1.5 - 26.5.1.7 (456) 18.6.3.2c (1343)
One-Way Slab 38 (456) 22.1 (1343)
40 (456) 22.4 (1343)
41 (456) 22.5 (1343)
26.5.1.5 - 26.5.1.7 (456) 18.6.3.2c (1343)
Two-Way Slab 38 (456) 22.1 (1343)
40 (456) 22.4 (1343)
41 (456) 22.5 (1343)
26.5.1.5 - 26.5.1.7 (456) 18.6.3.2c (1343)

Note: * - IS 456 Clause 41 and IS 1343 Clause 22.5 are applied only if “beam” torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
55.5.6 Ductility
Design System RC PT
Beam 37.1.1d (456) 21.1.1d (1343)
38.1f (456)
One-Way Slab 37.1.1d (456) 21.1.1d (1343)
38.1f (456)
Two-Way Slab 37.1.1d (456) 21.1.1d (1343)
38.1f (456)
454 RAM Concept

Chapter 55
55.6 IS 456 code implementation
55.6.1 Section 26.5.1.1

Included code sections - item a.
Excluded code sections - item b.
The 0.85bd/fy criterion is implemented
b is taken the core width (see “Concrete “Core” Determination” on page 330). If the core width is zero (there is no core),
then b is taken as the width of the section.
This provision is applied to beams only.
The provisions of item b (Maximum reinforcement) are not considered.
section considered.
55.6.2 Section 26.5.2.1

Reinforcement is provided in accordance with 0.12 percent requirement. This assumes that high strength deformed bars have
been provided.
This provision is applied to slabs only.
section considered.
55.6.3 Section 31.7.1

The spacing between bars is limited to a maximum of 2 times the slab thickness.
This provision is applied to slabs only.
If the member is designated as post-tensioned, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the
cross section centroid, or are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as equivalent to
an un-tensioned bar. These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes - their plan locations are ignored.
This implementation is somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements.
55.6.4 Section 37 / 38 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check)

Included code sections - 37.1.1 (item d), 38.1 (item f).
Excluded code sections - 37 (rest), 38 (rest).
RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies 37.1.1 (item d) as a limit to the neutral axis depth,
thereby ensuring ductility.
RAM Concept 455

Chapter 55
0.0035
The neutral axis depth is further limited to ----------------------------- in accordance with 38.1 item f;
εy
0.0055 + ------
γm
where ε y = maximum reinforcement yield strain of all reinforcement in the cross section in tension.
55.6.5 Section 38 Design resistance moment of beams

Included code sections - 38.1.
Excluded code sections - none.
Items a, b, c, d and e of section 38.1 are followed. Item f is applied under “Ductility” design.
Strain compatibility design is used. The maximum compressive strain is 0.0035.
See the Materials section for the material stress strain curves ( γ m = 1.5 for concrete; γ m = 1.15 for reinforcement).
Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored.
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the stress-strain curve of each concrete block is used appropriately.
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section or design span
under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to provide the required moment
simultaneously with the given axial force.
selecting the appropriate design section or design span properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
reinforced section. See Ductility in the previous section for applying ductility requirements.
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by Concept may exceed the amount
necessary. This is because Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater than 20%, which would be necessary
to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement Concept selects is that necessary for axial force equilibrium in the
cross section.
55.6.6 Section 40 Design shear resistance

Included code sections - 40.1 (partial), 40.2, 40.3, 40.4, 26.5.1.5, 26.5.1.6
Excluded code sections - 40.1.1, 40.5
See “Concrete “Core” Determination” on page 330 for calculation of b.
τ c is calculated per Table 19, using the equation in SP 24 (1983).
used in the calculation of τ c .
100As / bd is taken as 0.15 minimum and 3.0 as a maximum in accordance with the “<=0.15” and “3.00 and above” in table
19.
vc is calculated per the equation in SP:24 - 1983 to calculate values from Table 19.
456 RAM Concept

Chapter 55
For one-way shear in slabs, the design shear strength is increased by the depth factor in accordance with 40.2.1.1
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used.
The effective depth is determined by a cracked section analysis using the bending moment and axial force in place at time of
the shear being investigated. If all of the reinforcement in the cross section is in compression, then the effective depth is
calculated as the distance from the compression-most face to the furthest active reinforcement (in this case 100As / bd is
taken as 0.15).
fy is limited to 415 N/mm2.
Stirrups are provided per 26.5.1.5, 26.5.1.6, and 40.4
In beams, at least minimum stirrups will be provided at all locations.
Maximum allowable shear stress is determined in accordance with Table 20. Slabs use 1/2 the values in Table 20 in
accordance with 40.2.3.1.
Maximum spacing of stirrups along the span is the smaller of 0.75 d and 300 mm.
The spacing across the span is not considered.
Bent up bars and regions close to supports are not considered.
The anchorage of longitudinal bars is not checked.
Enhanced shear strength close to supports is not considered.
Beams of varying depth are not considered.
Net axial compression is considered per 40.2.2 if the “Consider Net Axial…” checkbox is checked.
Bottom loaded beams are not considered.
55.6.7 Section 41 Torsion

Included code sections - 41.1, 41.3, 41.4, 26.5.1.5, 26.5.1.6, 26.5.1.7
Excluded code sections - 41.2
Only the “core” of a cross section is used for torsion design. See “Concrete “Core” Determination” on page 330.
• with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs) and capacity and reinforcement scaled back up by the
number of ribs (* num ribs).
• code provisions are not applicable to multiple ribs, so to get a more exact calculation, use a separate design section or
design strip for each rib.
Equivalent shear Ve is calculated per clause 41.3.1.
Equivalent bending moment Me1 is calculated per clause 41.4.2.
Shear and torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with clause 26.5.1.6 and 26.5.1.7.
Area of torsion reinforcement and longitudinal reinforcement is calculated in accordance with clause 41.4.
Maximum spacing of links is the least of x1, (x1 + y1)/4 or 300 mm.
If torsion design is selected, at least minimum stirrups will be provided at all locations.
RAM Concept 457

Chapter 55
55.6.8 Annex F Assessment of Crack Widths

Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to ensure that the reinforcement stresses remain below 0.8fy.
Crack widths are calculated per Annex F. A concrete stress strain curve that approximates tension stiffening is used - see
discussion on “Concrete Behaviour” on page 447. Creep is not considered.
Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to keep crack widths at or below the following limits:
Environment:
• Protected - 0.3 mm
• Normal - 0.3 mm
• Corrosive - 0.2 mm
• Very corrosive - 0.1 mm
These limits are specified in IS 456 clause 35.3.2. They are applied to post-tensioned members as well (except type 1) even
though they do not match the limiting crack width values for Type 3 in Table 8. This results in a crack width limit design to
0.3 mm for Type 3 members and a crack width limit design to 0.2 mm for Type 2 members. This crack width design is
required by IS 1343 11.3.2 and IS 456 26.3.3 since bar spacing limits have not been specifically applied.
This criterion is applied to two-way slabs, but will not provide accurate crack width predictions for two way slabs when wide
design strip segments or wide design sections are used.
The crack-limiting capabilities of appropriately placed bonded post-tensioning tendons are considered, and the balance
loading will be considered if included in the load combinations.
In determining the effectiveness of bonded tendons, the equation can be manipulated as follows:
Crack width = (3acrεm) / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)]
= εm s c
sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)] = crack spacing
Concept assumes the maximum crack spacing is 3(h-x).
Concept assumes that each bar and bonded tendon is placed horizontally to give the same crack spacing. Bars and tendons
that - due to their elevation - cannot provide the crack spacing are ignored.
sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / ht] where ht = (h-x) = height of tension zone
sc = 3acr ht / [ht +2(acr - cmin)]
sc [ht +2(acr - cmin)] = 3acr ht
sc ht +2scacr - 2sccmin = 3acr ht
sc ht - 2sccmin = 3acr ht - 2scacr
sc ht - 2sccmin = acr (3ht - 2sc)
acr = (sc ht - 2sccmin) / (3ht - 2sc)
2 2
However, a cr = s b + c min , where sb = half the horizontal spacing between reinforcement.
Using this final equation, Concept determines a spacing for each bar or bonded tendon that is effective in controlling
cracking. Concept iteratively determines the sc that gives the sbs that sum to the tension face width.
For bonded tendons, the cover cmin is assumed to be the cover to the centroid of the tendon, and the “bar” diameter is
assumed to be zero. Both of these assumptions are conservative.
458 RAM Concept

Chapter 55
55.7 IS 1343 code implementation
55.7.1 Section 18.6.3.2c Minimum transverse reinforcement

When the depth of the web is more than 4 times the thickness of the web, 0.1 percent reinforcement is provided in
accordance with 18.6.3.2c.
The spacing limit related to the clear depth of the web is not implemented. This spacing, however, should normally be
comparable to the maximum spacing of 0.75 dt applied in other shear provisions.
55.7.2 Section 18.6.3.3 Minimum longitudinal reinforcement

Reinforcement is provided in accordance with 0.15 percent requirement. This assumes that high strength deformed bars have
been provided.
Any bonded or unbonded tendon areas are applied to this provision before calculating any required untensioned
reinforcement. Only tendons on the tension side (as determined by the minimum reinforcement setting) or within 10% of the
cross section depth are used.
section considered.
55.7.3 Section 18.6.3.3 Limitation on area of prestressing tendons

Un-stressed reinforcement is added to provide an ultimate moment capacity greater than the cracking moment.
The cracking is assumed to be top (hogging moment) or bottom (sagging moment) based on the “Min. Reinforcement
Only sections within 1/6 of the span length from supports or 1/6 of the span length from midspan are checked, as these are
considered as the likely locations of first cracking of concrete.
See ““Cracking Moment” Used in Design Calculations” on page 329 for a theoretical discussion of the cracking moment
(note that the 1.2 factor is not used in IS 1343)
55.7.4 Section 21.1.1 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check)

RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies item “d” as a limit to the neutral axis depth, thereby
ensuring ductility.
55.7.5 Section 22.1 Ultimate limit state for beams in flexure

See section 38 for general approach.
Note that if axial forces are included in the design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-
tensioning forces into supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate.
See “Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves” on page 321 for tendon stress-strain curves.
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility. If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section
under consideration, then vector components of the cross section strains and the tendon stresses are used.
RAM Concept 459

Chapter 55
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor approach (see detailed description in “Unbonded
Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves –General Theory” on page 322).
possible.
55.7.6 Section 22.4 Design shear resistance of beams

Vco is calculated per section 22.4.1. The flange/web intersection is not checked.
Vcr is calculated per section 22.4.2.
The value of Vc is used as shown in the following table.
Moment Vc Implementation
M < Mo Vc = Vco
Vc = (stress)bh
and tension is on the Vc = (stress)bh

“tension” face *
and no tension on Vc = (stress)bh

the “tension” face *
d = dt (assumed)
As = 0 (none in “tension zone”)
Aps = 0 (none in “tension zone”)

Table 55-6 Vc rule mapping
Note: * The calculation of Mo uses only 80% of the stress due to prestress. This can produce the rare case where the section
is in reality uncracked and has a tension face different to that calculated with Mo. For the unusual case of M > Mo and the
section is actually uncracked (when considering the full prestress force) the conservative assumptions of column four are
made.
“d” is defined as the depth to the centroid of the tension force in the tension zone (including rebar and post-tensioning). This
is slightly different (and likely more rational) than the distance from the extreme compression fibre to the centroid of the
tendons as defined in the code.
“dt” is defined as the maximum depth to any longitudinal mild reinforcement, or the depth to the centroid of the tendons,
whichever is greater.
The vertical tendon force component is ignored.
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used in calculations.
Longitudinal reinforcement designed by Minimum, Service and Strength designers is considered in the determination of Ap
b is adjusted by considering any tendons in the shear core. The full width of unbonded tendons is deducted, and two-thirds of
the width of bonded tendons is deducted from b.
For cross sections with multiple tendons, the fpu and fpe values used in the calculations are averaged.
Longitudinal unstressed reinforcement is converted into equivalent area of prestressed reinforcement to determine Ap used
in Table 6.
460 RAM Concept

Chapter 55
When calculating fpe/fpu, fpe is taken as the effective prestressing force divided by the equivalent area of prestressing steel.
vc is calculated per the equation in SP : 24 - 1983 to calculate values from Table 6.
For slabs, Table 6 values are modified by IS 456 40.2.1.1 as appropriate.
Maximum shear stress is in accordance with Table 7. For slabs, this value is adjusted in accordance with IS 456 40.2.3.1.
Shear reinforcement is calculated per 22.4.3.
Minimum shear reinforcement is provided at all locations in beams.
Minimum reinforcement is provided in slabs when Vu > Vc.
The “web thickness” used in the calculations is the same as the shear core width - this may be incorrect if the core width is
made up of multiple webs. In such cases, multiple design sections or design strips can be used; each containing only one
web.
55.7.7 Section 22.5 Torsion

Included code sections - 22.5.1, 22.5.3.1, 22.5.3.2, 22.5.4, 22.5.5 (item a and b)
Excluded code sections - 22.5.2, 22.5.3.3, 22.5.5 (item c and d)
Only the “core of a cross section is used for torsion design. See “Concrete “Core” Determination” on page 330.
• with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs) and capacity and reinforcement scaled back up by the
number of ribs (* num ribs).
• code provisions are not applicable to multiple ribs, so to get a more exact calculation, use a separate design section or
design strip for each rib.
Equivalent bending moment Me1 and Me2 are calculated per sections 22.5.3.1 and 22.5.3.2.
Transverse bending moment Me3 is calculated and reported in the auditor per 22.5.3.3, but no transverse bending design is
performed.
Shear and torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with sections 22.5.4.1, 22.5.4.2, 22.5.4.3 and 22.5.4.4. In the
shear equation for Av in section 22.5.4.3, “dt” is substituted for “dl” to align this equation with the shear equation in 22.4.3.2
when no torsion is present. This change may not be conservative, but is consistent with the publication mentioned in the note
below.
Distribution of torsion reinforcement is calculated in accordance with section 22.5.5.
Maximum spacing of torsion stirrups is the least of x1, (x1 + y1)/4 or 200 mm.
If torsion design is selected, at least minimum stirrups will be provided at all locations.
Note: There is a typographical error in the code section 22.5.4.2 for the calculation of Ve1. The term in the numerator should
be ec, not e as shown in the code. Also, equation for Tc in section 22.5.4.1 is typographically incorrect. Refer to publications
“Design of Prestressed Concrete Beams Subjected to Combined Bending, Shear, and Torsion” by Rangan and Hall, ACI
Journal March 1975 and “Strength of Rectangular Prestressed Concrete Beams in Combined Torsion, Bending, and Shear”
by Rangan and Hall, ACI Journal April 1973 for details.
55.7.8 Section 22.7.1 Flexural tension stresses in concrete

Hypothetical flexural tensile stress limits are taken from section 22.7.1.
RAM Concept 461

Chapter 55
For type 2 members, the temporary service loads adjustment is not taken.
For bonded and unbonded cross sections, Type 3 hypothetical flexural tensile stress limits are taken from Table 8 as
“Grouted post-tensioned tendons”.
The values in Table 8 are multiplied by the Depth Factors in Fig. 6 as necessary.
For each section, two limit stresses are calculated. The first limit stress is the maximum stress allowed if no supplemental
un-tensioned reinforcement is used. The second limit stress is the absolute maximum stress allowed. The supplemental un-
tensioned reinforcement is calculated in accordance with the Note under Table 8. Cross sections “with unbonded tendons”
(see “Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections” on page 462) are classified as “other members” when
calculating supplemental reinforcement.
Note: When calculating supplemental reinforcement per the Note under Table 8, the additional reinforcement is calculated
as a percentage of the cross-sectional area of the concrete in the tension zone as is done in BS 8110. This is different than a
literal reading of the IS 1343 code.
55.7.9 Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections

For the purposes of this section, a cross section is considered as being “with bonded tendons” if the majority of the tendons
in the cross section (based on vector-component areas) are bonded. Cross sections that do not qualify as “with bonded
tendons” are considered as being “with unbonded tendons”. A cross section without tendons is therefore considered as being
“with unbonded tendons”.
55.7.10 Calculation of Supplemental Untensioned Reinforcement

Supplemental reinforcement is calculated when the “unreinforced” stress limits are exceeded, even for the structure types
where it is not anticipated by IS 1343. For example, if a type 1 beam has tension stresses exceeding 0 N/mm2, it will be
marked as having failed the 22.7 criterion; supplemental reinforcement will still be calculated for the type 1 beam even
though the reinforcement cannot solve the failure.
The calculation of supplemental reinforcement per Note, Table 8 is as follows:
Stress Difference = Actual Stress - Supplemental Reinforcement Limit Stress
As = Act [(Stress Difference) / (100 * σ )]
where Act = cross-sectional area of the concrete in the tension zone
and σ = 3 N/mm2 for unbonded cross sections and 4 N/mm2 for bonded cross sections
section considered.
55.7.11 Section 22.8.1 Design compressive stresses

Compressive stresses in concrete based on the concrete section are limited to the values in Fig. 7 for Zone I. Zone II values
are never applied.
Direct compression stresses at the section centroid are limited to 0.8 times the value determined from Fig. 7.
55.7.12 Section 22.8.2 Design compressive stresses (Transfer)

Compressive stresses in concrete based on the cracked concrete section at transfer of prestress are limited to the values in
Fig. 8 for post-tensioned work.
If the limit stress is exceeded then reinforcement is added as required to limit the concrete stress; depending on the bending
moment and axial forces, either compression reinforcement, tension reinforcement or both will be added.
462 RAM Concept

Chapter 55
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the section limiting stress is reported as the smallest (absolute value) stress
limit of all of the individual concrete areas.
The average of the top and bottom concrete stress in the cracked section is limited to the direct compressive stress limit of
0.8 times the value from Fig. 8.
55.7.13 Punching shear design

RAM Concept 463

Chapter 55
464 RAM Concept

Chapter 56
56 Estimating deflections
Note: This chapter presents various methods of estimating deflections that vary in accuracy and complexity. Although we
suggest you read the whole chapter, you will probably find “Detailed deflection predictions using strip based deflection plots”
on page 474, and “Using strip based deflection plots for slabs” on page 475 the most useful for a quick and reasonably
accurate estimation of long term deflections. The various methods are summarized in “Summary of RAM Concept’s deflection
capabilities” on page 480.
The calculation of concrete floor deflections is complicated. There are many issues to consider, and even with adequate
consideration and calculation, any deflection prediction should only be considered an estimate.
Deflections are affected by:

• member size (section properties)
• concrete modulus of elasticity
• reinforcement (unstressed and post-tensioning)
• applied loads
• load history
• cracking
• shrinkage
• creep
• dynamic effects (vibrations)
Historically, designers have usually calculated deflections of concrete members using elastic methods with modifications
made for some of the factors listed above.
Most post-tensioned floors have been designed to minimize cracking and so elastic deflection calculation methods have
generally been acceptable. The increasing usage of partial prestress methods has made deflection calculations more
important for post-tensioned design. Reinforced floors usually undergo more extensive cracking than post-tensioned floors,
which is one reason why they need more concrete section, and more consideration of deflection issues.
More aggressive designs (that is, with shallower or thinner concrete sections) require a more rigorous analysis to determine
that the deflection limit states are satisfactory. RAM Concept allows the use of simplistic methods in addition to more
detailed and accurate methods for determining deflections. The aggressive designer must, however, have a thorough
understanding of the methods and issues to ensure satisfactory deflections.
In particular, if the designer pushes the floor design “to the limit” then problems may occur due to issues that are unforeseen
or not considered by Concept. These include:
• cracking from overload during construction
• poor placement of reinforcement (less effective depth resulting in more cracking)
• vibrations (dynamic effects are not considered by Concept)
56.1 About RAM Concept’s deflection calculations
RAM Concept analyses the concrete floor with a linear elastic analysis. All deflection contour plans are representative of the
elastic analysis and the particular load combination’s load factors. Concept does not implicitly consider cracking, shrinkage
and creep in these contour plots.
Concept calculates ECR (effective curvature ratio) values. You can investigate the effects of cracking, shrinkage and creep
with these ECR values. Concept calculates ECR values based upon the user defined creep and shrinkage values, and section
reinforcement (that calculated by Concept to comply with various design criteria) for each design strip cross section.
RAM Concept 465

Chapter 56
Load history is not considered, but it might affect the choice you make for the creep coefficient for the ECR calculations.
Dynamic effects are not considered.
56.1.1 RAM Concept’s deflection methodologies

RAM Concept can be used to investigate deflection in a number of ways. These include:
• Simplified deflection predictions using load factors and deflection contour plans (no consideration of cracking) [Method
1]
• Detailed deflection predictions using deflection contour plans and ECR, assuming all live load is permanent [Method 2]
• Detailed deflection predictions using deflection contour plans, ECR and consideration of transient nature of live load
[Methods 3 and 4]
• Detailed deflection predictions using strip-based plots of long term deflection incorporating integration of the elastic
deflection and ECR [Method 5].
56.1.2 About creep calculations

Creep can be defined as an increase in strain over time under a permanent stress. Creep is thus related to permanent load.
Creep factors can be defined as the ratio of long term strain to instantaneous strain, due to permanent load. This is the
definition used in RAM Concept.
Permanent live loads have creep factors similar to that of dead loads. Live load is usually not 100% permanent, but either
transient or partly transient. Thus, live load creep factors are often less than that for dead load.
The live load creep factor can be calculated as: creepLL = creep*permLL% + (1 - permLL%)
where
• creepLL is the live load creep factor
• creep is the design creep factor (basic creep factor modified with factors for age of loading, thickness, environment etc.)
• permLL% is the permanent live load as a percentage of the total live load
The formula assumes that the total live load deflection is the sum of the permanent live load deflection multiplied by the
design creep factor, plus the transient live load deflection.
The following tables show calculation of live load creep factors.
Live Load Permanent Design Calculate creep Live load

LL creep factor factor creep factor
1 25% 3 3*0.25+(1-0.25) 1.5
2 50% 3 3*0.5+(1-0.5) 2
3 100% 3 3*1 3
Figure 56-1 Calculation of live load creep factor (with design creep factor of 3)
466 RAM Concept

Chapter 56
Live Load Permanent Design Calculate creep Live load

LL creep factor factor creep factor
1 25% 3.35 3.35*0.25+(1-0.25) 1.59
2 50% 3.35 3.35*0.5+(1-0.5) 2.18
3 100% 3.35 3.35*1 3.35
Figure 56-2 Calculation of live load creep factor (with design creep factor of 3.35)
Note: ACI 209 reports the value of 3.35 as an average creep value. RAM Concept files adopt this value as a default.
56.2 About detailed deflection predictions using ECR
RAM Concept calculates the effective curvature ratio (ECR) as a means for the designer to investigate the effects of
cracking, shrinkage and creep on deflection. This is useful for RC floors, and PT floors with service stresses exceeding the
concrete rupture stress.
Depending upon the method used, you can use ECR values as multipliers of short term deflection, or as load factors for a LT
Uncracked Deflection LC.
ECR is described as:
ECR = Ce / Cg
where
• Ce = the effective cross section curvature (considering the effect of creep, shrinkage and cracking)
• Cg = the gross section curvature
For additional information, refer to “Calculation of Effective Curvature Ratio” on page 327.
It is generally quick to find an upper bound on deflection by multiplying the maximum ECR for the floor by the appropriate
short term deflection. This is conservative, and you could calculate a more reasonable value by using weighted averages of
ECR, or an average based upon integration.
You can plot the ECR for different rule sets.
About Weighted Averages of ECR
Usually a cracked concrete member is uncracked near inflexion points, and other parts of the span. In addition, the cracking
at midspan may be more significant than at the supports, or vice versa. Unless the span is uncracked, it is very unlikely that
the ECR is the same throughout the span.
A weighted ECR value considers the different amount of cracking throughout the span.
In the following discussion, this weighted average is calculated considering only the ECR values at the left support,
midspan, and the right support.
The weighting of the ECR values is somewhat subjective. Since the energy in a beam is proportional to the integral of the
moment squared and the deflection of the beam is approximately proportional to the energy in the beam, then a weighted
average should consider an integral of the moment squared. Refer to “Use of ECR” on page 327 for further explanation.
The following plots show integrals of the moment square for a fixed end span and a propped cantilever (fixed one end,
simply supported the other). The objective of the plots is to calculate the ratios of the integrals of the moment squares for the
different zones (left support, midspan, right support.).
RAM Concept 467

Chapter 56
Figure 56-3 A plot of the moment squares for a fixed end beam
Note: The maximum moments for a fixed end beam are -wl2/12 and wl2/24 respectively. The moment squares of these are
0.00694(wl2)2 and 0.001736(wl2)2, which correspond to the plot.
Integral wL5 prefix Itotal = Ii / Itotal
I1 + I2 + I3
I1 (left) 0.000427 0.001389 0.308
I2 (mid) 0.000535 0.001389 0.385
I3 (left) 0.000427 0.001389 0.308
Figure 56-4 Determination of weighted factors for fixed end member
468 RAM Concept

Chapter 56
Figure 56-5 A plot of the moment squares for a propped cantilever (fixed one end, simply supported the other)
Note: The maximum moments for a propped cantilever are -wl2/8 and 0.0703wl2/12 respectively. The moment squares of
these are 0.01563(wl2)2 and 0.00494(wl2)2, which correspond to the plot.
Integral wL5 prefix Itotal = Ii / Itotal
I1 + I2 + I3
I1 (left) 0.001147 0.003125 0.367
I2 (mid) 0.001978 0.003125 0.633
I3 (left) 0 0.003125 0
Figure 56-6 Determination of weighted factors for propped cantilever
56.2.1 Summary of weighted averages

The following table summarizes the weighted average values based on the preceding discussion. You can use them to
calculate a weighted average of ECR for a particular span. They are only a guide.
RAM Concept 469

Chapter 56
Span type Left multiplier Middle multiplier Right multiplier
Continuous both 0.3 0.4 0.3

ends
Simply sup- 0.37 0.63 0

ported one end
Simply supported 0 1 0
Cantilever 1 0 0
Figure 56-7 Factors for weighted ECR
56.3 Using RAM Concept to predict deflections
You can use RAM Concept to predict deflections using the five methods outlined below. Method 5 is generally considered
the best. Their relative merits are discussed in “Summary of RAM Concept’s deflection capabilities” on page 480
56.4 Simplified deflection predictions using contour plans
RAM Concept calculates deflections based upon defined load factors and uncracked sections. The deflections are plotted for
various loadings and load combinations (default and user-defined).
Using RAM Concept’s contour plots is a simple and sometimes adequate way to predict deflections.
56.4.1 Method 1: Gross elastic deflections

Many designers are satisfied assessing deflections for post-tensioned floors using deflection contour plans. The contour
plans show load combinations (some with increased load factors to consider creep) without any implicit consideration of
cracking. This is generally done when gross-section stresses do not exceed approximately 6 f′ c (psi units) [ 0.5 f′ c (MPa
units)].
Service LC
The Service LC Deflection Plan uses service loads (as defined in the Service Load Combination) and reports deflection
contours based upon gross sections without any considerations of creep and cracking.
LT Uncracked Deflection LC
The LT Uncracked Deflection LC uses long term loads (as defined in the LT Uncracked Deflection Load Combination) and
reports deflection contours based upon gross sections. This could be considered the “old-fashioned” method where the effect
of creep and shrinkage is estimated by applying a load factor (of, say, 3) to dead loads and post-tensioning loads, and a
different load factor (of, say, 1.5) to live loads.
As discussed in “About creep calculations” on page 466, the choice of live load factor should consider the type of live load.
Note: The LT Uncracked Deflection LC load factors are not automatically linked to the creep factor parameter in the Calc
Options Dialog window.
Note: The Sustained Service LC (used only for ACI 318) is not recommended for deflection investigation as it is actually
provided for the service design rule 18.4.2(a) that requires compression stresses for permanent live loads to be less than
0.45*f'c. Its load factors are similar to those used for the Service LC, not the LT Uncracked Deflection LC.
470 RAM Concept

Chapter 56
56.5 Detailed deflection predictions using weighted ECR values for permanent live
loads
You can use RAM Concept’s ECR calculations for a more accurate method of predicting deflections.
This method uses a service (short term) deflection plan with a weighted ECR for critical spans.
56.5.1 Method 2: Modify the maximum deflection with a weighted ECR value
This method uses the following steps:
• Determine maximum deflection from the appropriate service deflection plan
• Multiply this deflection by the weighted ECR for the span
Note: Sometimes the maximum deflection does not occur in the span with the maximum ECR. You can be conservative and
use the maximum deflection and the floor’s maximum weighted ECR, or check different spans with the appropriate weighted
ECR
Note: The LT Uncracked Deflection LC deflection plan should not be used to determine the value that is multiplied by the
weighted ECR.
Example 56-1 Method 2

A continuous beam has been analyzed with a creep factor of 3.35 (defined in the calculation options dialog box).
The service deflection is 3.14 mm. The ECR values vary from 3.35 at the left hand support, to 6.65 at midspan, to 5.72 at the
right hand support.
Figure 56-8 Service deflection and ECR plot
The long term deflection can be estimated as:
Weighted average of ECR = 0.3*3.35 + 0.4*6.65 + 0.3*5.72 = 5.38
Deflection = 3.14 *5.38
= 17 mm (0.67 inches)
RAM Concept 471

Chapter 56
56.6 Detailed deflection predictions using weighted ECR values for transient live loads
The live load for most floors is not 100% permanent. That is, some or all of the live load is transient. For such floors, using
ECR values for permanent loads is conservative.
The creep factor for transient, or partly transient live loads, should be less than the creep factor for dead load. Refer to
Figures 56-1 and 56-2 for a discussion of live load creep factors.
Consideration of a lower creep value for live load makes the calculations more difficult, because it is not sufficient to look at
ECR for the reduced live loads. This is because:
• the concrete may be uncracked due to reduced loads, but cracked for maximum loads.
• a uniform creep factor cannot be applied.
Two additional deflection prediction methods are discussed here. These methods consider transient live loads. Both have
merit but you should decide which is more appropriate.
56.6.1 Method 3: Modify the maximum deflection with a weighted ECR value that considers the
transient nature of the live load
This method uses the following:
• For the LT Uncracked Deflection Load combination
• Adopt the value of ECR from Method 2 as the load factor for the dead loadings and balanced loading.
• Adopt a modified ECR value for live loading that reflects the proportion of live load that is transient.

For the same continuous beam as in method 2:
The load factor for the dead loadings and balanced loading is 5.38
The live load is considered to 50% permanent and the remainder is transient.
From Figure 56-2, the live load creep factor is 2.18.
The modified ECR for live loading is 5.38*2.18/3.35=3.50
The LT Uncracked Deflection LC has been changed to factors of 5.38 on all dead loading and balanced loading, and 3.50 for
live load.
Figure 56-9 Long term deflection with load factors based upon ECR.
472 RAM Concept

Chapter 56
The estimated long term deflection is thus 13 mm (0.52 inches). As expected, this is less than for Example 56-1.
Note: It would be prudent to rename the load combination if you have changed the load factors to recognize cracking.
Note: If significant compression steel is present in the cross-section, these methods will not be valid as the application and
use of the 3.35 creep factor makes the assumption that this factor represents the ratio of cracked and creeped curvature to
cracked curvature. This is approximately true in a singly reinforced section. However, in the case with compression steel the
steel and concrete share the forces on the compression side, but only the concrete undergoes creep and thus this creep factor
ratio is no longer accurate.
56.6.2 Method 4: Modify the maximum deflection with a “cracking factor” derived from the
weighted ECR that considers the transient live load
This method uses the following procedure:
• Determine the effect of cracking for maximum live load by dividing the weighted ECR by the Calc option creep value to
obtain a cracking factor.
• Apply this cracking factor to a new deflection LC, called, say, the “Creep but no cracking Deflection LC”

For the same continuous beam as in method 2, the cracking factor is estimated as:
Crack factor = ECR / (creep factor)
Thus, crack factor = 5.38 / 3.35 = 1.61
The live load is considered to be 50% permanent and the remainder is transient.
From Figure 56-2, the live load creep factor would be 2.18.
The “Creep but no cracking Deflection LC” has been changed to factors of 3.35 on all dead loading and balanced load, and
2.18 for live load.
Figure 56-10 The ‘Creep but no cracking” deflection
The “Creep but no cracking Deflection LC” deflection is 8.2 mm.
The estimated long term deflection is thus 8.2 * 1.61 = 13 mm (0.52 inches).
As expected, this is the same as Example 56-2.
Note: If significant compression steel is present in the cross-section, these methods will not be valid as the application and
use of the 3.35 creep factor makes the assumption that this factor represents the ratio of cracked and creeped curvature to
cracked curvature. This is approximately true in a singly reinforced section. However, in the case with compression steel the
steel and concrete share the forces on the compression side, but only the concrete undergoes creep and thus this creep factor
ratio is no longer accurate.
RAM Concept 473

Chapter 56
56.7 Detailed deflection predictions using strip based deflection plots
RAM Concept can plot deflection along design strips for all loadings, load combinations and rule sets. These are available
using the plot dialog and “strip” tab as shown in Figure 56-11. No default plans are provided with these plots, but you can
create them.
Figure 56-11 Strip deflection setting
More significantly, RAM Concept provides section analysis deflection plots for rule sets. These are available using the plot
dialog and “section analysis” tab as shown in Figure 56-12.
Note: Theses section analysis deflection plots are more powerful, as the ECR values are integrated along the strip and
included for long-term deflection.
Note: The plots show deflection along the strip spines. There is no averaging across the design strip cross section.
Figure 56-12 Section analysis deflection setting
474 RAM Concept

Chapter 56
56.7.1 Method 5: Strip based long-term deflection plot

This method uses the L.T. Deflection plan in the Service (or Maximum Service) Rule Set.
To view the long-term deflection plot

1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > L.T. Deflection Plan.
To view the long-term deflection plot for AS3600

1 Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Max Service Design > L.T. Deflection Plan.

For the same continuous beam as in method 2, the L.T. Deflection Plan shows the plot in Figure 56-13.
Figure 56-13 The (strip based) long-term deflection plot
The strip based long-term deflection is 17.4 mm (0.69 inches). This compares with Method 2 (17 mm) as neither method
considered a reduced creep factor for live load.
56.8 Using strip based deflection plots for slabs
The calculation of deflections for two-way slabs is more complicated than that for a beam directly supported by columns.
This is because there could be significantly different degrees of cracking in the two perpendicular directions. The same is
true of one-way slabs supported by beams.
There are generally two considerations:

• Deflection at midspan of middle strip relative to the ends
• Absolute deflection at midspan of middle strip
Sections Example 56-5 and Example 56-6 discuss the deflection analysis of the two-way slab shown in Figure 56-14.
Figure 56-14 Flat slab example with the analyzed panel shown in gray
RAM Concept 475

Chapter 56
The examples use the L.T. deflection plan in the Service Rule Set (see “To view the long-term deflection plot” on page 475
for instructions). Some files show this plan in the Maximum Service Rule Set (depending upon the code used).
Note: The elastic deflections were shown on the same plan by changing the plot.
Example 56-5 Flat slab - cracking in one strip

Figure 56-15 shows the elastic deflection of the east-west column strips and north-south middle strip. The deflections are
identical where the strips intersect.
Note: The plots may not show identical results if the middle strip spine does not intersect the midpoint of the column strips,
or maximum deflection is not at midspan.
Figure 56-15 Flat slab Example 56-5: elastic deflections of selected column and middle strips
Figure 56-16 shows the long term deflection plots.
The beam strip and middle strip are uncracked and so have identical deflections where they intersect.
The column strip (east-west) has undergone cracking whereas the middle strip (north-south) has not. Hence the values where
they intersect (point “A”) are not the same.
476 RAM Concept

Chapter 56
Figure 56-16 Flat slab Example 56-5: long-term deflections of selected column and middle strips
Relative deflection at midspan of middle strip
The relative middle strip deflection can be rationalized as follows:
∆ = 22.6 - (11.5 + 2.9)/2
= 22.6 - 7.2
= 15.4 mm
Absolute deflection at midspan of middle strip
The absolute middle strip deflection can be rationalized as follows:
∆ = 22.6 - (11.5 + 2.9)/2 +(23.1 + 2.9)/2
= 22.6 - 7.2 + 13.0
= 28.4 mm
Note: Clearly the 2.9 mm could be left out of the equations.
Example 56-6 Flat slab - cracking in all strips

This example has an increased live load and a shallower edge beam than Example 56-5.
RAM Concept 477

Chapter 56
Figure 56-18 shows the elastic deflection of the east-west column strips and north-south middle strip. The deflections are
identical where the strips intersect.
Note: The plots may not show identical results if the middle strip spine does not intersect the midpoint of the column strips,
or maximum deflection is not at midspan.
The maximum elastic deflection is approximately 10% greater than that of Example 56-5.
Figure 56-17 Flat slab Example 56-6: elastic deflections of selected column and middle strips
Figure 56-18 shows the long term deflection plots.
All strips have cracked and so have the deflections values are different where the strips intersect.
478 RAM Concept

Chapter 56
Figure 56-18 Flat slab Example 56-6: long-term deflections of selected column and middle strips
Relative deflection at midspan of middle strip
The relative middle strip deflection can be rationalized as follows:
∆ =26.8 - (13.2 + 4.9)/2
= 26.8 - 9.1
= 17.7 mm
Absolute deflection at midspan of middle strip
The absolute middle strip deflection can be rationalized as follows:
∆ = 26.8 - (13.2 + 4.9)/2 + (24.6 + 6.3)/2
= 26.8 - 9.1 + 15.5
= 33.2 mm
Note: A deflection analysis using north-south column strips and east-west middle strips could produce slightly different
results.
RAM Concept 479

Chapter 56
56.9 Summary of RAM Concept’s deflection capabilities
There are a number of ways to use RAM Concept to estimate deflections. This chapter outlined five methods. The designer
should decide which is the most appropriate., but method 5 is generally faster and more accurate.
Method Steps Pro Con
1 LT Uncracked Estimate the (1) Simple (1) Does not con-

Deflection LC long term load sider cracking
factors based on
creep
2 ECR / Service Multiply (1) Relatively (1) Requires user to

Deflection weighted ECR simple multiply deflections
by deflections from contour plan by
in Service LC ECR. (2) Overesti-
deflection plan mates deflection if
live load is not per-
manent
3 ECR / Long Calculate load (1) Relatively (1) If design is

Term Deflec- factors based on simple. (2) Pro- changed then ECR
tion ECR from vides a contour may change which
method 2 for plan with long could require load
(load factors dead load fac- term deflec- factors to be
based on ECR) tors, and mod- tions. changed. (2) Implies
ify ECR for that the worst
reduced live weighted ECR will
load factors be used everywhere.
(3) Thus conserva-
tive for all but the
critical span
4 ECR / Long Calculate load (1) Doesn't (1) Requires user to

Term Deflec- factors from require user to multiply long term
tion method 1, and modify load deflections by
modify with factors if ECR “cracking factor”.
(load factors “cracking fac- changes
based on creep tor” rational-
factor) ized from
method 2
5 L.T. Deflec- None, other (1) Very simple (1) Requires some
tion Plan than to modify manual adjustment
if strip is not (2) Doesn’t for flat slabs to
(design strip directly sup- require manual account for differen-
based) ported. weighting of tial cracking.
ECR
ECR can be very useful for more accurately predicting deflections.
The weighted ECR is always less than the maximum ECR value in the span. The designer should consider modifying the
creep value for live load.
It is generally conservative (and quick) to find an upper bound on deflection by multiplying the maximum ECR for the floor
by the appropriate short term deflection.
56.9.1 Other Notes

RAM Concept performs cracked section analyses by iteratively solving for a cross section strain (top strain and bottom
strain) that results in the cross section bending moment and axial force being equal to the applied moment and axial force.
480 RAM Concept

Chapter 56
In the cracked section analyses, Concept considers concrete to have no tension strength. Since concrete obviously does have
some tension strength, this assumption is equivalent to considering that the concrete has been previously cracked by some
other loading condition (this assumption is conservative). This pre-cracked assumption is used to determine the cracked
cross section stresses and the cracked moment of inertia. This assumption does not effect the ECR calculations as Branson's
formula does not consider the cracked moment of inertia unless the cross section stresses exceed the modulus of rupture.
Concept considers any compression reinforcement in the calculation of ECR.
If there is no cracking, then shrinkage is irrelevant as gross section properties are used. If there is cracking, then the
reinforcement restrains the shrinkage, so the side with more reinforcement shrinks less than the side with less reinforcement.
Assuming that the side with more reinforcement is the tension side, this accentuates the curvature. The calculations do not
consider the effect of restrained shrinkage and the cracking it may cause.
The shrinkage strain as specified in the Calc Options window is for ECR calculations only.
The creep coefficient as specified in the Calc Options window is used for ECR calculations only. This coefficient is the value
of (total strain under constant stress) / (initial strain under same stress); a typical value is 3.35 (1.0 for initial strain and 2.35
for creep strain).
Note: For more information, refer to “Creep and Shrinkage Effects” on page 325, “Cracked Section Analyses” on page 326,
“Branson’s Stress Ratio” on page 326 and “Calculation of Effective Curvature Ratio” on page 327.
56.10 Effect of user-defined reinforcement on deflection calculations
Design strips have properties that you can use to define a minimum amount of reinforcement: top and bottom reinforcement
ratio.
If it exceeds the design reinforcement, the user-defined reinforcement affects deflection calculations for cracked sections.
User defined reinforcement has no effect on uncracked sections.
See the design strip property description on page 84 of Section 21.5, and one of the following sections for more
information.:
• page 373 of Chapter 51, “ACI 318-02 Design”, or
• page 411 of Chapter 53, “AS 3600-2001 Design”, or
• page 428 of Chapter 54, “BS 8110: 1997 Design”, or
• page 451 of Chapter 55, “IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design”
Example 56-7 Deflection of RC beam with user defined reinforcement

This example shows that with increased amount of reinforcement, the long term deflection is decreased.
Zero user-defined reinforcement
Figure 56-19 Design strip property for Figures 56-20 and 56-21.
Figure 56-20 Reinforcement and deflection: US units
RAM Concept 481

Chapter 56
Figure 56-21 Reinforcement and deflection: metric units
Bottom user-defined reinforcement
Figure 56-22 Design strip property for Figures 56-23 and 56-26.
Figure 56-23 Increased (user-defined) bottom reinforcement and deflection: US units
Figure 56-24 Increased (user-defined) bottom reinforcement and deflection: metric units
Top and bottom user-defined reinforcement
Figure 56-25 Design strip property for Figures 56-26 and 56-27
Figure 56-26 Increased (user-defined) top and bottom reinforcement and deflection: US units
Figure 56-27 Increased (user-defined) top and bottom reinforcement and deflection: metric units
482 RAM Concept

Chapter 57
57 Punching Shear Design Notes
Ensuring that a slab will not fail in punching shear is one of the most important tasks in slab design. This chapter gives an
overview of punching shear design and advice on using RAM Concept’s punching shear design capabilities.
57.1 Punching shear overview
57.1.1 What is a “punching shear” failure?

Large support reactions (or any load) applied over a small area of a slab can cause the slab to fail near the perimeter of the
support in shear-like failure. This “punching shear” is different from “beam shear” because the failure location is around a
perimeter instead of along a line across the slab. Bending moment reactions applied along with the reaction force tend to
lower the amount of load that can be supported without a punching failure. Local thickenings of a slab may increase the
punching shear resistance, or may just move the punching shear failure location to a perimeter outside of the thickened area.
Punching shear failures are usually brittle and sudden.
57.1.2 How are forces really transferred in a punching zone?

The transfer of forces in a punching zone is extremely complex, and the load path changes with increased cracking in the
zone. There are no simple general models to predict the behavior of the punching zone. Three-dimensional truss behavior is
probably the simplest model that can be applied to a punching zone, but even this model is too complex for design purposes.
57.1.3 How do the building codes handle punching shear?

All building codes approach punching shear by replacing the actual complicated punching behavior by relatively simple
models that do not reflect the actual behavior of the punching zone. The only reason that these simple models lead to safe
designs is that they have been calibrated with test results for the standard interior, edge and corner column cases.
It should always be remembered that for situations other than the standard interior, edge and corner cases, the building code
models might produce results that are illogical and possibly unsafe.
57.2 How does RAM Concept handle punching shear?
In RAM Concept, any slab-column connection can be designed for punching shear considerations. Concept performs the
following steps in the analysis and design of a slab-column connection for punching shear:
57.2.1 Step 1: Determine the force envelopes to be checked

Concept uses envelopes of the reactions on the column to calculate the force envelopes for determining the critical case. The
forces are enveloped about the punch check axes and the following cases are considered: Max Fz, Min Fz, Max Mr, Min Mr,
Max Ms, Min Ms. The controlling envelope can be displayed by checking “controlling criteria” in the visible objects menu
under “Punching Checks” on any plan that displays the Rule Set Design Layers or Design Status Layer.
Loads applied inside the critical sections
Any loads that are applied within the critical section shape could be excluded from the punching reaction since they do not
contribute to the forces passing through the critical section. Concept calculates the punching reaction by summing the
column above and below reactions with any point loads applied within the column shape. The column shape is used for this
RAM Concept 483

Chapter 57
calculation (instead of the critical section shape) as it guarantees a single set of punching reactions for each punching check.
Line and area loads are not considered in this summation.
Punching Reactions for Lateral SE Loads
Loads of analysis type Lateral SE are appropriately included in the punching reactions. These loads are typically applied at
the column/wall locations and normally consist of at least an applied out of plane concentrated force with a set of
orthogonally applied moments. These forces typically represent the total joint forces applied from the supports to the slab for
the given lateral loading. The correct punching reaction for this type of loading is simply the loading itself. Since Concept
internally removes the column and wall supports in the Lateral SE loading analysis, the resulting punching reaction will be
the summation of any loads applied within the column shape.
Contribution from the Vertical Component of Prestress
Some building codes allow the vertical component of prestress to be considered in the punching calculations. This is
normally accomplished by adding the contribution of the vertical prestress to the capacity at the critical section, or by
subtracting the vertical prestress component from the punching reaction. Concept can approximate this effect using the Calc
Option Include Tendon Component in Punch Check Reaction. If this option is selected, after the tendons have been
converted into equivalent concentrated balance loads Concept will modify (normally reduce) the punching reaction by any
concentrated forces located within the column shape.
Note: Due to the fact that the tendons are idealized as concentrated balance forces as well as the fact that Concept uses the
column shape instead of the critical section shape, this calculation is approximate. When using this option, it is extremely
important to make sure that the Concept model tendon plan locations and profile shapes match the final design and field
placement in order to obtain accurate results. As such, this option should be used with extreme caution.
57.2.2 Step 2: Determine the “column” critical sections

Concept investigates the slab geometry within the punching zone radius specified to find likely failure locations. Concept’s
critical section calculations correctly consider slab thicknesses, but make simplifying assumptions about the elevations of
the slab regions. In certain situations this can result in improper location of critical sections.
In areas of varying thickness, Concept's punching calculations assume that the thickenings protrude toward the load
application. For example, in an elevated slab shear caps are assumed to be located below the slab, and in a mat/raft
foundation plinths are assumed to be located above the mat/raft. If this is not the case, Concept may not locate the critical
sections appropriately. See the example in Figure 57-1.
A
B
C
Analyzed correctly Concept considers failure planes A and C,

but should consider A and B
Figure 57-1 Shortcoming of Concept’s consideration of failure planes
The location at some distance (usually a function of effective depth “d”) from the face of the column is considered to be a
likely failure area. The location at some distance from a change in section thickness is also considered to be a likely failure
area.
If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Sector Voids, then any slab edge or hole found within the punching zone radius
creates a sector or zone that offers no resistance to punching.
484 RAM Concept

Chapter 57
If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Failure Planes, then Concept investigates a number of critical sections including
sections that connect to edges or openings (which provide no punching resistance) in attempts to find the most critical
section.
If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Ignore Edges, then the location of the critical sections is not affected by the holes, but
any part of a section intersecting a hole will be considered to provide no punching resistance. It is recommended that Ignore
Edges is only used if the Sector Voids and Failure Planes treatments do not produce desired critical sections.
Figure 57-2 Failure plane results for the three different slab edge / hole treatments
Concept tries to connect the likely failure locations together to determine logical potentially critical sections. The method
that Concept uses tends to find the appropriate sections, but does not always find them. You should always visually inspect
the locations of the critical sections that Concept has checked to see if they are appropriate (this is usually accomplished by
a simple visual review of the Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan).
57.2.3 Step 3: Determine the code-model stresses on the column sections

Please refer to the specific code section for the description of the code model and calculation of punching demand.
57.2.4 Step 4: Determine the code-allowable stresses on the column sections

Please refer to the specific code section for the description of the calculation of punching capacity in accordance with the
code model.
57.2.5 Step 5: Design stud shear reinforcement (SSR) if necessary

If any of the calculated column critical sections have a higher demand than capacity (and thus unreinforced stress ratio
(USR) > 1.0), the user may choose to have Concept design SSR to strengthen the column, if possible. This is done by
selecting the “Design SSR if necessary” option on the punch check properties.
The SSR design is carried out on any sections with an USR > 1.0:
1 Check the maximum section stress against the allowable maximum stress - some codes use this provision to prevent highly
stressed sections from being reinforced. Please refer to the specific Code section for a detailed description of how each handles
this check.
2 Install Initial Rails - some initial rails are installed with an arbitrary length. The initial rails are installed to satisfy the
maximum transverse spacing requirement of the active Code at the face of the column or support.
3 Extend the Rails - the rails are iteratively extended until all cutoff section stresses are within the Code-allowable stresses
for unreinforced sections. A cutoff section is one at the Code specified offset distance outside the zone reinforced with SSR.
RAM Concept 485

Chapter 57
4 Check the calculated/designed stud spacing resulting from the current rail layout. If the spacing doesn't work, rails are
added and the design is restarted at step 2.
Note: In punch checks containing slab edges, it is possible for Concept to extend the rails to a distance within the punch
check radius, but points projected perpendicular to the slab edge would be outside the punch check radius. In this case
Concept may not find the most critical cutoff sections. This can normally be rectified by increasing the punch check radius.
The Engineer should inspect cutoff sections for appropriateness and adjust punch check properties as necessary.
57.2.6 Step 6: Summarize the Results

Finally, the results are summarized. Direct summarizing of SSR designs is not possible for a number of reasons (for
example, two independent designs might have rails of different lengths, and therefore different depths which would dictate a
different stud spacing). Therefore, if more than one design rule specifies punching shear design, the force envelopes from
each design rule are combined into a single force envelope, then a summary design is carried out for this combined force
envelope as outlined above.
For each resulting critical section the calculated stress is divided by the code allowable stress to determine an unreinforced
stress ratio (USR). If the column contains SSR reinforcement, Concept also reports a reinforced strength ratio (RSR), which
is the punching demand over the strengthened capacity. If one or more of the potentially critical sections does not fit the
standard conditions, then the column is tagged with a Nonstandard Section label in which case the engineer should review
the applicability of the code design equations to the critical section labeled nonstandard.
57.3 Using Concept's results to specify stud shear reinforcement (SSR) systems
Typical values specified for an SSR System include number and arrangement of rails at the column or support, first stud
spacing, typical stud spacing, stud diameter, and rail height in addition to the typical stud properties.
Most of the properties required to specify an SSR System are available by plotting the SSR under visible objects > Punch
Checks. The overall height of the rails is not reported by Concept but can be easily determined from the geometry. Generally,
the height of the rails should be dimensioned to be as close as possible to the structural member's outer surfaces (while
observing necessary cover and other Code requirements). Concept's strength calculations assume that each individual shear
stud rail has a single effective depth, calculated as the thinnest effective depth of any slab area intersected by the shear stud
rail. A punching design may have shear stud rails with multiple depths at a column or support.
57.4 Column connection type
RAM Concept calculates the allowable shear stress for each potentially critical section based on the applicable code
equations. The allowable stresses are dependent upon the column connection type.
Note: Column connection type is not used in AS3600.
57.4.1 About Connection Type

Concept determines whether a column is “interior”, “edge” or “corner” based on the Connection Type property of the
punching check. If the connection type property is set to Auto, then Concept assigns a connection type.
Concept attempts to determine the connection type using the total angle of voids within a punching check radius. A void
angle is defined as the angle between tangent lines to any void contained within the punching check, or the angle between
the intersection points of slab edges and the punching check perimeter.
Concept assigns the connections as follows:

• if the total angle of the voids is greater than 180 degrees: corner
486 RAM Concept

Chapter 57
• if the total angle of the voids is less than 180, but greater than 90 degrees: edge
• otherwise: interior
Due to the possible complex geometries, Concept will not always assign the appropriate connection type, so we advise you
to use discretion when using the “Auto” setting.
The connection type assigned by Concept can be viewed on a plan by checking the “Column Condition” box under
“Punching checks” on any plan that displays Rule Set Design Layers, or the Design Status Layer.
For connections that don't neatly fit into one of the categories, it is conservative to select an option that has more slab edges
(i.e., if a connection appears to be somewhere between an edge and a corner, it is conservative to select “corner” for
connection type).
57.5 ACI 318 Punching Shear Design
The ACI Punching Shear Model
The ACI punching shear analysis and design approach uses the ACI 318 provisions for the basis of the implementation. A
critical section is defined at d/2 from the periphery of the area of application of force. These critical sections are arranged to
minimize bod. For slab edges located within the punching check, additional critical sections will be generated by projecting
perpendicular lines from the original section to the slab edges. Additionally, a set of sections will be generated for each basic
slab shape (column, drop cap, etc.).
To calculate the section stresses, an elastic distribution of stresses caused by the eccentricity between the load/reaction and
the critical section centroid is superimposed with the shear stresses caused by the concentric loading to calculate a linearly
varying stress distribution on the section. Where there are eccentricities in two orthogonal directions, they are considered
simultaneously. γ v for each section is calculated about the principal axes for that section. For column sections, the
length/width ratios used to calculate γ v are unmodified. For cutoff sections, the length/width ratios are modified in
accordance with ACI 421.1R99.
57.5.1 Calculation of punching resistance for the unreinforced section

This section discusses the calculation of punching resistance for an unreinforced section.
Critical section properties and equations for the calculation of actual stresses
Notation
A = area of one side of the critical section, in2
bo = total length of the critical section, in.
b1 = width of the critical section measured in the direction of the span for which moments are determined, in.
b2 = width of the critical section measured in the direction perpendicular to b1, in.
d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal tension reinforcement, as outlined in ACI 318, in.
Ixx = moment of inertia for bending about the x-axis for the entire critical section, in4
Ixx = moment of inertia contribution about the x-axis for an individual side of the critical section, calculated with respect to
the centroid of the critical section, in4
Iyy = moment of inertia for bending about the y-axis for the entire critical section, in4
RAM Concept 487

Chapter 57
Iyy = moment of inertia contribution about the y-axis for an individual side of the critical section, calculated with respect to
the centroid of the critical section, in4
Ixy = product of inertia for the entire critical section, in4
Ixy = product of inertia contribution for an individual side of the critical section, calculated with respect to the centroid of the
critical section, in4
L = length of one side of the critical section, in.
Mox = joint reaction (moments from columns above and below) about the x-axis at the centroid of the column utilizing a
“right-hand rule” for sign convention, kip-in
Moy = Joint reaction (moments from columns above and below) about the y-axis at the centroid of the column utilizing a
“right-hand rule” for sign convention, kip-in
Mux = column reaction, moment about the x-axis at the centroid of the critical section, kip-in
Muy = column reaction, moment about the y-axis at the centroid of the critical section, kip-in
vu = shear stress located at some point on the critical section, ksi
Vu = axial column reaction, located at the centroid of the column with an upward column reaction being positive, kips
x = x-coordinate of the centroid of the entire critical section, in.
xside = x-coordinate of the centroid of a side of the critical section, in.
xcol = x-coordinate of the centroid of the column, in.
xpoint = x-coordinate of the point at which you are calculating stresses, in.
y = y-coordinate of the centroid of the entire critical section, in.
yside = y-coordinate of the centroid of a side of the critical section, in.
ycol = y-coordinate of the centroid of the column, in.
ypoint = y-coordinate of the point at which you are calculating stresses, in.
γ vx = fraction of unbalanced moment about the x-axis transferred by eccentricity of shear, in accordance with ACI 318
γ vy = fraction of unbalanced moment about the y-axis transferred by eccentricity of shear, in accordance with ACI 318
θ = angle between a side of the critical section and the positive x-axis
Equations for calculation of shear stress
The equations presented are derived from basic mechanics of materials. A similar formulation can be found in the article
“Design of Stud Shear Reinforcement for Slabs” by Ghali & Elgabry, ACI Structural Journal, May-June 1990. The values of
γ vx and γ vy are always calculated about the principal axes of the critical section.
vu =
Vu
+
( )[
y po int − y ⋅ γ vx ⋅ M ux ⋅ Iyy + γ vy ⋅ M uy ⋅ I xy ]
2
bo d I xx I yy − I xy
a)
−
(x po int )[
− x ⋅ γ vy ⋅ M uy ⋅ Ixx + γ vx ⋅ M ux ⋅ I xy ]
2
I xx I yy − I xy
488 RAM Concept

Chapter 57
b) M ux = M ox + Vu ⋅ ( ycol − y )
c) M uy = M oy − Vu ⋅ ( xcol − x)
d) I xx = ∑I
sides =1
xx
n
e) I =
yy ∑I
sides =1
yy
n
f) I =
xy ∑I
sides =1
xy
g) I = dL (sin 2 θ ) + Ld ( y − y ) 2
3
xx side
12
h) I = dL (cos 2 θ ) + Ld ( x − x ) 2
3
yy side
12
3
i) I = dL (sin θ ⋅ cos θ ) + Ld ( x − x )( y − y )
xy side side
12
1
γ v = 1−
j) 2 b1
1+
3 b2
Note: Equation a) is based upon standard strength of materials equations for bending in an asymmetric section. If the
moments are applied about one or more axis of symmetry, then Ixy = 0 and equation a) reduces to the more familiar:
Vu γ vx ⋅ M ux ⋅ ( y po int − y ) γ vy ⋅ M uy ⋅ ( x po int − x)
vu = + −
bo d Ix Iy
ACI 318 equations for calculation of allowable shear stress
The allowable shear stress is calculated by selecting the appropriate equation from ACI-318 (11-33), (11-34), (11-35), or
(11-36).
Equation 11-33 controls in non-prestressed concrete zones with large column aspect ratios. As the aspect ratio of the column
gets larger, the allowable punching shear stress approaches the allowable one-way shear stress.
Equation 11-34 is intended to correlate the allowable shear stress in non-prestressed zones with the ratio bo/d. This equation
generally controls in thinner slabs with large columns or at critical sections outside column caps.
′
Equation 11-35 is the upper bound of allowable shear stress for non-prestressed zones, 4 f c .
Equation 11-36 is for application to prestressed punching zones. In order to qualify as prestressed, a zone must meet the
following criterion:
RAM Concept 489

Chapter 57
1 The effective prestress, fpc at the column shall not be less than 125 psi. The effective prestress is calculated by averaging
the precompression in all the elements within the punching check radius. This could result in non-prestressed equations being
used in drop caps of prestressed slabs where the precompression drops below 125 psi in the cap. Additionally, if large
restraining elements are used (i.e., shear walls) that divert the prestressing force in a region, the non-prestressed equations
would correctly be used where the average precompression is below 125 psi.
2 f’c shall not be taken greater than 5000 psi. If a concrete strength is input greater than 5000 psi, a maximum f’c of 5000 psi
will be used in prestressed punching zones, but the allowable shear stress will still be calculated using equation 11-36.
3 The column must not be located near a slab edge or large opening.
If any of the above conditions are not met, equations 11-33 through 11-35 are applied.
Note: These equation numbers are from the ACI 318-02 and ACI 318-05 codes.
Maximum Reinforced Section Stress
The reinforced shear stresses vu on the column sections are limited to a maximum of φv n , where vn = 6 f′c per ACI 318
11.12.3.2. This limit can be raised to vn = 8 f′c by using the suggestion in ACI 421.1R-99 of a higher limit for vn. Sections
with unreinforced stresses larger than these values cannot be successfully reinforced with SSR.
Calculation of Punching Resistance with SSR
Where SSR is used the punching resistance is calculated as follows:
vn = vc + vs (11-2)
where
(11.12.3.1)
v c = 2 f′c
or
(ACI 421.1R-99 suggestion for higher vc)

v c = 3 f′c
vs = Av fyvdaveRail / (bosd) (11-15)
Note: This equation has been extended from ACI equation 11-15 to approximately account for the situation where different
rails at a column have different heights due to geometrical irregularities.
Av = area in one peripheral line of stud shear reinforcement
daveRail = the average effective depth of the slab containing the rails
Miscellaneous Provisions
The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.4 d in accordance with ACI 421.1R-99 equation 3.12. This spacing is rounded
down to the nearest 1/8 in. for US units or 5 mm for metric units.
The maximum typical stud spacing is 0.5 d in accordance with ACI 318, but can be increased to 0.75 d when v u ⁄ φ is less
than or equal to 6 f′c by using the suggestion in ACI 421.1R-99 for a higher limit for spacing.
The maximum tangential spacing of rails at the face of the column is limited to 2d in accordance with ACI 421.1R-99
appendix A.2 and ACI 318-02 11.12.3.3. Tangential spacing requirements are not checked at locations other than the face of
the column/support.
490 RAM Concept

Chapter 57
The SSR is extended until the cutoff section stresses are within the allowable limit of 2 f′c per ACI 318-02 11.12.6.2(b).
For cutoff sections outside the original column perimeter sections, γ v is adjusted in accordance with ACI 421.1R-99
Appendix B.
57.6 AS 3600-2001 Punching Shear Design
The AS 3600 Punching Shear Model
The critical section for punching shear is assumed to be at dom/2 from the face of the loaded area or support, where dom
represents the mean value of do, averaged around the critical perimeter. Based on the derivation of the code equations, dom is
not meant to include the thickness of beams. Concept uses a heuristic method for determining the critical section thickness in
regions of differing slab/beam thicknesses around the punching check. The critical section thicknesses can be inspected by
turning them on using “visible objects”.
The AS 3600 model for punching shear assumes that the shear force V* is distributed evenly around the critical section
creating a uniform average shear stress of v = V*/udom. The unbalanced moment, Mv* is resisted by a 3-component
mechanism:
1 Difference in yield moments at the front and back faces of the slab strips.
2 Eccentricity of the uniform shear stresses v from the centroid of the support or load.
3 Torsional moment on the side faces (torsion strips).
In the model, the torsional moment in #3 is resolved into a maximum shear stress and added to the uniform average shear
stress v. The proportion of Mv* contributing to the torsional moment in #3 is actually variable, but is assumed to be constant
to simplify the model. The value of Mv* is taken at the centre of the column/support.
Design Equations
The resulting shear capacity Vuo where Mv* is zero (as well as on slab strip faces) is calculated per AS 3600 clause 9.2.3a:
V uo = ud om ( f cv + 0.3σ cp )
Rearranged to view in terms of limiting stress, this equation becomes:
V∗
------------- ≤ f + 0.3σ cp
ud om cv
Where Mv* is not zero, the model results in the following design equation in AS 3600 clause 9.2.4a when there are no
closed ties in the torsion strips and no spandrel beams:
V uo
V u = --------------------------------------------
 uM v∗ 
1 +  -----------------------
 8V∗ ad om
This expression sets an upper limit on the combination of Mv* and V* that can be resisted by the concrete. This equation can
be rearranged to view in terms of limiting stresses:
M v∗ V∗
---------------- + ------------- ≤ f cv + 0.3σ cp
8ad om
2 ud om
The code allows for increasing the punching capacity by placing a minimum quantity of closed ties in the torsion strips.
Concept provides check box items to include calculation based upon the presence of these minimum closed ties in
RAM Concept 491

Chapter 57
accordance with AS 3600 clause 9.2.4b. Concept does not calculate the quantities of minimum ties required by this clause,
which must be calculated and included by the Engineer.
When the minimum quantity of closed ties is present in the torsion strips, the equation in clause 9.2.4b is used:
1.2V uo
V u = -----------------------------------------
 uM v∗ 
1.0 +  ----------------
 2V∗ a 2
This expression can also be re-arranged to view in terms of limiting stresses:
M v∗ V∗
----------------------- + -------------------- ≤ f cv + 0.3σ cp
2.4a d om 1.2ud om
2
In scenarios where the shear to moment ratio is small and/or torsion strip width to effective depth is small, it is possible for
the AS 3600 equations to calculate a lower strength with ties than without.
Concept does not calculate shear capacity using the beam provisions of clause 9.2.4c and 9.2.4d.
Calculation of Maximum and Allowable Shear Stress and Corresponding Stress Ratio
The allowable shear stress calculated is: f cv + 0.3σ cp , where
2 ′ ′
f cv = 0.17  1 + ----- f c ≤ 0.34 f c
 β h
and σ cp is the average prestress in the punching check region. If σ cp results in tension it reduces the allowable stress. The
reported allowable shear stresses are multiplied by Φ = 0.7 .
For each set of enveloped force reactions, a maximum unreinforced shear stress is calculated as follows:
1 The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the slab strip face is calculated.
2 The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the torsion strip due to combined shear and bending is calculated for bending
about the r-axis, using the closed ties provisions if selected by the user.
3 The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the torsion strip due to combined shear and bending is calculated for bending
about the s-axis, using the closed ties provisions if selected by the user.
The absolute maximum shear stress from above is reported as the maximum unreinforced shear stress for that force
envelope. The unreinforced stress ratio for each force envelope is the maximum unreinforced stress/allowable stress.
The SSR is used to resist direct shear stresses, but not torsion stresses. Where SSR is provided the punching resistance is
calculated as follows:
1 The following operations are performed individually on each face:
2 A minimum number of rails are installed based upon a maximum transverse rail spacing of 2dom. The rails are installed
at the allowable maximum spacing. The length of each rail is a minimum of 2.5d.
3 The number of strips used for strength is calculated, up to a total of 4 (2 slab and 2 torsion strips). This is accomplished by
determining how many faces contain parts of the critical section. If there is no part of the critical section on a particular face,
this face will not be used for strength design but will get rails placed, if possible, using the maximum transverse spacing
requirement.
4 The perimeter length of the face is calculated both as a slab strip and a torsion strip. The length of the torsion strip is simply
the appropriate width of the critical section. The length of the slab strip is calculated as the length remaining after any torsion
strip lengths have been deducted. If the torsion strip is broken up with holes/openings, it is possible that the slab strip length
will be less than or equal to zero. In this event no design will be reported and the status will be reported as “Failed”.
492 RAM Concept

Chapter 57
5 The average effective depth of the slabs containing the existing rails is calculated.
6 The number of additional rails required is calculated and added, if necessary, and step 4 and 5 are repeated until a satis-
factory solution is found.
The strength equations used in the calculation of SSR are as follows:
For slab strips:
V u = V uo ( 1 + K s )
where
1 d u
K s = ---------A vs f vy  ---  ---
V uo  s   b
and
Avs = cross sectional area of one peripheral line of studs in the strip
b = width of the strip
fvy = yield stress of the studs in the strip
d = average effective depth of the slab containing the shear stud rails
u = perimeter length of the critical section
For torsion strips:
V uo
V u = ---------------------------------------------
1 uM v∗
--------------- + -----------------------
1 + K t 8V∗ ad om
where
1 d u
K t = ---------A vt f vy  ---  ---
V uo  s   a
and
a = width of the strip
The maximum punching shear force which can be transferred to the column is taken as the smaller of these two values of
ΦV u :
where
V ≤ ΦV u
Φ = 0.7
Maximum Reinforced Strength
The maximum strength of the reinforced slab/column connection is given as:
Vumax = 0.2fc’udom
thus giving the following 2 conditions that must be satisfied:
In the slab strip,
RAM Concept 493

Chapter 57
Vuo (1+Kt) < 0.2udom fc’
In the torsion strip,
Vuo (1+Ks) < 0.2udom fc’
The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.35 d. This spacing is rounded down to the nearest 5 mm for metric units (or 1/8
inch for US units).
The maximum typical stud spacing is 0.75 d. In seismic applications, the Engineer can limit the typical spacing to a smaller
value by specifying the typical stud spacing directly.
A minimum quantity of SSR reinforcement is provided as follows:
In the slab strip,
0.35bs
A vs = ----------------
f vy
In the torsion strip,
0.35as
A vs = ----------------
f vy
When SSR reinforcement is required, the minimum quantity of reinforcement is required on all strength strips.
57.7 EN 1992-2004 Punching Shear Design
The EN 1992-2004 Punching Shear Model
The punching shear analysis and design approach uses the EC2 provisions for the basis of the implementation. Some
condition specific EC2 provisions were generalized using CEB-FIP 90. The implementation also implements suggestions in
TR-43 regarding treatment of precompression in the shear strength equations.
A control perimeter (u1) is defined at 2d from the periphery of area of application of force. This control perimeter is
constructed so as to minimize its length. The corners of the perimeter are rounded.
For slab edges located within the punching check, additional control perimeters will be generated by projecting
perpendicular lines from the original control perimeter to the slab edges. Additionally, control perimeters will be generated
for each basic slab shape, cap, etc. This could result in a number of basic control perimeters.
To calculate the perimeter stresses, a plastic distribution of stresses caused by the eccentricity between the load/reaction and
the control perimeter is superimposed with the shear stresses caused by the concentric loading to calculate a complete stress
distribution on the perimeter. Where there are eccentricities in two orthogonal directions, they are considered
simultaneously. The k factor in EC2 equation 6.39 is applied to the unbalanced moment after the column forces are
transformed to the plastic neutral axis of the control perimeter.
EC2 clause 6.4.3(3) requires the calculation of a β factor on the basic control perimeter. The same β factor is then applied
to all subsequent perimeter calculations. This simplification is made due to the complexity in the plastic section calculations.
Concept does not make this assumption, but instead calculates and applies an appropriate β factor for each perimeter
calculated. This is in accordance with the approach for the cutoff section in CEB-FIP 90.
494 RAM Concept

Chapter 57
57.7.1 Calculation of punching resistance for the unreinforced section
Control Perimeter Section Properties and Equations for the Calculation of Actual Stresses
Before any calculations are performed, the following manipulations are carried out on the reactions at the column center:
1 The column reactions are transformed to the control perimeter elastic centroid.
2 k factors are calculated using ratios about the column principal axes.
3 The reactions are rotated to the column principal axes and multiplied by appropriate k factors.
4 The reactions are rotated to the control perimeter elastic principal axes.
area a
σa + σ d σa + σc
area c
area d
σb + σd σb + σ c
area b
Figure 57-3 EN 1992-2004 control perimeter
The remainder of the calculations are carried out about the elastic principal axes of the control perimeter. Since a plastic
stress distribution is used, if the “punching” area of the control perimeter on each side of the elastic neutral axes is not equal,
the magnitudes must vary to maintain vertical equilibrium. This is handled by using multiplication factors representing the
ratio of stress on one side of the principal axis over the stress on the other side. These factors are represented in the following
form:
Area a
α x = ---------------
Area b
Area c
α y = ---------------
Area d
The stresses in each quadrant (considering bending about each axis separately) can then be represented as:
σb = –αx σa Equation 1
σd = –αy σc Equation 2
Two simultaneous equations can then be set up and solved for the state of stress around the critical section:
Mox = unbalanced moment about the principal x-axis of the critical section (after adjustment by k)
Moy = unbalanced moment about the principal y-axis of the critical section (after adjustment by k)
d = effective depth at location in critical section
RAM Concept 495

Chapter 57
Substituting equations 1 and 2 and collecting terms,
These terms can be envisioned as plastic section moduli and each term has units of cubic length. Due to the interaction of α
in the above equations and the equations below, these values are only valid for the axes about which they are calculated.
Equation 3 and 4 then become:
We can then use equations 1 and 2 to solve for σ b and σ d .
The stress in any given “quadrant” of the critical section is then solved for as:
Calculation of Allowable Stress
The punching resistance for an unreinforced section is calculated as follows:
1
---
3
v Rd ,c = C Rd ,c k ( 100ρ 1 f ck ) + k 1 σ cp ≤ v min + k 1 σ cp (6.47)
where
0.18
C Rd ,c = ----------
γc
496 RAM Concept

Chapter 57
200
k = 1 + --------- ≤ 2.0d d in mm
d
ρ1 = ρ ly + ρ lz ≤ 0.02 relates to bonded tension steel in y and z directions (this value is input directly by the user as a
punching check property)
fck = characteristic compressive cylinder strength of concrete at 28 days
k1 = 0.1
σ cp = ( σ cy + σ cz ) ⁄ 2 average compression in the punching check region.
Where SSR is used the punching resistance is calculated as follows:
v Rd ,cs = 0.75v Rd ,c + [ 1.5 ( d sw ⁄ s r )A sw f ywd ] ⁄ u i d i (6.52)
dsw = average effective depth of slab containing shear reinforcement
sr = radial spacing of shear reinforcement
Asw = area of one peripheral line of shear reinforcement
di = the average effective depth of the perimeter under consideration
fywd = effective design strength of the shear reinforcement
= f yk ⁄ γ s
di = the average effective depth of the perimeter under consideration
Note: Because the head sizes of SSR are typically selected to ensure 100% development of the stem, the yield strength of the
SSR reinforcement is used without adjustment for effective depth, d. If the Engineer needs to make reductions to the effective
yield strength of the studs due to depth issues these modifications can be made by specifying a reduced yield stress in the “SSR
Systems” on the “Materials” page.
Limitation of Punching Stress at the Perimeter of the Column or Loaded Area
At the perimeter of the column face the maximum shear stress is limited to:
vEd = vRd,max (6.53)
where
v Ed = βV Ed ⁄ ( u 0 d )
vRd,max = 0.5 v fcd
β = maximum beta from calculated control perimeters, u1
v = 0.6[1 - fck/250] fck in N/mm2
fcd = design value of concrete compressive strength
u0 = length of column or loaded area periphery
u0 is further limited as follows:
RAM Concept 497

Chapter 57
Edge columns: u0 < 6d
Note: This simplification for edge columns was necessary due to difficulty in calculating the code equation for irregular
situations. This provision is not in strict compliance with the code and should be reviewed by the Engineer as necessary.
Corner columns: u0 < 3d
The control perimeter at which shear reinforcement is not required is calculated using eq. 6.47. The outermost perimeter of
shear reinforcement is placed not greater than 1.5d within this perimeter.
The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.5 d.
The maximum typical stud spacing is 0.75 d.
A minimum quantity of SSR reinforcement is provided in accordance with EC2 equation 9.11:
A sw ,m in ≥ ( 0.08 f ck s r s t ) ⁄ 1.5f yk
where st is assumed to be < 2d (Final rail layout should be confirmed/adjusted to be in agreement with this assumption)
Note: Arrangement of SSR in accordance with Figure 6.22 is not considered. The Engineer should re-arrange the SSR as
appropriate or add infill rails to satisfy the requirements of tangential spacing limits. Adjustment of control perimeters in
accordance with Figure 6.22B is not considered.
Note: EC2 has special provisions for column bases. These provisions are not implemented in Concept (the provisions above
are applied to all punching checks). For slabs without prestress, this will always be conservative. For slabs with prestress,
the Engineer will need to evaluate the validity of the results.
57.8 Sign convention
The equations presented require the use of the “right-hand rule” sign convention. While RAM Concept allows you to set
your own sign conventions for reactions, it will internally apply the correct signs to the equations.
Figure 57-4 Positive moment reactions derived from the “right-hand rule” sign convention.
Concept reports the reactions applied from the column to the slab. The reactions are the forces and moments that would need
to be applied to the column joint in order to keep the system in equilibrium if the columns were removed. This can be
envisioned by removing the column from the structure and replacing it with the reported reactions applied at the column
centroid. Refer to Figure 57-5 for clarification.
498 RAM Concept

Chapter 57
Figure 57-5 Column reaction sign conventions
57.9 Advice on the selection of punching check properties
Maximum Search Radius - This radius defines the circular area around a column that RAM Concept will investigate in
its search for potential failure locations. A punching zone radius that is set to be a very large distance will always be
conservative. However, having a very large radius has two detrimental effects. First, RAM Concept will need to review a
larger area of the slab, and hence will take longer to check the column. More importantly, slab holes and slab edges that are
far from the column will be considered in determining the potentially critical sections which may result in a smaller critical
section than is appropriate.
Cover to CGS - This is the distance from the top of slab to the centroid elevation of the top reinforcement. In general this
is the distance from the top of the slab to the bottom of the top bar (or the top of the bar under the top bar). This distance is
subtracted from the slab thickness to determine the “d” distance.
Angle - The plan angle about which punching reactions are enveloped. For some codes this also defines the angle about
which the punching calculations are performed. In general, this should either be set to the angle of the column or (if the
column is at a slab edge) the angle of the slab edge. The “Align Punch Check Axis with Rectangular Columns” checkbox
can be used to automatically set the angle.
Edge/Hole Treatment - See Figure 57-2.
Connection Type - Corner, edge, interior or auto. Refer to “About Connection Type” on page 486.
RAM Concept 499

Chapter 57
57.10 Miscellaneous information
Effect of precompression
For post-tensioned slabs, the allowable calculated by Concept may be smaller than that calculated by 2D frame programs,
because Concept uses an effective prestress value that is an average for the punching zone. This punching zone average will
reflect a lower effective prestress in column capitals and other thickened areas.
57.11 Some final words of advice
RAM Concept is not infallible in its determination of potentially critical sections; for unusual geometries Concept may not
check the appropriate section and/or may check inappropriate sections that give higher than appropriate stress ratios.
The engineer must review Concept’s selection of potentially critical sections, and must use engineering judgment to decide if
Concept’s selections are appropriate and if the application of the code model is appropriate.
500 RAM Concept

Ram Concept Manual Version 3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ram Concept Manual Version 3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RAM Concept

Copyright attribution: © 2007, Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All rights reserved.

2 Looking at the Workspace . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . .5

4 Using Plans and Perspectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

5 Drawing and Editing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

6 Viewing Objects in Text Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

9 Specifying Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

11 Specifying Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

12 Selecting Design Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

13 Using a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

14 Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

15 Data Transfer from STAAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

16 Defining the Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

17 Generating the Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

18 Manually Drawing the Finite Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

RAM Concept iii

21 Defining Design Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

22 Defining Design Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

23 Defining Punching Shear Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

24 Drawing Reinforcement Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

25 Defining Tendons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

26 Using Live Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

27 Calculating Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

28 Viewing the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

29 Plotting Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

30 Using the Auditor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

31 Using the Estimate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

33 Exporting Plans and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

34 Exporting a Database to the RAM Structural System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

35 Using Strip Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

36 General Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

37 Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

38 Errors and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

39 Simple RC Slab Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

40 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

42 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: BS8110 / TR43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

43 PT Flat Plate Tutorial: IS 456 : 2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

44 Mat Foundation Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

45 Strip Wizard Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

46 Analysis Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

RAM Concept vii

48 Live Load Reduction Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

49 Reinforcement Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

50 ACI 318-99 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

51 ACI 318-02 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

52 ACI 318-05 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

53 AS 3600-2001 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

54 BS 8110: 1997 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

viii RAM Concept

55 IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

56 Estimating deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

57 Punching Shear Design Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

Concept does not generally use strip methods other than to

Strips generated by Strip Wizard are three-dimensional, but

• openings Note: Even if you do not have access to the PT version, it

1.5.2 Critical Chapters

• rule selection Group Load Combinations

For example, for a model with 3 wind loadings (Wa, Wb

The group load combinations are particularly useful when

Slab Plot Enveloping (Including Soil Bearing)

Concept now includes this code.

Improved 2D Graphics Speed North, Central and South America

Australia, Asia, Middle East